Loading...
24D-329 (7) SECTION 16520 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnished by Owner; installed by Contractor. B. Wiring: Provide electrical wiring within fixtures which is suitable for connection to branch circuit wiring as follows: 1. NEC Type AF for 120 volt, minimum No. 18 AWG. 2.2 POLES A. General: Furnished by Owner; installed by Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install poles plumb. Provide double nuts to adjust plumb. Grout around each base. B. Install lamps in each luminaire. C. Bond luminaires, metal accessories and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole. D. All perimeter lighting shall be automatically controlled. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. B. Take measurements during night sky,without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution as directed. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES Site Number 305-634 16520-1 July,2008 SECTION 16510 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES A. Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule in Drawings. All fixtures are Owner furnished; Contractor installed. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. B. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing. C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure Provide auxiliary members spanning ceiling grid members to support surface mounted luminaires Fasten surface mounted luminaires to ceiling grid members using bolts, screws, rivets,or suitable clips. F. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. G. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. H. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place. I. Install wall mounted luminaires and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. K. Connect luminaires,emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16130 using flexible conduit. L. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. M. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. N. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign,and luminaire. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Refer to Section 01750 for adjusting installed work. B. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed. END OF SECTION OW YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES Site Number 305-634 16510-1 July,2008 B. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS,except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.1. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS Site Number 305-634 16410-2 July,2008 SECTION 16410 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Furnished by Owner. 2.2 SWITCHBOARD A. Description: NEMA PB 2 switchboard with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated and specified. B. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 208Y/120 volts. 2. Configuration: Three phase,four wire,grounded. 3. Main Bus: As required for the facility. 4. Integrated Equipment Rating: 200,000 rms amperes symmetrical. C. Main Section Devices: Individually mounted. D. Distribution Section Main Device: Individually mounted and compartmented. E. Auxiliary Section Devices: Panel mounted. F. Bus Material:Aluminum with tin plating, standard size. G. Bus Connections: Bolted,accessible from front for maintenance. H. Fully insulate load side bus bars. Do not reduce spacing of insulated bus. Use factory applied tape wrapping or spray applied 105 degrees C minimum insulating material. I. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard. J. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. 1. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. 2. Include shunt trip, undervoltage release, and auxiliary contact where required. K. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front only of the switchboard, suitable for the conductor materials and sizes indicated. L. Pull Section:Arrange as required for the facility. M. Enclosure: Type 1 -General Purpose NEMA 3R. 1. Align sections at front and rear. 2. Switchboard Height: 90 inches, excluding floor sills, lifting members and pull boxes. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc. 4. Mimic Bus: Show bussing, connections and devices in single line form on the front panels of the switchboard using black color lines on a white plastoid laminated panel, fastened flat against the panel face with rivets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboard in locations shown on Drawings,according to NEMA PB 2.1. YUM—E3.1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS Site Number 305-634 16410-1 July,2008 E. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. F. Neatly type label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower,full load amperes,code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Place label in clear plastic holder. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.2. END OF SECTION J YUM—E3.1 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS Site Number 305-634 16220-2 July,2008 SECTION 16220 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing enclosed motor controllers with minimum 3 years documented experience. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. General Electric. 3. Siemens. 4. Cutler Hammer. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NEMA ICSI,2 and 6. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUAL CONTROLLERS A. All motor controllers shall have an overall unit short circuit current rating that equals or exceeds of maximum fault current at the point of application. B. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 6,AC general-purpose, Class A, manually operated, full-voltage controller with overload element, red pilot light, N.O. auxiliary contact, and push button operator. C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 6,AC general-purpose, Class A, manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors,with thermal overload unit, red pilot light and toggle operator. D. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2,AC general-purpose Class A manually operated,full- voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors,without thermal overload unit, with red pilot light and toggle operator. E. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6,Type as required to meet conditions of installation. 2.2 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 6,AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. B. Coil operating voltage: 120 or 208 volts,60 Hertz. C. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS; melting alloy. D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6,Type as required to meet conditions of installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 01780 for manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation." C. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16070. D. Provide fuses for fusible switches. e YUM—E3.1 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS Site Number 305-634 16220- 1 July,2008 SECTION 16215 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following for monitoring and control of electrical power system: 1. PC-based workstation(s)software. 2. Communication network and interface modules for RS-232, RS-485,Modbus TCP/IP, and/or IEEE 802.3 data transmission protocols. 3. LEED Documentation. 1.2 REFERENCES A. International Performance Measurement&Verification Protocol(IPMVP),Volume III: "Concepts and Options for Determining Energy Savings in New Construction,"April 2003. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Instrumentation and Recording Devices:monitor and record load profiles and chart energy consumption patterns. 1. Measure and Record Metering Data for the Following: a. Electricity. b. Domestic water. C. Natural gas. 2.2 REFERENCES A. International Performance Measurement&Verification Protocol (IPMVP),Volume III, Chapter 4,"M&V Methods for Energy Conservation Measure Isolation"(Option B)or"Whole Building Calibrated Simulation"(Option D). END OF SECTION , YUM—E3.1 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL Site Number 306-634 16215-1 July,2008 SECTION 16210 ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. For Utility Supplied Services-System Characteristics: 1201208 volts,three phase,four-wire, 60 Hertz. System voltages shall match utility service. B. Self-generated voltages shall match system standard voltages. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE 141. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 PAD FOR UTILITY TRANSFORMER A. Description:Transformer pad sized as required by utility company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Arrange with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. Pay for all required permits and fees. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install meter base as required by Utility Company. All wire, conduits, pads, meter bases, weatherheads, and meter not installed by utility company and required for a complete and functional electrical service. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES Site Number 305-634 16210-1 July,2008 SECTION 16150 WIRING CONNECTIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and applicable local codes. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.for testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CORDS AND CAPS A. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1. B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6;match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. C. Cord Construction: NFPA 70,Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. D. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection,wiring, and energization. 3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 WIRING CONNECTIONS Site Number 305-634 16150-1 July,2008 oil a. Hubbell Model WP826MP. 2.4 FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE FITTINGS A. Flush Cover Convenience Receptacle: 1. Material: Brass plate with steel box. 2. Configuration: Duplex threaded opening. 3. Manufacturers: Hubbell Model 132529 W/SF2525. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. '�►e I. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal J. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. K. Install protective rings on active flush cover service fittings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 WIRING DEVICES Site Number 305-634 16140-2 July,2008 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES A. Color: Stainless steel cover plate and grey device. B. Specification Grade. C. Manufacturers: 1. Single Pole Switch: a. Pass&Seymour Model 20 AC1-1. 2. Double Pole Switch: a. Pass&Seymour Model 20 AC2-I. 3. Three-way Switch: a. Pass&Seymour Model 20AC3-I. 4. Four-way Switch: a. Pass&Seymour Model 20AC4-I. 5. Indicator Switch Pilot Gang: a. Pass&Seymour Model 20AC1/3-CPL. 6. Key Switch: a. Pass&Seymour Model 20AC1/2/4-L. 7. Momentary Switch: a. Pass&Seymour Model 1250-I. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Color: Stainless steel cover plate and grey device. B. All devices to have 20A at 125V rating. C. Specification Grade. D. Manufacturers: 1. Single Convenience Receptacle: a. Pass&Seymour Model 5361 2. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: a. Pass&Seymour Model 5362. 3. GFCI Receptacle: a. Pass&Seymour Model 2091-S. 4. Isolated Ground Receptacle: a. Pass&Seymour Model IG6300. 5. Telephone Jack: a. Hubbell Model CX244. 2.3 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Stainless steel. B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover. C. Shall be furnished and installed for the type of service involved. D. Manufacturers: 1. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover. OW YUM-E3.1 WIRING DEVICES Site Number 305-634 16140-1 July,2008 2. Cover: Glass fiber weatherproof cover with nonskid finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES A. Install boxes in accordance with NEC"Standard of Installation." B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices,taps,wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140. F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. I. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. J. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaries positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. K. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. L. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. M. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. N. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. O. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. A*4k P. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. Q. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. R. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. S. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. T. Support boxes independently of conduit. U. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. V. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. W. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations [exposed to the weather]and wet locations. X. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade;formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations. Y. Set floor boxes level. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Box Selection: For boxes in main feeder conduit runs, use sizes not smaller than 8 inches square by 4 inches deep. Do not exceed 6 entering and 6 leaving raceways in a single box. Cable Supports: Install clamps, grids,or devices to which cables may be secured. Arrange cables so they may be readily identified. Support cable at least every 30 inches inside boxes. B. Mount pull boxes in inaccessible ceilings with covers flush with the finished ceiling. C. Size: Provide pull and junction boxes for telephone, signal, and other systems at least 50 percent larger than would be required by Article 370 of NEC,or as indicated. Locate boxes strategically and provide shapes to permit easy pulling of future wires or cables of types normal for such systems. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 RACEWAY AND BOXES Site Number 305-634 16130-2 July,2008 SECTION 16130 RACEWAY AND BOXES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of the National Electrical Code. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CABINETS, BOXES,AND FITTINGS, GENERAL A. Electrical Cabinets, Boxes, and Fittings: Of indicated types, sizes, and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated, provide units of types,sizes, and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. 2.2 OUTLET, DEVICE,AND SMALL WIRING BOXES A. General: Conform to UL 514A, "Metallic Outlet Boxes, Electrical,"and UL 514B,"Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes." Boxes shall be of type, shape, size, and depth to suit each location and application. B. Steel Boxes: Conform to NEMA OS 1,"Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.' Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts,threaded screw holes and accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps, cable clamps, exterior rings and fixture studs. C. Service Fittings for Floor Outlet Boxes: Surface mounted horizontal, cast aluminum type 3 inches high, suitable for finished spaces and finished in satin aluminum,except as otherwise indicated. Provide duplex receptacle or 1 inch bushed opening for telephone or other communications service as indicated. Equip fitting for attaching flat to floor box cover. 2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. General: Comply with UL 50, "Electrical Cabinets and Boxes",for boxes over 100 cubic inches volume. Boxes shall have screwed or bolted on covers of material same as box and shall be of size and shape to suit application. B. Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural steel bracing. C. Hot-Dipped Galvanized Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural steel bracing. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Cover shall be gasketed. D. Boxes Approved for Classified Locations: Cast metal of cast nonmetallic boxes conforming to UL 886,"Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous(Classified) Locations,"listed and labeled for use in the specific location classification, and with the specific hazardous material encountered. Conduit entrances shall be integral threaded type. E. In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250,Type 6,outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Nonskid cover with neoprene gasket and with suitable stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cover Legend: F. Fiberglass Handholes: Die molded glass fiber hand holes: 1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 inch x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side. YUM—E3.1 RACEWAY AND BOXES Site Number 305-634 16130- 1 July,2008 Aawk N. Make splices,taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. O. Identify all wire and cable. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NFPA 70 and applicable local codes. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLE Site Number 305-634 16120-2 July,2008 SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. As suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating:600 volts. D. Insulation: NFPA 70; Type THW insulation for feeders and branch circuits larger than 4/0 AWG;Type THHN/THWN insulation for all others. 2.2 METAL CLAD CABLE A. Description: NFPA 70,Type MC. B. Conductor: Copper. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 WIRING METHODS A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations, Exposed Dry Interior Locations,Above Accessible Ceilings,Wet or Damp Interior Locations and Exterior Locations use only building wire,Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. B. Install cable in accordance with the NECA"Standard of Installation." C. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. D. Use stranded conductors for control circuits and all motor connections. E. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. F. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. G. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. H. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire. I. Protect exposed cable from damage. J. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. K. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. L. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment,and panelboards. M. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. YUM—E3.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLE Site Number 305-634 16120-1 July,2008 SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and applicable local codes. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. B. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Communication cabinets. 3. Starters. 4. Disconnect Switches. C. Letter Size: 1. 3/8-inch letters for identifying equipment. D. Note: Embossed adhesive tape shall not be used. 2.2 WIRE MARKERS A. Description: Tubing type wire markers. B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and junction boxes and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings. 2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Description: 2-inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. B. Location: Along length of each underground conduit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using rivets. C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Site Number 305-634 16075-1 July,2008 SECTION 16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and applicable local codes. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes: Corrosion resistant,galvanized or powder coated. B. Select materials,sizes, and types of anchors,fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts,expansion anchors, and powder actuated anchors. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry,and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts. 5. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 6. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. 2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Description: Galvanized or Powder Coated steel. B. Acceptable Product: 1. Unistrut Model P 1000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate and install anchors,fasteners, and supports in accordance with NFPA 70 "Standard of Installation". 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. 3. Do not use perforated strap,wire ties, plumbers strap or similar items. 4. Obtain permission from the Architect before using powder-actuated anchors. 5. Obtain permission from the Architect before drilling or cutting structural members. B. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel members. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. F. Rigid steel, IMC and EMT raceways shall be supported at intervals not over 10 feet and within 3 feet of each box, cabinet or fitting. Provide one support not over 12 inches from each change in direction. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Site Number 305-634 16070- 1 July,2008 SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Motor Frames. B. Metal frame of the building. C. Noncurrent-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment. D. Rod electrode. E. Buried metallic water piping. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms maximum. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and applicable local codes. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODES A. Material: Copper-clad steel. B. Diameter: 5/8 inch. C. Length: 8 feet. 2.2 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. B. The minimum size of grounding conductors shall be in accordance NFPA 70 or local code requirements. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING Site Number 305-634 16060-1 July,2008 OW SECTION 15850 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size,finish,and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type,size, location,application, and noise level. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Titus. 2. Krueger. 3. Metalaire. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 ROUND CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Round, stamped or spun, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern, with sectorizing baffles where indicated. Diffuser collar shall project not more than one inch above ceiling. Core shall be adjustable for vertical or horizontal throw. B. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish. C. Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. D. Acceptable Product: Refer to schedule on Drawings. 2.3 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Square, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated. B. Frame: Inverted T-bar type. C. Fabrication: Aluminum with baked enamel off-white finish. D. Accessories: Opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. E. Acceptable Products: Refer to schedule on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry,and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers,despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser,or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09910. END OF SECTION 0'' YUM-E3.1 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Site Number 305-634 15850- 1 July,2008 Awk D. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 by 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. E. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. F. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15810 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils,fans, automatic dampers,at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers,and elsewhere as indicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ductwork in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. D. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative. E. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. F. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off. G. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. H. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles,and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille,or register assembly. END OF SECTION AwAk YUM—E3.1 DUCT ACCESSORIES Site Number 305-634 15820-2 July,2008 SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL—not used PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket,galvanized steel construction,with push-pull operator strap. 2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 by 18 inches or smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment:Air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. B. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: 16 gage thick galvanized steel,with blades of maximum 6 inch width,with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings,and plated steel pivot pin;adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.3 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 Inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. 3. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches [with outside and inside handles]. 4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. C. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible,and as indicated. B. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. 2. Net Fabric Width:Approximately 2 inches wide. 3. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage galvanized steel. 2.5 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS. A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible,and as indicated. B. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. 2. Blade: Fabricate of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape,secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action,flanged bushing with set screw. C. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. 12 by 48 inch. YUM—E3.1 DUCT ACCESSORIES Site Number 305-634 15820- 1 July,2008 D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems,complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. F. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. H. Connect terminal units to supply ducts[directly or]with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. I. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. J. Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with provisions for clean out. Use stainless steel for ductwork exposed to view and stainless steel or carbon steel for ducts where concealed. K. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL AWA, Low Pressure Supply Galvanized Steel Return and Relief Galvanized Steel General Exhaust Galvanized Steel Kitchen Hood Exhaust Galvanized Steel Dishwasher Exhaust Stainless Steel Outside Air Intake Galvanized Steel Combustion Air Galvanized Steel END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 DUCTWORK Site Number 305-634 15810-2 July,2008 ii SECTION 15810 DUCTWORK PART 1 GENERAL-Not Used PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts:ASTM A 525 and ASTM A 527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G90 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A 90. B. Insulated Flexible Ducts: 1. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire;fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. 2. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. 3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 4. Temperature Range:-10 degrees F to 160 degrees F. 5. Acceptable Products: a. Thermaflex Model M-KE. b. Flexmaster. C. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. D. Sealant: 1. Non-hardening,water resistant,fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. E. Hanger Rod:ASTM A 36; galvanized;threaded both ends,threaded one end,or continuously threaded. 2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Construct T's, bends,and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide[air foil] turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. D. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. 2.3 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible,and as indicated. Provide duct material,gages,reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible. C. Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. YUM-E3.1 DUCTWORK Site Number 305-634 15810-1 July,2008 3. Provide multi-conductor instrument harness (bundle) in place of single conductors where number of conductors can be run along common path. 4. Fasten flexible conductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly. D. Start-Up-Start,test and adjust electric control systems in presence of manufacturer's authorized representative. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Cleaning- Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. F. Final Adjustment-After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, control valves, motors and similar equipment specified in this Section. Final adjustment shall be performed by specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer of primary temperature control system. G. Control Sequences 1. Rooftop Packaged Units a. Occupied: Energize rooftop units during occupied cycle via manufacturer supplied thermostat. Modulate outside air and return air dampers in sequence and in conjunction with unit's mechanical refrigeration to maintain desired room temperature via manufacturer supplied thermostat. b. Unoccupied: Maintain outside air damper closed. Cycle unit fan and unit's heating to maintain reduced room temperature of 60 degrees F with unoccupied thermostat. 2. Power Ventilators a. Energize exhaust fans during occupied cycle and de-energize during unoccupied cycle via electronic time clock control. END OF SECTION YUM-E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-16 July,2008 Ow D. Provide flexible connections to completely isolate fans from direct contact with all sheet metal work. E. Provide access panels or doors, as required, for access to valves, controllers,fire dampers. 3.6 DUCT INSULATION, INSTALLATION A.Wrapped Ductwork Insulation 1.Application Requirements: Insulate the following ductwork as follows: a. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and room terminal outlet. b. HVAC return ductwork between room terminal inlet and return fan inlet, or HVAC unit inlet. 2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with 1-1/2 inches thick insulation and vapor barrier jacket,application limited to concealed locations. B. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose and as follows: 1. Install insulation on pipe and ductwork systems subsequent to painting,testing, and acceptance of tests. 2. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. 3. Clean and dry pipe or duct surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. 4. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe and ductwork insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. 5. Extend pipe and ductwork insulation without interruption through walls,floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. 6. Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective finish or jacketing as recommended by manufacturer. 7. Replace damaged insulation that cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. 8. Insulation installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. 3.7 CONTROL SYSTEMS, INSTALLATION A. Installation 1. Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, rough-in drawings, and details indicated on the Drawings. 2. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor to install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable requirements specified in Division 16- Electrical. 3. Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights. B. Control Wiring -The term"control wiring"shall be defined to include providing of wire, conduit and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric control devices. C.Wiring System 1. Install complete control wiring system for electric control systems. 2. Conceal wiring except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. YUM-E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-15 July,2008 1. Securely fasten all ducts to building construction by means of hangers, supports, guides, anchors, and sway braces to maintain duct alignment,to prevent sagging, and to prevent noise and excessive strain on ducts due to movement under operating conditions. 2.Adequately mount and anchor all material and equipment as required. Include lateral bracing as required to prevent horizontal, seismic movement. Refer to applicable Mechanical Code requirements and details on Drawings for seismic requirements. 3. Do not support ducts from fans or other equipment. 4. Power-driven fasteners shall not be used to support ducts. 5. Support round duct, 30-inch and larger, with two hangers at each support point. 6. Hangers and supports shall conform to SMACNA section, "Hangers and Supports". Support horizontal ducts with in 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection using double strap hangers on each side of fitting. 7. Support vertical ducts, passing through roofs with two continuous angles screwed to the duct and bearing to the roof structure, and conforming to SMACNA section'Riser Support-From Floor." C. Seismic Supports and Bracing 1.Where required, all ductwork and equipment shall be seismically supported and braced per the SMACNA"Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems", including Appendix E. D. Joints Sealing, General 1. Duct tape shall not be used on duct joints. 2. Transverse joints: All transverse joints including Ductmate type joints on all supply, return, exhaust and outside air intake ducts, sealed using Hardcast Arabol. 3. Interior exposed joints: Seal using water based sealer, Hardcast Iron Grip. 4. Interior concealed joints (above 1-inch W.G. pressure ductwork): Seal using gypsum impregnated tape and adhesive. 5. Interior concealed joints (to 1-inch W.G. pressure ductwork): Seal using water based sealer, Hardcast Iron Grip. 6. Exterior joints (above 1-inch W.G. pressure ductwork): Seal using gypsum impregnated tape and adhesive. 7. Exterior joints (to 1-inch W.G. pressure ductwork): Seal using oil based sealer, Hardcast Galva Grip or equal. 8. Exterior joints: Seal water and to air-tight condition with sealant. E. Ductwork Painting, General-Where the interior surfaces of ductwork are visible through the blades of supply outlets, return inlets, and exhaust inlets, paint interior visible surfaces with one coat of flat black paint. See Section 09905-Painting. F. Cleaning-Clean the inside of plenums, casings, enclosures, fans, and accessible ductwork before starting fans. 3.5 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES, INSTALLATION A. Provide duct-mounted balancing dampers or attached opposed blade dampers so that each diffuser, grille and register may be individually balanced. B. Provide unit opposed blade damper where individual duct mounted balancing dampers are not provided. C. Provide turning vanes in all mitered elbows in all ducts, so that tips are parallel with the sides of the ducts. Vanes shall be single thickness type with extended trailing edge. Tips of acoustical turning vanes on outside radius shall be flush with acoustical lining. YUM-E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-14 July,2008 with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. 11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 3.2 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide layout drawings of units, locations and power requirements to electrical installer. 2. Install minimum 30 percent efficiency air filters in unit during installation phase. Do not operate the unit without filters in place. 3. Mount rooftop unit on factory built roof-mounting frame. Install roof mounting frame level. Secure frame to structural framing and rooftop unit on frame as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Install 3-inch long flexible duct connection at inlets and outlets of units. 5. Install condensate drain piping and traps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the Drawings. All metal piping and supports shall be of same material to prevent electrolysis. 6. Control installers shall install thermostat and all wiring associated with control signals into the units. All thermostats shall be located in manager's office with remote sensors located in appropriate locations in return ductwork. 7. Install all line voltage power wiring and conduit as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in Division 16-Electrical. 8. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor to install a new set of filters three days prior to Substantial Completion review. 3.4 EXHAUST/SUPPLY FAN INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. B. Provide access space around fans for service and maintenance, as indicated on the Drawings and in compliance with applicable Mechanical Code. C. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. D. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor to provide electrical power wiring as specified in Division 16-Electrical. 3.4 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION A. Ductwork Installation, General: 1. Ductwork is generally diagrammatically indicated on the Drawings and shall be generally installed as indicated. Do not scale Drawings for exact location of ducts. 2. Install ducts to best suit field conditions and to coordinate with other building components. Do not cut Structural members without consent of Construction Manager. Check with Structural Drawings prior to locating penetrations. 3. Duct sizes are indicated as net inside dimensions on the Drawings. The indicated dimensions shall be altered at the job site for the purpose of avoiding interference and clearance difficulties to other dimensions producing the same air handling characteristics, provided such altered dimensions are approved by the Construction Manager. B. Hangers and Supports YUM—E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-13 July,2008 AMR%, 1. The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with one or two Sirocco fan(s)direct driven by a single motor. 2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 3. The indoor unit shall have a ducted air outlet system and ducted return air system. E. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a standard factory installed return air filter. 2. Optional return filter box (rear or bottom placement)with high-efficiency filter shall be available for all PDFY indoor units. F. Coil: 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 6. The condensate shall be gravity drained from the fan coil. 7. Both refrigerant lines to the PDFY indoor units shall be insulated. G. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/6OHz). H. Controls: 1. This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric to perform functions necessary to operate the system. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 HVAC SYSTEM INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements 1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of,to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in- place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6.Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with drawings and specs,to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form.Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Construction Manager for resolution prior to installation. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, YUM—E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-12 July,2008 1. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled,wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. C. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space-saving ceiling recessed. 2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. 3. Branch ducting shall be allowed from cabinet. 4. The one-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing for one-way airflow. D. Fan: 1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with one line-flow fan direct driven by a single motor. 2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 3. The indoor fan shall consist of four(4)speeds, Low, Mid1, Mid2, and High. E. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life washable permanent filter. F. Coil: 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 6. The condensate lift mechanism shall be able to raise drain water 23 inches above the condensate pan. 7. Both refrigerant lines to the PMFY indoor units shall be insulated. G. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz)or 207-253 volts(230V/6OHz). H. Controls: 1. This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric to perform functions necessary to operate the system. Please refer to Part 5 of this guide specification for details on controllers and other control options. 2.14 PDFY (CEILING-CONCEALED DUCTED) INDOOR UNIT A. General: 1. The PDFY shall be a ceiling-concealed ducted indoor fan coil design that mounts above the ceiling with a 2-position, field adjustable return and a fixed horizontal discharge supply and shall have a modulating linear expansion device. The PDFY shall be used with the R2-Series outdoor unit and BC Controller, Y-Series outdoor unit,or S-Series outdoor unit.The PDFY shall support individual control using M-NET DDC controllers B. Indoor Unit. 1. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. C. Unit Cabinet: 1. The unit shall be space saving, ceiling-concealed, ducted. 2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. D. Fan: YUM—E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-11 July,2008 mechanism, an auto restart function,an emergency operation function and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. B. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space-saving ceiling-recessed cassette. 2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. Branch ducting shall be allowed from cabinet. 3. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four-way blow. 4. The grille vane angles shall be individually adjustable from the wired remote controller to customize the airflow pattern for the conditioned space C. Fan: 1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single motor. 2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 3. The indoor fan shall consist of five(5) speed settings, Low, Mid1, Mid2, High and Auto. 4. The fan shall have a selectable Auto fan setting that will adjust the fan speed based on the difference between controller set-point and space temperature. 5. The indoor unit shall have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow, 3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow. 6. The indoor unit shall have switches that can be set to provide optimum airflow based on ceiling height and number of outlets used. 7. The indoor unit vanes shall have 5 fixed positions and a swing feature that shall be capable of automatically swinging the vanes up and down for uniform air distribution. 8. The vanes shall have an Auto-Wave selectable option in the heating mode that shall randomly cycle the vanes up and down to evenly heat the space. 9. If specified,the grille shall have an optional i-see sensor that will measure room temperature variations and adjust the airflow accordingly to evenly condition the space. D. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life washable filter E. Coil: 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 6. The unit shall include a condensate lift mechanism that will be able to raise drain water 33 inches above the condensate pan. 7. Both refrigerant lines to the PLFY indoor units shall be insulated. E. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts(230V/6OHz). F. Controls: 1. This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric to perform functions necessary to operate the system. 2.13 PMFY(1-WAY CEILING-RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE) INDOOR UNIT A. General: 1. The PMFY shall be a one-way cassette indoor unit that recesses into the ceiling with a ceiling grille and shall have a modulating linear expansion device. The PMFY shall be used with the R2-Series outdoor unit and BC Controller, Y-Series outdoor unit,or S-Series outdoor unit. The PMFY shall support individual control using M-NET DDC controllers. B. Indoor Unit. YUM-E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-10 July,2008 4. The outdoor unit compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. The capacity shall be completely variable down to 16% of rated capacity. 5. The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload. 6. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. G. Electrical: 1. The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 3-phase,60 hertz. 2. The outdoor unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253V(230V/6OHz). 3. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors. 4. The control circuit between the indoor units, BC Controller and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system. 2.11 BRANCH CIRCUIT (BC) CONTROLLERS FOR R2-SERIES SYSTEMS A. General: 1. The BC (Branch Circuit) Controllers shall be specifically used with R410A R2-Series systems. These units shall be equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a galvanized steel finish. The BC Controller shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. This unit shall be mounted indoors.The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50%to 150%of rated capacity. B. BC Unit Cabinet: 1. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel. 2. Each cabinet shall house a liquid-gas separator and multiple refrigeration control valves. 3. The unit shall house two tube-in-tube heat exchangers. C. Refrigerant 1. R41 OA refrigerant shall be required for CMB-P-NU-G/GA/GB BC Controllers in conjunction with PURY-P-TGMU-A outdoor unit systems. D. Refrigerant valves: 1. The unit shall be furnished with multiple branch circuits which can individually accommodate up to 54,000 BTUH and/or three indoor units. Branches may be twinned to allow more than 54,000 BTUH. 2. Each branch shall have multiple two-position valves to control refrigerant flow. 3. Service shut-off valves shall be field-provided/installed for each branch to allow service to any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation. 4. Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable refrigerant flow. E. Integral Drain Pan: 1. An integral condensate pan and drain shall be provided. F. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. 2. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz)or 207-253V(230V/60Hz). 3. The BC Controller shall be controlled by integral microprocessors. 4. The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor,twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system. 2.12 PLFY-P"NAMU-E (4-WAY CEILING-RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE) INDOOR UNIT A. General: 1. The PLFY shall be a four-way cassette style indoor unit that recesses into the ceiling with a ceiling grille. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay tl YUM-E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-9 July,2008 (-E models), and M-NET DDC (Direct Digital Controls). The PURY outdoor units shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards that interface to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The outdoor unit shall have a powder coated finish. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. 1. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50%to 150%of outdoor rated capacity. 2. Outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 63 dB(A). 3. Both refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the BC (Branch Circuit) Controller(Single or Main) shall be insulated. 4. There shall be no more than 3 branch circuit controllers connected to any one outdoor unit. 5. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls. 6. The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, over-current protection and DC bus protection. 7. The outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with a maximum height difference of 164 feet and have total refrigerant tubing length of 984-1312 feet. The greatest length is not to exceed 492 feet between outdoor unit and the indoor units without the need for line size changes or traps. 8. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in heating down to-4°F ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls. 9. The outdoor unit shall not cease operation in any mode based solely on outdoor ambient temperature. 10. The outdoor unit shall have a high efficiency oil separator plus additional logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained. B. Unit Cabinet: 1. The casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with a powder coated baked enamel. C. Fan: 1. The PURY-P72/P96/ P108/P126/P144TGMU outdoor unit shall be furnished with one direct drive, variable speed propeller type fan. 2. The PURY-P168/P192/P204/P216/P234TGMU outdoor unit shall be furnished with two direct drive, variable speed propeller type fans. 3. All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and be completely variable speed. 4. All fan motors shall be mounted for quiet operation. 5. All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. 6. The outdoor unit shall have vertical discharge airflow. D. Refrigerant 1. R41 OA refrigerant shall be required for PURY-P-TGMU-A outdoor unit systems. E. Coil: 1. The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion resistant blue-fin finish. 3. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. 4. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven compressor. 5. The outdoor coil shall include 4 circuits with two position valves for each circuit, except for the last stage. F. Compressor: 1. The PURY-P72/P96/P108/P126/ P144TGMU outdoor units shall be equipped with one inverter driven scroll hermetic compressor. 2. The PURY-P168/P192/P204/P216/P234TGMU outdoor unit shall be equipped with one inverter driven scroll hermetic compressor and one scroll hermetic compressor. 3. A crankcase heater(s) shall be factory mounted on the compressor(s). YUM-E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-8 July,2008 water tight enclosure with access through a hinged door. Factory wiring will be provided from the switch to the unit high voltage terminal block.The switch will be UUCSA agency recognized. Note: The disconnect switch will be sized per NEC. UL guidelines will not be used in place of unit over current protection. K.Through the Base Gas Piping 1. Provision will be made in the unit for installing though the base gas piping. The factory installed option will have all piping necessary including an external shut-off piping yoke including pre-assembled, black steel, manual gas shut-off valve, elbows, and union.The three manual shut-off valves will each include a 1/8"[3.17 mm] NPT pressure tap. This assembly will require minor field labor to install. L. Hinged Access Doors 1. Sheet metal hinges will be factory installed on the Evaporator Access Door, Compressor/Control Access Door, Direct Gas-Fired Burner and Control Access Door and Outdoor Air Access Door. M. Outdoor Air Temperature and Relative Humidity Sensor 1. This factory installed combination outdoor air sensor located in the outdoor air hood is designed to sense both outdoor air temperature and relative humidity for use by the microprocessor controller to make required ventilation, cooling, dehumidification and heating decisions. Refer to the Sequence of Operations section of the Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual for detailed unit control and operational modes. N. Supply Air Sensing Tube 1. This factory installed sensing tube is designed to sense the supply air temperature downstream of the indoor fan section. O. Control Input(Occupied/Unoccupied) 1. Terminals are provided for a field installed dry contact or switch closure to put the unit in the Occupied or Unoccupied modes. P. Space Temperature Sensor with Set Point Adjustment-OPTIONAL 1. When enabled this optional field installed sensor with temperature set point adjustment dial provides space temperature cooling and heating set points to the RRU Control Module (RRUCM) to allow the unit to better control supply air conditions in response to space temperature and space temperature set points. Refer to the Sequence of Operations section of the Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual for detailed unit control, set up and operational modes. Q. Space Humidity Sensor-OPTIONAL 1. When enabled this optional field installed sensor provides space relative humidity to the RRU Control Module(RRUCM)to allow the unit to better control the call for cooling in response to space humidity and space humidity set points. Refer to the Sequence of Operations section of the Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual (RRUSVX01A-EN)for detailed unit control, set up and operational modes. R. 100% Return Air Damper-OPTIONAL 1. Field installed 100%return air damper controlled by a direct coupled actuator that is electrically interlocked with the outdoor air damper to allow 100% return air recirculation in the Unoccupied cooling mode. 2.10 R2-SERIES OUTDOOR UNIT A. General: The R2-Series PURY outdoor unit shall be used specifically with CITY MULTI VRFZ components. The R2-Series shall consist of the PURY outdoor unit, Branch Circuit(BC) Controller, indoor units YUM-E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-7 July,2008 IMORK temperature control, minimizes drift from set point and provides better building comfort. A centralized micro-processor(RRUCM) will provide anti-short cycle timing for a higher level of machine protection. D. Dual Refrigerant Circuits 1. The two independent refrigerant circuits incorporate a split face coil with thermal expansion valves (TXV's), service pressure ports and refrigerant line filter driers as standard. An area will be provided for replacement suction line driers. Refrigerant circuit one (1 st Stage) is equipped with a factory installed and preset refrigerant capacity control(RCC)to prevent evaporator coil temperatures below approximately 38 F. E. Evaporator and Condenser Coils 1. Internally finned 3/8"[9.53 mm] copper tubes mechanically bonded to configured aluminum plate fins are standard. Coils are leak tested at the factory to ensure the pressure integrity. The evaporator coil and condenser coil are leak tested to 200 psig [1379 kPa] and pressure tested to 450 psig [3192.8 kPa].The evaporator coil is horizontal face split. F. Indoor Fan and Motor 1. Unit will have an FC, centrifugal fan with a belt driven, adjustable sheave and thermally protected motor. The unit will have an adjustable idler arm assembly for quick adjustment of fan belts and motor sheaves. Indoor fan is equipped with an integrated fan fail switch. G. Outdoor Fan 1. The outdoor fans will be direct-drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in the vertical discharge position. The fan motors will be permanently lubricated and will have built in thermal overload protection. H. 100% Outdoor Air Hood with Damper and Filters 1. Factory installed and integrated 100% outdoor air hood with damper controlled a by direct coupled actuator and 2"[50.80 mm] permanent and washable aluminum mesh filters accessibly through a hinged access panel. The unit is factory equipped with a return air damper tray to accept an optional field installed 100% return air damper controlled by a direct coupled actuator that is electrically interlocked with the outdoor air damper to allow 100% return air recirculation in the Unoccupied cooling mode. The standard damper tray is blocked off to allow 100%outdoor airflow June 29,2006 FLD=Furnished by Trane/Installed by Others Trane Equipment Submittal Page 5 of 16 I. Modulating Direct Gas-Fired Burner 1. The unit will have a fully modulating, high turndown direct-gas fired heat.The heating section will have a 12"direct gas-fired burner constructed with a corrosion resistant aluminum casting and stainless steel baffles. On an initial call for heat, proper airflow must be verified sensed through a dual-action,factory preset hi/low burner differential air pressure switch prior to initiation of the ignition process.After proving airflow, an electronic ignition controller will begin a 30-second burner chamber pre-purge. Following pre-purge a direct spark igniter will ignite the fuel air mixture during a 15 second single-try lock out ignition trial. The microprocessor based RRU Control Module(RRUCM)will supply enable gas to the burner through a direct acting,fully modulating gas valve at a 25%firing for 45 seconds following successful ignition.At the end of the 90 second total pre and post ignition cycles, the gas burner will modulate to maintain required temperature set points controlled by the RRUCM.After one unsuccessful ignition attempt the entire heating system will be locked out until manually reset at controller,through a remoter operator display or by removing and reapply power to the unit. Units will be suitable for use with natural gas. J. Through the Base Electrical with Disconnect Switch 1. Factory installed 3-pole, molded case disconnect switch with provisions for through the base electrical connections will be included. The disconnect switch will be installed in the unit in a YUM-E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-6 July,2008 3. Certainteed Corp. B.All insulation material shall comply with applicable energy conservation regulations for Project location. C. Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation,jackets, coverings,sealers, mastics and adhesives)with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method. D. Provide staples, bands,wires,tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. E. Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.6 HVAC CONTROLS A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings. B. Electric and electronic HVAC Controls: Components and operating features as indicated on the Drawings. 2.7 ROOF CURB A. Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant-coated, insulated curb with nailer strip,flashing and counterflashing and cadmium-plated hardware. 2.8 DIRECT GAS-FIRED 100% OUTDOOR AIR ROOFTOP UNIT A. General-Downflow Airflow 1. Units will be direct gas-fired dedicated 100%outdoor air downflow airflow. Operating range will be between 115 deg F [46.1 deg C] and 0 deg F[-17.8 deg C]cooling as standard from the factory. Cooling performance will be rated in accordance with ARI testing procedures.The unit will be factory assembled, internally wired, fully charged with R-22 and 100 percent run-tested before leaving the factory. Wiring internal to the unit will be colored and numbered for simplified identification. Units will be ETL listed and labeled, classified in accordance to ANSI Z83.4 for gas nonrecirculating gas-fired industrial air heaters, UL 1995/CAN C22.2 236 and CSA 3.7-M99 for central cooling air conditioners. Units are labeled ETLC for Canadian installation. B. Unit Casing-Downflow 1. Unit casing is constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, and galvanized steel. All components are mounted in a weather resistant steel cabinet with painted exterior. Unit's surface will be tested 500 hours in a salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117. Cabinet construction allows for all maintenance on one side of the unit.Service panels provide a water and air tight seal. The indoor air section is complete with fire resistant, permanent, odorless glass fiber material. The base pan has no penetrations within the perimeter of the curb other than the raised supply/return openings to provide an added water integrity precaution should the condensate drain back up. The base of the unit has provisions for forklift and crane lifting. C. Controls for Dual Compressors Unit 1. Unit is completely factory wired with necessary controls and contactor pressure lugs for power wiring. Units will provide an external location for mounting fused disconnect device. Micro- processor controls are provided for all 24 volt control functions. The resident control algorithms will make all heating, cooling and/or ventilating decisions in response to electronic signals from sensors measuring outdoor temperature and humidity. The control algorithm maintains accurate YUM—E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-5 July,2008 D. Label entire assembly in accordance with UL 181 Class 1 air duct requirements and not have a flame and smoke spread rating in excess of 25/50 respectively. 2.3 DUCT ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS A. In sheet metal work, hollow core double construction of same or heavier gage material as duct in which installed, products by CESCO, Vent Products,Air Balance, or equivalent. 1. Provide Ventlok or approved hinges and latches on all doors; 100 Series hinges and latches on low pressure system doors up to 18-inches maximum dimension, 200 Series on larger low pressure system doors and 333 Series on high pressure systems. 2. Construct doors up to 18-inches maximum dimension with one inch overlap fit and gasket with 3/4-inch by 1/8-inch sponge rubber,fit larger doors against 1-1/2 inches by 1/8-inch flat stock or angle frame and gasket with 3/4-inch by 1/8-inch sponge rubber or felt. 3. Door swing to be opposite airflow direction. 2.4 DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES A.Volume and Splitter Dampers 1. Galvanized sheetmetal blade and frame with Ventfabrics Inc., Ventlok operating hardware. 2. For accessible dampers, provide#641 self-locking dial regulators and#644 self-locking dial regulators for insulated ductwork,#637 square end bearing, and#635 spring end bearing, as applicable. 3. For inaccessible dampers, provide#666 or#677 concealed locking damper regulator with bearings as above. For static pressures above 3-inch W.G., provide#640 HiVel dial regulator and#609 HiVel end bearing for accessible dampers. B. Multi-Louver Volume Dampers 1. 16-gauge galvanized steel frame. Opposed, 6-inch wide, 16-gauge galvanized steel blades. Concealed linkage in frame. 2. Titus#AG-35-B, Ruskin #CD35/OBD or equal. C. Flexible Connections 1. Provide flexible connectors at the discharge and inlet of fans, air handlers, rotating mechanical equipment, and where shown on the Drawings for proper vibration isolation. 2. Neoprene impregnated glass cloth with 24-gauge galvanized metal frame. Minimum dimensions: 3-inch metal, 3-inch fabric, 3-inch metal. 3. Duro Dyne#MFN4, Ventfabrics"Ventglas", Q Industries, Consolidated Kinetics, Elgen, or equal. D. Backdraft Dampers 1. Provide counterweight type complete with frame, end bearings, counterbalance assembly, blades, and linkage. 2. Install at outside air intakes, exhaust outlets,and where shown on Drawings. 3. Pacific Air Products#PRD-100AL, Ruskin#CBS-7 or equal by Swartwout,American Warming, or Vent Products. 2.5 DUCT INSULATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide products of the following manufacturers, complying with specified requirements. Equivalent products of other manufacturers will be considered in accordance with the"or equal'provision specified in Section 01000-Supplemental General Requirements, and the Construction Contract. 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. 2. Johns Manville Corp. YIJM-E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-4 July,2008 1.8 CLEAN-UP A.At the completion of the work, clean the area of all debris such that the Project is left in a neat and clean manner as deemed acceptable by the Owner. 1.9 WARRANTY A. In addition to honoring all Contractor supplied equipment manufacturers'warranties,the Contractor shall warrant and correct all defects in Contractor supplied material and all workmanship for a period of one(1)year after acceptance of Project by the Owner. Warranty costs shall include all labor and material associated with the correction of work covered under this Contract. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS, FANS AND AIR OUTLETS A. Equipment shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Air conditioning unit shall include hard- start kit for low ambient temperature operation. B. The manufacturer shall include the following items: 1. 5-year compressor warranty-parts only. 2. 10-year heat exchanger warranty-parts only. 3. Factory installed two-position motorized damper. 4. Factory installed hard start kit for low ambient to zero degree operation. 5. Factory installed hinged access panels. 6. Through the base gas and electrical connections to minimize roof penetrations. 7. Factory installed circuit breaker. 8. Factory installed unpowered convenience outlet. 9. Factory supplied/field installed supply air smoke detector. C. The contractor shall furnish manufacturer complete submittal wiring diagrams of the packaged unit as applicable for field maintenance and service. 2.2 DUCTWORK A. Rectangular Ducts Fabrication, General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with SMACNA- HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Tables 1-3 through 1-19, including their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals,tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals. B. Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts Fabrication, General: Fabricated using 16-gage, carbon steel sheets for concealed ducts and 16-gage stainless steel for exposed ducts. Weld and flange seams and joints. Conform to NFPA Standard 96. C. Flexible Ductwork Fabrication, General: 1. Factory preinsulated, spiral helix steel spring permanently bonded to an interior liner, and sheathed in an exterior reinforced laminated vapor barrier jacket. 2. Precut lengths of flexible duct with continuous inner liner,factory installed female collars and fastening devices at each end. 3. Provide spin-in extractor/balancing damper assembly complete with a level position indicator and positive locking device, as indicated on the Drawings, round duct takeoffs from rectangular main ducts. J YUM—E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-3 July,2008 A. YUM! Brands, Inc. has entered into a national account agreement with Trane for furnishing the HVAC roof top units specified in this section. Complete installation shall be by the Contractor. For pricing quotations, placing orders, and further information, contact Trane at number indicated on the drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Install packaged units, as indicated in the Drawings, in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and requirements. Provide related products and accessories from one manufacturer. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer recommendation protecting from dirt, moisture, contaminants and weather. B. Codes and Standards: Perform all installations in accordance with the latest standards as recognized by ASHRAE, SMACNA and all applicable state and local codes and ordinances. C.Workmanship: Experienced, well-trained workers competent to complete the work as specified shall perform Labor in conformance with generally accepted trade standards. Install all equipment square and plumb allowing access for proper operation, adjustment and service. 1.5 STRUCTURAL AND SPACE CONDITIONS A. All work shall avoid obstructions and interference with other trades, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear and free. 1.6 VIBRATION AND NOISE A. Install each of the various pieces of equipment to operate without objectionable vibration or noise. 1.7 BALANCING AND TESTING . , A. Test and Balance shall be performed by a nationally qualified Test and Balance Company contracted directly by the Owner. B. Contractor shall coordinate testing with the Testing and Balance Company. All systems shall be fully operational prior to commencement of testing. Correct all deficiencies noted in the Test and Balance Report within three days or prior to store opening. C. Assume responsibility for correcting all items determined to be the result of improper or incomplete installation. D. Contractor shall be responsible for providing test reports to the local jurisdiction as required for Certificate of Occupancy. E. Required for all Corporate Development: YUM! Brands, Inc. "Zero Defect"Test and Balance Program. National Consultants: Test and Balance Corporation Melink Corporation Awarded Global Refer to the Scope of Works Documents, section 00020,for instructions and contact information. Refer to"Support Tools"on the plans.yum.com website for an outline all applicable information pertaining to the"Zero Defect"Test and Balance Program. YUM—F.3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-2 July,2008 SECTION 15500 HEATING,VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK Furnishing of all labor, materials,tools,transportation, services, and related items necessary to complete the installation of the HVAC system as illustrated on the drawings,together with all necessary auxiliaries and appurtenances. A. Items include but are not limited to the following: 1. Packaged rooftop unit. 2. Heat exchanger. 3. Refrigeration components. 4. Unit operating controls. 5.Air filters. 6. Roof curb. 7. Electrical power connections. 8. Operation and maintenance service. 9. Ductwork. 10. Ductwork specialties. 11.Access panels and doors. 12. Ductwork insulation. B. Submit Product Data. C. Submit Shop Drawings, including mounting and installation details for roof curbs and coordination with roofing system. D. References 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2001 -Energy Standard for Buildings. Establishes minimum efficiencies for equipment. 2. NFPA 90 A& B-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems and Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 3.ANSI/ASHRAE 15-Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 4.ARI 360-Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment testing and rating standard. Applies to Gas/Electric Units above 135,000 BTU. 5.ANSI/ASHRAE 37 -Testing Unitary Air Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. 6.ANSI Z21.47/UL1995- Unitary Air Conditioning Standard for safety requirements. 7.ARI 210/240 -Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. Applies to all units below 135,000 BTU. 8.ARI 270-Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 9.ARI 370-Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Equipment. 10.ANSI/NFPA 70-1995 -National Electric Code. E. EER: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Building, except Low-Rise Residential Buildings." 1.3 NATIONAL ACCOUNT YUM-E3.1 HEATING,VENTILATION,AND AIR CONDITIONING Site Number 305-634 15500-1 July,2008 condensing units. Provide isolation valves with unions on both the supply and discharge water lines for each unit. Provide factory isolation valve kit. F. Coordinate electrical connection requirements with the electrical contractor prior to installation. G. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 WATER HEATERS&CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT Site Number 305-634 15485-2 July,2008 roll SECTION 15485 WATER HEATERS AND CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to AGA, NFPA 54 requirements for water heaters. B. Conform to ASME Section 8D for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat exchangers. C. Conform to ASME Section 8D for tanks. D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.2 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 01780. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS A. Acceptable Product: Refer to schedule on Drawings. 2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PRE-HEATING UNIT A. Acceptable Product: Refer to schedule on Drawings. 2.3 WASTE OIL RECOVERY SYSTEM A. Acceptable Product: Refer to schedule on Drawings. B. The waste oil recovery system shall be equal to RTI Indoor Poly1.4k tank MaxLife Equipment and shall include the following features: Certified by NSF to ANSI/NSF Standard 4, level gauge on the fresh oil tank reading in pounds of oil, overfill protection on both tanks, heated waste oil tank, mounting inserts to allow the equipment to be secured to the floor. 1. Pipe connections: Per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. www.rti-inc.com 2.4 DOMESTIC WATER PREHEATING EQUIPMENT A. Acceptable Product: Refer to schedule on Drawings. B. The domestic water preheating equipment shall be equal to Turbotec Enviro-pak and shall include the following features: stainless steel enclosure, integral pump and controls with a single point of electrical connection, indicator lights, safety diagnostics, and 5 year warranty. 1. Pipe connections: 1/2"water in, 1/2"water out, 1/2"refrigerant in, and 1/2"refrigerant out. 2. www.turbotecproducts.com PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA and NFPA 54 requirements. Refer to drawing Sheet P6.0. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system. C. Install pre-heating equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Provide complete packaged Waste Oil Recovery system including tank for clean oil,tank for waste oil, controls, piping from tanks to kitchen equipment,and any necessary connections to the kitchen equipment. E. Provide complete domestic water preheating system with final connections to the domestic cold water system and refrigerant suction and liquid lines associated with freezer and cooler YUM—E3.1 WATER HEATERS&CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT Site Number 305-634 15485-1 July,2008 E. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain. F. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to lavatories and sinks. G. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures (each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch minimum, and minimum 18 inches long. H. The water reclamation system shall be a complete functioning system. Provide connections from the roof drainage system to the reclamation system. Refer to architectural and mechanical plans for specific requirements. The water shall be collected from the roof drainage system into tanks located at grade. The discharge from the tanks shall be routed full size with a ball valve to a curb outlet and also to the suction side of the irrigation pump. During irrigation conditions, the valve serving the curb outlet shall be closed and the valve serving the irrigation system shall be open. During non-irrigation seasons,the valve serving the curb outlet shall be open and the valve serving the irrigation system shall be closed. Provide elbow vents on each tank, provide full sized overflow to curb outlet. Domestic water make-up shall be provided directly to the tank. Provide atmospheric vacuum breaker and isolated water meter on the water line serving the tanks. Provide solenoid valve and pressure switch to maintain minimum irrigation water level. Refer to the Drawings for additional information. The entire system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Site Number 305-634 15430-3 July,2008 C. Interior Finished Floor Areas(CO-3): 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange,threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. 2. Acceptable Products: Refer to Drawings. D. Interior Finished Wall Areas(CO-4): 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2. Acceptable Product: Refer to Drawings. 2.6 HYDRANTS A. Wall Hydrant: 1. ANSUASSE 1019; non-freeze, self-draining type with chrome plated wall plate hose thread spout, handwheel, and integral vacuum breaker. 2. Acceptable Products: Refer to Drawings. 2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Refer to schedule on Drawings. 2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. ANSI Al 12.26.1; copper construction, piston type sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range 34 to 250 degrees F and maximum 150 psi working pressure. 2.9 WATER RECLAMATION SYSTEM A. Acceptable Product: Refer to schedule on Drawings. B. The water reclamation system shall be equal to Rainwater H2OG Storage Solution and shall include the following features: 1. Pre-engineered water storage tanks a. Refer to drawings for quantity and location b. Inlet screen C. Elbow vents on each tank d. Full sized system overflow piped to curb outlet e. Full sized discharge piped to curb outlet and to the suction side of the irrigation system pump f. Pipe connectors between each tank to ensure equalized tank levels g. Domestic water make-up with atmospheric vacuum breaker for irrigation purposes 1) Coordinate backflow prevention requirements with the local jurisdiction. 2) Refer to Drawings for domestic water line sizing requirements. h. Tank mounted pressure switch interlocked with a solenoid valve on the domestic water makeup. i. Step down transformer for pressure switch and solenoid valve as required. 1) Refer to Drawings for additional electrical requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. YUM-E3.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Site Number 305-634 15430-2 July,2008 SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL-not used PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF DRAINS (when applicable) A. Assembly: ANSI Al 12.21.2. B. Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump. C. Strainer: Removable cast iron dome. D. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type, refer to Section 07550. 1. Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop. 2. Adjustable under deck clamp. 3. Roof sump receiver. 4. Waterproofing flange. 5. Controlled flow weir. 6. Leveling frame. 7. Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation. 8. Perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof. 9. Perforated stainless steel ballast guard extension. E. Acceptable Product: Josam Model 21500. 2.2 ROOF OVERFLOW DRAINS A. Lacquered cast iron body and clamp collar[and bottom clamp ring]; pipe extended to 2 inches above flood elevation. B. Acceptable Product: Josam Model 21500. 2.3 FLOOR DRAINS A. Floor Drain (FD-1): 1. ANSI Al 12.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer. 2. Acceptable Products: Refer to Drawings. 2.4 FLOOR SINKS A. Floor Sink(FS-1): 1. Square PVC body with integral seepage pan, PVC interior,aluminum or PVC dome strainer,and loose set PVC grate. 2. Acceptable Product: Refer to Drawings. 2.5 CLEANOUTS A. Exterior Surfaced Areas(CO-1): 1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover. 2. Exterior Surfaced Areas (CO-1): 3. Acceptable Product: a. Josam Model 56000. B. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas (CO-2): 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover. 2. Acceptable Product: a. Josam Model 56010. YUM—E3.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Site Number 305-634 15430-1 July,2008 SECTION 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Refer to Section 01330 for procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,trim, and finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Refer to Section 01330 for procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Refer to schedule on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with [screwdriver]stops, reducers, and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07920, color to match fixture. F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit use of fixtures during construction. END OF SECTION YUM-E3.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES Site Number 305-634 15410-1 July,2008 B. Starting Current: Less than 5 times full load current. C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with 2 capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A(100 degrees F temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. G. Enclosed Motors: Class A(100 degrees F temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.5 THREE PHASE POWER-SQUIRREL-CAGE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque. B. Starting Current: Six times full load current. C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. D. Design, Construction,Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B [energy efficient]motors. E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better. F. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum,or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. G. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors embedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay with wiring to terminal box. H. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 200,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. I. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1. J. Part Winding Start Above 254T Frame Size: Use part of winding to reduce locked rotor starting current to approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current while providing approximately 50 percent of full winding locked rotor torque. K. Nominal Efficiency: To NEMA MG 1, energy efficient for frame sizes 215T motor sizes 10 and larger. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Section 01450-Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. END OF SECTION YUM-E3.1 MOTORS Site Number 305-634 15170-2 July,2008 Oro"' SECTION 15170 MOTORS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 WARRANTY A. Section 01780-Closeout Submittals. B. Provide 3 year manufacturer warranty for motors larger than 1 horsepower. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Less Than 250 Watts, for Intermittent Service: Equipment manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications. B. Single Phase Motors: PSC where available. C. Electrical Service: 1. Motors smaller than 1/2 HP: 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 2. Motors 1/2 Horsepower and larger: 208 volts or 460 volts, three phase,60 Hz. D. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise. E. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. F. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type. G. Explosion-Proof Motors: UL approved for hazard classification. H. Visible Nameplate: Indicating manufacturer's name and model number, motor horsepower, RPM,frame size,voltage, phase, cycles,full load amps, insulation system class, service factor, maximum ambient temperature,temperature rise at rated horsepower, minimum efficiency. I. Wiring Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70,threaded for conduit. 2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame. 2.2 SINGLE PHASE POWER-SPLIT PHASE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to 7 times full load current. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque. D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A(110 degrees F temperature rise)insulation, NEMA Service Factory, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. E. Enclosed Motors: Class A(110 degrees F temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.3 SINGLE PHASE POWER-PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to 6 times full load current. C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings. D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A(110 degrees F temperature rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector. 2.4 SINGLE PHASE POWER-CAPACITOR START MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque. YUM—E3.1 MOTORS Site Number 305-634 15170-1 July,2008 E. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to per 1/4 inch per foot(2 percent) minimum. Maintain gradients. B. Slope water piping minimum 0.25 percent and arrange to drain at low points. 3.5 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections,confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. B. Provide new water service complete with approved backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves. 1. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete bridge. Calk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main inside to concrete wall. C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 PLUMBING PIPING Site Number 305-634 15145-6 July,2008 1. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body,Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic,direct pressure actuated,temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME SEC IV certified and labeled. 2.24 STRAINERS A. Size 2 inch and Under: 1. Class 150,threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 0.8 mm(1/32 inch) stainless steel perforated screen. B. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch: 1. Class 125,flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space,and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15060. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08311. I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure installed depth is below maximum frost depth. J. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. L. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. M. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09910. N. Excavate in accordance with Section 02300 for work of this Section. O. Backfill in accordance with Sections 02300 for work of this Section. P. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. Q. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. R. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood. S. Install water piping to ASME 1331.9. T. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions,walls and floors. U. Inserts: Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. D. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass,or manual flow control services. YUM-E3.1 PLUMBING PIPING Site Number 305-634 15145-5 July,2008 2. Joints: NFPA 54,threaded or welded to ANSI 831.1. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME 816.22,wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder, lead free, Grade 95TA. 2.18 FLANGES, UNIONS,AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 3 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: 1. Housing: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. 2. Sealing gasket: "C"shape composition sealing gasket. D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end,water impervious isolation barrier. 2.19 GLOBE VALVES A. Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, bronze disc, solder ends. B. 2 Inches and Larger: 1. MSS SP-85, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, renewable bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat,flanged ends. 2.20 BALL VALVES A. Construction,4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, bronze,two piece body,chrome plated brass ball, regular port,Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends. 2.21 PLUG VALVES A. Construction 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-78,cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated,Teflon or Buna N packing,flanged ends. Provide lever operator with set screw. 2.22 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: 1. MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts,fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, [threaded][and][double union]ends. B. Over 2 Inches: 1. MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted,elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged. 2.23 RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: 1. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body,Teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: YUM—E3.1 PLUMBING PIPING Site Number 305-634 15145-4 July,2008 1. Fittings: CPVC,ASTM F 493. 2. Joints:ASTM F 493 or ASTM D 2846, solvent weld. 2.11 WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME 816.22,wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32,solder, lead free, Grade 95TA. B. CPVC:ASTM D 2846, Schedule 80. 1. Fittings:CPVC,ASTM F 493. 2. Joints:ASTM F 493 or ASTM D 2846, solvent weld. 2.12 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: ASTM C 564,neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum. B. Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 76. 1. Fittings: Concrete. 2. Joints: ASTM C 443(ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034 where allowed by code. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.13 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: ASTM C 564,neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum. B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034 where allowed by code. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.14 STORM WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: ASTM C 564,neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum. B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034 where allowed by code. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.15 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM 1248-65T 1. Fittings: ASTM D 2683 or ASTM D 1248 socket type. 2. Joints: Fusion welded. 2.16 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M,forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.2,welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 0.25 mm polyethylene tape. 2.17 NATURAL GAS PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME 816.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A 234/A 234M,forged steel welding type. O YUM-E3.1 PLUMBING PIPING Site Number 305-634 15145-3 July,2008 1. Acceptable Products: Watts Model 40. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Acceptable Products:Watts Model 40. 2.5 STRAINERS A. Size 2 inch and Under: 1. Acceptable Products: Watts Model 77S. B. Size 1-1/2 inch to (4 inch): 1. Acceptable Products:Watts Model 77F. 2.6 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight, hub and spigot. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Caulked joints, lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 888, no hub. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints:ASTM C 564, neoprene gasket. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 3034 SDR 35 or ASTM D 2665, SCH where allowed by code. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gaskets. 2.7 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034 where allowed by code. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.8 SANITARY SEWER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: ASTM C 564, lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe:ASTM A 888, no hub. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints:ASTM C 564, neoprene gasket. C. PVC Pipe:ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40, DWV. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints:ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2654, solvent cement. 2.9 WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151. 1. Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch diameter rods. B. CPVC Pipe: ASTM D 2846, Schedule 80. 1. Fittings: CPVC ASTM F493, Schedule 80. 2. Joints:ASTM F 493, solvent weld, or ASTM D 2840. 2.10 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 42, annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints:AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze, lead free. B. CPVC:ASTM D 2846, Schedule 80. YUM-E3.1 PLUMBING PIPING Site Number 305-634 15145-2 July,2008 SECTION 15145 PLUMBING PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with authority having jurisdiction standards. Utilize products as indicated in drawings and as allowed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX and applicable state labor regulations. D. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX. E. Identify pipe with marking including size,ASTM material classification,ASTM specification, and water pressure rating. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with authority having jurisdiction plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BALL VALVES A. Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1. Acceptable Products: a. Crane Model 9200 Series. b. Stockham Model 5206 Series. B. 2 Inches and Larger: 1. Acceptable Products: a. Crane Model 9200 Series. b. Stockham Model 5206 Series. 2.2 GLOBE VALVES A. Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1. Acceptable Products: a. Milwaukee Model 572. b. Crane Model 1702. C. Stockham Model B-16. B. 2 Inches and Larger: 1. Acceptable Products: a. Milwaukee Model 572. b. Crane Model 1702. C. Stockham Model B-16. 2.3 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: 1. Acceptable Products: Watts Model 223. B. Over 2 Inches: 1. Acceptable Products: Watts Model 127W. 2.4 RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: YUM-E3.1 PLUMBING PIPING Site Number 305-634 15145-1 July,2008 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. 3.2 SCHEDULES A. Evaporative Condenser Intake and Exhaust: 1 inch aluminized film. B. Outside Air Intake Ducts:2 inch aluminized film. C. Supply Plenums: 1 inch aluminized film. D. Supply Ducts: 1 inch aluminized film or 1 inch rigid insulation with service jacket. E. Exhaust Hood Duct: Provide installation, clearances, and thickness to meet required fire rating. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 DUCTWORK INSULATION Site Number 305-634 15083-2 July,2008 SECTION 15083 DUCTWORK INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL-Duct insulation shall comply with Chapter 13,section 410 Air Distribution System of the Florida Building Code. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Insulation: ASTM C 553;flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' ('Ksi')value: ASTM C 518,0.045 at 0.31 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E 96; 1.3 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. C. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film,with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. 2.2 GLASS FIBER RIGID BOARD A. Insulation: Fiberglass semi-rigid board, 1 inch thick. B. Rectangular or Square Duct Insulation: ASTM C 612,Type II. 1. K-value:0.23 at 75 degrees F mean temperature. 2. All service jacket in compliance with ASTM C 1136,field installed. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. C. Round Duct Insulation:ASTM C 547,Tpe I. 1. K-Value: 0.23 at 75 degrees F mean temperature. 2. All service jacket in compliance with ASTM C 1136,factory installed. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. 2.3 EXHAUST HOOD DUCT WRAP A. Flexible Grease and Air Duct Wrap System; UL listed;foil both sides fully encapsulated. 1. Meeting requirements of 1 hour enclosure passing UL Classification"Ventilation Duct Assembly-Nos.V-11 and V-12". B. Acceptable Product: Pyroscat Duct Wrap F2E by Vesuvius, Irwin,TN. C. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, products from one of the following manufacturers may be submitted for approval. 1. ETS Schaefer Corporation. 2. Thermal Ceramics. 3. Unifrax Corporation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers,and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings,joints,flanges,fire dampers,flexible connections, and expansion joints. C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. YUM-E3.1 DUCTWORK INSULATION Site Number 305-634 15083- 1 July,2008 F. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. G. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.. 3.2 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Thickness per this section END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 PIPING INSULATION Site Number 305-634 15081 -2 July,2008 SECTION 15081 PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL-REQUIREMENTS 1.1 Confirm to Applicable codes. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION A. Insulation: ASTM C 547 [and ASTM C 7951; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K'('Ksi')value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Manville. 2. Owens-Corning. C. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation. D. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. ASTM C 195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. E. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density. 3. Weave: 5x5. 4. Thickness: 1" F. Indoor Vapor Barrier: 1. FRK self-sealing jacket. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation. G. Flexible Foam Insulation 1. 1/2 inch thick flexible foam plastic insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. B. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions,flanges, strainers,flexible connections, and expansion joints. C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets,factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. 2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. D. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less,do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. E. Insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets,with or without vapor barrier,factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. YUM-E3.1 PIPING INSULATION Site Number 305-634 15081 -1 July,2008 SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for support of plumbing. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping: 1. Conform to ASTM F 708. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal and vertical piping against movement. END OF SECTION low YUM—E3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Site Number 305-634 15060- 1 July,2008 SECTION 10525 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications 1. Conform to NFPA-10 requirements for extinguishers. 2. Provide units conforming with ANSI/UL 711 and ANSI/UL 92. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. JL Industries. 2. Larsens Manufacturing Co. B. Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Multi-purpose dry chemical type U.L.299, (ammonium phosphate),with pressure gauge 1. Capacity: 10.0 lbs. 2. U.L. Rating: 4A:60B:C 3. Acceptable Product: MP10 by Larsens. B. Mounting bracket: Manufacturer's standard. 2.3 FINISHES A. Extinguisher: Red enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Site Number 305-634 10525-1 July,2008 SECTION 10435 EXTERIOR SIGNS PART 1 GENERAL—not used PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following: 1. Best Manufacturing Company,Montrose,Colorado. 2. Mohawk Sign Systems, Schenectady, New York. 3. Nelson-Harkins,Chicago, Illinois. 4. ASI Signs, Dallas,Texas. 2.2 HANDICAPPED PARKING A. Screen Printed Signs: 1. 18 gage bonderized steel with blue baked enamel finish and white screen printed copy. 2. Copy and Size: a. "Handicapped Parking Only'-12 inches by 18 inches. b. "Van Accessible"- 12 inches by 6 inches. 3. Acceptable Product: Best Traffic Signs No. SSO4 with SS52 as required. B. Post: Galvanized pipe column minimum 9 feet long. 2.3 DIRECTIONAL SIGNS A. Screen Printed Signs: 1. Extruded aluminum panels with anodic finish and white screen printed copy. 2. Size and Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Copy: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Acceptable Product: Best Post and Plank as detailed on Drawings. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install signs plumb, level and square and in proper planes with other work,at heights as indicated by Owner's Representative. B. Anchor each plastic laminate sign with adhesive. C. Install signs with sufficient amount of foam tape for proper installation. D. Attach as recommended by sign manufacturer. E. Anchor each sign with adhesive. F. Coordinate arrival and installation of graphic signs with hardware installation. Graphic signs function as and are coordinated with the hardware as shown on the Drawings. 3.2 EXTERIOR INSTALLATION-PARKING AND DIRECTIONAL SIGNS A. Mount posts in 12 inch round by 2'-6"deep concrete footing. B. Handicapped Signs:60 inches to bottom of lowest line(including"Van Accessible"). END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 EXTERIOR SIGNS Site 305-634 10435-1 July,2008 OW 3.11 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Refer to Room Finish Schedule and Exterior Paint Schedule on Drawings. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 PAINTS Site Number 305-634 09910-7 July,2008 B. Ferrous Metal Items-Eggshell(including interior hollow metal doors,frames,access doors and frames): 1. Sherwin-Williams a. One coat Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer. b. Two coats Incredicoat Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, 1.5 mils DFT/coat. C. Dining Room Block Walls 1. Benjamin Moore a. Prime:One(1)coat Benjamin Moore Block Filler#M-88. b. Finish:Two(2)coats Benjamin Moore Super Spec Acrylic Semi Gloss Enamel #276. D. Kitchen Block Walls 1. Benjamin Moore a. Prime:One(1)coat Benjamin Moore Block Filler#M-88. b. Finish:Two(2)coats Benjamin Moore Acrylic Epoxy High Gloss Coating #M43/M44. E. Bathroom Walls 1. Benjamin Moore a. Prime:One(1)coat Benjamin Moore Acrylic Primer Sealer#253. b. Finish:Two(2)coats Benjamin Moore Acrylic Epoxy High Gloss Coating #M43/M44. F. All Ceilings 1. Benjamin Moore a. Prime:One(1)coat Benjamin Moore Acrylic Primer Sealer#253 b. Finish:Two(2)coats Benjamin Moore Acrylic Flat#282. G. Miscellaneous Items Exposed to View and Not Otherwise Scheduled: Finish with compatible paint to match adjacent surface finish and color. 3.10 EXTERIOR COATING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal Items: 1. Sherwin-Williams a. Touch up shop primer as required. b. First Coat: Sherwin-Williams, DTM Acrylic B66W1. C. Second Coat: Same as first. B. Galvanized Metal Items: 1. Sherwin-Williams a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams, Galvite Paint No. B50W3. b. Second Coat: Sherwin-Williams, DTM Acrylic B66W1. C. Third Coat: Same as second. C. Synthetic Masonry Surfaces: 1. Benjamin Moore a. Primer: One(1)coat Benjamin Moore Acrylic Pigmented Sealer#066 01,tinted '/finish coat color. b. Finish:Two(2)Coats Benjamin Moore Super Spec Acrylic Low Lustre#185. D. Cedar Siding,Trim: 1. Benjamin Moore a. Prime: One(1)coat Benjamin Moore Fresh Start Alkyd Primer#094,tinted finish coat color. b. Finish:Two(2)coats Benjamin Moore Impervex High Gloss Acrylic Enamel #309. E. Pressure Treated Lumber: 1. MoorWood a. Prime: Not necessary. b. Finish: One(1)or two(2)coats MoorWood Solid Color Acrylic Stain#089. F. Shop Finishes: Refer to individual sections. YUM—E3.1 PAINTS Site Number 305-634 09910-6 July,2008 D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.5 APPLICATION A. The intent of these Specifications is to produce the highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. The proper preparation of all surfaces will be strictly enforced and wherever finished surfaces show any defects due to improper preparation,workmanship,etc.,the defects shall be removed and the work refinished at the expense of the Contractor. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Final finish coats shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance,and shall be free and smooth of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps,or skipped areas. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. D. Apply each coat to uniform finish and thickness. E. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. F. Sand lightly between coats on wood and metal items to achieve required finish. G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. H. Where clear finishes are required,tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. I. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork scheduled to be painted with primer paint. J. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. K. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. 3.6 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint shop primed equipment. Paint shop prefinished items where exposed to view in finished spaces. B. Paint exposed air handlers, roof ventilators, goose necks,exhaust fans and other items on the roof with 2 coats exterior enamel. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the base metal or primer as specified herein. 3.7 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled,splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment,surplus materials,and debris. C. Collect cotton waste,cloths,and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. D. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing as determined by the Owner's Representative. Otherwise, re-coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point. 3.8 VOC (VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND)COMPLIANCE A. Products listed in following schedule and substitutes proposed for use must be formulated to meet applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum VOC content. Utilize products which have been specially formulated to need such requirements. 3.9 INTERIOR COATING SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board-Semi-gloss 1. Sherwin-Williams a. One coat roller applied latex texturing compound. b. One coat ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer, 1.1 mils DFT. C. Two coats Everclean Latex Semigloss, 1.4 mils DFT/coat. YUM—E3.1 PAINTS Site Number 305-634 09910-5 July,2008 AM%. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report to Owner's Representative any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop applied primers for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. Remove existing coatings which exhibit loose surface defects. C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. F. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. G. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease,scale,dirt,and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts,and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. H. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. I. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried;sand between coats. J. Interior Wood Items Schedule to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried;sand lightly between coats. K. Shop Finished Items: Finish in accordance with AWI standards and guide lines. L. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION OF PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES A. General: 1. Remove cracked and deteriorated sealants and calking. 2. Remove chalk deposits and loose,blistered,peeling,scaling,or crazed finish to bare base material or sound substrate by scraping and sanding. 3. Wash surfaces with solution of TSP to remove wax,oil, grease, and other foreign material; rinse,and allow to dry. Exercise caution that TSP solution does not soften existing coating. 4. Abrade glossy surfaces by sanding or wiping with liquid de-glosser. 5. Remove mildew as specified above. 6. Test compatibility of existing coatings by applying new coating to small, inconspicuous area. If new coatings lift or blister existing coatings, request recommendation from Owner's Representative. 7. Apply specified primer to surfaces scheduled to receive coatings. B. Metal: 1. Remove rust from surfaces to bare metal in accordance with SP3"Power Tool Cleaning". 2. Exercise care not to remove galvanizing. 3. Complete preparation as specified for new work. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths,shields,and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. YUM—E3.1 PAINTS Site Number 305-634 09910-4 July,2008 { ` �bYiCtl�rii� 4m s F rrd t! Ott 10 n � ,, . . .,. ..r. ,..,. . ROMP Oil 3 �� moths VAWIY n t '` th afe H a 8 4 i aF , 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency,capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating with good flow and brushing properties;capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac,turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified,of commercial quality. C. Patching Materials: Latex filler. 2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. YUM—E3.1 PAINTS Site Number 305-634 09910-3 July,2008 lowk 2. ICI Dulux Paints, Carrollton,TX, 3. The Sherwin-Williams Company, Cleveland, OH. 4. Pittsburgh Paints, PPG Industries, Inc., Cleveland, OH. 5. Porter Paints. 6. Vista Paints. 7. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Acceptable Products: Refer to schedule at end of section. C. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be product of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified and approved by manufacturers of products used. D. Secondary Products such as Linseed Oil,Turpentine and Shellacs: First quality products of a reputable manufacturer. E. Products specified in the Schedule are provided as a standard of quality unless noted otherwise. F. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL ��1 �? to ���ied late apt `ltd Goaf��ig '�' n51�e pradu tha �iamp�y I sul� rfac re ffi clv INp . s Ft Paints # :., RIM* mo e thaw la •� , <A y YUM—E3.1 PAINTS Site Number 305-634 09910-2 July,2008 SECTION 09910 PAINTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building code for flame spread/fuel contribution/smoke development rating requirements for finishes. B. Comply with applicable city,county,state, and federal requirements and ordinances regarding maximum VOC(Volatile Organic Compound)content of coatings. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. B. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name,type of paint,brand name, brand code, coverage,surface preparation, drying time, cleanup,color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the ranges required by paint manufacturer. B. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before,during,and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow,or when relative humidity is above 75 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior;unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.4 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not store paints,oils,thinners and other flammable items inside the building. Store in approved containers when not in actual use during painting. Keep fire hazard at a minimum. B. Take precaution to protect public and construction workers during progress of work. C. Furnish a temporary fire extinguisher of suitable chemicals and capacity, located near flammable materials. 1.5 SUBMITTALS z � PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore Paints, Montvale, NJ. YUM—E3.1 PAINTS Site Number 305-634 09910-1 July,2008 SECTION 09775 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm with minimum three years experience specializing in manufacturer of glass reinforced panels. B. Installer: Approved by manufacturer and having successfully completed five projects of similar scope and complexity. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following: 1. Kemlite. 2. Lasco. 3. Marlite. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Fire Resistance Rating per ASTM E-84: 1. Flame Spread: Class A. 2. Smoke Developed: 200. B. Physical characteristics: 1. Flexural strength: 15,000 psi. 2. Tensile strength: 9,000 psi. C. U.S.D.A.approved. D. Thickness: 1/8",minimum,weighing 1-1/2 Ibs/sq.ft. E. Color: White. F. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer. G. Accessories: Batten strips and related items as required and as recommended by manufacturer. H. Acceptable Product: Refer to finish legend on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Fasten or adhere for tight connections and joints. 3.3 CLEANING A. Perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01740. END OF SECTION e' YUM E3.1 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS Site Number 305-634 09775-1 July,2008 SECTION 09650 VCT TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, Premium VCT A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Finish Schedule on Drawings. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Dt 100, 110,940 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates. B. Wet down or wash dry,dusty surfaces and remove excess water immediately prior to application of tiles. C. Prepare surfaces in strict accordance with instructions of manufacturer whose setting materials or additives are being used. +, 3.2 INSTALLATION A. VCT Installation,General 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and applicable regulations. 3.3 CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean finish surfaces. Finish and protect per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 72 hours after installation. B. Where temporary use of new floors is unavoidable,supply large,flat boards or plywood panels for walkways over Kraft paper. C. Protect work so that it will be without any evidence of damage or use at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 VCT TILE Site Number 305-634 09650-1 July,2008 3.3 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them. B. Provide protection of installed leveler from dust,dirt, precipitation,and freezing. C. Provide protection of installed waterproofing, primer and finish from dust,dirt, precipitation,freezing and continuous high humidity until fully dry. PART 4 MANUFACTURER'S DETAILS 4.1 Refer to(insert)attached .PDF interior stucco wall covering detail. A. STO_40.XX END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 TEXTURED WALL FINISH SYSTEM over INTERIOR MASONRY Site Number 305-634 09540-4 January,2008 I. Attach penetrations through finish to structural support and provide watertight seal at penetrations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Sto Corp. Contact:Sto Strategic Accounts 1-888-STO-EIFS(888-786-3437) B. Provide mesh, primer,textured wall finish,leveling,and resurfacing materials from single source manufacturer. 2.2 FABRIC REINFORCEMENT(optional component) A. Sto Mesh—nominal 4.5 oz/yd2(153 g/m2),symmetrical, interlaced open-weave glass fiber fabric made with minimum 20 percent by weight alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials. 2.3 LEVELER(select one,depending on substrate condition) A. Sto Leveler—fiber reinforced polymer modified cement based leveler for patching and resurfacing concrete and masonry surfaces(1/4"or up '/Z"applied in two coats). B. Sto BTS-Plus—polymer modified cement based leveler for resurfacing concrete and masonry surfaces(up to 1/8"in two coats). 2.4 JOB MIXED INGREDIENTS A. Water—clean and potable. B. Portland cement—in compliance with ASTM C 150,Type I. 2.5 PRIMER(optional component) A. Sto 801 Primer or Sto 804 Primer-acrylic based tinted primer. Note: priming is recommended to provide uniform substrate absorption and finish color,to improve adhesion and water resistance,and to retard efflorescence. Priming is required over waterproofing and for Sto Decocoat and Sto Granitex finishes.) 2.6 FINISH A. Sto acrylic based textured wall finish with graded marble aggregate. Texture: Sto Fine Sand Finish PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD SUPPORT SERVICES A. Upon request and with prior notification(2 weeks minimum),STO Field Representative and/or STO Distributor Personnel will make themselves available to attend Pre- Construction Conference and conduct periodic on-site Installation Observations. B. Contact: Sto Strategic Accounts @ 1-888-STO-EIFS or(888-786-3437)and/or www.stocorp.com for a list of STO Distributor contact names. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install textured wall finish system in compliance with manufacturer's published instructions. YUM–E3.1 TEXTURED WALL FINISH SYSTEM over INTERIOR MASONRY Site Number 305-634 09540-3 January,2008 5. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job site to install the finish system in compliance with STD's published specifications and details and the project plans and specifications. C. Provide Feld sample, minimum 10'x 10'(3 x 3 m)of textured wall finish system as reference standard. D. Inspections: 1. Provide independent third party inspection where required by code or contract documents. 2. Conduct inspections in accordance with code requirements and contract documents. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name and identification of product. B. Protect finishes(pail products)from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90°F (32°C). Store away from the direct sunlight. C. Protect Portland cement based materials(bag products)from moisture and humidity. Store under cover and off the ground in a dry location. 1.5 COORDINATION/SCHEDULING The work in this section requires close coordination with related sections and trades. Sequence work to provide protection of construction materials from weather deterioration A. Provide minimum 28 day cure of concrete,concrete masonry units, brick and stucco before the installation of finish system. B. For load bearing concrete masonry and stud wall assemblies,commence the finish system installation after completion of all floor, roof construction and other construction that imposes dead loads on the walls to prevent excessive deflection(and potential cracking)of the substrate. C. Sequence interior work such as drywall installation prior to finish installation to prevent stud distortion (and potential cracking)of stucco substrates. D. Provide site grading such that the finish terminates above grade or finished grade a minimum of 8 inches(203 mm)or as required by code. E. Provide protection of rough openings before installing windows,doors, and other penetrations through the wall and provide sill flashing. Coordinate installation of wall assembly moisture barrier with windows and doors to provide weatherproofing of the structure and to prevent moisture infiltration and excess air infiltration. F. Install window and door head flashing immediately after windows and doors are installed. G. Install diverter flashings wherever water can enter the wall assembly to direct water to the exterior. H. Install copings and sealant immediately after installation of the finish and when finish is dry. YUM—E3.1 TEXTURED WALL FINISH SYSTEM over INTERIOR MASONRY Site Number 305-634 09540-2 January,2008 took SECTION 09540 TEXTURED WALL FINISH SYSTEM over INTERIOR MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Materials and installation of textured wall finish system for exterior wall surfaces. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Joints: 1. Indicate location of joints and joint type on architectural drawings. 2. Provide appropriate sealant at joints and terminations of finish with adjoining construction or dissimilar materials. 3. Prevent application of finish over isolation,expansion,cold or control joints in construction. 4. Prevent application of finish along inside edges of joint. Apply to outside face of wall only. B Substrates: 1 Provide surface plane tolerance not to exceed%inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3m). Provide for repair of surface defects and leveling or resurfacing of surfaces that do not meet required tolerances. 2. Concrete—prevent the use of form oil,curing compounds or other bond breakers that inhibit bond to the surface or provide for their removal. 3. Concrete Masonry—provide open texture concrete masonry units with flush joints. 4. Brick—provide absorbent brick with flush joints. 5. Portland Cement Plaster/Stucco—provide installation in conformance with ASTM C 926(except omit finish installation and follow this specification). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer requirements 1. Textured wall finish system manufacturer for a minimum of twenty(20)years. 2. Manufacturing facilities ISO 9002 certified. 3. Single source manufacturer of surface repair/leveler materials,waterproofing and textured wall finish. B. Contractor requirements 1. Licensed,insured and engaged in application of textured wall finishes for a minimum of three(3)years. 2. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of Sto materials. 3. Employ skilled mechanics who are experienced and knowledgeable in textured wall finish application,and familiar with the requirements of the specified work. 4. Successful completion of minimum three(3)projects of similar size and complexity to the specified project. YUM-E3.1 TEXTURED WALL FINISH SYSTEM over INTERIOR MASONRY Site Number 305-634 09540-1 January,2008 K. Lateral Bracing: Provide four 12 gage wires at 90 degrees as indicated on Drawings; minimum 12 feet on center where required for seismic loading conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION-ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustic units in place,free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to shortest room axis. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane,and free from twist,warp and dents. F. Cut panels to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. G. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 feet of an exterior door. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND PATCHING A. Replace damaged members of exposed suspension system. Replace ceiling board and panel that is damaged, installed improperly, or shows visible signs of sagging. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Site Number 305-634 09515-3 July,2008 AWAk 2. Celotex Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.4 VINYL COATED UNIT MATERIALS A. Vinyl Panels: Conforming to the following: 1. Size: Refer to finish schedule on Drawings. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inches. 3. Composition: Refer to finish legend on Drawings. 4. Edge: Square. 5. Surface Color: Refer to drawings, sheet A7.2 Finish Schedule for color. 6. Acceptable Products Refer to finish schedule on Drawings. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Wire: Minimum 12 gage,galvanized,self-annealed, mild steel wire. B. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. Refer to drawings, sheet A7.2 Finish Schedule for color. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION -LAY-IN GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C 636, manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this Section,to produce a ceiling true to lines and levels,free from warp and soiled or damaged grid or panels. B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. C. Install after major above ceiling work is complete.Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. D. Hang system independent of walls,columns,ducts, pipes and conduit. Hang wires directly from structure, not from fireproofing,fireproofing suspension members, bridging or roof decks. Locate first hanger 6 inches from wall and space 48 inches along carrying channel. Where carrying members are spliced,avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. F. Center system on room axis leaving equal border units, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Do not leave panels less than 1/2 length or width. G. Do not support fixtures or other components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner;or support components independently. H. Do not eccentrically load system,or produce rotation of runners. I. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Field rabbett panel edges.Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closers to match edge molding. Provide prefabricated radius edge moldings around radius wall corners. Use maximum lengths,straight,true to line,and level. J. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement. Maintain visual closure. YUM—E3.1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Site Number 305-634 09515-2 July,2008 SECTION 09515 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed,sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed,tested,and approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. C. Humidity: 20 to 40 percent prior to,during,and after installation. D. Temperature: 61 degrees F minimum, prior to,during,and after installation. 1.2 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide extra quantity of acoustic panel under provisions of Section 01780. B. Provide extra panels equal to 2 percent of total for each type used. C. Store in designated location as directed by Owner. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation with other trades and make provisions for their work to prevent cutting and patching. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS-SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. Chicago Metallic. 2. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. Armstrong World Industries. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. C. Products specified herein are those of USG Interiors as a standard of quality. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Standard Exposed Tee Grid 1. Intermediate duty system,complying with ASTM C 635, non-fire rated. 2. Commercial quality cold-rolled aluminum. 3. Components: Die cut and interlocking. 4. Exposed Grid Surface Width: 15/16 inch. 5. Cope cross runners to lay flush with main runners,except at edge moldings. 6. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Baked-on enamel,satin finish matching ceiling panel color. Refer to drawings,sheet A7.2 Finish Schedule for color. 7. Acceptable Product: USG Environmental ZXA. B. Grid Accessories: Stabilizer bars,furring clips, splices,edge moldings hold down clips and closure strips as necessary to complete and complement suspended ceiling grid system. 1. Components: Die-cut and interlocking. C. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel;size and type to suit application,to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS—VINYL COATED UNITS A. Acceptable Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries. YUM—E3.1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Site Number 305-634 09515-1 July,2008 8. Cut and fit tile at penetrations through tile. Do not damage visible surfaces. Carefully grind edges of tile abutting built-in items. Fit tile at outlets,piping and other penetrations so that plates,collars,or covers overlap tile. 9. Extend the work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures,to form complete covering without interruptions,except as otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions,edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 10. Accurately form intersections and returns. 11. Form internal angles coved and external angles bulinosed. C. Thin Set Method, Floors and Walls 1. Apply mortar or adhesive with notched trowel using scraping motion to work material into good contact with surface to be covered. Maintain 90 percent coverage on back of tile and fully bed corners. 2. Apply only as much mortar or adhesive as can be covered within allowable windows as recommended by mortar or adhesive manufacturer or while surface is still tacky. 3. When installing large tiles,ceramics or mosaics,trowel small quantity of mortar or adhesive onto back of each tile or sheet of tiles. 4. Set tiles in place and rub or beat with small beating block. 5. Beat or rap tile to ensure proper bond and also to level surface of tile. 6. Align the to show uniform joints and allow to set until firm. 7. Clean excess mortar or adhesive from surface of tile with wet cheese cloth(not a sponge)while mortar is fresh. 8. Allow face mounted tile to set until firm before removing paper and before grouting. 9. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding tiles. D. Grouting 1. Install in accordance with grout manufacturer's recommendations and ANSI Al 08.10. E. Control Joints and Other Sealant Usage 1. Install in accordance with TCA Installation Handbook. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean excess mortar from surface with water as work progresses. Perform cleaning while mortar is fresh and before it hardens on surfaces. B. Remove grout haze following recommendation of mortar additive manufacturer. Do not use acids for cleaning. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 72 hours after installation. B. Where temporary use of new floors is unavoidable,supply large,flat boards or plywood panels for walkways over Kraft paper. C. Protect work so that there is no evidence of damage or use at the time of acceptance. END OF SECTION a ` YUM—E3.1 TILE Site Number 305-634 09300-3 July,2008 2.7 GROUT A. Manufacturer: as scheduled B. Polymer-Modified Hydraulic Grout(for tile in areas other than"D"below): 1. Description: Latex-modified,containing a factory blended antimicrobial,sanded,grout consisting of Portland cement,and additives;comply with ANSI A118.6. 2. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule on Drawings. 3. Acceptable Products: a. Ultracolor Grout by MAPEI b. Custom Building products C. Approved Equal. C. Unsanded Latex-Modified Grout for Wall Tile(for the in areas other than"D"below): 1. Description: Latex-modified, containing a factory blended antimicrobial, non-sanded, grout consisting of portland cement and additives;comply with ANSI A118.6. 2. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule on Drawings. 3. Acceptable Products: a. Keracolor U Grout by MAPEI b. Custom Building Products C. Approved Equal. D. Epoxy Grout(quarry tile floors in kitchen and cooler): 1. Multi-component,factory prepared, 100 percent epoxy resin and hardener with sand or mineral filler material. 2. Comply with ANSI A118.3. 3. Colors: a. Floors: as scheduled. 4. Acceptable Products: a. Kerapoxy by MAPEI. b. Approved Equal. ""wk E. Refer to drawings, sheet A7.2 Finish Schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces in strict accordance with instructions of manufacturer whose setting materials or additives are being used. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Tile Installation,General 1. Install tile materials in accordance with ANSI A137.1,other referenced ANSI and TCA specifications,and TCA"Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation", except for more stringent requirements of manufacturer or these Specifications. B. Layout 1. Lay out work to pattern indicated so that full tile or joint is centered on each wall and no tile of less than half width need be used. Do not interrupt pattern through openings. Lay out tile to minimize cutting and to avoid tile less than half size. 2. For heights stated in feet and inches, use courses of full tile to produce nearest attainable heights without cutting tile. 3. No staggered joints will be permitted. 4. Align joints in tile in both directions. 5. Align joints between floor and base tile. 6. Make joints between sheets of tile exactly same width as joints within sheet. 7. File edges of cut tile smooth and even. YUM—E3.1 TILE Site Number 305-634 09300-2 July,2008 SECTION 09300 TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ANSI-Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile-A137.1. B. Conform to TCA Ceramic Tile: The Installation Handbook. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 CERAMIC TILE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to finish schedule on Drawings.. B. Ceramic Wall Tile: Refer to finish schedule on Drawings. 2.2 QUARRY TILE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to finish schedule on Drawings.. B. Acceptable Products: Refer to finish schedule on Drawings. 2.3 PORCELAIN TILE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Finish Schedule on Drawings.. B. Acceptable Products: Refer to Finish Schedule on Drawings. 2.4 TRIMMERS A. Provide necessary caps, stops, returns,trimmers and other shapes to complete installation. B. Color and finish to match wall tile or as indicated on drawings. 2.5 MORTAR AND ADHESIVE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein,provide products from one of the following manufacturers. 1. Custom Building Products, Seal Beach,CA. 2. MAPEI Corporation, San Bernardino,CA 3. Laticrete International, Inc., Bethany,CT. 4. Bostik, Middleton, MA. 2.6 MORTAR MATERIALS-THIN SET BEDS A. Latex Modified: 1. Description: Two component system;premium high strength mortar and Liquid Latex additive;complying with ANSI A118.4. 2. Acceptable Products: a. MAPEI Keracrete System consisting of Keracrete Crete mortar and Keralastic latex admixture. b. Approved Equal. B. Quick Setting Thin-Set Mortar: 1. Description: Fast setting, second generation,two-component mortar consisting of latex additive and mortar;comply with ANSI A118.4. Cures completely with no residual moisture in 24 hours. 2. Acceptable Products: a. MAPEI Grani/Rapid System consisting of Grani/Rapid powder and PRP318 latex additive. b. Approved Equal. YUM—E3.1 TILE Site Number 305-634 09300-1 July,2008 2. Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, mineral fiber insulation blankets without membrane facing. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine gypsum board panels for damage and existence of mold. Install undamaged panels B. Examine gypsum board in accordance with GA 231 for water damage. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with [ASTM C 840] [GA 216] 3.3 FINISHING A. General: Comply with[ASTM C 840] [GA 214 and GA 216] 1. Level 1: Plenums,service corridors;above ceilings '' 2. Level 2:Areas of water resistant gypsum backing board under tile;exposed areas where appearance is not critical. 3. Level 3: Areas to receive heavy or medium textured coatings; heavy-grade wa I Icoveri ngs. 4. Level 4:Areas to receive flat sheen paint finish;light textured coatings; lightweight wa Ilcoveri ngs. 5. Level 5: Areas to receive gloss, semi-gloss sheen paints; critical lighting conditions. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are damaged. END OF SECTION Gypsum Board 09 29 00-10 Project Name/Project Number/2-Jul-08 > 1. Tape: Comply with ASTM C 475 2. Joint Compound: Comply with ASTM C 475 x Jr � • axr` ,t11Tif_Lt11 (k>,I :,.�1'..EITitTI£L1CD„Ait`C�'+fly$(�1711jIF`i r. 1�•� .. G�l, 11,t1�`Eitl311S.�T�I,T��1'�te,.. i�s� �th�t�t `e`' teut�f Stl��a+ar less w'h a a�lated ac�ttliitg',,;ft A1od �. ... v��.�£�F �•� � % �'r'''k sail r �Yg t: � r E. Texture Finishes 1. Primer 2. Wall Texture: [Fine] [Medium] [Coarse] 3. Ceiling Texture: [Fine] [Medium] [Coarse] F. Sealant (Specifier Note: Sealants may be specified in this section or may be specified elsewhere in Division 07. EDIT paragraphs below dependent upon location of sealant specification.) 1. Refer to Section [07 92 00 Joint Sealants] [insert section number and title]. OR 2. Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, non- bleeding,gunnable type as recommended by panel manufacturer. G. Insulation (Specifier Note: Insulation may be specified in this section or may be specified in Division 09. EDIT paragraphs below dependent upon location of acoustical insulation specification.) 1. Refer to Section [09 81 00 Acoustic Insulation] [insert section number and title]. OR Project Name/Project Number/2-Jul-08 092900-9 Gypsum Board CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. B. Interior Ceiling Board 1. Regular Gypsum Ceiling Board: Gypsum Core panel with enhanced sag resistant core. Complying with ASTM C 1396. a. Basis of Design: Pro Roc' Interior Ceiling, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: 1/2 inch. C. Width: 48 inches. d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet] [14 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges:Tapered 2. Gypsum Ceiling Cove and Cornice: Profile molding for installation at wall/ceiling joint.Complying with ASTM C 1396. a. Basis of Design: Ceiling Decor Cove and Cornice, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. b. Thickness: [3/8 inch] [3/4 inch] C. Profile Width: [4-1/2 inch] [4-7/16 inch] d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges:Square 3. Gypsum Ceiling Step: Gypsum board used as base steps for application of ceiling wlAt� cove and cornice. a. Basis of Design: Ceiling Decor Steps, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: 1/2 inch C. Width: 4 inches d. Length:8 feet 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: Complying with ASTM C 1047. 1. Corner Bead 2. Casing Beads: [LC-Bead] [L-Bead] [U-Bead] 3. Control Joint B. Fasteners: 1. Screws: [ASTM C 954][ASTM C 1002]as recommended by panel manufacturer. 2. Nails: ASTM C 514 with heads, lengths, configurations, and finish as recommended by panel manufacturer. 3. Adhesive: Recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Treatment Gypsum Board 092900-8 Project Name/Project Number/2-Jul-08 2. Fire Rated Veneer Plaster Base: Gypsum core lathing panel with enhanced fire resistant core for use under veneer plaster finishes in Type X Designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396,Type X. a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Veneer Plaster Base Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. b. Thickness:5/8 inch. C. Width: 48 inches. d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: [Square][Tapered] 3. fire Rated Veneer Plaster Base: Gypsum core lathing panel with enhanced Type C fire resistant core for use under veneer plaster finishes in Type X Designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396,Type C. a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Veneer Plaster Base Type C, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. b. Thickness: 1/2 inch. C. Width: 48 inches. d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet][Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: [Square] [Tapered] 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD CEILING AND SOFFIT PANELS A. Exterior Soffit Board 1. Regular Exterior Soffit Board: Gypsum core soffit panel with sag resistant core. Complying with ASTM C 1396. a. Basis of Design: ProRoc®Exterior Soffit Board,manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: 1/2 inch. C. Width: 48 inches. d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet][Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges:Tapered 2. Fire Rated Exterior Soffit Board: Gypsum core soffit panel with enhanced fire and sag resistant core for use in fire resistive designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396, Type X. a. Basis of Design: Pro Roc' Exterior Soffit Board Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. b. Thickness:5/8 inch. C. Width: 48 inches. d. Length: [8 feet][12 feet][Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges:Tapered Project Name/Project Number/2-Jul-08 092900-7 Gypsum Board CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. D. High Performance Products 1. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with enhanced core to provide resistance to abuse.Complying with ASTM C 1396. a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Abuse Resistant, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: 1/2 inch C. Width:48 inches d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Tapered 2. Fire Rated Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with enhanced core to provide resistance to abuse for use in fire-resistive Type X designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396,Type X. a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Abuse Resistant Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: 5/8 inch C. Width:48 inches d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Tapered 3. Fire Rated Shaft Liner Gypsum Board: Gypsum core shaftwall panel with enhanced fire resistant core.Complying with ASTM C 1396 Type X. a. Basis of Design: Pro Roc" Shaftliner Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: 1 inch C. Width:24 inches d. Length: [8 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Modified Tapered E. Plaster Base Products 1. Regular Veneer Plaster Base: Gypsum core lathing panel with face paper for use under veneer plaster finishes. Complying with ASTM C 1396. a. Basis of Design: Pro Roc'Veneer Plaster Base, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: 1/2 inch. C. Width: 48 inches. d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: [Square] [Tapered] Gypsum Board 092900-6 Project Name/Project Number/2-Jul-08 ' "" 2. Fire Rated Water-Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with enhanced fire-resistance and water resistance core for use in fire-resistive Type X designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396,Type X. a. Basis of Design: Pro Roc' Moisture Resistant Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. b. Thickness: 5/8 inch C. Width:48 inches d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Tapered C. Specialty Products 1. Flexible Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with enhanced core to allow for flexibility;Complying with ASTM C 1396 a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® '/s" Flex, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: 1/4 inch C. Width:48 inches d. Length: [8 feet][12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Tapered 2. Gypsum Backer Board: Gypsum core panel for use as first layer in multi-layer applications or as base layer in ceilings for adhesive title applications. Complying with ASTM C 1396. a. Basis of Design: ProRoc' Backer Board, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. b. Thickness: 1/2 inch C. Width:48 inches d. Length: 18 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Square 3. Fire Rated Gypsum Backer Board: Gypsum core panel with enhanced fire-resistant core for use as first layer in multi-layer applications or as base layer in ceilings for adhesive title applications in Type X designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396,Type X. a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Backer Board Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. b. Thickness: 5/8 inch C. Width:48 inches d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [14 feet] [16 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Square Project Name/Project Number/2-Jul-08 092900-5 Gypsum Board CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. 40 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD WALL PANELS A. Standard Gypsum Board Products 1. Regular Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel solid set core enclosed in paper. Complying with ASTM C1396. a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Regular or Evenwall, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: [1/2 inch] [114 inch][3/8 inch] C. Width: [48 inches) [54 inches] [48 inches or 54 inches] d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints) e. Edges: [Square] [Rounded) [Tapered)[Evenwall) 2. Fire Rated Gypsum Board:Gypsum core panel with a specially formulated core for use in fire-resistive Type X designs. Complying with ASTM C 1396. a. Basis of Design: ProRoc® Type X or Evenwall Type X, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: 5/8 inch C. Width: [48 inches] [54 inches] [48 inches or 54 inches] d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: [Tapered] [Evenwall] 3. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel with a solid set,fire-resistive core for use in fire-resistive Type C designs. Complying with and ASTM C 1396. a. Basis of Design: Pro Roc' Type C, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: [1/2 inch] [5/8 inch] C. Width:48 inches d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Tapered B. Moisture Resistant Products 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board:Gypsum core panel with enhanced water resistant core for use behind tile in wet areas.Complying with ASTM C1396. a. Basis of Design: ProRoc®Moisture Resistant, manufactured by CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. b. Thickness: 1/2 inch C. Width:48 inches d. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet] [12 feet] [Use longest length available to avoid joints] e. Edges: Tapered Gypsum Board 092900-4 Project Name/Project Number/2-Jul-08 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Installer shall have experience with installation of gypsum board under similar conditions. B. Mock-ups: 1. Install mock-up using approved gypsum products, including fasteners and related accessories per manufacturer's current printed instructions and recommendations. a. Mock-up size:I 1 feet by 10 feet] [insert size]. b. Mockup for [[each] [designated] level of exposed gypsum board finish] AND/OR[[each] [designated] texture finish indicated] C. Mock-up Substrate:Match wall assembly construction. d. Mock-up may[not] remain as part of the work. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packages, indicating manufacturer and product name. B. Store gypsum in accordance with GA-238 and manufacturer recommendations. AWW 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. In accordance with ASTM C 840. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Specifier Note:Product Information is proprietary to CertainTeed Gypsum, inc.products.) 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design: CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.; 4300 West Cypress Street, Suite 500, Tampa,FL 33607; 1-800-233-8990(1-866-427-2872);www.certainteed.com B. Equivalent Design: Manufacturer with products of equivalent design may include, but are not limited to: 1. National Gypsum Company 2. USG Corporation Project Name/Project Number/2-Jul-08 092900-3 Gypsum Board CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. + B. Gypsum Association 1. GA-214- Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish 2. GA-216 -Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 3. GA-231 -Assessing Water damage to Gypsum Board 4. GA-238-Guidelines for the Prevention of Mold Growth on Gypsum Board 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section [01 33 00 Submittal Procedures] [insert section number and title]. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each component. C. Samples: 1. Board: Submit sample of each panel product specified, [6 inches square] [insert size]. 2. Trim: Submit sample of each type of trim specified, [12 inches long][insert size]. 3. Texture: Submit sample [12 inches square] [insert size]of textured coated gypsum board. D. Quality Assurance Submittals (Specifier Note: DELETE Design Data, Test Report submittal requirements when propriety .01` specification is used and can be held. MAINTAIN Design Data, Test Report submittal requirement when other products may be submitted as substitution.) 1. Design Data,Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions. E. Closeout Submittals 1 Refer to Section [01 78 00 Closeout Submittals] [insert section number and title]. aw .; Formatted:Bullets and Numbering hw Gypsum Board 092900-2 Project Name/Project Number/2-Jul-08 A"JA! (Specifier Note: The purpose of this guide specification is to assist the specifier in correctly speci- fying gypsum board products and installation. The specifier needs to edit the guide specifications to fit the needs of specific projects. Contact a CertainTeed Product Representative to assist in making the appropriate product selections. Throughout the guide specification, there are Specifier notes to assist in the editing of the file. The term Architect is used throughout these guide specifi- cations, as a guide and may be edited to read "Design Professional", "Engineer", "Owner" or other appropriate designation as required for specific project. References have been made within the text of the specification to MasterFormat 2004 Section numbers and titles, specifier need to coordinate this numbers and titles with sections included for the specific project. Brackets(]; "ANDIOR"; and "OR"have been used to indicate when a selec- tion is required.) SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gypsum board wall panels B. Gypsum Board soffit and ceiling panels C. Accessories and Trim 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM C 475-Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 2. ASTM C 514-Standard Specifications for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board. 3. ASTM C 665 -Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing 4. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 5. ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. to 0.112 in.in Thickness 6. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs 7. ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base 8. ASTM C 1396-Standard Specification for Gypsum Board Project Name/Project Number/2-Jul-08 092900-1 Gypsum Board CertainTeed Gypsum,Inc. OPW 2.07 PRIMER(select one) A. Sto 801 Or 804 Primer—an acrylic based tinted primer. B. Sto 805 Hot Prime—an acrylic based primer/sealer 2.08 FINISH COAT A. Sto acrylic based textured wall finish with dirt pick-up resistance technology Texture: Sto Fine Sand Finish. NOTE: For hairline crack-bridging capabilities, it is recommended that an elastomeric textured finish be used(ex.Sto Powerwall Finish or Sto PowerFlex Finish) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD SUPPORT SERVICES A. Upon request and with prior notification(2 weeks minimum), STO Field Representative and/or STO Distributor Personnel will make themselves available to attend Pre- Construction Conference and conduct periodic on-site Installation Observations. B. Contact: Sto Strategic Accounts @ 1-888-STO-EIFS or(888-786-3437)and/or www.stocorp.com for a list of STO Distributor contact names. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install stucco in conformance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them. B. Provide protection of installed stucco from dust, dirt, precipitation,and freezing. C. Provide protection of installed primer and finish from dust,dirt, precipitation,freezing and continuous high humidity until fully dry. PART 4 MANUFACTURER'S DETAILS 4.1 Refer to(insert)attached .PDF exterior stucco wall covering details. A. STO 6.00 Stucco on Exterior Masonry B. STO 6.70 Stucco on Exterior Masonry Accent END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 FIBER REINFORCED PORTAND CEMENT PLASTER—STUCCO over EXTERIOR MASONRY Site Number 305-634 09220-5 July,2008 2.2 SURFACE PREPARATION (optional component,depending on substrate condition) A. Sto Bonding Agent--acrylic bonding agent for brush or roller application to prepared CMU surfaces. 2.3 ACCESSORIES(supplied by others,select one type) A. Weep screed,casing bead,corner bead,corner lath, expansion and control joint accessories. All accessories shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1063 and its referenced documents: 1. PVC plastic in compliance with ASTM D 1784, cell classification 13244C. 2. Zinc in compliance with ASTM B 69. B. All accessories shall have perforated or expanded flanges and shall be designed with grounds for the specified thickness of stucco. 2.4 JOB MIXED INGREDIENTS A. Water—clean and potable. B. Clean,well graded sand free of deleterious materials in compliance with ASTM C 897. C. Stucco Admixture(optional) 1. Sto Bonding Agent-acrylic admixture for Sto Powerwalle Stucco. 2.5 STUCCO Sto Powerwalle Stucco—factory proportioned,fiber reinforced Portland cement based stucco for trowel or pump application,field mixed with graded sand(ASTM C 897)and water. Apply in one to two coats up to'/"thickness or apply in 2 coats(scratch and brown coat)up to a maximum of 5/8"thickness. 2.6 FOAM ACCENT BUILD-OUTS A. Adhesive 1. Sto Primer Adhesive B-one component, polymer modified,cement based adhesive. B. Insulation Board 1. Sto EPS Insulation Board--nominal 1.0 Ib/ft3(16 kg/m3) Expanded Polystyrene(EPS) Insulation Board in compliance with ASTM C 578 Type I requirements,and EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene(EPS) Insulation Board. (Note: minimum required thickness is 1 inch[25 mm]and maximum allowable thickness is typically 4 inches[100 mm]for noncombustible type construction unless thicker dimensions are approved by the code official). C. Reinforcing Mesh(select one): 1. Sto Mesh--nominal 4.5 oz./yd 2(153 g/m2),symmetrical, interlaced open-weave glass fiber fabric made with minimum 20 percent by weight alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials(achieves Standard Impact Classification). 2. Sto Detail Mesh--nominal 4.2 oz/yd2(143 g/m2),flexible, symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber fabric,with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials (used for standard EIFS back wrapping and aesthetic detailing). D. Base Coats(select one or both): Sto Primer Adhesive B-one-component polymer modified cement based, base coat with less than 33 percent Portland cement content by weight. Sto Flexyl—fiber reinforced acrylic based waterproof base coat mixed with Portland Cement(for use as a waterproof base coat to waterproof foundations, parapets, splash areas,trim and other projecting architectural features). YUM–E3.1 FIBER REINFORCED PORTAND CEMENT PLASTER–STUCCO over EXTERIOR MASONRY Site Number 305-634 09220-4 July,2008 4. For applications over metal lath and sheathing, consult with system manufacturer for recommendations. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name and identification of product. B. Protect coatings(pail products)from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90°F (32°C). Store away from direct sunlight. C. Protect Portland cement based materials(bag products)from moisture and humidity. Store under cover off the ground in a dry location. 1.4 COORDINATION/SCHEDULING A. Provide minimum 28 day cure of concrete and concrete masonry units before the installation of stucco. B. For load bearing concrete masonry and stud wall assemblies,commence the stucco installation after completion of all floor, roof construction and other construction that imposes dead loads on the walls to prevent excessive deflection (and potential cracking) of the stucco. C. Sequence interior work such as drywall installation prior to stucco installation to prevent stud distortion (and potential cracking)of the stucco. D. Provide site grading such that the stucco terminates above earth grade minimum 4 inches (100 mm)and above finished grade(pavers/sidewalk) minimum 2 inches(51 mm). Provide increased clearance in freezefthaw climate zones. E. Provide protection of rough openings before installing windows,doors,and other penetrations through the wall and provide sill flashing. Coordinate installation of moisture barrier with window and door installation to provide weather proofing of the structure and to prevent moisture infiltration and excess air infiltration. F. Install window and door head flashing immediately after windows and doors are installed. G. Install diverter flashings wherever water can enter the wall assembly to direct water to the exterior. H. Install copings and sealant immediately after installation of the stucco and when finish coatings are dry. I. Attach penetrations through stucco to structural support and provide water tight seal at penetrations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Sto Corp. Contact:Sto Strategic Accounts 1-888-STO-EIFS(888-786-3437) B. Provide stucco, primer and finish from single source manufacturer. YUM—E3.1 FIBER REINFORCED PORTAND CEMENT PLASTER—STUCCO over EXTERIOR MASONRY Site Number 305-634 09220-3 July,2008 ."" 3. Do not use EPS foam on weather exposed projecting ledges,sills,or other projecting features unless supported by framing or other structural support and protected with metal coping or flashing. Refer to Sto details. E. JOINTS 1. Provide two piece expansion joints in the stucco system where building movement is anticipated: at joints in the substrate or supporting construction,where the system is to be installed over dissimilar construction or substrates,at changes in building height, at floor lines, at columns and cantilevered areas. On solid substrates without metal lath such as cast-in-place concrete and concrete masonry units provided joints in the supporting construction exist at appropriate intervals and they are reflected in the stucco. In such cases joint spacing in the stucco shall not exceed 250 ft2. 2. Provide one piece expansion joints at through wall penetrations,for example, above and below doors or windows. 3. Provide two piece expansion joints in the stucco system where building movement is anticipated:at joints in the substrate or supporting construction,where the system is to be installed over dissimilar construction or substrates,at changes in building height, at floor lines, at columns and cantilevered areas. On solid substrates without metal lath such as cast-in-place concrete and concrete masonry units provided joints in the supporting construction exist at appropriate intervals and they are reflected in the stucco. In such cases joint spacing in the stucco shall not exceed 250 ft2. 4. Provide minimum 3/8 inch(9 mm)wide joints where the system abuts windows, doors and other through wall penetrations. 5. Provide appropriate accessories at stucco terminations and joints. 6. Provide appropriate sealant at stucco terminations. 7. Indicate location of joints,accessories and accessory type on architectural drawings. F. FIRE PROTECTION 1. Do not use foam trim in excess of 4 inches(100 mm)thick unless approved by the Code Official on buildings of noncombustible construction. 2. Refer to the applicable code compliance report for other limitations and fire-resistive assemblies that may apply. G. SOLID SUBSTRATES 1. Provide surface plane tolerance not to exceed%inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3.0 m). 2. Concrete—prevent the use of form oil,curing compounds or other bond breakers that inhibit bond to the surface or provide for their removal. 3. Concrete Masonry—provide open texture concrete masonry units with flush joints. H. STUCCO THICKNESS: General 1. Direct Application to Concrete or Concrete Masonry:stucco thickness shall be applied at'/inch thick in one or two coats. Shall not exceed 5/8 inch applied in a minimum two coat(scratch&brown coat)application. 3. Thickness shall be uniform throughout the wall area. YUM-E3.1 FIBER REINFORCED PORTAND CEMENT PLASTER-STUCCO over EXTERIOR MASONRY Site Number 305-634 09220-2 July,2008 SECTION 09220 FIBER REINFORCED PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER/STUCCO over EXTERIOR MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Materials and installation of exterior stucco wall covering. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Structural(wind and axial loads) 1. Design for maximum allowable deflection, normal to the plane of the wall,of U360 2. Design for wind load in conformance with code requirements. Consult applicable code compliance report. B. MOISTURE CONTROL 1. Prevent the accumulation of water into or behind the stucco,either by condensation or leakage into the wall construction, in the design and detailing of the wall assembly: a. Provide corrosion resistant flashing to direct water to the exterior where it is likely to penetrate components in the wall assembly,including,above window and door heads, beneath window and door sills,at roof/wall intersections,decks, abutments of lower walls with higher walls,above projecting features,and at the base of the wall. b. Protect sills of rough openings with barrier membrane. Where casing bead is used back-to-back at expansion joints, back the joints with barrier membrane. Refer to Sto details. C. GRADE CONDITION 1. Do not specify the stucco for use below grade or on surfaces subject to continuous or intermittent water immersion or hydrostatic pressure. Provide minimum 4 inch(100 mm)clearance above earth grade, minimum 2 inch(51 mm)clearance above finished grade(pavers/sidewalk). Provide increased clearance in freeze/thaw climate zones. D. SLOPED SURFACES:including Foam Trim and Projecting Architectural Features attached to stucco. 1. Avoid the use of stucco on build-outs or weather exposed sloped and horizontal surfaces(refer to 2 and 3 below). 2. Build out trim and projecting architectural features from the stucco wall surface with code compliant EPS foam. All foam trim and projecting architectural features must have a minimum 1:2[271]slope along their top surface.All foam horizontal reveals must have a minimum 1:2[270]slope along their bottom surface. Increase slope for northern climates to prevent accumulation of ice/snow and water on surface.Where trim/feature or bottom surface of reveal projects more than 2 inches(51 mm)from the face of the wall plane, protect the top surface with waterproof base coat. Avoid the use of trim and features that exceed the maximum allowable thickness of EPS permitted by code(typically 4 inches[100 mm])unless approved by the code official. Periodic inspections and increased maintenance may be required to maintain surface integrity of finishes on weather exposed sloped surfaces. Limit projecting features to easily accessible areas and limit total area to facilitate maintenance and minimize maintenance burden. Refer to Sto details. YUM—E3.1 FIBER REINFORCED PORTAND CEMENT PLASTER—STUCCO over EXTERIOR MASONRY Site Number 305-634 09220-1 July,2008 3.3 INTERIOR DRY METHOD-TAPE AND TAPE A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops,projecting 1/16 inch above sightline. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. C. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane. D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of pane in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape. 3.4 EXTERIOR DRY METHOD-PREFORMED GLAZING A. Cut glazing spline to length; install on glass pane. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. C. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane. D. Install removable stops without displacement of glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. E. Trim protruding tape edge 3.5 CLEANING/PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an"X"by using plastic tape or removable paste. B. Clean all surfaces of glazing materials,mortar, plaster, paint and other soiling or contaminates. C. Remove labels after work is completed. D. Wash and Polish both faces not more than one week prior to Owners acceptance of work. E. Replace broken,scratched,chipped,or otherwise damaged glass. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 GLAZING Site Number 305-634 08800-3 July,2008 5. Air Space: Interpane space purged dry air. 6. Total Unit Thickness: 1 inch minimum(5/8-3/4 inch thickness when glazed into pre- glazed wood windows). 7. Note: Provide tinted outer light as approved by Owner's Representative and as required to meet local code requirements for shading coefficient and solar heat gain requirements. D. Glass Type GL-4-Spandrel Glass Unit: 1. Same type as vision glass,ASTM C 1048,fully tempered, 1/4 inch thick,with ceramic frit or black opacifier on back side,dark bronze color as selected by Owner's Representative. E. Glass Type GL-5—Insulated Spandrel Glass Unit: 1. Insulated glass unit,total thickness of 1 inch,exterior pane of Type GL-4. 2.4 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Glazing Compound: FS TT-G-410;grey color. B. Butyl Sealant: FS TT-S-001657; Shore A hardness of 10-20; black color; non-skinning. C. Silicone Sealant: FS TT-S-1543;Class A single component;solvent curing;capable of water immersion without loss of properties;cured Shore A hardness of 5;color as selected by Owner's Representative. 1. Acceptable Products: a. 2001 Ultraclear Silicone Sealant by Dow Corning. b. 795 by Dow Corning. C. SCS 1201 by General Electric. d. Progtaze by Tremco. 2.5 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene;70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness;4 inch long by 3/8 inch wide by 1/4 high. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene;50 Shore A durometer hardness;3 inch long by 1/4 inch wide by 1/4 inch thick; self adhesive one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness;coiled on release paper; black color. 1. Acceptable Product: Tremco 440. D. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinylchloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot, meeting ASTM D 1667. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. F. Setting Angles: 0.060 inch aluminum z-clips on T-angles sized as required. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Carefully measure glass openings and provide minimum required tolerances and clearances. 3.2 GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturers'recommended installation procedures and as outlined herein. B. Prevent nicks, abrasions and other damage likely to develop stress on edges. C. Comply with CPSC and MSGC for provisions of tempering of glass in and near doors and adjacent to walking surfaces, unless local codes are more stringent. YUM—E3.1 GLAZING Site Number 305-634 08800-2 July,2008 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with applicable code as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 330 unless indicated otherwise. B. Limit glass deflection to 1/175 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual. 1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop Drawings. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide 10 year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01780. B. Warranty: Include coverage for 1. Delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same. 2. Seal failure of insulated glass units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. PPG Certified Fabricator. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 GENERAL A. Heat strengthened or temper glass lights as required by code and as recommended by manufacturer complying with ASTM C 1048 and ANSI Z97.1. B. Temper units without tong marks. C. Glass unit thicknesses are indicated as minimums,to be increased as required by wind loading and spans encountered. Glass manufacturer to prepare loading and span calculations to document thickness of glass. 2.3 GLASS MATERIALS A. Glass Type GL-1 -Float Glass: 1. ASTM C 1036,glazing select quality. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch minimum. B. Glass Type GL-2-Safety Glass: 1. ASTM C 1048,glazing select quality; Kind FT,fully tempered. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch minimum. C. Glass Type GL-3-Insulated Glass Units: 1. Meeting Class A requirements of ASTM E 774 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 773. 2. Double pane with glass elastomer edge seal. 3. Outer Pane: 1/4 inch thick minimum glass. 4. Inner Pane: 1/4 inch thick minimum glass. YUM—E3.1 GLAZING Site Number 305-634 08800-1 July,2008 PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware plumb, level, and true to line in accordance with manufacturer's templates, Section 01600,and Project conditions. B. Install fire rated hardware in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Where cutting and fitting is required on substrates to be field painted or similarly finished, install,fit,remove and store hardware prior to finishing. Reinstall hardware after finishing operations are completed. D. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. E. Reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for installation and operation. F. For substrates which are not factory prepared for hardware: 1. Mortise work to correct size and location without gouging, splintering or causing irregularities in exposed finish work. 2. Fit faces of mortised components snug and flush without excessive clearance. G. Set thresholds at exterior doors in bed of sealant. Remove excess sealant. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Check and adjust each operating hardware item to ensure correct operation and function. B. Ensure weatherstripping and seals do not inhibit closing and positive latching of door. C. Lubricate moving or operating components as recommended by hardware manufacturer. Use graphite type lubrication if none other is recommended. D. Replace defective materials or units which cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Reinstall items found improperly installed. E. Prior to date of Substantial Completion, readjust and relubricate hardware items as necessary. 3.3 SCHEDULE—Refer to Drawings low'? END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 DOOR HARDWARE Site Number 305-634 08710-4 July,2008 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Drawings. B. Lock Guards: Prime coated steel,equivalent to Ives 184. C. Silencers: 1. Type: Preformed neoprene or rubber. 2. Location and quantities: a. Pairs of Doors: Two at header. b. Single Doors: Three at strike jamb. C. Weatherstripped Doors: Not required. 2.8 WEATHERSTRIPPING,SEALS AND THRESHOLDS A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Refer to Drawings. B. Thresholds: 1. Type: Extruded aluminum. 2. Size: 5 inch width, 1/2 inch height. C. Weatherstripping: 1. Type: Extruded aluminum with neoprene bulb. D. Sweep Strips: 1. Type: Extruded aluminum with neoprene seal. E. Door Bottom Seals: 1. Type: Extruded aluminum housing with polyurethane seal. F. Rain Drips: 1. Type: Extruded aluminum. G. Astragals: 1. Type: Steel, prime coated. 2.9 DOOR STOPS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Drawings. B. Provide door stops at each door leaf,except not required at doors equipped with overhead stops/holders,or doors equipped with closers having deadstop feature. C. Door stops consist of floor stops or wall stops to prevent doors from striking building components or equipment. D. Wall Stops: 1. Equipped with expandable anchor for use at gypsum board/stud or wth machine screw and expansion shield for use at concrete or masonry walls. E. Floor Stops: 1. Equip with machine screw and expansion shield,and appropriate riser where scheduled for areas indicated to receive carpet or thresholds. 2.10 KEYING A. Door Locks: Keyed, master-keyed,and grand master-keyed as directed by Owner's Representative with control keying for core removable cylinders. B. Supply 2 keys for each lock. C. Provide bitting list locks. D. Supply keys in the following quantities: 1. 10 master keys. 2. 10 construction keys. 2.11 FINISHES A. Finishes: 1. US32D,brushed stainless steel, unless noted otherwise in schedule. ew YUM—E3.1 DOOR HARDWARE Site Number 305-634 08710-3 July,2008 ANWA 4. Adjustable spring power allowing adjustment up to 50 percent in field to suit individual door conditions. 5. Adjustable backcheck for interior and exterior units. 6. Maximum operating force of 8.5 pounds or exterior doors, 5 pounds for interior doors, and 15 pounds for label doors. 7. Size as recommended by manufacturer for door size and weight. 8. Hold open and deadstop features where indicated in Hardware Sets. 9. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard full size non-metallic cover. 10. Furnish with necessary arms,tracks, brackets, plates,shoes,and other accessories to suit door and frame conditions. 11. Finish accessories to match cover. 2.5 HINGES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Drawings. B. Butt Hinges: 1. Comply with ANSI A156.1 and A156.7. 2. Five knuckle design with square corners. 3. Full mortise type. 4. Flat button tip and matching plug. 5. Non-removable pins for out-swinging exterior doors and for interior reverse bevel doors equipped with locking device;safety stud also acceptable. Non-rising pin for other doors. 6. Non-ferrous construction at locations exposed to exterior atmosphere. 7. Heavy weight for doors 3'-4"width and over and for fire rated doors over 8'-0"height. Standard weight at other doors. 8. Anti-friction or ball bearing type for doors equipped with closers. 9. Anti-friction or ball bearing type for doors(3'-0")width and over which are not equipped with closers. 10. Plain bearing type for doors less than 3'-0"width which are not equipped with closers. C. Minimum Number Hinges: 1. Doors 5-0"or less in height: One pair. 2. Doors over 5-0"and not over 7'-6": 1-1/2 pair. 3. Doors over 7'-6": One for each additional 7-6"height or fraction thereof. 4. Dutch doors: 2 pair. D. Minimum Size and Gage: 1. Doors 3'-0"width or less:4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inches, 0.134 gage 2. Doors over 3'-0"up to 3'-4):5 by 4-1/2 inches,0.146 gage. 3. Doors over 3'-4": 5 by 4-1/2 inches,0.190 gage. 4. Fire rated doors over 8'-0"height: Sized as indicated above,except not less than 0.180 gage. 2.6 PUSH/PULL TRIM AND PLATES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Drawings. B. Pulls and Push Plates: 1. Acceptable Product: Refer to Drawings. C. Protection Plates: 1. Type: Stainless steel,square corner design,0.050 inch thickness. 2. Size: When mounted on push side of door, 1 inch less than door width at pair of doors and 2 inches less than door width at single doors. When mounted on pull side of door, 1 inch less than door width. 3. Kick Plates: Beveled 3 edges, 12 inch height unless indicated otherwise in Hardware Sets. 4. Armor Plates: Beveled 3 edges,42 inch height unless indicated otherwise in Hardware Sets. 5. Mop Plates: Beveled 3 edges,4 inch height. ..04y YUM-E3.1 DOOR HARDWARE Site Number 305-634 08710-2 July,2008 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 2 years experience,with AHC designation. B. Hardware Installer: Employ a qualified carpentry person to perform the work of this Section. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. B. Comply with provisions of Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines(ADAAG), ANSI A117.1,and applicable state and local requirements for accessibility,whichever is most stringent,to accommodate handicapped persons. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide hardware complete with necessary screws, bolts,anchors or other fastenings for proper application of suitable size and type,and match hardware as to materials and finish. 2.2 CYLINDERS A. Provide cylinders for locksets, deadlocks, exit devices, and other control and locking devices indicated in Hardware Sets. B. Equip cylinders with appropriate rings. C. Finish cylinders and rings to match trim. 2.3 LOCKING AND LATCHING DEVICES 1. Manufacturers: Refer to Drawings and Scope of Work. 2. Bored Locksets and Latchsets: ANSI Al 56.13,Grade 2. 3. Acceptable Products: Refer to Drawings. 4. Backset:2-3/4 inches. 5. Latch Bolt: Two piece anti-friction, 3/4 inch throw. 6. Strike: ANSI standard 4-7/8 inch height, 1-1/4 inch curved lip. 7. Trim lever and rose: Refer to schedule at end of section. 2.3 EXIT DEVICES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Drawings. B. Basis for Design;Acceptable Products: Refer to Drawings. C. Standards: ANSI A156.3,Grade 1. D. UL listed for"Fire Exit Hardware"at labeled assemblies. E. Touch Bar: Modern design,recessed to provide proper clearance at door openings,full width of door. F. Dogging Feature: Equip for keyed cylinder at non-label assemblies. 2.4 SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Drawings. B. Acceptable Products: Refer to Drawings. C. Standard: ANSI A156.4,Grade 1. D. Required Features: Manufacturer's standard cast iron or cast aluminum construction. 1. Regular or parallel arm mounting. 2. Rack and pinion construction with compression spring,fully hydraulic. 3. Closing speed and latching speed controlled by independently operated valves. e YUM—E3.1 DOOR HARDWARE Site Number 305-634 08710-1 July,2008 S21 =SolaMaster Series Solatube 21-C (21 in/530 mm Daylighting System) Suspended Ceiling DA= Dome Acrylic FCM=Curb Mounted Flashing (Curb By Others) L1 =OptiView Diffuser SS=Secondary Diffuser YUM—E3.1 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 08625-6 July,2008 '00K 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. After installation of first unit,field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water test in presence of Owner,Architect, or Contractor,or their designated representative. Correct if needed before proceeding with installation of subsequent units. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 08625-5 July,2008 A injection molded high impact PVC;to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture out of tubing. 5. Dome Seal: Polypropylene Fiber Pile weatherstrip 0.27 inch (6.85mm) by 0.27 inch (6.85mm). 6. Reflective Tube: Aluminum sheet,thickness 0.018 inch (0.5 mm). a. Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity high reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface.Visible spectrum(400 nm to 760 nm)greater than 99 percent. Total solar spectrum(400 nm to 2500 nm) less than 93 percent. b. Color: a*and b*(defined by CIE L*a*b*color model)shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance to ASTM E 308. 7. Reflective 30 degree Adjustable Tube:Aluminum sheet,thickness of 0.018 inch (0.5 mm) a. Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity high reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface.Visible spectrum(400 nm to 760 nm)greater than 99 percent. Total solar spectrum(400 nm to 2500 nm)less than 93 percent. 8. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Solatube Model 21-C. Ceiling mounted box transitioning from round tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube,with compression seal to minimize condensation and bug or dirt infiltration;23.8 by 23.8 inches (605 by 605 mm) square frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings. a. Round to square transition box made of opaque polymeric material, classified as CC2, Class C, 0.110 inch (2.8 mm)thick. b. Lens:Type L1 OptiView Fresnel lens design to maximize light output and diffusion with extruded aluminum frame.Visible Light Transmission shall be>90 percent at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm)thick. C. Seal: Closed cell foam, 3 pounds per cubic foot(48 kg per cubic meter). d. Secondary Diffuser: Type SS,Acrylic plastic classified as CC2 material. ,,, *A Thickness shall not be less than 0.100 inches. 9. Catalog Number:S21C-DA-FCM-L1-SS 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon. B. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application and ceiling system requirement. C. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. YUM—E3.1 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 08625-4 July,2008 t of I7 �ht Crectrts (lablet�e prr�dcrts"sd �' ci '. ttxteter3 llaatClr ofystemor use lim r° rt wi# r©tl 0000, 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engaged in manufacture of tubular skylights for minimum 10 years. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions(temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Tubular Daylighting System: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Solatube International, Inc.,which is located at:2210 Oak Ridge Way ;Vista, CA 92081;Toll Free Tel:888-765-2882;Tel: 760.477-1120; Fax: 760-597-4488 ; Email: request info;Web:www.solatube.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM A. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 21-C Penetrating Ceiling,21 inch (530 mm)Daylighting System: 1. Roof Dome Assembly:Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube. a. Glazing: Type DA, 0.143 inch(3.7 mm)minimum thickness injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material and meeting characteristics of DR-101 blend. 2. LightTracker Reflector, made of aluminum sheet,thickness 0.015 inch(0.4 mm)with Spectralight Infinity. Positioned in the dome to capture low angle sunlight. 3. Roof Flashing Base: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. a. Base Material:Sheet steel,corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 463/A 463M, 0.028 inch (0.7 mm)thick. b. Base Style: Type FCM, Curb mounted flashing,with inside diameter 27 inches (685 mm)by 27 inches (685 mm)to cover curb by others. 4. Dome Ring:Attached to top of base section;0.090 inch(2.3 mm) nominal thickness YUM—E3.1 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 08625-3 July,2008 H. ASTM D 635-Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of Self- Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position. I. ASTM D-1929-Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics. J. UL 181 -Factory Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; 1998 K. UL 790-Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials; 1997. L. ICBO/ICC AC-16-Acceptance Criteria for Plastic Skylights;2003. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Completed tubular daylighting system assemblies shall be capable of meeting the following performance requirements: 1. Air Infiltration Test:Air infiltration will not exceed .30 cfm/sf aperture with a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. 2. Water Resistance Test: No uncontrolled water leakage at 16.5 psf pressure differential with water rate of 5 gallons/hours/sf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. 3. Uniform Load Test: a. No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to make tubular skylight inoperable or cause permanent deflection of any section in excess of 1 percent of its span at a Positive or Negative Load of 35 psf(1.68 kPa). b. All units shall be tested with a safety factor of(3)for positive pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with ASTM E 330. 4. Fire Testing: a. Class B Burning Brand- The burning brand shall self-extinguish without transferring the fire to the dome Per: U.B.C. Standard 15-2 Class B Burning Brand Test.See ASTM E 108 and UL 790. b. Self-Ignition Temperature-Greater than 650 degrees F Per: U.B.C. Standard 26-6. See ASTM D-1929-68(1975). C. Smoke Density-Rating no greater than 75 Per: U.B.C. Standard 26-5. (See ASTM D-2843-70) or no greater than 450 Per U.B.C.8-1 (See ASTM Standard E 84-91 A)in way intended for use. d. Rate of Burn-Minimum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min(64 mm/min) Classification CC-2: U.B.C. Standard 26-7. See ASTM D 635-74. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage,flashings and accessories. D. Verification Samples: As requested by Architect. E. Test Reports: Independent testing agency or evaluation service reports verifying compliance with specified performance requirements. YUM—E3.1 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM Ark Site Number 305-634 08625-2 July,2008 SECTION 08625 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tubular daylighting system, consisting of roof dome, reflective tube,and diffuser assembly; configuration as indicated on the drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07311 -Asphalt Shingles: Flashing of skylight base. B. Section 07320-Roof Tiles: Flashing of skylight base. C. Section 07510-Built-Up Bituminous Roofing: Flashing of skylight base. D. Section 07530-Electrometric Membrane Roofing: Flashing of skylight base. E. Section 07550-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Flashing of skylight base. F. Section 07600- Flashing: Metal flashings. G. Section 08620-Unit Skylights: Skylights without reflective tube. H. Section 08630-Metal Framed Skylights. I. Section 15810-Ducts: Fan vent duct and connections. J. Section 16150-Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections. K. Section 16500- Lighting Equipment and Controls: Light bulbs and lamps. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2001. B. ASTM A 463/A 463M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Aluminum Coated, by the Hot Dip Process;2001 a. C. ASTM A 653/A 653M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated(Galvanized),by the Hot Dip Process;2001a. D. ASTM E 283-Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. E. ASTM E 308-95-Standard Practice for Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the CIE System F. ASTM E 330-Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. G. ASTM E 331 -Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain walls and Doors by Static Air Pressure Difference. YUM—E3.1 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 08625-1 July,2008 2.9 FINISHES A. Clear Anodized: 1. Conforming to AA-M12C22A41. 2. Architectural Class I,etched, medium matte,clear anodic coating,0.7 mil minimum thickness. B. Dark Bronze Anodized: 1. Conforming to AA-M12C22A41. 2. Architectural Class I,etched, medium matte,clear anodic coating,0.7 mil minimum thickness. C. Refer to Drawings for Storefront Finish. PART 3EXECUTION PART 4 EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system,doors,and glazing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA-Metal Curtain Wall,Window. B. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame assembly to structure. C. Align assembly plumb and level,free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances,aligning with adjacent work. D. Install sill flashings. E. Coordinate attachment and seal of air and vapor barrier materials. Install sill flashings. F. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. G. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08710 for installation requirements. H. Install glass[and infill panels]in accordance with Section 08810,using exterior dry method of glazing. I. Install perimeter 2 part polyurethane type sealant, backing materials,and installation requirements in accordance with Section 07920. J. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 4.2 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 feet non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 feet,whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 4.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01770. B. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. 4.4 CLEANING/REPAIRING/REPLACEMENT A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft,clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. D. Replace scratched,cracked,chipped or otherwise damaged glass and framing. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Site Number 305-634 08410-3 July,2008 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following: 1. Kawneer Company, Inc. 2. US Aluminum. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. C. The products listed below are based on Vistawall as a standard of quality. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Storefront Frame Style: 1. Vistawall FG3000 for 1 inch glazing, center set,2 inch by 4-1/2 system. B. Door Style:Vistawall Heavy Duty"375"Medium Stile,with 3/16 wall thickness.Vistawall door 1.Vistawall with"Natura Pine"finish is the only door approved for single brand KFC 2.3 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B 221;6060-T5 alloy,temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209;5005-H16 alloy,temper. C. Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A 446; hot-dipped galvanized. D. Steel Sections: ANSI/ASTM A 36; shapes to suit mullion sections. E. Primer and Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: FS TT-P-645. F. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 2.4 FABRICATED COMPONENTS A. General: Form section true to details with clean,straight,sharply defined profiles,free from defects impairing strength or durability. -OWN B. Flashings: Form from sheet aluminum with same finish as extruded sections. Apply finish after fabrication. Material thickness as required to suit condition without deflection or "oilcanning". 2.5 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800. 2.6 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07920 of types described below 2.7 HARDWARE A. Refer to schedule on Drawings. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and frames allowing for minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly,yet enabling installation. B. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with internal reinforcement,except that door corners will be welded. Make joints and connections flush, hairline,and weatherproof. C. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior. D. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchorage items. E. Arrange fasteners,attachments,and jointing to ensure concealment from view. F. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. YUM—E3.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Site Number 305-634 08410-2 July,2008 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE A. Architectural Requirements 1. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify or solve problems of thermal or structural movement,glazing or anchorage. 2. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimensions of units, sightlines and profiles of members. 3. Provide concealed fastening wherever possible. B. Structural Requirements 1. System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling temperature range of 170 F degrees without causing detrimental effects to system or components. 2. Design and size members to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind as calculated in accordance with building code,and measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 330. 3. Limit mullion deflection to L/200,or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,whichever is less. 4. System to accommodate,without damage to system or components,or deterioration of perimeter seal: Movement within system; movement between system and perimeter framing components;dynamic loading and release of loads;and deflection of structural support framing. 5. Storefront manufacturer shall be responsible for design and engineering of storefront ew system,including necessary modifications to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts. 6. Attachment considerations shall take into account site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening,weakening or fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. 7. Design anchors,fasteners and braces to be structurally stressed not more than 50% of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. 8. Engineer storefront and entrances to be free from rattles,wind whistles and noise due to thermal and structural movement and wind pressure. C. Environmental Requirements 1. Drain water entering joints,condensation occurring in glazing channels,or migrating moisture occurring within system,to exterior. No leakage shall occur in wall when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at test pressure of 2.86 pounds per square foot. 2. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of assembly surface area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 Ibs/sq ft.as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 283. 3. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly,primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and AAMA-Metal Curtain Wall,Window, Store Front and Entrance-Guide Specifications Manual. B. Conform to requirements of ANSI A117.1 and local accessibility amendments. C. Coordinate with responsible trades to establish,verify and maintain field dimensions and job conditions. YUM—E3.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Site Number 305-634 08410-1 July,2008 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Stops: Wood,of same species as door facing; prepared for countersink style screws. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. B. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. C. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Of same species as veneer facing for transparent finish. D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. E. Bond edge banding to cores. F. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. G. Factory pre-fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. B. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard and to Warnock Hersey requirements. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCE A. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. ' B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion(Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, corner to corner,over an imaginary 36 by 84 inch surface area. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion(Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, top to bottom,over an imaginary 36 by 84 inch surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, edge to edge,over an imaginary 36 by 84 inch surface area. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01770. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Site Number 305-634 08210-2 July,2008 W SECTION 08210 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard,Custom Grade. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect,and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver to site after wet construction operations are completed and dried-in building has reached average prevailing relative humidity. C. Storage: 1. Store in clean,dry,ventilated area protected from sunlight. 2. Avoid extreme heat,cold, dryness or humidity. 3. Store flat over level surface above floor on wood blocking. 4. Under bottom door and over top of stack,furnish plywood or corrugated cardboard for protection. D. Handling: Do not drag doors across one another or across other surfaces. 1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction,door frame and door hardware installation. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01770 to the following term: B. Life of Installation: Interior doors. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer,warping beyond specified installation tolerances,defective materials,telegraphing core construction. D. Include hanging,installation of hardware and refinishing which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. Locknet.Owner's National Account. Refer to Scope of Work for contact information. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 DOOR TYPES A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick;solid core construction. 2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Core(Solid, Non-Rated): AWI Section 1300,Type PC Particleboard. 2.4 FLUSH DOOR FACING A. Plastic Laminate Facing: NEMA LD-3, General Purpose Type,0.050 inch thick. 1. Color, Pattern,and Texture: Refer to Finish Schedule. YUM—E3.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Site Number 305-634 08210-1 July,2008 G. Fill face welds and surface depressions with metallic paste filler or body putty,grind smooth and flush to unblemished finish appearance. H. Bevel lock or latch edge 1/8 inch in 2 inches at single doors and at meeting stiles at pairs of doors. I. Glazing Beads: Minimum 18 gage steel, screw on type,corners mitered,welded to door assembly on security side, removable on opposite side. 1. Factory install and secure loose bead with countersunk oval head screws spaced 8 inches on center maximum and within 2 inches of ends. 2. Coordinate dimensions for glazing rabbets with requirements of Section 08800. J. Vision Openings: Frame openings for sizes indicated. 1. Equip with glazing beads. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames as welded unit. B. Fabricate doors and frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes. C. Prepare frame for silencers. 2.5 FINISH A. Interior Units: Baked on primer. B. Exterior Units: Baked on primer over 1.25 ounces per square foot galvanizing, in accordance with ASTM A 386. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105. B. Coordinate with gypsum board construction for anchor placement. A0W% C. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. D. Set frames plumb, level,and true alignment,securely fastened to the floor and adjoining walls. E. Install doors accurately in frames, maintaining specified clearances. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8 inch measured with straight edge,corner to corner. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Site Number 305-634 08110-2 July,2008 OW SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART IGENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of SDI-100. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers—Welded Unit Frames: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. Republic Builders Products. 2. Ceco Corporation 3. Fenestra Technologies Corp. B. Acceptable Manufacturers—Hollow Metal Exterior Door: 1. Locknet. Owner's National Account. Refer to Scope of Work for contact information. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Exterior Frames: 14 gage thick material. B. Interior Frames:Welded steel, 16 gage thick material. C. Construction: Welded required;knocked-down not allowed. D. Corners of mitered design;stops coped and butted,or mitered. E. Guard Box: Closed box design,26 gage minimum,welded to frame. Provide at: 1. Mortise hardware cutouts for assemblies installed within masonry walls or where assemblies have frame grouted with mortar or similar material at time of installation. F. Spreader: Manufacturer's standard temporary channel or angles tack welded at bottom of jamb members. G. Floor Anchor Clips: Provide at each jamb and mullions which extend to floor. 1. In areas where concrete topping or other similar construction occurs, provide adjustable design to permit securing to depressed subfloor construction. In lieu of adjustable design,frames may extend to subfloor. H. Jamb Anchors 1. Wood Stud Wall Systems: Anchor strap,type or design compatible with stud system. Locate at top of frame, 12 inches from top and,24 inches on centers maximum intermittently,minimum 4 per jamb. 2.3 DOORS A. Exterior Door: Refer to Drawings. B. Face Construction: 1. Interior: 2. Exterior: Face sheets broken to form and meet in joint on stile edges;weld and grind smooth joints on stile edges. C. Vertical edges continuously reinforced from top to bottom with steel channels or flat bars placed immediately inside of face sheets.Vertical edges continuously reinforced from top to bottom with steel channels or flat bars placed immediately inside of face sheets. D. Reinforce top and bottom edge full width of door with steel channel not less than 16 gage. E. Fabricate exterior doors with top edge closed flush and fabricate bottom edge with flush closure where required for attachment of weatherstripping. Provide openings in bottom closure of exterior doors to permit escape of entrapped moisture. F. Provide insulating material in void spaces for sound deadening in assemblies utilizing internal core of steel stiffeners. YUM—E3.1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Site Number 305-634 08110-1 July,2008 Aw% 1. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve manufacturer-required width- to-depth ratios. 2. Install to achieve sealant depth and sealant contact depth no greater than distance required by manufacturer for sealant material,joint width,and joint movement range. 3. Install using blunt instrument to avoid puncturing. 4. Install to provide optimum joint profile and in manner to provide not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch)sealant depth when tooled. 5. Install tape where insufficient joint depth makes use of rod not possible. Match tape width to joint width to prevent three-side adhesion. Do not wrap tape onto sides of the joint. C. Sealant: 1. Install sealants at same time as installation of backing bond breaker materials. 2. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for applying different sealant materials in direct contact with each other. 3. Install sealant with pressure-operated devices to form uniform continuous bead. 4. Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints full. 5. Install to adhere to both sides of joint. 6. Install to not adhere to back of joint; provide sealant backing. 7. Install sealant free of air pockets and embedded matter. 8. Recess sealant 3 mm (1/8 inch)from surface of pavements and horizontal surfaces. D. Sealant Tooling: 1. Comply with manufacturer's tooling method requirements. 2. Tool sealant within manufacturer's tooling time limits. 3. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. 4. Allow acrylic latex sealant to achieve firm skin before paint is applied. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Sealant Schedule: 1. Exterior locations: a. Wall joints: S-GP b. Perimeter of penetrations through walls: Designation S-GP C. Expansion joints in ceilings, soffits, and overhead surfaces: Designation S-GP d. Control joints and perimeter of penetrations in ceilings,soffits,and overhead surfaces: Designation: S-GP e. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and their rough opening: Designation S- GP f. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and adjoining surfaces: Designation S- GP g. Joints and perimeter of penetrations in horizontal pedestrian and vehicle traffic surfaces: Designation U-TB. h. Joints in Section 07610: Designation S-GP. 2. Interior Joints: a. Wall and ceiling joints subject to movement: Designation U-MC. b. Wall and ceiling joints not subject to movement: Designation AL. C. Interior side of exterior openings: U-MC. d. Floor joints: Designation U-TB.] e. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and their rough opening: Designation AL. f. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and adjoining surfaces: Designation AL. g. Interior Sanitary Joints;Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Adjoining Floor, Wall,and Ceiling Surfaces;Joints in Dietary and Food Preparation Areas, Kitchens, Food Storage Areas,and Areas Subject to Frequent Wet Cleaning, including joints between walls and floors,Joints Between Back Splashes and Wall Substrates: Designation S-S. YUM—E3.1 JOINT SEALANTS Site Number 305-634 07920-4 July,2008 3. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 4. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: Not more than 250 g/L. 5. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: Not more than 775 g/L. 6. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Cleaner, Primer, Backing Rods: As recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent material compatible with sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. 2.3 MIXES A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix thoroughly with mechanical mixer without mixing air into sealants. C. Continue mixing until sealant is uniform in color and free from streaks of unmixed materials. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Ensure that concrete and masonry have cured minimum of 28 days. B. Verify that sealant backing is compatible with sealant. C. Verify that substrate surface: 1. Is within manufacturer's moisture content range. 2. Complies with manufacturer's cleanliness and surface preparation requirements. D. Joint Width: 1. Verify joints are greater than minimum widths required by manufacturer. 2. If joints are narrower than minimum required widths,widen narrow joints to indicated width. 3. Do not place sealant in joints narrower than manufacturer's required minimum. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare,clean,and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and matter which might impair adhesion of primer and sealant to substrate. C. Remove form release agents, laitance,and chemical retarders,which might impair adhesion of primer and sealant to concrete and masonry surfaces. D. Comply with ASTM C 1193. E. Protect elements adjoining and surrounding work of this Section from damage and disfiguration. F. Priming: 1. Prime joint substrates unless priming is not required by mnufacturer's sealant-substrate compatibility and adhesion test. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Comply with results and recommendations from: a. "Manufacturer's compatibility and adhesion test. 2. Provide compatible sealant system between dissimilar assemblies and adjacent construction. 3. Seal locations necessary to create and secure continuous enclosure even though Drawings may not indicate all locations;do not seal weep holes. 4. Seal to prevent migration of water,vapor,and air through joints. 5. Comply with manufacturer's required application temperature and relative humidity ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these ranges. B. Sealant Backing Bond Breaker: YUM—E3.1 JOINT SEALANTS Site Number 305-634 07920-3 July,2008 1) Type: S 2) Grade: NS 3) Class: 25 4) Uses: NT, [M,j G,A, O b. Low modulus,single component, neutral curing, non-staining, non-bleeding silicone sealant. C. Joint movement range without cohesive/adhesive failure: Plus 50 percent to minus 50 percent of joint width. d. Color: Selected by Owner's Representative from manufacturer's full color range. 2. Acceptable Products: a. 795, Dow Corning. b. Silpruf, General Electric. C. 864, Pecora. d. Rhodorsil 5C, Rhone-Poulenc. e. Spectrum 1,Tremco. C. Silicone-Sanitary(Designation S-S): 1. Description: a. ASTM C 920: 1) Type: S 2) Grade: NS 3) Class: 25 4) Uses: NT, M, G,A, O b. Neutral or acid curing, non-staining, non-bleeding,fungicide-containing. C. Color: Selected by Owner's Representative from manufacturer's full color range. d. Complying with United States Food and Drug Administration Regulation 21CFR- 177-6000. 2. Acceptable products: a. 786 Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant, Dow Corning. b. Sanitary 1700, General Electric. C. 863,Pecora. d. Rhodorsil 36, Rhone Poulenc. e. Tremsil 600,Tremco. D. Urethane-Traffic-Bearing (Designation U-TB): 1. Description: a. ASTM C 920: 1) Type: M 2) Grade: P or NS 3) Class: 25 4) Uses: T, M,O b. Chemical curing,non-staining, non-bleeding. C. Joint movement range without cohesive/adhesive failure: Plus 25 percent to minus 25 percent of joint width. d. Shore A hardness:35 minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240. e. Color: Selected by Owner's Representative from manufacturer's full color range 2. Acceptable Products: a. Vulkem 245,202, Mameco. b. Dynatred, Pecora. C. Sikaflex 2c/SL, Sika. d. THC 900/901,Tremco. E. General: VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: Not more than 250 g/L. 2. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. YUM—E3.1 JOINT SEALANTS Site Number 305-634 07920-2 July,2008 SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: 1. Manufacturer's certification that products: a. Furnished for the specific project meet or exceed specified requirements. b. Assembled for each joint are compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application. C. Are suitable for the indicated use. 2. Manufacturer's certification that sealants, primers,and cleaners,comply with local regulations controlling the use of volatile organic compounds. 3. Contractor's and installer's certification that products are installed in accordance with Contract Documents,based on inspection and testing specified as part of Field Quality Control. 1.2 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate installation of sealants with substrates to which they are applied. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties under provisions of Section 01780. B. Warrant installed products to be free from defects in material,labor,or installation techniques for 2 years. C. Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which: 1. Fail to achieve air tight seal. l 2. Fail to achieve watertight seal. 3. Exhibit loss of adhesion. 4. Exhibit loss of cohesion. 5. Do not cure. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Kam ' idP,thia PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acrylic Latex(Designation AL): 1. Description: a. ASTM C 834. b. Non-sag; non-staining; non-bleeding. C. Joint movement range without cohesive/adhesive failure: Plus 7.5 percent to minus 7.5 percent of joint width. d. Color: As selected by Owner's Representative from manufacturer's full color range. 2. Acceptable Products: a. AC-20, Pecora. b. Sonolac, Sonneborn. C. Acrylic Latex 834,Tremco. B. Silicone-General Purpose(Designation S-GP): 1. Description: a. ASTM C 920: YUM—E3.1 JOINT SEALANTS Site Number 305-634 07920-1 July,2008 SECTION 07700 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL—not used PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE PORTALS A. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers: 1. N-Series Pipe Portal,Custom Curb, Inc.,Chattanooga,TN. 2. PCC Cap,The Pate Company, Broadview, IL. 3. Pipe Portal System, Roof Products Systems Corporation, Bensenville, IL. 4. TP-1 Piping Cover,ThyCurb Division of Thybar Corporation.,Addison, IL. B. Description: 1. Manufacturer=s standard ABS and EPDM rubber boots to accommodate 3/8 through 6 inch diameter pipe. 2. Furnish complete with stainless steel hose clamps. 3. Accommodate quantity and size of piping to pass through portal caps. 4. Fabricate for mounting atop manufacturer=s curb. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate free of visual distortions and defects. Weld corners and joints. B. Provide for removal of condensation. C. Provide weathertight assembly. PART 3EXECUTION 0^ 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with work in accordance with Section 01450. B. Verify that deck,curbs, blocking, cants, roof membrane, and base flashing are in place and positioned correctly. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install units plumb, level,square, and free from warp or twist while maintaining dimensional tolerances and alignment with surrounding construction. 2. Apply bituminous paint on metal surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals. 3. Securely anchor roof accessories to supporting substrates with appropriate type fasteners. 4. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashings. B. Curbs: Integrate curbs with adjacent roofing systems, base flashings,and counter(lashings to create watertight conditions. C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashings for weathertight installation. E. Apply bituminous paint on metal surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES Site Number 305-634 07700-1 July,2008 2.4 FINISHES A. Refer to Section 09910. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. B. Install starter and edge strips,and cleats before starting installation. C. Install one layer of underlayment prior to installing copings and parapet caps. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction and recommendations. B. Conform to drawing details included in manuals published by SMACNA. C. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with wedges at maximum 12 inches on center. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant. D. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in locations approved by Owner's Representative. E. Lap seam flashings and work not normally exposed to view. Use butt joint with back-up plate joint method exposed flashings, coping caps,and guards. Seal joints. F. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. G. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes,and lines accurate to profiles. H. Seal metal joints watertight. I. On soldered metal joints, make watertight for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. J. Install expansion joints at frequency as recommended in SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Do not fasten seams such that movement is restricted. Coordinate expansion joint locations with joints in adjacent materials. 3.3 QUALITY CONTROL A. Install surfaces flat such that from normal viewing distances, no waviness or oil canning is visible. 3.4 SCHEDULE OF PRODUCTS USED A. Flashing and Counter Flashing: Fabricate as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Chapter 4. B. Coping: As indicated on Drawings and in accordance with SMACNA Figure 3-4A. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Site Number 305-634 07620-2 July,2008 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL—not used PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS-SHEET MATERIALS A. Structural Quality Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: 1. Hot-dip aluminum-zinc-coated steel sheet(Galvalume)complying with ASTM A 792 with class AZ-50 coating. 2. Grade 40 or to suit manufacturer's standards,smooth finiish. B. Sheet Metal Thickness/Mass: 1. Flashing: In accordance with SMACNA Chapter 4. 2. Gutters: In accordance with SMACNA Table 1-5. 3. Downspouts: In accordance with SMACNA Table 1-9. 4. Coping, Facia/Gravel Stop, Scupper: In accordance with SMACNA Table 3-1. 5. Conductor Heads: In accordance with SMACNA Figure 1-25. C. Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape,accurate in size, square,free from distortion and defects,to profiles indicated in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. B. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet. C. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. D. Hem exposed flashings on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. E. Form materials which are typically concealed from view by the public with lap seams. On exposed seams,use butt-seam/back-up plate type unless noted or detailed otherwise. F. Solder and seal metal joints except those indicated or required to be expansive type joints. After soldering,remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. G. Fabricate corners from one place with minimum 18 inch long legs; solder for rigidity;seal with sealant. H. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. I. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend minimum 2 inches over wall surfaces. J. Fabricate as much as possible in shop with machinery to eliminate as much hand tooling on the job as possible. Shop fabricate to allow for adjustments in the field for proper anchoring and joining. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners 1. Nails:AISI Series 300 for galvanized steel. Use annular ring shank type, No. 12 gage or larger to suit application,of sufficient length to penetrate backing material at least 7/8 inch. B. Solder Materials 1. Flux: Type as recommended by sheet material manufacturer; not detrimental to base material. Use resin type flux for terne metal. 2. Solder: ASTM B 32 type,50 percent tin/50 percent lead for galvanized steel. C. Underlayment:ASTM D 6221,Type I Reinforced modified bitumen membrane flashing consisting of a fiberglass scrim and polyester mat reinforcement. D. Sealants: Two component polyurethane,non-sagging, sealant as specified in Section 07920. E. Reglets: 1. Acceptable Product:Type ST Spring-lok flashing reglet by Fry Reglet, Norcross, GA. F. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586,Type I,asbestos free, asphalt based. YUM—E3.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Site Number 305-634 07620-1 July,2008 AON 3.4 FLASHINGS A. Conform to manufacturer's specifications. B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Cleat and seam all joints. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 SHEET METAL ROOFING Site Number 305-634 07610-2 July,2008 SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvalume steel roofing and associated flashings. B. Eave ice dam protection. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile,jointing pattern,jointing details, fastening methods, flashings,termination,and installation details. B. Samples: Submit two samples,24"x24" in size of metal roofing mounted on plywood backing illustrating typical standing seam, material,color,and finish. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the following: 1. NRCA(National Roofing Contractors Association) -Roofing Manual. 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion,and to provide ventilation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MATERIALS A. Fabricators: 1. Central Texas Metal Roofing Supply Co. Inc. Style BattLoc 150. 2. Others as approved. B. Hot Dipped Galvanized G60 or G90 conforming to ASTM A446, Grade A and ASTM A525. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal,with soft neoprene washers. B. Underlayment: No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. D. Sealant: Acrylic,as required by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Prepare deck in compliance with requirements of roofing manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Conform to drawing details and manufacturer's requirements. 3.3 STANDING SEAM ROOFING A. Space seams at 12 inch oc. B. Gauge—24 ga. C. Lay sheets with long dimension perpendicular to eaves. D. Finish standing seams 1 inch high on flat surfaces. E. Terminate standing seams at ridge and hips by turning down with tapered fold. YUM—E3.1 SHEET METAL ROOFING Site Number 305-634 07610-1 July,2008 The back of the DynaFlex and the substrate shall both be mopped with asphalt at no less than the EVT temperature or 400°F,whichever is higher, prior to installation. All wall and curb flashings shall be nailed at their top edge in strict accordance with Johns Manville Flashing Specifications using 1 inch tin-capped nails immediately after flashing membrane installation. D. Install flashing in accordance with roofing manufacturers' specification. DFE-3 and DFE- 15 are considered equal alternates. E. All vertical laps shall be stripped-in with a three course application of MBR Utility Cement and fabric and painted with aluminum emulsion roof coating after it has had a few days to weather. F. Membrane Flashings at Metal Flanges (gravel stops, vents, etc): All flange type flashings (except lead flanges at drains) such as gravel stops and vents shall be primed, set in mastic at approximately 1/8 inch thick,and securely stagger nailed 3 inches on center. The flange shall then be stripped in with a minimum 8 inch wide strip of reinforced modified bitumen base flashing, Johns Manville DynaFlex, after application of the cap sheet. As an alternate, and if scheduling allows, sheet metal flanges may be stripped in over the base ply membrane using one ply of MB base felt prior to installation of the cap sheet. G. All lead flange type flashings (at drains and lead stacks)shall be primed and set in mastic at approximately 1/8 inch thick. The flange shall then be stripped in with a reinforced modified bitumen base flashing, Johns Manville DynaFlex, after application of the cap sheet. Flashing shall extend a minimum 4 inches past the edge of the metal flange. As an alternate and if scheduling allows, sheet metal flanges may be stripped in over the base ply membrane using one ply of MB base felt prior to installation of the cap sheet. H. Roof-walk: Install in locations indicated with a 6 inch gap between planks in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. Protective Coverings: 1. Install protective coverings at paving and building walls adjacent to hoist and kettles prior to starting work. 2. Lap protective coverings at least 6 inches, secure against wind, and vent to prevent collection of moisture on covered surfaces. 3. Keep protective coverings in place for duration of roofing work. B. Special Protection: Provide approved special protection and avoid heavy traffic on completed work. C. Drippage of Bitumen: Seal joints in and at edges of deck as necessary to prevent drippage of bitumen into building or down exterior walls. D. Damaged Work and Materials: Restore work and materials damaged during handling of bitumen and installation of roofing materials to original condition or replace with new materials. 3.6 INSPECTION: A. Have an authorized Yum! Brands, Inc roof Consultant perform inspection in accordance with Yum! Brands, Inc Roof Inspection Process Program B. One Final Inspection, after job completion, shall be made by principal manufacturer's representative, in the company of the Owner's representative. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 Four Ply Asphalt Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07555-7 July,2008 Awl,, 3. Apply asphalt at a temperature range within 25 degrees above,or below Equiviscous Temperature(EVT). E. Starting at low edge,apply one 12-inch wide felt;over that one 24-inch wide felt; over these two,a full 36-inch wide felt in steep asphalt at a rate of 23 lbs. per each layer of felt. F. Apply following felts full width,overlapping each preceding felt by 27-1/2 inches. G. Install each felt so that it is firmly and uniformly set, in hot asphalt,without voids. Broom felts lightly during application. Dry edges will not be tolerated. H. Cap Sheet Installation: 1. Cut cap sheet into practical lengths. 2. Lay the material out on the roof and allow it to relax and flatten. 3. Apply hot asphalt at approx.20°F. above the EVT temperature to maximize bonding at a nominal rate of 23 lbs. per square. 4. Flop the cap sheet into the application of hot asphalt. 5. Maintain 2-inch side laps and 6-inch end laps. The cap sheet must be uniformly set,without voids, into the hot asphalt. 6. Apply loose,white granules into the fluid asphalt extrusion before it has time to cool. 7. Cap sheet must not be applied when temperature drop to 50°F.or less. Follow manufacturer's cold application guidelines strictly when installing cap sheet in temperatures between 50 and 70°F. 8. Asphalt must bleed out past the edge of the sheet by a minimum%inch. Before the asphalt has an opportunity to cool,drop loose white granules into the fluid bitumen. I. Steep-Sloped Areas(1/2 inch per foot or greater): Install nailers per manufacturers' published recommendations to act as insulation blocks and for backnailing roofing plies. Nailers should be installed in a direction perpendicular to the direction of slope and insulation boards must be cut to fit tightly between the nailers. All plies of the roofing membrane must run in a direction parallel to the direction of slope. Endlaps at the upper end of each roll must terminate at and be nailed to the wood nailer a maximum 8 inches on-center using 1 inch tin-capped nails. All manufacturers'published back-nailing recommendations must be followed. J. Cold Weather (below 50 0F.) Application of Modified Bitumen: Asphalt must be used, which has an EVT that can accommodate a minimum mop temperature of 4250. NEVER lay rolls on their side. Before starting each day, unroll several rolls of GlasKap completely and turn over so that the black underside is exposed to the sun. This will warm the sheet and allow it to relax. A close mopping technique is mandatory. Limit mop-lead to a maximum of 4' in front of the roll and immediately unroll the sheet into the hot asphalt. Edges should be'scuffed in' immediately after rolling the sheet in the asphalt. It is critical that the laps be firmly adhered in the hot asphalt. Asphalt should always extrude from the entire lap. K. Within 72 inches of each exhauster serving a type 1 exhaust hood, provide MBR Flashing Cement,a sacrificial layer of GlasaKap Cap Sheet,and a top coat of MBR Flashing Cement. 3.4 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Preparation: Inspect walls, curb heights, counterflashings, etc., and check for conformance with minimum base flashing height of eight inches. Bring non-conforming areas to the attention of the Owner's Representative for correction. B. Primer: Prime all masonry, metal, or concrete surfaces from the top of the roof membrane to the termination of the flashing level with asphalt primer at the rate of one gallon per 100 square feet or as recommended by the manufacturer. Allow the primer to dry thoroughly. C. Install Johns Manville DynaFlex base flashing at all intersections formed by vertical surfaces, and wherever curbed roof openings, wall, parapets, or other structure joint or penetrate roof. YUM—E3.1 Four Ply Asphalt Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07555-6 July,2008 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Inspect wood deck closely for: a. Proper securement of boards to joists with no loose decking. b. Damaged Panels. c. Deterioration. e. Unacceptable areas should be brought to the attention of the General Contractor and Owner's Representative prior to installation of roofing system. 2. Ensure that wood blocking has been installed as detailed in the plans and specifications. B. Make sure that all counterflashing receivers, curbs, etc. are constructed in such a manner as to provide a minimum 8 inch base flashing height measured from the finished roofs surface to the top of the base flashing membrane. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Rosin Sheet: Tack down a rosin sheet to prevent bitumen drippage. Laps in rosin sheet shall be offset from plywood deck joints by a minimum of 12 inches. B. Base Layer of Insulation: Starting at the low edge of the roof, mechanically attach one layer of Johns Manville Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation using fasteners at the prescribed rate to achieve FM 1-90 uplift resistance. Use additional fasteners at perimeters and corners as prescribed in the Factory Mutual 1-28 publication. Fasteners shall be no closer than 6 inches to the board edge. Fasteners must be sized to and penetrate no less than 1 inch. C. Install boards with long joints continuous and running in a direction parallel to the decking. Short joints should be staggered. Joints should be butted tightly. D. Subsequent Layers of Insulation: Offsetting all vertical joints by a minimum of 6 inches, solidly adhere perlite board roof insulation using a 33 lb. per square application of Type IV asphalt applied at the EVT temperature. Step in each board to ensure maximum adhesion. Joints should be butted tightly. Open joints of%4 inch or wider must be filled with scrap insulation E. Form crickets and saddles by solidly adhering tapered insulation panels over top layer of insulation using full 33 lb. per square moppings of steep asphalt as necessary to provide positive drainage at all portions of the roof area. Board edges shall be butted tightly with no gaps of a '/4 inch or larger between them. Gaps of such size must be filled to top surface level with scrap insulation. Install tapered insulation in the same manner. F. If it is found after membrane installation that additional crickets or tapered insulation is required, cut out the underlying membrane and prime the surface of the perlite insulation prior to installation of the new crickets. G. Apply no more insulation than can be completely covered with the roofing membrane on same day. 3.3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Johns Manville's 4GIC mineral-surfaced four ply asphalt membrane roofing system Specifications are an integral part of this specification. B. At end of each day's work, protect installed roofing and insulation by closing off edge of system with water cut-off,consisting of 2 plies of felts and mopping of steep asphalt extending onto deck and top edge of membrane at least 4 and 6 inches. C. Remove water cut-off completely and clean prior to resuming roofing application. D. Bitumen Temperature 1. Never heat asphalt to or above Flash Point(FP). 2. Do not heat asphalt above Finished Blowing Temperature(FBT)for longer than 4 hours. YUM—E3.1 Four Ply Asphalt Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07555-5 July,2008 Tapered Insulation(Full overlay at all areas): F. Factory Tapered Johns Manville Fesco Board (as required), conforming to ASTM C-728, as supplied by Johns Manville Roofing Systems. Design slope of '/4 inch per foot. Minimum thickness of%inch. G. Grease Protection Layer: 80 mil top coat of MBR Flashing Cement with white granules to match Glaskap over woven poly fabric over 80 mil MBR flashing Cement. H. Base Flashing 1. ASTM D 6221, Type I, Reinforced modified bitumen membrane flashing consisting of a fiberglass scrim and polyester mat reinforcement, an elastomeric base material of SBS rubber and asphalt, with a white ceramic granule surface. 158 mils (4mm) thick, Nominal weight shall be 82 lbs. per 75 sq. ft. roll Johns Manville DynaFlex. Must be adhered with asphalt or Johns Manville MBR Flashing Adhesive. 3. Flashing Cement: Modified Bitumen flashing Adhesive as recommended by roofing manufacturer. Johns Manville MBR Flashing Adhesive as required. I. Composition Stripping at Gravel Stops and Metal Flanges 1. Asphalt: ASTM-D-312, Type IV 2. Set primed metal flange in bed of MBR Utility Cement and secure to nailer per primary roofing manufacturers' published details. 3. Cover this primed flange with Reinforced modified bitumen membrane flashing consisting of a fiberglass scrim and polyester mat reinforcement, an elastomeric base material of SBS rubber and asphalt, with a white ceramic granule surface. 158 mils (4mm) thick, 82 lbs. per 75 sq. ft. Johns Manville DynaFlex. Must be continuously applied in a full mopping of Type IV roofing asphalt or MBR Flashing Adhesive. J. Roof-Walk: Preformed, skid-resistant boards consisting of modified asphalt, reinforcements and fillers with a ceramic granule surface on both sides. Dimension shall be 32 inch x 32 inch x 'A" 5/16 inch. Johns Manville DynaTred Roof Walkway. K. Cant Strip: Perlite,5-5/8 inch face(4 x 4 inches), minimum dimension. Johns Manville FesCant Plus. L. Expansion Joint Cover: Johns Manville Expand-O-Flash 1. A weatherproof, non-reinforced elastomeric bellows with closed cell foam backer and bifurcated attachment to metal mounting flanges. 2. Bellows: Type E, 060 inch (1.6mm) EPDM, black 3. Foam Backer: Minimum thickness 3/8 inch(9.5mm) 4. Flange Style: a. CF at Curb to Wall Detail b. CF at Curb to Curb 5. Flange Metal: Aluminum(26 ga.) 6. Corners and Intersections: To be prefabricated by the manufacturer 7. Must be covered by 10-year Primary Roofing Manufacturer's System Guarantee. M. Pitch Pan Filler:Two component polyurethane elastomeric sealant. Johns Manville UltraGard EPDM Pourable Sealer. N. Gas Pipe Supports: 1. Pipes of 1-1/2 inch in Diameter and Less_ Adhere Johns Manville DynaTred Walkway Pads directly to the un-surfaced membrane with hot asphalt. Loose lay a treated 4 inch x 4 inch wood block on this. Install a loose-fitting metal strap around pipe to keep block in position. 2. Pipes Greater than 1-1/2 inches in Diameter: Construct a curb, resting on and secured to the deck, in accordance with NRCA Detail L-2. Provide a roller device as shown in their Detail S. O. All other materials not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of roofing, shall be selected by approved manufacturer and subject to approval of Owner's Representative/Owner. YUM—E3.1 Four Ply Asphalt Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07555-4 July,2008 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Base Membrane Roofing System:Johns Manville 4GIC 1. (Base specification,see exact requirements below) 2. Substitutions: None allowed. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Rosin Paper: In widest sheets possible. As necessary to prevent bitumen drippage through roof deck. B. Layer of Insulation: Factory Mutual Class I, Polyisocyanu rate Foam Faced with Asphalt/Glass Mat, or Polymer Glass Mat on Both Sides of Foam and complying with ASTM C-1289. Long Term Thermal Resistance to be no less than ten (10) as determined by CAN/ULC 5 770. Thickness of approximately 4.0 inch.Johns Manville E'NRG'Y 2 Roof Insulation, E'NRG'Y 3 Roof Insulation. C. Base Layer: 4-inch thickness unless otherwise indicated on drawings;4-foot by 4-foot maximum board size. 1. Typical Physical Properties Water Absorption(ASTM 0 2842) % by Volume-2 hours...<3.5% Dimensional Stability Change(ASTM D 2126) <2% Compression Resistance(ASTM D 1621) 10%Consolidation-psi(kPa)........20(138) nom....... Moisture Vapor Permeance(ASTM E 96) <1 perm (57.5 ng/(Pa.s.M2) Service Temperature -100 to 200°F (-73°to 93°C) Tensile Strength-psf(kPa)(ASTM 01623) 730(35)nom D. Top Layer: Retro-Fit Board-1/2-inch,high density, rigid board consisting of expanded perlite,cellulosic fibers, binders,and waterproofing agents with top surface seal-coated, complying with ASTM C728. 1. Physical Properties-1/2 inch Thick(13mm) Water Absorption(ASTM C 209) %by Volume-2 hours ...3.5%max Compression Resistance(ASTM C 165) 5%Consolidation.....psi...35......(kPa)...241 10%Consolidation...psi...50......(kPa)....517 Laminar Tensile Strength(ASTM C 209) Psi...4.9............(kPa)...33.8 Flexural Strength, psi (ASTM C 203) Psi...60............(kPa)...414 Product Density(ASTM C 209) Pcf....... 11-14......(kg/rn ).. 192 Linear Expansion(ASTM C 209) %max...0.5 E. Perlite Board Johns Manville RetroFit Board conforming to ASTM C-728. Minimum thickness 1/2 inch YUM—E3.1 Four Ply Asphalt Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07555-3 July,2008 4. Review roof plans; for slope, deck type, drainage, membrane attachment, expansion joints, flashing and details. Resolve all conflicts between what is considered good roofing practice and the specifications. 5. Review proposed roofing system and recommended work practices for its installation. 6. Study all plans to determine whether different roof areas have different requirements. 7. Designate which areas on site will be available for use as storage and working areas. 8. Review procedures to be followed to provide proper protection of roof system during and after construction of roof. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and data to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. A. Manufacturer's written agreement to issue specified guarantee on the specified roof system when installed by successful bidding roofing contractor. B. The Contractor selected for this work must be approved by the primary materials Manufacturer, Johns Manville, and be capable of providing the specified Manufacturer's guarantee. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE&HANDLING A. Store materials in a cool,dry place. B. Store roll material on end on clean, dry, raised surface. C. Place insulation on raised-surface and protect with waterproof tarpaulins, with sufficient air circulation to prevent condensation. D. Do not install wet insulation. E. Store solvents,emulsions, and coatings in a cool,dry area between 45 and 100 degrees F. Handle roll-materials to prevent damaged ends. G. Allow no unlabeled materials on site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not start roofing if rain is imminent or ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. B. If rain occurs during roof membrane application, cease operations and protect deck, insulation, penetrations and membrane from water damage and intrusion. C. Remove and replace all material that has been subject to moisture. D. Protect finished surfaces of building from damage by installation of roofing system. E. Protect completed roofing and flashings from damage by subsequent roofing installation and construction traffic. F. In event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements required by Owner's Representative. G. Comply with all applicable code,fire and safety regulations. H. Flame-heated Equipment 1. Locate and use flame-heated equipment so as not to endanger the structure or other materials on the site or adjacent property. 2. Do not place flame-heating equipment on roof. 3. Provide and maintain fire extinguisher. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Guarantee includes materials and workmanship to maintain roof in a watertight condition. B. Provide single source, single responsibility guarantee which covers membrane, insulation, bituminous flashing and roofing manufacturer-supplied walkways, and expansion joint covers. C. Provide Johns Manville's Ten (10)Year Standard Roofing System Guarantee. Guarantee to run from date of substantial completion. ""11% YUM—E3.1 Four Ply Asphalt Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07555-2 July,2008 SECTION 07555 FOUR-PLY ASPHALT MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work includes: 1. Installation of a high thermal roof insulation mechanically attached to a wood roof deck. Subsequent layers set in hot asphalt. 2. New mineral-surfaced four ply asphalt membrane roofing system including insulation,flashing, Coping, Fascia, Expansion joint covers. 3. Applicator is SOLELY responsible for accuracy of all measurements and estimates of material,quantities,and sizes. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood Roof Deck and Nailers: Section 06100 3. Sheet Metal: Section 07620 4. Roof Drains: Section 15430 C. National Account: 1. Contact Charlie Williams, Manager, Preferred Accounts at Johns Manville for additional information regarding this specification or the YUM! Brands national account. 2. 800-793-3240—Office Fax: 866-395-3446 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Currently approved in writing by manufacturer of roofing system prior to award of roofing contract. Documentation of Johns Manville Guarantee Application Confirmation. B. Documentation of Johns Manville Guarantee Application Confirmation Confirmation 10 days prior to job start that the subject project has been registered with Johns Manville for a Request for a guarantee. Contact the local Johns Manville Representative to register the project or sign up to register projects on line at www.6m.com/signmeup. If you have signed up to use the on line registration service and have a pass word to use the Guarantee Management System at the JM Connexus site, go directly to http://eb.0m.com/to register the Guarantee Application. C. This documentation of registration must be submitted at the schedule Pre-Job Conference 1.3 PRE-ROOFING CONFERENCE A. Hold roofing pre-construction conference at the project site, not more than one week prior to beginning roofing. B. Attendance is mandatory for: roofing sub-contractor, roofing foreman, contractor's superintendent, roofing manufacturer's representative and Owner's representative, mechanical subcontractor, sheet metal subcontractor, and anyone else responsible for items penetrating or in contact with roof. C. Agenda 1. Review in detail Owner's Representative's specifications, roof plans and all roof and flashing details. 2. If a manufacturer's specification is used, review, and resolve all deviations or differences from the Owner's Representative's specifications. 3. Review and understand Factory Mutual and Underwriters Laboratories requirements and resolve all conflicts between FM or UL specifications and the Owner's Representative's/manufacturer's specifications. YUM—E3.1 Four Ply Asphalt Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07555-1 July,2008 3. Keep protective coverings in place for duration of roofing work. B. Special Protection: Provide approved special protection and avoid heavy traffic on completed work. C. Drippage of Bitumen: Seal joints in and at edges of deck as necessary to prevent drippage of bitumen into building or down exterior walls. D. Damaged Work and Materials: Restore work and materials damaged during handling of bitumen and installation of roofing materials to original condition or replace with new materials. 3.6 INSPECTION A. Have an authorized Yum! Brands, Inc roof Consultant perform inspection in accordance with Yum! Brands, Inc Roof Inspection Process Program B. One (1) Final Inspection, after job completion, shall be made by principal manufacturer's representative, in the company of the Owner's representative. PART 4 MAUFACTURER'S DETAILS 4.1 Refer to (insert)attached .PDF Roofing Details. A. Parapet Wall Flashing. B. Roof Edge Flashing. C. Roof Penetration Flashing. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07550-8 July,2008 A close mopping technique is mandatory. Limit mop-lead to a maximum of 4' in front of the roll and immediately unroll the sheet into the hot asphalt. Edges should be'scuffed in' immediately after rolling the sheet in the asphalt. It is critical that the laps be firmly adhered in the hot asphalt. Asphalt should always extrude from the entire lap. F. Within 72 inches of each exhauster serving a type 1 exhaust hood, provide MBR Flashing Cement,a sacrificial layer of DynaKap Cap Sheet,and a top coat of MBR Flashing Cement. 3.4 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Preparation: Inspect walls, curb heights, counterflashings, etc., and check for conformance with minimum base flashing height of eight (8)". Bring non-conforming areas to the attention of the Owner's Representative for correction. B. Primer: Prime all masonry, metal, or concrete surfaces from the top of the roof membrane to the termination of the flashing level with asphalt primer at the rate of one(1) gallon per 100 square feet or as recommended by the manufacturer. Allow the primer to dry thoroughly. C. Install Johns Manville DynaFlex base flashing at all intersections formed by vertical surfaces, and wherever curbed roof openings, wall, parapets, or other structure joint or penetrate roof. The back of the DynaFlex and the substrate shall both be mopped with asphalt at no less than the EVT temperature or 400°F,whichever is higher, prior to installation. All wall and curb flashings shall be nailed at their top edge in strict accordance with Johns Manville Flashing Specifications using 1" tin-capped nails immediately after flashing membrane installation. C. Install flashing in accordance with roofing manufacturers' specification. Refer to the Manufacturer's Details,end of this section. E. All vertical laps shall be stripped-in with a three course application of MBR Utility Cement and fabric and painted with aluminum emulsion roof coating after it has had a few days to weather. F. Membrane Flashings at Metal Flanges (gravel stops, vents, etc):All flange type flashings (except lead flanges at drains) such as gravel stops and vents shall be primed, set in mastic at approximately 1/8"thick, and securely stagger nailed 3"on center. The flange shall then be stripped in with a minimum 8" wide strip of reinforced modified bitumen base flashing,Johns Manville DynaFlex,after application of the cap sheet. As an alternate, and if scheduling allows, sheet metal flanges may be stripped in over the base ply membrane using one ply of MB base felt prior to installation of the cap sheet. G. All lead flange type flashings(at drains and lead stacks)shall be primed and set in mastic at approximately 1/8"thick. The flange shall then be stripped in with a reinforced modified bitumen base flashing, Johns Manville DynaFlex, after application of the cap sheet. Flashing shall extend a minimum 4"past the edge of the metal flange. As an alternate and if scheduling allows, sheet metal flanges may be stripped in over the base ply membrane using one ply of MB base felt prior to installation of the cap sheet. H. Roof-walk: Install in locations indicated with a 6"gap between planks in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. J. Expansion Joint Covers:Install Johns Manville's Expand-O-Flash as required on the drawings and/or by the manufacturer for specific situations. Material shall have an aluminum flange, EPDM bellows, and where possible shall be the CF configuration mounted on minimum 8"curbs. 3.5 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. Protective Coverings: 1. Install protective coverings at paving and building walls adjacent to hoist and kettles prior to starting work. 2. Lap protective coverings at least 6", secure against wind, and vent to prevent collection of moisture on covered surfaces. YUM—E3.1 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07550-7 July,2008 adhesion. Joints should be butted tightly. Open joints of%" or wider must be filled with scrap insulation E. Form crickets and saddles using 2x lumber and plywood under insulation or by solidly adhering tapered insulation panels over top layer of insulation using full 33 lb. per square moppings of steep asphalt as necessary to provide positive drainage at all portions of the roof area. Board edges shall be butted tightly with no gaps of a %" or larger between them. Gaps of such size must be filled to top surface level with scrap insulation. Install tapered insulation in the same manner. F. If it is found after membrane installation that additional crickets or tapered insulation is required, cut out the underlying membrane and prime the surface of the perlite insulation prior to installation of the new crickets. G. Apply no more insulation than can be completely covered with the roofing membrane on same day. 3.3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Starting at the low edge of the roof, using Johns Manville DynaPly, start with a 18"width. Following 36" wide felts are to be applied full width, overlapping the preceding felts by 3" sidelaps and 4" endlaps so that at least one (1) ply of felt covers the substrate at all locations. Install each felt so that it is firmly and uniformly set,without voids, into the hot asphalt. Asphalt temperatures should be 400°F, or at the Equiviscous Temperature (EVT), whichever is higher. Asphalt should be applied just in front of the roll of felt, at a nominal rate of 23 lbs. per square over the entire surface. Asphalt must bleed out from the sidelaps at all locations. Lightly broom base sheet to ensure proper adhesion. Dry edges of any depth will not be tolerated and must be corrected prior to installation of the modified bitumen cap sheet to avoid creating dry voids within the membrane assembly. B. Modified Bitumen Cap Sheet- Start once again at the low edge of the roof and roll a full width of Johns Manville DynaKap FR into a full mopping of hot asphalt. The remaining sheets are to be applied in the same manner with 4" side and end laps. Mop lead distances shall not exceed 6'. Lightly broom in modified sheet immediately after installation to ensure intimate contact with fluid bitumen and to ensure that it remains completely embedded and adhered in same. Lightly step in side laps to ensure that they are sealed. Asphalt temperatures should be 400°F, or at the Equiviscous Temperature (EVT), whichever is higher. Asphalt should be applied just in front of the roll of felt at a nominal rate of 23 lbs. per square over the entire surface. Cap sheet shall be installed within five(5)days of base felt installation unless accepted in writing by manufacturer. Asphalt must bleed out past the edge of the sheet by a minimum %". Before the asphalt has an opportunity to cool,drop loose white granules into the fluid bitumen. C. Johns Manville's 2CID Modified Bitumen Specifications are an integral part of this specification. D. Steep-Sloped Areas(1/2"per foot or greater): Install nailers per manufacturers' published recommendations to act as insulation blocks and for backnailing roofing plies. Nailers should be installed in a direction perpendicular to the direction of slope and insulation boards must be cut to fit tightly between the nailers. All plies of the roofing membrane must run in a direction parallel to the direction of slope. Endlaps at the upper end of each roll must terminate at and be nailed to the wood nailer a maximum 8"on-center using 1"tin-capped nails. All manufacturers' published back-nailing recommendations must be followed. E. Cold Weather (below 50 0F.) Application of Modified Bitumen: Asphalt must be used, which has an EVT that can accommodate a minimum mop temperature of 4250. NEVER lay modified rolls on their side. Before starting each day, unroll several rolls of DynaKap FR completely and turn over so that the black underside is exposed to the sun. This will warm the sheet and allow it to relax. YUM—E3.1 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing "61PA, Site Number 305-634 07550-6 July,2008 158 mils. (4mm) thick, 82 lbs. per 75 sq.ft. Johns Manville DynaFlex. Must be continuously applied in a full mopping of Type IV roofing asphalt or MBR Flashing Adhesive. G. Roof-Walk: Preformed,skid-resistant boards consisting of modified asphalt, reinforcements and fillers with a ceramic granule surface on both sides. Dimension shall be 32" x 32" x 5116". Johns Manville DynaTred Roof Walkway. H. Cant Strip: Perlite,5-5/8"face(4 x 4 inches), minimum dimension. Johns Manville FesCant Plus. I. Expansion Joint Cover: Johns Manville Expand-O-Flash A weatherproof, non-reinforced elastomeric bellows with closed cell foam backer and bifurcated attachment to metal mounting flanges. Bellows: Type E ,060"(1.6mm) EPDM, black Foam Backer: Minimum thickness 3/8"(9.5mm) Flange Style: 1) CF at Curb to Wall Detail 2) CF at Curb to Curb Flange Metal: Aluminum (26 ga.) Corners and Intersections: To be prefabricated by the manufacturer Must be covered by 10-year Primary Roofing Manufacturer's System Guarantee. J. Pitch Pan Filler:Two component polyurethane elastomeric sealant. Johns Manville UltraGard EPDM Pourable Sealer. Used at Taco Bell"Flying Arch"only. K. All other materials not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of roofing,shall be selected by approved manufacturer and subject to approval of Owner's Representative/Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Inspect wood deck closely for: Proper securement of boards to joists with no loose decking. Damaged Panels. Deterioration. Unacceptable areas should be brought to the attention of the General Contractor and Owner's Representative prior to installation of roofing system. 2. Ensure that wood blocking has been installed as detailed in the plans and specifications. 3. Make sure that all counterflashing receivers, curbs,etc.are constructed in such a manner as to provide a minimum 8" base flashing height measured from the finished roofs surface to the top of the base flashing membrane. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Rosin Sheet: Tack down a rosin sheet to prevent bitumen drippage. Laps in rosin sheet shall be offset from plywood deck joints by a minimum of 12". B. Base Layer of Insulation: Starting at the low edge of the roof, mechanically attach one layer of Johns Manville Polyisocyanu rate Roof Insulation using fasteners at the prescribed rate to achieve FM 1-90 uplift resistance. Use additional fasteners at perimeters and corners as prescribed in the Factory Mutual 1-28 publication. Fasteners shall be no closer than 6"to the board edge. Fasteners must be sized to and penetrate no less than 1". C. Install boards with long joints continuous and running in a direction parallel to the decking. Short joints should be staggered. Joints should be butted tightly. D. Subsequent Layers of Insulation: Offsetting all vertical joints by a minimum of 6", solidly adhere perlite board roof insulation using a 33 lb. per square application of Type IV asphalt applied at the EVT temperature. Step in each board to ensure maximum YUM—E3.1 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07550-5 July,2008 %by Volume-2 hours ...3.5%max Compression Resistance (ASTM C 165) 5%Consolidation.....psi...35......(kPa)...241 10%Consolidation...psi...50......(kPa)....517 Laminar Tensile Strength(ASTM C 209) Psi...4.9............(kPa)...33.8 Flexural Strength, psi (ASTM C 203) Psi...60............(kPa)...414 Product Density(ASTM C 209) Pcf....... 11-14......(kg/rn3).. 192 Linear Expansion (ASTM C 209) %max...0.5 Tapered Insulation (As required): Johns Manville tapered ENRGY 2/3 or Tapered Fesco Board. C. Insulation Securement: Wood Deck: Base Layer-Fasteners: Screws and metal plates shall be tested and approved by Factory Mutual in accordance with their standard 4470 and listed in the current FM Approval Guide as such. Top Layer-Asphalt conforming to Type IV, ASTM D-312, as supplied by a source acceptable to the primary roofing manufacturer and eligible for inclusion under the coverage of the specified guarantee. D. Membrane Roofing: 1. Cover areas shingle-fashion with a 2-ply progressive composition modified bitumen roof system, consisting of Type IV asphalt, a Modified Bitumen Polyester and Fiberglass reinforced smooth surfaced base sheet, Cover with a U.L. Class A SBS Modified Bitumen fiberglass and polyester reinforced Cap Sheet with factory applied white granule surface. , 2. Modified Base Ply: ASTM D-6162, Type ll, Grade S. A SBS modified bitumen membrane with a polyester and fiber glass reinforcement. Thickness shall be 125 mils(3.2 mm) minimum. Nominal weight shall be 90 lbs. per 1 sq. roll. Johns Manville DynaPly. 3. Modified Bitumen Cap Sheet: ASTM D-6162, Type ll, Grade G. Fiberglass and polyester reinforced, fire rated, SBS modified bitumen sheet with white granule surface. Nominal thickness shall be 160 mils. Nominal weight shall be 115 lbs. per 1 sq. roll. Johns Manville DynaKap FR. 4. Interply moppings of asphalt and insulation adhesive shall be Type IV, ASTM D- 312, as supplied by a source acceptable to the primary roofing manufacturer and eligible for inclusion under the coverage of the specified guarantee. E. Base Flashing 1. ASTM D 6221, Type I Reinforced modified bitumen membrane flashing consisting of a fiberglass scrim and polyester mat reinforcement, an elastomeric base material of SBS rubber and asphalt, with a white ceramic granule surface. 158 mils. (4mm) thick, Nominal weight shall be 82 lbs. per 75 sq. ft. roll Johns Manville DynaFlex. Must be adhered with asphalt or Johns Manville MBR Flashing Adhesive. 2. Flashing Cement: Modified Bitumen flashing Adhesive as recommended by roofing manufacturer. Johns Manville MBR Flashing Adhesive as required. F. Composition Stripping at Gravel Stops and Metal Flanges 1. Asphalt:ASTM-D-312,Type IV 2. Set primed metal flange in bed of MBR Utility Cement and secure to nailer per primary roofing manufacturers'published details. 3. Cover this primed flange with Reinforced modified bitumen membrane flashing consisting of a fiberglass scrim and polyester mat reinforcement, an elastomeric base material of SBS rubber and asphalt, with a white ceramic granule surface. YUM—E3.1 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07550-4 July,2008 OW F. In event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements required by Owner's Representative. G. Comply with all applicable code,fire and safety regulations. H. Flame-heated Equipment 1. Locate and use flame-heated equipment so as not to endanger the structure or other materials on the site or adjacent property. 2. Do not place flame-heating equipment on roof. 3. Provide and maintain fire extinguisher. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Guarantee includes materials and workmanship to maintain roof in a watertight condition. B. Provide single source, single responsibility guarantee which covers membrane, insulation, bituminous flashing and roofing manufacturer-supplied walkways and expansion joint covers. C. Provide Johns Manville's Ten (10)Year Standard Roofing System Guarantee. Guarantee to run from date of substantial completion. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Base Membrane Roofing System: 1. Johns Manville 2CID. 2. Substitutions: None allowed. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Rosin Paper: In widest sheets possible. As necessary to prevent bitumen drippage through roof deck. B. Layer of Insulation: Factory Mutual Class I, Polyisocyanurate Foam Faced with Asphalt/Glass Mat,or Polymer Glass Mat on Both Sides of Foam and complying with ASTM C-1289. Long Term Thermal Resistance to be no less than twenty-five (25) as determined by CAN/ULC 5 770. Thickness of approximately 4.0". Johns Manville E'NRG'Y 2 Roof Insulation, E'NRG'Y 3 Roof Insulation. Base Layer: (2)2-inch layers with a total thickness or 4-inches unless otherwise indicated on drawings;4-foot by 4-foot maximum board size. Typical Physical Properties Values Test Method Water Absorption........................<3.5%................ASTM 0 2842 Dimensional Stability Change......<2%...................ASTM D 2126 Compression Resistance" 10%Consolidation-psi(kPa)........20(138) nom.......ASTM D 1621 Moisture Vapor Permeance...........<1 perm.............ASTM E 96 (57.5 ng/(Pa.s.m2) Service Temperature...................-100 to 200°F (-73°to 93°C) Tensile Strength-psf(kPa)............730(35) nom......ASTM 01623 Top Layer: Retro-Fit Board-1/2-inch high density rigid board consisting of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders,and waterproofing agents with top surface seal-coated, complying with ASTM C728. Physical Properties-1/2"Thick(13mm) Water Absorption(ASTM C 209) YUM—E3.1 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07550-3 July,2008 1.4 PRE-ROOFING CONFERENCE A. Hold roofing pre-construction conference at the project site, on the day roofing is schedule to begin. B. Attendance is mandatory for: roofing sub-contractor, roofing foreman, contractor's superintendent, roofing manufacturer's representative and Owner's representative, mechanical subcontractor, sheet metal subcontractor, and anyone else responsible for items penetrating or in contact with roof. C. Agenda 1. Review in detail Owner's Representative's specifications, roof plans and all roof and flashing details. 2. Review and understand Factory Mutual and Underwriters Laboratories requirements and resolve all conflicts between FM or UL specifications and the Owner's Representative's/manufacturer's specifications. 3. Review roof plans; for slope, deck type, drainage, membrane attachment, expansion joints, flashing and details. Resolve all conflicts between what is considered good roofing practice and the specifications. 4. Review proposed roofing system and recommended work practices for its installation. 5. Study all plans to determine whether different roof areas have different requirements. 6. Designate which areas on site will be available for use as storage and working areas. 7. Review procedures to be followed to provide proper protection of roof system during and after construction of roof. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and data to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. B. Manufacturer's written agreement to issue specified guarantee on the specified roof system when installed by successful bidding roofing contractor. C. The Contractor selected for this work must be approved by the primary materials Manufacturer, Johns Manville, and be capable of providing the specified Manufacturer's guarantee. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE&HANDLING A. Store materials in a cool,dry place. B. Store roll material on end on clean,dry, raised surface. C. Place insulation on raised-surface and protect with waterproof tarpaulins, with sufficient air circulation to prevent condensation. D. Do not install wet insulation. E. Store solvents, emulsions,and coatings in a cool,dry area between 45 and 100 degrees F. Handle roll-materials to prevent damaged ends. G. Allow no unlabeled materials on site. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not start roofing if rain is imminent or ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. B. If rain occurs during roof membrane application, cease operations and protect deck, insulation, penetrations and membrane from water damage and intrusion. C. Remove and replace all material that has been subject to moisture. D. Protect finished surfaces of building from damage by installation of roofing system. E. Protect completed roofing and (lashings from damage by subsequent roofing installation and construction traffic. YUM—E3.1 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07550-2 July,2008 SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING PARTI GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work includes: 1. Installation of one layer of a high thermal roof insulation mechanically attached to a wood roof deck. Subsequent layers set in hot asphalt. 2. New two ply white mineral surfaced SBS modified bitumen membrane system, including flashing. 3. Applicator is SOLELY responsible for accuracy of all measurements and estimates of material, quantities, and sizes. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): ASTM D-41 - Asphalt Primer ASTM C-1289 - Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyisocyanu rate Foam Faced with Asphalt/Glass Mat, or Polymer Glass Mat on Both Sides of Foam. (1.5" Minimum Thickness)) ASTM C-728 - Perlite Roof Insulation ASTM D-312 - Type IV (4) - Asphalt used for insulation adhesive and roof membrane installation. Modified mastic as recommended by the manufacturer - (Johns Manville MBR Utility Cement/MBR Flashing Adhesive) ASTM D-5147 - Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Material ASTM D-6162 - Type 11, Grade S. SBS Sheet Materials using a Combination of Polyester and Fiberglass Reinforcements with smooth surfacing. ASTM D-6162 - Type II, Grade G. SBS Sheet Materials using a Combination of Polyester and Fiberglass Reinforcements with granular surfacing. B. Underwriters Laboratories- U.L. Class A Fire Rating for entire roof system. System shall be listed in the current U.L. Building Materials Directory. C. Factory Mutual Engineering Corp.: Class 1, Wind Rating, IA-90 Approval, as determined in accordance with FMRC Standard 4470, assuming roof deck meets FM requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Currently approved in writing by manufacturer of roofing system prior to award of roofing contract. Documentation of Johns Manville Guarantee Application Confirmation. B. Documentation of Johns Manville Guarantee Application Confirmation Confirmation 10 days prior to job start that the subject project has been registered with Johns Manville for a Request for a guarantee. Contact the local Johns Manville Representative to register the project or sign up to register projects on line at www.6m.com/signmeup. If you have signed up to use the on line registration service and have a pass word to use the Guarantee Management System at the JM Connexus site, go directly to http://eb.4m.com/to register the Guarantee Application. C. This documentation of registration must be submitted at the schedule Pre-Job Conference. YUM—E3.1 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing Site Number 305-634 07550-1 July,2008 recommended. Smooth,clean plywood or plank walkways, runways and platforms shall be provided as necessary. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The roof insulation shall be installed with approved fasteners and distribution plates placed according to the manufacturer's most recent published specifications for the use under Duro-Last Roofing, Inc.'s roofing system and for issuance of the warranty. B. Install the roofing system to Duro-last Roofing, Inc.'s most recent published specifications. 3.3 INSPECTION and WARRENTY A. After the installation is complete,a Technical Representative Specialist employed by Duro-last Roofing, Inc. shall inspect the visible details of the roofing system for acceptability for warranty issuance.Any deficiencies shall be corrected by the Contractor and made ready for re-inspection within five(5)working days. Upon acceptance,the warranty and inspection report will be promptly issued to General Contractor within 5 working days. YUM! Brands withholds final payment(10% retainage) until General Contractor submits warranty and inspection report to YUM! Brands. PART 4 MANUFACTURER'S DETAILS 4.1 Refer to(insert)attached .PDF Roofing Details. A. General Details. B. Curb Flashing. C. Horizontal Membrane Termination at Gutter. D. Horizontal Membrane Termination at Roof Edge. E. Membrane at Parapet Wall. F. Pole Mounting through Parapet Wall Membrane. G. Roof Penetration at Curb. H. Roof Penetration at Pipe/Vent Stack. I. Vent Stack Flashing. J. Vertical Membrane Termination. K. Walkway Pad. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM Site Number 35-634 07523-5 July,2008 h4tfler AdhesT�, s 2aQ F; i glee cft M '� � lans 1f1m rnbran�F7 ' 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. As required by Local Jurisdiction. B. One-half(1/2") R=3.0 or better board insulation shall be the minimum required by Duro-last Roofing, Inc. and YUM! Restaurant Services Group for the system proposed and issuance of the warranty. Roof Insulation board thickness and R- value shall be dictated by minimum region requirements 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. As indicated on the Drawings and required by the manufacturer. B. Roof Walk Pads. 1. 2 ft.—6 inch x 5 ft.—0 inch full-skirt safety stripe walk pads as manufactured by Duro-Last Roofing. C. Satellite Sled under-lay. 1. Contractor to install a 10'x 10'area of Duro-Last Walk pads(four 5ft.x 5ft. walk pads-Duro-Last item number 1308)with tabs welded to the deck sheet membrane to support a satellite sled. Also provide a second layer of walk pads(four 5ft.x 5 ft.walk pads-Duro-Last item number 1308)not welded to deck sheet membrane. General Contractor to coordinate a site visit with satellite/sled installer and roofing contractor during roofing installation to properly identify the required install area, local codes and other details. C. No EDPM permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE INSPECTION A. Inspect all surfaces to receive roofing for any condition that will adversely affect execution, performance, or quality of work. Conduct a fastener pull-test and roof core-test to determine condition of roof and appropriateness of a Duro-last re-roofing installation. Contractor shall identify to General Contractor or Construction Manager areas or sections of roof that need to be replaced and obtain approval of General Contractor or Construction Manager before work commencement. B. All roof surfaces and all sloped surfaces to drains and outlets shall be checked and approved by the roofing contractor prior to the start of the roofing work. C. Install roofing material only under satisfactory conditions as specified by the membrane manufacturer. 3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not layout or expose any insulation on the deck that cannot be covered by membrane on the same day. B. In making all field heat welds, make sure all edges are clean and free of tar, mastic or other foreign items. C. Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 120 degrees Fahrenheit. D. Sealants and adhesives should be applied according to Duro-last Roofing, Inc.'s specifications. E. Start securing the membrane at the highest point and work towards the drains. F. Storing,wheeling, or trucking directly on roof insulation or membrane surface is not YUM—E3.1 SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM Site Number 35-634 07523-4 July,2008 B. Roofing system shall not be applied when weather conditions are not within the range acceptable under Duro-last Roofing, Inc.'s recommendations. D. If rain occurs during roof membrane application,cease operations and protect the roof deck, insulation,penetrations and membrane from water damage and intrusion. E. Remove and replace all material that has been subject to moisture. F. Protect finished surfaces of building from damage by installation of roofing system. G. Protect completed roofing and flashings from damage from subsequent roofing installation and construction traffic. H. In the event of damage,immediately make all repairs and replacements required by Owner's Representative. I. Comply with all applicable code,fire and safety regulations. J. Flame-heated equipment: 1. Locate and use flame-heated equipment so as not to endanger the structure or other materials on the site or adjacent properties. 2. Do not place flame-heated equipment on the roof. 3. Provide and maintain a fire extinguisher. � E I? pf�rf em W�tllga`�iF2Iedenae Index not fess � �lai tl i`M E� Bd�n $ t .��enticaF . PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Membrane components to be products of Duro-last Roofing, Inc. 2. A special formulated, permanent,thermoplastic alloy, bonded to a high tenacity, low shrinkage weft inserted polyester fabric with resistance to ultraviolet rays, microorganisms and impervious to most caustic chemicals, animal fats,greases and oils typically found on a restaurant roof. 3. Membrane shall be factory welded into prefabricated sheets up to 2,500 square feet or as determined by job condition. 4. The new roofing shall be a prefabricated mechanically fastened installation of single-ply reinforced thermoplastic membrane,40 mils thick. 5. Fire resistance of the thermoplastic roofing system shall meet UL Class A. All packaging of membrane and insulation shall bear UL Class A label. 6. Membrane color shall be white. 7. All roofing components used at roof penetrations shall be provided by Duro- last Roofing, Incorporated,including metal edge terminations,scuppers, downspouts,thru-wall drains and flashings. OMNI t "rnme goofing system.manufadturerciz fOi g° rid r Pane rGOTI e is lieyus he rhea terprOn =,,ed` i'lg to; t�ftipttF,,, �a ttel .::. s es} so grL,c er esi �ra 7 f Pies„ d eld t 1poU d5ig 5d;� ng. sx YUM—E3.1 SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM Site Number 35-634 07523-3 July,2008 1.4 PRE-ROOFING CONFERENCE A. Attendance is required for: Roofing Sub-Contractor, Roofing Foreman, Contractor's Superintendent, Roofing Manufacturer's Representative,Owner's Representative, Mechanical Sub-Contractor, Sheet Metal Sub-Contractor and anyone else responsible for items penetrating or coming contact with the roof membrane. B. Agenda: 1. Review in detail Owner's Representative's specifications, roof plans and all Roof and flashing details. 2. If a manufacturer's specification is used, review, and resolve all deviations or differences from the Owner's Representative's specifications. 3. Review and understand Factory Mutual and Underwriters Laboratories requirements and resolve all conflicts between FM or UL specifications and the Owner's representative's/Manufacturer's specifications. 4. Review roof plans;for slope, deck type, drainage, membrane attachment, expansion joints,flashing and details. Resolve all conflicts between what is considered good roofing practices and the specifications. 5. Review proposed roofing system and recommended work practices for its installation. 6. Study all plans to determine whether different roof areas have different Requirements. 7. Designate which areas on site will be available for use as storage and working areas. 8. Review procedures to be followed to provide proper protections of roof System during and after construction of roof. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Written confirmation from Duro-Last Roofing, Inc.that the installer is an Authorized Dealer/Contractor. B. Shop drawing showing the layout of the prefabricated roofing panels shall be submitted to YUM! General Contractor and Construction Manager prior to work commencement. ED $ittals . P %1 rtt f jft st� rtt ,,W� W 1.6 DELIVERY, STOREAGE and HANDLING A. Store materials in a cool,dry place; on a raised surface. B. Place insulation on a raised surface and protect with waterproof tarpaulins,with sufficient air circulation to prevent condensation. C. Do not install wet insulation. D. Store solvents,emulsions,and coating in a cool,dry area between 45 and 100 degress F. E. Handle materials to prevent damaged ends. F. Allow no unlabeled materials on site. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Follow Duro-last Roofing, Inc.'s instructions, cautions,warnings and procedures. YUM—E3.1 SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM Site Number 35-634 07523-2 July,2008 SECTION 07523 SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Includes: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a 40 mil single-ply membrane roofing system tha is fabricated of a weft inserted low-shrink,anti-wicking polyester fabric and has a thermoplastic coating material laminated to both sides as manufactured by Duro-last Roofing, Inc. 2. All deck sheets and parapets should be pulled tight and installed as wrinkle free as possible. 3. Furnish and install new 2 ft.—6 inch x 5 ft.—0 inch safety stripe,full skirt walk pads from roof access point to each piece of HVAC,refrigeration and exhaust ventilation equipment that will require cyclical service. Duro-Last walk pads should be installed by welding the six inch skirts completely to the deck membrane with a full 1-1/2 inch weld to prevent the walk pads from dislodging. Verify with General Contractor or YUM! Brands Construction Manager exact quantity of pads required. Itemize walk pad costs on bid. 4. Contractor to install the membrane system per all local, state and federal codes and regulations. 5. On all parapet locations,wrap parapet with new pre-manufactured parapet flashings by Duro-Last Roofing and terminate on top of wall at the exterior wall face. Install Duro-Last Roofing 2-piece,4 inch compression metal edge detail, color to be chosen by YUM! Brands, Inc. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. YUM! Brands Restaurant Services Group requires that the roof have the Duro-last Roofing, Inc.'s standard written 15-year(labor and materials)warranty at no additional charge. Warranty shall be issued by the original manufacturer of the roofing membrane. No private label products shall be accepted. General Contractor may only utilize authorized Duro-Last installers to bid and install the Duro-Last system. Verification of an authorized installer or an updated referral list may be obtained by contacting a Duro-Last Regional Sales Manager at 1-800-248-0280. A Duro-Last authorized contractor referral list with Duro-Last corporate contact information shall also be provided to each YUM! Brands Construction Manager for his or her specific area, and updated by request. Upon warranty inspection and acceptance of the roof,the warranty shall be turned over to the Contractor on behalf of YUM! Brands Restaurant Services Group by a Quality Assurance Technician employed by Duro-last Roofing, Inc. 1.3 WEIGHT REQUIREMENTS A. The total weight of the installed roofing system including all accessories; i.e.,screws, plates,2-way breather vents,etc.,shall not exceed 25 pounds per square,not including insulation weight. Insulation weight varies according to R-value desired. B. Contractor shall inform YUM! Brands General Contractor and Construction Manager of all timelines,schedules and construction processes prior to work commencement. ew YUM—E3.1 SINGLE PLY ROOFING SYSTEM Site Number 35-634 07523-1 July,2008 2.03 FABRICATION A. Factory Finishing: 1. Fluoropolymer:Thermally cured fluoropolymer primer and top coats composed of Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin in amounts that are in accordance with AAMA 2605. 2.04 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation drawings and instructions. B. Coordinate with mechanical to ensure SolarWall systems can be connected to fan and ventilation system. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions:Verify that substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 METAL WALL PANELS Site Number 305-634 074213-3 July,2008 Facility(NSTF) procedures for transpired solar collectors. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: In accordance with Section 014100- Regulatory Requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 10 years experience in the design and manufacture of solar air heating systems. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE&HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirements Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01330—Submittal Procedures for Owner's acceptance manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. 1. Warranty Period: a. System: 12 months from the date of installation or 15 months from the date of shipment,whichever comes first. b. Panel: 12 months from the date of installation or 15 months from the date of shipment,whichever comes first. 44ftk. c. Paint: 20 years for fluoropolymer finish against peeling, chipping and fading. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL WALL PANELS A. Manufacturer: Conserval Systems, Inc. 1. Contact:4242 Ridge Lea Road, Suite 28, Buffalo, NY 14226;Telephone: (716)835-4903; Fax: (716)835-4904; E-mail: info @solarwall.com;website:www.solarwall.com. 2. Contact: 200 Wildcat Road,Toronto, Ontario M3J 2N5 Canada; Telephone: (416)661- 7057; Fax: (416)661-7146; E-mail: info @solarwall.com;website:www.solarwall.com. B. SolarWall: 1. Type: SW150. 2. Metal: Galvanized steel, 24 gauge,ASTM A653 and A775. 3. Configuration: 1.43 inch ribs with 35.44 inch coverage 37.21 inch wide panel. 4. Finish: Fluoropolymer. a. Color: Classic Bronze. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Stand-Off Components: Provide galvanized steel components to support the panels in a manner as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Flashing: Provide flashing materials to match the metal and finish of the panels. C. Fasteners: Provide corrosion resistant self-drilling screws and rivets as recommended by the manufacturer. Exposed fasteners must be finished to match the panels. YUM—E3.1 METAL WALL PANELS Site Number 305-634 074213-2 July,2008 OOOK SECTION 074213 METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Perforated metal wall panel system that uses solar energy as fuel to heat or ventilate indoor spaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Sealants: Division 07 sealant sections. 2. Connections to Ventilation Fans: Division 23 HVAC sections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A755 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 3. ASTM 8209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 2605 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Air Intake: Provide a panel system that will provide for heating 3-6 cubic feet per minute of fresh air per square foot of panel. 2. Structural: Provide a panel system that will safely withstand dead and live loads Indicated on the drawings. 3. Expansion and Contraction: Provide a panel system that will accommodate expansion and contraction due to solar heat gain and ambient temperatures without damaging panel system performance. a. Design Ambient Temperature Range: Minus[ ]to plus[ ]degrees F. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Section 013300-Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA®sheet,for specified products. C. Shop Drawings: Submit installation drawings that show the arrangement and orientation of panels. Include details of stand-off components, panel joints,flashing and trim for closures. D. Samples: 1. Submit color chart of manufacturer's full range of standard colors for specified finish. 2. Submit color chip of color to be selected. E. Test Reports: Submit test reports indicating compliance with specified National Solar Test YUM—E3.1 METAL WALL PANELS Site Number 305-634 074213-1 July,2008 Ow END OF SECTION ork YUM—E3.1 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 07240-5 July,2008 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD SUPPORT SERVICES A. Upon request and with prior notification(2 weeks minimum), STO Field Representatives and/or STO Distributor Personnel will make themselves available to attend Pre-Construction Conference and conduct periodic on-site Installation Observations. B. It is the recommendation of Yum! Brands Inc.that the General Contractor/Construction Manager schedule a minimum of Two(2)Site Visits with STO Rep/Distributor: 1. Pre-Construction Conference 2. After the application of the Air/Moisture Barrier(see section 09540)and before the application of the Insulation Board (see 2.23 this section) C. Contact: Sto Strategic Accounts @ 1-888-STO-EIFS or(888-786-3437)and/or www.stocorp.com for a list of STO Distributor contact names 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install in accordance with system manufacturer's most current printed instructions. 3.3 TOUCH-UP A. After installation,the contractor shall touch-up areas where finish coat has been damaged with manufacturer's recommended primer and finish coat. B. Touch-up so that repair is not obvious. 3.4 COMPLETION A. When complete assembly shall be set square, plumb and level,accurately aligned to position intended, and securely anchored to prevent movement. B. Levels and joints shall be sharp, straight, accurately aligned with other running components, and joints between adjoining components shall be neatly and closely fitted as indicated. C. Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches,dents,tool marks,stains, discoloration,and other defects and damage. PART 4 MANUFACTURER'S DETAILS 4.1 Refer to(insert)attached .PDF EIFS Details: A. STO_2.74 Downspout Attachment B. STO_10.00 System Components C. STO_10.00a System Components for High Impact D. STO_10.10a Termination at Grade E. STO_10.11 termination at Sidewalk F. STO 10.23a Preparation of Rough Opening G. STO 10.24a Window Head H. STO 10.25a Window Jamb I. STO 10.26b Window Sill J. STO 10.30 Un-Vented Soffit K. STO 10.42a Horizontal Joint at Dissimilar Material L. STO 10.50a Vertical Joint at Dissimilar Material M. STO 10.51 Vertical Joint at Inside Corner N. STO 10.60 Termination at Parapet O. STO 10.70 Pipe Penetration P. STO_10.82 Sign Attachment YUM—E3.1 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 07240-4 July,2008 1. Sto Mesh--nominal 4.5 oz./yd2(153 g/m2), symmetrical, interlaced open-weave glass fiber fabric made with minimum 20 percent by weight alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials(achieves Standard Impact Classification). B. Ultra-High Impact Mesh 1. Sto Armor Mat--nominal 15 oz./yd 2(509 g/m2),ultra-high impact, double strand, interwoven,open-weave glass fiber fabric with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials(use Ultra High-Impact EIF System on areas as indicated on drawings). C. Specialty Meshes 1. Sto Detail Mesh--nominal 4.2 oz/yd 2(143 g/m2),flexible, symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber fabric,with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials(used for standard EIFS back-wrapping, aesthetic detailing, and reinforcement of sheathing joints and protection of rough openings with air/moisture barrier). 2. Sto Corner Mat--nominal 7.8 oz./yd2(265 g/m2), pre-creased, heavy-duty, open-weave woven glass fiber fabric with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials(used for maximum impact protection at inside and outside corners). 2.28 JOB MIXED INGREDIENTS A. Water-Clean and potable. B. Portland cement-Type I in conformance with ASTM C 150. 2.29 ACCESSORIES A. Starter Track—Rigid PVC(polyvinyl chloride) plastic track Part No. STDE as furnished by Plastic Components, Inc.,9051 NW 97th Terrace,Miami, Florida 33178(800 327-7077). 2.30 SEALANTS A. Listed by the system manufacturer and approved by the sealant manufacturer for the selected system. Dow Corning Sealants are recommended by Sto Corp. and required for a single source warranty. Contact Sto Corp.for the specific types of Dow sealants required to obtain the single source warrant t�1tt e4tt� 2 ass a1cu1„ate kt�° Cl a 2.31 MIXING AND PREPARATION A. Perform according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2.26 PRIMER(optional component) A. Sto Primer acrylic based tinted primer. Note:the primer is an optional component except when specifying fine aggregate finishes such as Sto Decocoat, Stolit.75,or Sto Granitex. It may be tinted to match the finish color and enhances finish color and adhesion of all finishes. 2.27 FINISH COAT A. Sto Essence DPR Finish—acrylic based textured wall coating with graded marble aggregate. 1. Color: Refer to finish schedule on Drawings. 2. Texture: Fine Sand unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Note:specify finish color with a lightness value of 20%or greater. YUM—E3.1 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 07240-3 July,2008 AO%A criteria and requirements for the system components, including the Air&Moisture Barrier in section 07195. 2.2 MATERIALS 2.21 AIR/MOISTURE BARRIER A. Sto Guard 1. Joint Compound: Sto Gold Fill",'&—ready mixed acrylic based flexible joint compound for rough opening protection and joint treatment of wall sheathing. Used with StoGuard Mesh. 2. Waterproof Coating:Sto Gold CoatT"'—ready mixed acrylic based waterproof coating for wall sheathing. Note: Sto Guard is not recommended for use over pressure treated or fire retardant treated wood sheathing,contact Sto Corp.for recommendations. 2.22 ADHESIVE A. Cementitious Adhesives 1. Sto Primer/Adhesive-B—one component polymer modified cement-based,factory blend,adhesive with less than 33 percent Portland cement content by weight(for use over exterior gypsum sheathing, Dens-Glass®Gold sheathing, Exterior Cementitious sheathing ,concrete, masonry or plaster surfaces.Also to be used over Exterior or Exposure I OSB and Plywood sheathm when protected with Sto Guard) 2.'. ICrtC C�na£�X S?f 4, �„r,., 2.23 INSULATION BOARD A. Nominal 1.0 Ib/ft3(16 kg/m3) Expanded Polystyrene(EPS) Insulation Board in compliance with ASTM C 578 Type I requirements,and EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene(EPS) Insulation Board. Note: minimum required thickness is 1 inch[25 mm]and maximum allowable thickness is typically 4 inches[100 mm] unless thicker dimensions are approved by the code official. 2.24 BASE COAT A. Cementitious Base Coats 1. Sto Primer/Adhesive-B—one component polymer modified cement based factory blend,base coat with less than 33 percent Portland cement content by weight. B. Waterproof Base Coat(where required on drawings) 1. Sto Flexyl—two component fiber reinforced acrylic based waterproof base coat mixed with Portland cement(for use as a waterproof base coat to waterproof foundations, parapets,splash areas,trim and other projecting architectural features). 2.25 REINFORCING MESHES A. Standard Mesh AWN YUM-E3.1 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 07240-2 July,2008 SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. System: Class PB,drainable type Exterior Insulation and Finish System incorporating a fluid- applied waterproofing/air barrier. B. Entire system to have a ASTM E 84 Flame spread classification of 0 to 25. 1.2 SUBMITTALS V " MW &W-0 ttCt C1 a i 1 dhes it u� & e wfsathetprgfrt „eH(tG1ud _f1tid, ,.u w d ntn 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Minimum of 5 years previous experience and evidence of manufacturer's or AWCI training. B. Manufacturer: Minimum of 10 years experience producing component materials for system installed in this country. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather and Environmental Conditions 1. Do not apply system during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is employed. 2. Installation of wet materials in temperatures less than 40 degrees F shall take place only if supplementary heat is provided and is maintained for a minimum of 24 hours OW after application of the wet materials. B. Protection 1. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces during the application of the wall system. 2. Protect system when work ceases for the day or when an area is completed so that water will not infiltrate behind the system. 1.5 COORDINATION A. The work of this section requires close coordination with related sections and trades. B. Tops of walls must immediately be covered with either the final trim or temporarily protected to prevent water infiltration behind the system. Install cap flashing as soon as possible after the finish coat has been installed. C. Install sealants in a timely manner. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide 10 year labor and material warranty for entire EIFS system. B. The EIFS Warranty shall cover against blistering, peeling,flaking,delamination, rusting, checking or chipping as a result of manufacturing defects. C. The EIFS Contractor shall provide 3 year workmanship warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Design Standard: EIFS system and products listed herein are based on Essence Next EIFS with drainable components as manufactured by Sto Corp. Contact:Sto Strategic Accounts @ 1-888-STO-EIFS or(888-786-3437). B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein;other submitted manufacturer's product components&drainable EIFS System must meet the performance YUM—E3.1 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 07240-1 July,2008 OPW 3.3 FOAMED IN PLACE A. Insulation to be placed in wall per manufacturer's specifications. The material shall be applied in a such manner as to assure complete cavity fill. The product shall be applied with the liquid ratios at the mixing gun being within the manufacturere's specified range. A cubic foot of the fresh foam shall weigh between 2 lbs.8 oz.and 3 lbs.6 oz. After installation of the material,allow two weeks for curing before painting walls. B. The installation of the insulation shall be contracted only by a firm which is certified and/or approved by the manufacturer of the insulation. C. After the foam is installed and cured,walls shall be protected from excessive moisture(rain) for at least 72 hours. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Exterior Walls and Soffits: Type 4, R-value 19 minimum. B. Roof Insulation: Refer to Section 07550. C. Acoustical Insulation, Interior Walls: none. D. Foundation: none. END OF SECTION Ow !w YUM—E3.1 BUILDING INSULATION Site Number 305-634 07210-3 July,2008 AaRk 3. Density: 8 pcf minimum. 4. Compressive Strength: 25 psi. 5. Water Absorption: 0.3 percent maximum per ASI/ASTM D 2842. 6. Edges: Tongue and groove. B. Acceptable Products: 1. Styrofoam SM by Dow. 2.5 FOAMED IN PLACE INSULATION—CELL FILL—INSULATION TYPE 4 A. Foamed in place insulation in all available cells yielding minimum R-value of 11. B. Acceptable Products: 1. CP Chemical Co. Inc.,Tripolymer(800)837-2517 2. Thermal Corporation of America,Thermco Foam Insulation(888)385-3626 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Tape: Pressure sensitive type, recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. Insulation Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 BATT AND BLANKET INSTALLATION A. Install insulation either friction fit, using adhesive,or mechanical fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after mechanical and electrical services have been installed. B. Fit insulation tight within stud spaces, above soffits, behind facias,and tight to and behind mechanical and electric services within plane of insulation,leaving no gaps or voids. Butt insulation tightly. Cut and fit tightly around items penetrating insulation. Stagger and butt joints, or cavity of a cavity wall system. C. Within metal stud or joist systems install full height and width in such manner that voids or openings do not occur. Insulation is required for full width between studs, including cavity of each stud. Do not allow insulation to obstruct vents. D. Cut and trim insulation neatly,to fit spaces. Cut insulation oversize to ensure tight butt joints when installed. Cut insulation to fit around protrusions and irregularly shaped projections. Use batts free of ripped backs or edges. E. Batt Insulation with Vapor Barrier Membrane 1. Install insulation with factory applied membrane facing"warm in winter'side of building spaces. If in doubt,confirm location with Owner's Representative. 2. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members;fasten in place at maximum 6 inches on center or tape in place. 3. Tape seal butt ends; lap side flanges and ends;do not tear membrane. F. Install sound attenuating blankets above ceilings and in stud cavities where detailed or scheduled. Butt tightly. 3.2 RIGID BOARD INSTALLATION—FOUNDATION PERIMETER(cold climates-where indicated on Drawings) A. Apply adhesive adhesive in three continuous beads per board length. B. Install boards on foundation wall and grade beam perimeter. Place boards in a method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger side joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. C. Extend boards over control and expansion joints, unbonded to foundation 6 inches either side of joint. YUM—E3.1 BUILDING INSULATION Site Number 305-634 07210-2 July,2008 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements. B. Provide continuity of vapor and air barrier at building enclosure elements. 1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install insulation during inclement weather or when surfaces are moist. 1.3 SUBMITTALS � � ft t g ���� f of postca sum�r and���ix�nsurner tied c�rr# t tl� d /nysy d�pnl, ib r ca w�et;f[ybe'IR trt�syu�a '46�yycl v7 PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following. Refer to Articles below for specific products. 1. Bonded Logic, Ultra Touch,Chandler,AZ 10000-01916, R-Value 19, 5.5" B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 BATT(THERMAL) INSULATION-KRAFT FACED—INSULATION TYPE 1 A. Glass fiber composition faced with integral kraft paper-faced vapor barrier, minimum 1 pound per cubic foot density, meeting following standards: 1. ASTM E 84: Flame spread 25 maximum;smoke developed 50 maximum. 2. ASTM C 518: R value of 3.2 per inch of thickness. 3. ASTM C 665: Type III. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL SEMI-RIGID, INSULATION TYPE 2 A. Mineral fiber composition, unfaced, semi-rigid, meeting following standards: 1. ASTM E 84: FHC 15/10 maximum. 2. ASTM C 518: R value of 4.0 per inch of thickness. 3. ASTM C 665: Type I. B. Following products are acceptable: 1. Sound Attenuating Fire Blankets(SAFB) by U.S. Gypsum Co. 2. Sound Control Blankets by Fibrex Co. 2.4 RIGID BOARD, INSULATION TYPE 3 A. Polystyrene Insulation: Extruded cellular type, meeting the following: 1. Aged Thermal Resistance: R value of 5.0. 2. Thickness: Refer to Drawings. YUM—E3.1 BUILDING INSULATION Site Number 305-634 07210-1 July,2008 C. Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other conditions that might adversely affect the air and moisture barrier installation. Do not start work until deviations are corrected. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove surface contaminants and replace damaged sheathing. D. Spot surface defects in sheathing with joint compound. C. Repair cracks,spalls,or other damage in concrete or concrete masonry surfaces 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install air/moisture barrier in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 AIRIMOISTURE BARRIER Site Number 305-634 07195-5 July,2008 2.3 REINFORCING MESH A. Sto Guard Mesh-nominal 4.2 oz/sq.yd. (142 g/m2),self-adhesive,flexible,symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber fabric,with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials(used with Sto Gold FilITM to reinforce rough openings, inside and outside corners and sheathing joints). B. Sto Detail Mesh-nominal 4.2 oz/sq.yd. (142 g/m2),flexible,symmetrical,interlaced glass fiber fabric,with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials(used with Sto Gold FilITM to reinforce rough openings, inside and outside corners and sheathing joints). 2.4 MIXING A. Mix materials with a clean, rust-free electric drill and paddle. B. Do not dilute materials with water or add other ingredients. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD SUPPORT SERVICES A. Upon request and with prior notification (2 weeks minimum), STO Field Representative and/or STO Distributor Personnel will make themselves available to attend Pre- Construction Conference and conduct periodic on-site Installation Observations. B. It is the recommendation of Yum! Brands Inc.that the General Contractor/Construction Manager schedule a minimum of Two(2)Site Visits with STO Rep/Distributor: 1. Pre-Construction Conference 2. After the application of the Air/Moisture Barrier(this section)and before the Application of the Insulation Board (see section 07240) C. Contact: Sto Strategic Accounts @ 1-888-STO-EIFS or(888-786-3437)and/or www.stocorp.com for a list of STO Distributor contact names. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Inspect concrete and concrete masonry surfaces for: 1. Contamination—algae,chalkiness, dirt,dust,efflorescence,form oil,fungus, grease, mildew or other foreign substances. 2. Surface absorption and chalkiness. 3. Cracks—measure crack width and record location of cracks. 4. Damage and deterioration. 5. Moisture content and moisture damage—use a moisture meter to determine if the surface is dry enough to receive the air and moisture barrier and record any areas of moisture damage or excess moisture. 6. Compliance with specification tolerances—record areas that are out of tolerance (greater than 1/4 inch in 8-0 feet[6 mm in 2438 mm]deviation in plane). B. Inspect sheathing application for compliance with applicable requirement: 1. Glass mat faced gypsum sheathing—Georgia Pacific Publication 102250 2. Exterior Grade and Exposure I wood based sheathing—APA E30 YUM-E3.1 AIR/MOISTURE BARRIER Site Number 305-634 07195-4 July,2008 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING . A Deliver materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name and identification of product. B. Protect coatings (pail products)from freezing temperatures and temperatures in excess of 90°F(32°C).Store away from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40°F (4°C)during application and drying period, minimum 24 hours after application of air and moisture barrier. B. Provide supplementary heat for installation in temperatures less than 40° F(4° C)or if surface temperature is likely to fall below 40° F (4°C). Note: surface temperature is lower than air temperature at night. C. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from application of materials. 1.8 COORDINATION/SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of foundation waterproofing, roofing membrane,windows,doors and other wall penetrations to provide a continuous air barrier. B. Provide protection of rough openings before installing windows,doors, and other penetrations through the wall. C. Provide sill flashing to direct water to the exterior before windows and doors are installed. D. Coordinate installation of windows and doors so air barrier components are connected to them to provide a continuous air barrier. E. Install window and door head flashing immediately after windows and doors are installed. F. Install diverter flashings wherever water can enter the assembly to direct water to the exterior. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty. Ten(10)years when used in conjunction with EIFS and five(5)years when used under other claddings. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Sto Corp.-Basis of Design Contact-Sto Strategic Accounts at 1-888-STO-EIFS(888-786-3437) B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. Submitted products from other manufacturers must be equal in performance criteria as described in section 1.03 and in warranty(section 1.09). 2.2 AIR AND MOISTURE BARRIER A. Fluid applied system equal to Sto Guard by Sto Corporation. 1. Joint Treatment:Sto Gold FillTm—ready mixed acrylic based flexible joint treatment for rough opening protection and joint treatment of wall sheathing. 2. Waterproof Coating:Sto Gold CoatTM—ready mixed acrylic based waterproof coating for wall sheathing. 00"` YUM–E3.1 AIR/MOISTURE BARRIER Site Number 305-634 07195-3 July,2008 Air Leakage: ASTM E 283 <0.06 cfm/ft @ 1.56 psf 0.0044 cfm/ft Wall (SBCCI PST& (0.00030 m3/S•m2 @ 75 Pa) (0.000022 m3/s•m2) Assembly ESI Method) with Sto Gold Fill&Sto Gold Coat ..........I...... .._ ... ...................... Air Leakage ASTM. STM E 283 <0.003 ft3/min-ft2)._@..__........._..__._..- 0.0002 ft3/min-ft ................ _......__......................_.. Sto Gold Fill (CCMC 1.56psf (<0.0014 Us•m2) Technical Guide (<0.02 Us m2 @ 75 Pa) .........................................................Method).............................................................._. Structural ASTM E 330 2 inches 51 mm water No loss of structural integrity ri Integrity pressure(positive& i ne ative for 1 hour. -.____---.........._g-_ ___..-_--_- --_--____ Dry Tensile ASTM D 882 20 Ibs/in(3503 N/m) Sto Gold Fill: 159 pli (27.8 kN/m)before Strength minimum before and after aging aging 213 pli (37.3 kN/m after aging Flexibility ASTM D 522 No cracking or delamination No cracking or delamination before and using 1/8"(3 mm) mandrel after aging at 14°F (-10°C) before and after acing Tensile ASTM C 297 >15 psi(103 kPa) Gypsum (ASTM C 79): >30 psi (206 kPa) Adhesion Gypsum (ASTM C 1177):>30 psi (206 kPa) Exposure 1 OSB: >50 psi(344 kPa) ° Exterior Plywood: P ( >90 i 620 kPa Surface ASTM E 84 Flame Spread: <25 Flame Spread:5 Burning Smoke Developed: <450 Smoke Developed: 10 NFPA Class A, UBC Class 1 building material _...___________________________..---...._......_....--------_-------_ _�___________.. ________ ---_.._-__-----__-._______------_--------_ Fire Testing UBC 26-9 No increase in fire hazard Pass 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's specifications, details and product data. B. Samples for approval as directed by Owner's Representative or owner. C. Manufacturer's standard warranty. D. Prepare and submit project-specific details(when required by contract documents). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer requirements 1. Manufacturer of exterior wall air and moisture barrier materials for a minimum of 20 years in North America. 2. ISO 9001 Certified. B. Contractor requirements 1. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of Sto materials. 2. Employ skilled mechanics who are experienced and knowledgeable in air and moisture barrier application,and familiar with the requirements of the specified work. 3. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job-site to install the system in compliance with Sto's published specifications. YUM-E3.1 AIR/MOISTURE BARRIER Site Number 305-634 07195-2 July,2008 SECTION 07195 AIR/MOISTURE BARRIER PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Materials and installation of air and moisture barrier complete over wall sheathing. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Deflection Criteria: maximum allowable deflection normal to the plane of the wall: U240 B. Wind Load: Conform with code requirements. A. Moisture Control: 1. Minimize condensation within the assembly. 2. Drain water directly to the exterior where it is likely to penetrate components in the wall assembly(windows and doors,for example). 2. Provide flashing to direct water to the exterior in accordance with code requirements, including, above window and door heads, beneath window and door sills,at roof/wall intersections,decks, intersections of lower walls with higher walls, and at the base of the wall. B. Air Barrier Continuity: Provide continuous air barrier system of compatible air barrier components. E. Mechanical Ventilation: maintain positive pressurization and indoor humidity levels between 40-60%at all times. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air/Moisture Barrier Performance Data: METHOD CRITERIA RESULTS Water AATCC 127 Resist 21.6 in(55 cm)water No water penetration before and after Penetration (Water Column) for 5 hours before and after aging Resistance Water ASTM E 1233/ _ No water at exterior plane No water penetration Penetration ASTM E 331 of sheathing. (exterior Testing gypsum, Dens-Glass® Gold, plywood,OSB)after 10 cycles @ 80%design load and 75 minutes water spray at 6.24 psf(299 Pa) differential Water ASTM D 2247 Absence of deleterious No deleterious effects after 14 day Resistance effects after 14 day exposure Testing ex .___ .__._________ _______---------- osure _____ �_______ .._ _ _ ___________..____. ......... ... ____....._.__.. .. ____.__..... Freeze/Thaw ICBO Method No visible effects(cracking, No visible deleterious effects at 5x Resistance (AC 24) checking,delamination, magnification erosion)when viewed at 5x Water Vapor ASTM E 96 Measure Sto Gold Fill: 17.3 perms Transmission Method B [994 ng/(Pa•s•m2)] (Water Method) Sto Gold Coat: 5.7 perms 327 n /Pa s mz OW YUM—E3.1 AIR/MOISTURE BARRIER Site Number 305-634 07195-1 July,2008 SECTION 06650 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating work specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. Aais. z �r cf # C?ata tam 'i dhes t!Ci slants„including pr"O d I a-terrVent Ilctu CCCdiceatiinag 3t�tt � mcet cn twwainas�*no r�tcts ' t tr$: .pri PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers as noted on Drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Solid polymer sheets in accordance with ANSI Z124. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A Adhesive As recommended by manufacturer. ;,02M ut�part 0 {EPA B. Sealant: Sealant recommended by manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." 1. Offleffis MW /r de's.. y" t eccar 16d) ��t,C��t 59 Subpart`f�,{�l�Q 2.4 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATION A. Fabricate solid polymer to following thickness; unless indicated otherwise: 1. Window Sill: 1/2 inch. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Section 01600, manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install units plumb, level, square, and free from warp or twist while maintaining dimensional tolerances and alignment with surrounding construction. B. Window Sills: Install sills tight to window framing and adjacent wall surfaces. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use materials or methods which may damage surface or surrounding construction. 1. Promptly remove excessive mastic and seam adhesive. B. Protect finished work in accordance with Section 01500. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS Site Number 305-634 06650-1 July,2008 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 05/06 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that fasteners are accurately aligned. I. Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes. 2. Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners. D. Install factory-laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints. E. Install trim accessories with [adhesive] [and] [nails] [or] [staples].[ Do not fasten through panels.] F. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. G. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. H. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant. I. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 06640 PLASTIC PANELING 06640-5 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 05/06 elk C. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate. E. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. I V4u tint liiriiitl� ' F �, y ,, o stn. F. Sealant: [Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone] [Single-component, mildew-resistant, acid-curing silicone] [Latex] sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." vQC Contento PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove wallpaper, vinyl wall covering, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond. B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints [where indicated] [to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels] [so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches(300 min)wide]. 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at [trim accessory] [panel joint] locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate [trim accessories] [panel joints] to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. PLASTIC PANELING 06640-4 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 05/06 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>or comparable product by one of the following: a. Kemlite Company Inc. b. Nudo Products,Inc. C. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 3. Glass-Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panel Nominal Thickness: Not less than [0.03 inch (0.76 mm)] [0.05 inch(1.3 mm)] [0.075 inch(1.9 mm)] [0.09 inch(2.3 mm)]. 4. Surface Finish: [Smooth] [Molded pebble texture] [Smooth surface with filled grooves at 4 inches (102 mm) o.c. to resemble tile] [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 5. Color: [White] [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 6. Plywood: DOC PS 1, Exterior B-C, [1/4 inch (6.4 mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)] [1/2 inch (12.7 min)] [5/8 inch(15.9 mm)] [3/4 inch(19.1 mm)]thick. 7. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2, [1/4 inch (6.4 mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm)] [3/4 inch(19.1 mm)]thick. 8. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, [Regular, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)]. 9. High-Impact Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, 5/8 inch (15.9 nun), with Type X core, and [0.010-inch (0.254-mm)] [0.020-inch (0.508-mm)] [0.030-inch (0.762-mm)] [0.081-inch (2.057-mm)] plastic film laminated to back side for greater resistance to through penetration(impact resistance). 10. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M or ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, 5/8 inch(15.9 mm),Type X,with moisture-and mold-resistant core and surfaces. � e ate.. .. . 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners,[outside corners,] and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: [White] [Match panels] [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. B. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard two-piece, snap-on vinyl extrusions designed to cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners,[outside corners,] and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: [White] [Match panels] [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. OOW PLASTIC PANELING 06640-3 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 05/06 3. Testing Agency: [Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction] [FM Approvals] [UL]. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A., I nutrota 1"'14' i '` q n[ x"I, tempe�����r�� , �il���? dz)�� ..t } �'►, u1? ��� ` � ,�N .,.. cp 1 l?Pr! PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. General: Gelcoat-finished,glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>or comparable product by one of the following: a. Kemlite Company Inc. b. Marlite. C. Nudo Products, Inc. d. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 3. Nominal Thickness: Not less than [0.075 inch (1.9 mm)] [0.09 inch (2.3 rum)] [0.12 inch(3.0 mm)]. 4. Surface Finish: [Smooth] [Molded pebble texture] [Smooth surface with filled grooves at 4 inches(102 mm) o.c. to resemble tile] [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 5. Color: [White] [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 2.2 FACTORY-LAMINATED PLASTIC PANELS A. General: Gelcoat-finished,glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319, laminated to [plywood] [oriented strand board] [fire-retardant particleboard] [gypsum board] [high-impact gypsum board] [moisture-and mold-resistant gypsum board]. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following]: PLASTIC PANELING 06640-2 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 05106 SECTION 06640-PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic(FRP)wall paneling[and trim accessories]. B. Related Sections: I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood furring for installing plastic paneling. 2. Division 10 Section "Impact-Resistant Wall Protection" for corner guards installed over plastic paneling. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. °{�,� � � did rFa �ati�'a�ttyg �dhe�t�� wind corripb�tte�g �� C. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic paneling[and trim accessories]. D. Samples for Verification: For plastic paneling[and trim accessories], in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling[and trim accessories]from single manufacturer. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: [25] [200] <Insert value>or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: [450] <Insert value>or less. PLASTIC PANELING 06640- 1 9. Fasten paneling with paneling system manufacturer's concealed clips. 10. Fasten paneling to gypsum wallboard with panel adhesive. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. , 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 06202 Ad YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06202-12 July,2008 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 3.5 PANELING INSTALLATION A. Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and color between adjacent panels. Leave 1/4-inch (6-mm) gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom,and openings. Install with uniform tight joints between panels. 1. Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and fasteners. Space fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer. 2. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent. 3. Arrange panels with grooves and joints over supports. Fasten to supports with nails of type and at spacing recommended by panel manufacturer. Use fasteners with prefinished heads matching groove color. B. Hardboard Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Leave 1/4- inch (6-mm) gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Butt adjacent panels with moderate contact. Use fasteners with prefinished heads matching paneling color. 1. Wood Stud or Furring Substrate: Install with 1-inch (25-mm) annular-ring shank hardboard nails. 2. Plaster or Gypsum Board Substrate: Install with 1-5/8-inch (41-mm) annular-ring shank hardboard nails. 3. Nailing: Space nails 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. at panel perimeter and 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. at intermediate supports unless otherwise required by manufacturer. C. Board Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Arrange in random- width pattern suggested by manufacturer unless boards or planks are of uniform width. 1. Install in full lengths without end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in random pattern to uniformly distribute joints on each wall. 3. Install with uniform end joints with only end-matched (tongue-and-groove) joints within each field of paneling. 4. Install with uniform end joints. Locate end joints only over furring or blocking. 5. Select and arrange boards on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and color between adjacent boards. Install with uniform tight joints between boards. 6. Fasten paneling by face nailing, setting nails, and filling over nail heads. 7. Fasten paneling with trim screws, set below face and filled. 8. Fasten paneling by blind nailing through tongues. ROW YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06202-11 July,2008 1. Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds. 2. Wood board paneling. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours[unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer]. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces,sizes, or patterns. B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners,fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1116-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm)variation between adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 5. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry. YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06202-10 July,2008 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Chesapeake Hardwood Products, Inc. b. Georgia-Pacific Corp. C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. 3. Thickness: 1/4 inch(6.4 mm). 4. Finish: Class[I][II]. 5. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows,tested per ASTM E 84: a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 6. Colors,Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. 1. Where galvanized finish is indicated, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. if.: ant d r"J iss when cetc aw tiifa . A .. C. Installation Adhesive for Foam Plastic Moldings: Product recommended for indicated use by foam plastic molding manufacturer. [ess..;uvhen,,calcu a Wmmft D. Paneling Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives. :., C7 �'` �, c ; '� ;r hri�' ttjk �4 q;ccardingy,;tq „ .... �...,.,., ]a E. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. y j 2.8 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished work: ,l° YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06202-9 July,2008 8. Mull-Casing Pattern: [WM 957, 3/8-by-1-3/4-inch (9.5-by-44-mm) beaded-edge] [WM 973, 3/8-by-1-3/4-inch(9.5-by-44-mm) bullnose] [WM 983, 318-by-1-3/4-inch(9.5- by-44-mm)featheredge]casing. 9. Stop Pattern: [WM 856, 3/8-by-1-3/8-inch (9.5-by-35-mm) ranch] [WM 946, 3/8-by-1- 3/8-inch (9.5-by-35-mm) ogee] [WM 886, 3/8-by-1-3/8-inch (9.5-by-35-mm) bullnose] stop. 10. Chair-Rail Pattern: WM 297, 11/16-by-3-inch (17-by-76-mm) chair rail. G. Foam Plastic Moldings: Molded product of shapes indicated, with a tough outer skin on exposed surfaces;factory primed. Exposed surfaces shall not be shaped after molding. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide[the product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Architectural Moldings Ltd.; Balmer Architectural Mouldings Division. b. Century Architectural Specialties LLC. C. Focal Point Architectural Products. d. Fypon Ltd. e. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 4. Density: Not less than 20 lb/cu.ft. (320 kg/cu. m). 5. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than [75] <Insert number> when tested according to ASTM E 84. 6. Thickness: Not more than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 7. Width: Not more than 8 inches (204 mm). 8. Patterns: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples]. 2.5 FIRE-RATED INTERIOR DOOR FRAMES A. Frames, complete with casings, fabricated from fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant MDF with veneered exposed surfaces, or from solid fire-retardant-treated wood. Frames shall comply with NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to [NFPA 252] [UBC Standard 7- 2]. 1. Species: [Red oak] [White oak][White maple][Cherry] <Insert species>. 2. Fire Rating: [20 minutes] [30 minutes] [45 minutes] [60 minutes] [90 minutes] [As indicated]. 2.6 PANELING A. Hardboard Paneling: Interior factory-finished hardboard paneling complying with AHA 135.5. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06202-8 July,2008 E. Hardwood Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): WMMPA HWM 2, N-grade wood moldings made to patterns included in WMMPA HWM 1. 1. Species: [Red oak] [White maple] [Aspen, basswood, cottonwood, sap gum, sycamore,white maple,or yellow poplar]<Insert species>. 2. Kiln-dried softwood or MDF,with exposed surfaces veneered with species indicated, may be used in lieu of solid wood. 3. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 4. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 5. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. 6. Base Pattern: [HWM 633, 7/16-by-3-1/4-inch (11-by-83-mm) ogee] [HWM 713, 7/16- by-3-114-inch (11-by-83-mm) ranch] [HWM 753, 7116-by-3-1/4-inch (11-by-83-mm) beaded-edge] [WM 620,7/16-by-4-114-inch (11-by-108-mm)ogee] base. 7. Shoe-Mold Pattern: [HWM 129, 7116-by-11/16-inch (11-by-17-mm) quarter-round] [HWM 126, 1/2-by-3/4-inch (13-by-19-mm) quarter-round] [HWM 131, 1/2-by-314-inch (13-by-19-mm)ogee] shoe mold. 8. Casing Pattern: [HWM 328, 112-by-2-1/4-inch (13-by-57-mm) clamshell] [HWM 366, 1/2-by-2-1/4-inch (13-by-57-mm). featheredge] [HWM 376, 112-by-2-1/4-inch (13-by- 57-mm) beaded-edge] casing. 9. Mull-Casing Pattern: [HWM 989, 3116-by-2-inch (5-by-51-mm) square-edge] [HWM 988, 318-by-1-1/2-inch (9.5-by-38-mm) featheredge] [HWM 987, 318-by-2-inch (9.5-by-51-mm)featheredge]casing. 10. Stop Pattern: [HWM 856, 3/8-by-1-3/8-inch (9.5-by-35-mm) ranch] [HWM 946, 3/8-by- 1-3/8-inch (9.5-by-35-mm) ogee] [HWM 886, 3/8-by-1-3/8-inch (9.5-by-35-mm) bullnose]stop. 11. Chair-Rail Pattern: HWM 297, 11/16-by-3-inch (17-by-76-mm)chair rail. F. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted): Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12. 1. Softwood Moldings: WMMPA WM 4, P-grade. a. Species: [Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine]<Insert species>. b. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12 percent or less. 2. Hardwood Moldings: WMMPA HWM 2, P-grade. a. Species: [Aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple,tupelo, or yellow poplar]<Insert species>. b. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 3. Optional Material: Primed MDF. 4. Finger Jointing: [Allowed][Not allowed]. 5. Base Pattern: [WM 623, 9116-by-3-1/4-inch (14-by-83-mm) ogee] [WM 713, 9/16-by-3- 1/4-inch (14-by-83-mm) ranch] [WM 753, 9/16-by-3-1/4-inch (14-by-83-mm) beaded- edge] [WM 620, 9116-by-4-1/4-inch (14-by-108-mm) ogee] [WM 750, 9/16-by-4-114- inch(14-by-108-mm) beaded-edge] base. 6. Shoe-Mold Pattern: [WM 129, 7116-by-11/16-inch (11-by-17-mm) quarter-round] [WM 126, 112-by-314-inch (13-by-19-mm) quarter-round] [WM 131, 112-by-3/4-inch (13-by-19-mm)ogee]shoe mold. 7. Casing Pattern: [WM 327, 11/16-by-2-1/4-inch (17-by-57-mm) clamshell] [WM 366, 11116-by-2-114-inch (17-by-57-mm) featheredge] [WM 376, 11/16-by-2-114-inch (17- by-57-mm)beaded-edge]casing. YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06202-7 July,2008 40444 5. Veneered Material: [Allowed] [Not allowed] [Use for lumber trim wider than 6 inches (150 mm)]. 6. Face Surface: [Surfaced (smooth)][Saw textured]. 7. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. C. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): 1. Species and Grade: Eastern white pine, [D Select] [Finish or 1 Common] [Premium or 2 Common]; NeLMA or NLGA. 2. Species and Grade: Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine; [D Select (Quality)] [1 Common(Colonial)] [2 Common(Sterling)]; NLGA or WWPA. 3. Species and Grade: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine; [D Select (Quality)] [Finish or 1 Common (Colonial)] [Premium or 2 Common (Sterling)]; NeLMA, NLGA,or WWPA. 4. Species and Grade:White woods, [D Select] [1 Common][2 Common];WWPA. 5. Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir south, [Superior or C&Btr] [Prime or D]finish; NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Species and Grade: Spruce-pine-fir,[1][2] Common; NeLMA, NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. 7. Species and Grade: Alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, sycamore,tupelo, or yellow poplar; [A] [B]finish; NHLA. 8. Maximum Moisture Content: [19] [15] percent[with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12 percent or less]. 9. Maximum Moisture Content: [13] [10][9] <Insert value>percent. 10. Finger Jointing: [Allowed] [Not allowed]. 11. Face Surface: [Surfaced(smooth)] [Saw textured]. 12. Optional Material: Primed MDF of same actual dimensions as lumber indicated may be used in lieu of lumber. AMR%, D. Softwood Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): WMMPA WM 4, N-grade wood moldings. Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12. 1. Species: [Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine] [Southern pine] [Western red cedar][Douglas fir]<Insert species>. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12 percent or less. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. 5. Base Pattern: [WM 623, 9/16-by-3-114-inch (14-by-83-mm) ogee] [WM 713, 9/16-by-3- 1/4-inch (14-by-83-mm) ranch] [WM 753, 9/16-by-3-1/4-inch (14-by-83-mm) beaded- edge] [WM 620, 9116-by-4-1/4-inch (14-by-108-mm) ogee] [WM 750, 9/16-by-4-1/4- inch (14-by-108-mm) beaded-edge] base. 6. Shoe-Mold Pattern: [WM 129, 7/16-by-11/16-inch (11-by-17-mm) quarter-round] [WM 126, 1/2-by-3/4-inch (13-by-19-mm) quarter-round] [WM 131, 1/2-by-3/4-inch (13-by-19-mm)ogee] shoe mold. 7. Casing Pattern: [WM 327, 11116-by-2-114-inch (17-by-57-mm) clamshell] [WM 366, 11/16-by-2-1/4-inch (17-by-57-mm) featheredge] [WM 376, 11116-by-2-114-inch (17- by-57-mm) beaded-edge]casing. 8. Mull-Casing Pattern: [WM 957, 3/8-by-1-3/4-inch (9.5-by-44-mm) beaded-edge] [WM 973, 3/8-by-1-3/4-inch(9.5-by-44-mm)bullnose] [WM 983,3/8-by-1-3/4-inch (9.5- by-44-mm)featheredge]casing. 9. Stop Pattern: [WM 856, 3/8-by-1-3/8-inch (9.5-by-35-mm) ranch] [WM 946, 3/8-by-1- 3/8-inch (9.5-by-35-mm) ogee] [WM 886, 3/8-by-1-3/8-inch (9.5-by-35-mm) bullnose] stop. 10. Chair-Rail Pattern: WM 297, 11/16-by-3-inch (17-by-76-mm)chair rail. YUM-E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06202-6 July,2008 oopk B. Plywood: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27, [Exterior type] [Interior Type A]. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not contain colorants and provide materials that do not have marks from spacer sticks on the exposed face. D. Do not use material that does not comply with requirements for untreated material or is warped or discolored. E. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark end or back of each piece] [or] [omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency]. 2. For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each piece. F. Application: [Where indicated][All interior lumber and plywood] <Insert application>. 2.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Softwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): 1. Species and Grade: Eastern white pine, [C Select] [D Select] [Finish or 1 Common] [Premium or 2 Common]; NeLMA or NLGA. 2. Species and Grade: Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine; [C Select (Choice)] [D Select(Quality)] [1 Common(Colonial)] [2 Common(Sterling)]; NLGA or WWPA. 3. Species and Grade: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine; [C Select (Choice)] [D Select (Quality)] [Finish or 1 Common (Colonial)] [Premium or 2 Common(Sterling)]; NeLMA, NLGA, or WWPA. 4. Species and Grade: White woods, [C Select] [D Select] [1 Common] [2 Common]; WWPA. 5. Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir south, [Superior or C &Btr] [Prime or D]finish; NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. 6. Species and Grade: Southern pine, [B&B][C&Btr]finish; SPIB. 7. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, [Clear Heart] [Grade A] [Grade B]; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 8. Maximum Moisture Content: [19] [15] percent[with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12 percent or less]. 9. Finger Jointing: [Allowed] [Not allowed]. 10. Face Surface: [Surfaced(smooth)][Saw textured]. B. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): 1. Species and Grade: [Red oak] [White maple] [Alder] [Aspen, basswood,cottonwood, sap gum, sycamore, white maple, or yellow poplar] <Insert species>; [Clear] [A finish][B finish]; NHLA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: [13] [10][9]<Insert value>percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Gluing for Width: [Allowed] [Not allowed] [Use for lumber trim wider than 6 inches (150 mm)]. YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06202-5 July,2008 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece[,or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency]. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. IVIPF. 2, � de> 10 ,6 4 y, forrrla Id a hyi n; E. Part[cl � AN.(02 ,� �t� conWrt] g uri�rtt�af.. hysN F. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 1. Color: See decor package/shop drawings. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Lumber: AWPA C2[or AWPA C31 (treated with inorganic boron)]. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. B. Plywood: AWPA C9. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 18 percent. C. Preservative,,,, ' ptyoa]s C.. Is, to...,.,. � . 4*N 444 ar$eiaic, r c �rniurr;<j, D. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical formulations that contain colorants or that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. E. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. F. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark end or back of each piece] [or] [omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency]. G. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each piece. H. Application: [Where indicated] <Insert application>. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. Lumber: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20, [Exterior type] [Interior Type A]. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. .w YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06202-4 July,2008 5. Interior ornamental wood columns. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging,or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Columns: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace columns that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Columns: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06202-3 July,2008 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of paneling indicated. C. Samples for Verification: 1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied finish, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq, in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mm)for panels. 2. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm)for lumber and 8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mm)for panels. 3. For interior wood columns, include[quarter-section] Samples of cap, base, plinth,and 6- inch- (150-mm-) long[quarter-section] Sample of shaft.[ Samples need not be same diameter as required columns.] x P„rpd�ict pat r 04,041k, Pro ,eta fd f ctlt 4 uc tin the Ink"�a fpihC � 3 �rt�flr,�te � � R � h�]f%df rtlfi ��9 pr cts 4Cti, Got10• , .., II .Y E. Research/Evaluation Reports: Showing that fire-retardant-treated wood complies with building code in effect for Project. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A... . CR Farettlfi wc�a�a pxav�i qt 0a btat i YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY AMIk Site Number 305-634 06202-2 July,2008 SECTION 06202-INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Fire-rated interior door[and sidelight]frames. 3. [Plywood] [Hardboard] [Board] paneling. 4. Shelving[and clothes rods]. 5. Interior ornamental wood columns. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view[and for structural wood decking and framing exposed to view]. 2. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for [shop-fabricated interior woodwork][interior woodwork not specified in this Section]. 3. Division 6 Section "[Interior Architectural Woodwork] [Paneling]" for architectural paneling. 4. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. B. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard. C. MDO Plywood: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face. YUM—E3.1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06202-1 July,2008 elk 4. Cap exposed edges with plastic laminate of same finish and pattern. 5. Apply laminate backing sheet on reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 3.3 TOLERANCES FOR FIELD ASSEMBLIES/JOINED ITEMS A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 FINISH CARPENTRY Site 305-634 06200-3 July,2008 a. Composition: High pressure laminate of paper and melamine,without decorative finish,0.020 inch thick minimum. b Acceptable Manufacturers: Same as for high pressure laminate surfacing. Har �r � neNe ' . A9 I ' tE " rrtdF! 1� ".ft / �tt t". "' Shelving u�ai18b9r�or:.li � frttln�tffr . f 2.2 ACCESSORIES AND TREATMENT A. Contact Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130B, of type recommended by millwork manufacturer to suit application. B. Wall Adhesive: Solvent release cartridge type, compatible with substrate,capable of achieving durable bond. C. Nails, Bolts, Nuts,Washers, Lags, Pins, Nails,and Screws: Size and type to suit application. D. Hardware: 1. Shelf Standards: a. Heavy Duty: K&V no. 87 and 187,double slotted, in bright zinc plated finish. b. Key Board Drawer: Fully articulated keyboard arm, black steel with painted black finish. 1) Acceptable Product: Catalog No.639.96.305 by Hafele. Z,3 MISS LLANEOU$' ER1Ai�S` A. Glue. Alipha sin Oy�,ur�t 4i ± ��s.�����f; ��u. fob g rpertt" se Celt 4# i i 'A i�bK EI�A 0 .: It1s#allatlon A l��ue (ding; Awk foam play n u wmll C. P'arieCir�uA 9 Ye.n. piY Y�ft� eltgg r 4er' 'dh, 1 £ C �^ Ct yr tlrl Wht t ub EP t�tht� a( C�, Mui#ipur e�Qn . o t snded tandd Icat 'ue'iar � PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prime paint or seal concealed surfaces and items or assemblies which will be in contact with cementitious materials or surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. B. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom Quality Standards. Handle materials to avoid dents and other damages. C. On field applied laminate plastic work 1. Apply plastic laminate finishes where indicated. 2. Adhere with adhesive over entire surface. Make joints and corners hairline. 3. Match patterns. Slightly bevel joints. YUM—E3.1 FINISH CARPENTRY Site 305-634 06200-2 July,2008 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect materials from damage,soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials until job site conditions and operations which could damage,soil or deteriorate work are complete. C. Store products and materials in ventilated,interior locations under constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F.and relative humidity not to exceed 55 percent. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4 f?h �orAtt� waduct 'pt �sros�� �frctlwex�d '�'�'Ct-�Cl1 � tip t`Ct, .... tewardship._w 1.3 SUBMITTALS ttt roduf l # for 1sirresn , s use ct sr#e,. radu�tsdocumenipn "'"� tn`dCn�t�ng";that prt�€ai h� fat ��d� 3f : >I tff #ert�Cyno � ly uvith f, dertlflCatia r�qurr " u�d$n Fh '• d°h rt cir+~dtted PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General 1. Comply with quality and grading standards contained herein for each material. 2. Sizes noted on drawings or indicated herein for lumber are nominal unless detailed by specific dimensions of actual size. 3. Plywood and particleboard 3/4 inch thickness unless noted or detailed otherwise. 4. Products surfaced four sides, unless noted otherwise. B. Softwood Plywood 1. Quality standard: PS 1. 2. Grading standard: AWI custom. 3. Core material: C-D Plugged INT-APA. 4 Fauality A B INT APA. 1. x0i, tiff .:. ont-6, g no urea formaide s D. Laminate Materials 1. High pressure laminate surface a. Thickness: 0.050 inch for horizontal grade;0.028 to 0.032 inch for vertical grade. b. Finish and Color: Refer to finish schedule on Drawings. 2. Laminate Backing Sheets YUM—E3.1 FINISH CARPENTRY Site 305-634 06200-1 July,2008 C. Fasteners: Galvanized; size and type to suit condition. D. Wood Blocking: Softwood lumber, construction grade, maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication. B. Cut members accurately to length, angle, and true to line to achieve properly fit,tight joint connections. C. Jig trusses during fabrication to assure accurate configuration. D. Build camber into truss. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses. B. Verify sufficient end bearing area. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, at spacings as indicated on Drawings and approved shop drawings. The load carrying capacity of any one truss shall not be exceeded during the construction period. B. Place trusses true to line and level in correct location. C. Provide temporary bracing to hold trusses in place until permanently secured. D. Place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain trusses straight and in correct position before inducing loads. E. Do not field cut or alter trusses. F. Place headers and supports to frame openings required. G. Frame openings between trusses with lumber in accordance with Section 06100. H. Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this Section. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES Site Number 305-634 06175-2 July,2008 SECTION 06175 PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Drawings and governing codes for live and dead load requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design trusses under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in structural framing design of trusses registered in state where project is located. Truss designs shall bear the name, seal, and registration number of the licensed professional engineer who supervised the truss structural framing design. Comply with the "National Design Specifications for Stress Graded Lumber and Its Fastenings" as published by N.F.P.A. and "Design Specifications for Light Metal Place Connected Wood Trusses" as published by T.P.I. B. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. C. Truss Plates In accordance with Truss Plate Institute D. rPt1dn ' Vin' b6druses 'pr " kited rti ;body b�, o!r I, in 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, wind strapping, and other governing load criteria. B. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. tow C. Conform to UL requirements to achieve rating indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Indicate framing system, truss placement, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers, bearing and anchor location and loads,bridging and bracing,connecting plates, and framed openings Submit desi n calculations C. t�i1�'ors y rttca certtfytn t u� mom�! e of r irEtB li ifh F ft� 8t cetifation. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Transport and store trusses according to Truss Plate Institute publication HIB-91. B. Protect trusses from warpage and distortion during transit and when stored. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Member of T.P.I.and having minimum experience level indicated. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA. Identify each piece by grade mark of lumber inspection bureau or agency approved by American Lumber Standards Committee board. B. Steel Connectors: Truss Plate Institute standard ANSI/ASTM A 446 steel, Grade A; galvanized. YUM—E3.1 PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES Site Number 305-634 06175-1 July,2008 1. Seal seams, edges,fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.4 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient quantity of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. 3. Apply sheathing tape to joints between foam-plastic sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing. 3.5 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed. END OF SECTION 06160 YUM—E3.1 SHEATHING Site Number 305-634 06160-7 July,2008 3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's"Uniform Building Code." 4. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule,"in BOCA's"BOCA National Building Code." 5. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule,"in SBCCI's"Standard Building Code." 6. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two- Family Dwellings." 7. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments,"in ICC's"International One-and Two-Family Dwelling Code." D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate [wall] [and] [roof] sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide,"for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing.[ Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels.] b. Screw to wood framing members. C. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated. B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. YUM—E3.1 SHEATHING A*%N Site Number 305-634 06160-6 July,2008 g. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 3. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than [535] [152] [125] [63]<Insert number> g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 4. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. D. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with [APA AFG-01] [ASTM D 3498] that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of [50] [70] <Insert limit> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than [0.025 inch] [0.030 inch] [0.040 inch]. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; [Vycor Plus Self-Adhered Flashing][Vycor V40 Weather Barrier Strips]. C. MFM Building Products Corp.;Window Wrap. d. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300. e. Protecto Wrap Company; [BT-20 XL] [PS-45]. f. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1,"Fastening Schedule,"in ICC's"International Building Code." * YUM—E3.1 SHEATHING Site Number 305-634 06160-5 July,2008 2.5 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: PS 1 Rating. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 40/20. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof[and wall] sheathing, provide fasteners[with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M] [of Type 304 stainless steel]. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other *�M► corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 2.7 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226,Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated. B. Building Paper: UBC Standard 14-1, Grade D (water-vapor-permeable, kraft building paper)[.] [, except that water resistance shall be not less than 1 hour and water-vapor transmission shall be not less than 75 g/sq. m x 24 h.] C. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Chemical Company(The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap. b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek [CommercialWrap] [StuccoWrap][HomeWrap][HomeWrap and HeaderWrap]. C. Ludlow Coated Products; [Air Stop Housewrap] [Barricade Building Wrap] [EnergyWrap Housewrap] [R-Wrap Protective House Wrap]. d. Pactiv, Inc.; GreenGuard [Classic Wrap][RainDrop][Ultra Wrap][Value Wrap]. e. Raven Industries Inc.; Rufco-Wrap. f. Reemay, Inc.;Typar HouseWrap. YUM—E3.1 SHEATHING - Site Number 305-634 06160-4 July,2008 B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction[and containing no arsenic or chromium]. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: [Treat all plywood, unless otherwise indicated] [Treat items indicated on Drawings][and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers,and waterproofing]. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature(HT)for roof sheathing and where indicated. 4. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Roof and wall sheathing within 48 inches of[fire][party]walls. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Subflooring and underlayment for raised platforms. 2.4 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: [Exterior, Structural 1][Exterior][Exposure 1, Structural 1][Exposure 1] sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than[16/0][20/0][24/0][32116]. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than[11/32 inch (8.7 mm)][1/2 inch (13 mm YUM—E3.1 SHEATHING Site Number 305-634 06160-3 July,2008 Wrod uef ptlGt CCeQ .v � h. si�r , F>, 9 ..nom' f ?. cor)tent F,,...,Pr©dui#L3 ter r alt E 7ZF1 car co g t .r t � tiro rA iit n Ili"t that pr =n#otns nt 3 Chi s specified t e rrta w cd icy uj era lrGlud� i �tce any , r,.ts ?.,,, lnclud .ktertttfndtcltp fir each,� I wc�d C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Preservative-treated plywood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Foam-plastic sheathing. 4. Building wrap. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from [UL's "Fire Resistance , Directory."] [GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual."] <Insert listing organization and publication.> 8 Forestfr�rfi+~atl4 > For # fo#lpw �a prodr�tarird ��rarrwa 011- itaed fr©m is ed aid .. 0 c M",X , 700 or 1' Ptywa0, 2. C?r�enran adR 4 � P�r�[cl� urns ' aym 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood: [DOC PS 1][Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated]. YUM—E3.1 SHEATHING Site Number 305-634 06160-2 July,2008 SECTION 06160 SHEATHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Composite nail base insulated roof sheathing. 4. Underlayment. 5. Building paper. 6. Building wrap. 7. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment. 8. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Miscellaneous Carpentry"for plywood backing panels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 6. For building wrap, include data on air-/moisture-infiltration protection based on testing according to referenced standards. 01LlflS YUM—E3.1 SHEATHING Site Number 305-634 06160-1 July,2008 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm actual-)size furring[horizontally] [and][vertically]at[24 inches (610 mm)] [600 mm]o.c. C. Furring to Receive [Gypsum Board] [Plaster Lath]: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-)size furring vertically at[16 inches (406 mm)] [400 mm]o.c. 3.4 WOOD TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 1. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint-finishing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads and fill holes. 4. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch(1.6-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA- registered label. END OF SECTION 06105 YUM—E3.1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06105-11 July,2008 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal-(38-mm actual-)thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet(6 m)o.c. H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. J. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule,"in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule,"in ICBO's Uniform Building Code. 4. Table 2305.2,"Fastening Schedule,"in BOCA's BOCA National Building Code. 5. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule,"in SBCCI's Standard Building Code. 6. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments,"in ICC's International Residential Code for One-and Two-Family Dwellings. 7. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments,"in ICC's International One-and Two-Family Dwelling Code. K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD[GROUND,][SLEEPER,] BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for[screeding or] attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. YUM—E3.1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06105-10 July,2008 2.11 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Particleboard Underlayment: ANSI A208.1, Grade[PBU] [M-2, Exterior Glue, complying with dimensional tolerances and thickness swell requirements of Grade PBU]. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with [APAAFG-01] [ASTM D 3498] that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of [50] [70] <Insert limit> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm). PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate[furring,] nailers,blocking, [grounds,]and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's"Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches(406 mm)o.c. G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. YUM—E3.1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06105-9 July,2008 B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME 818.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and,where indicated,flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594,Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade Al or A4). 2.10 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [products indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. 3. KC Metals Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. USP Structural Connectors. 7. <Insert manufacturer's name.> D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180)coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666,Type[304] [316]. 1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. YUM—E3.1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06105-8 July,2008 E. Lumber Trim for Opaque (Painted) Finish: Either finger-jointed or solid lumber, off one of] the following species and grades: 1. Grade[D Select][Finish](Premium]eastern white pine; NeLMA or NLGA. 2. Grade[D Select (Quality)] [1 Common (Colonial)] [2 Common (Sterling)] Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; NLGA or WWPA. 3. Grade[A] [B]Finish aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, red alder, soft maple, sycamore,tupelo, or yellow poplar; NHLA. F. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7 and graded according to WMMPA WM 4. 1. Moldings for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: N-grade [eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine] [western red cedar] [Douglas fir] [red oak] [white maple], selected for compatible grain and color. 2. Moldings for Opaque (Painted) Finish: P-grade [eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine] [aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, tupelo, or yellow poplar] [primed medium-density fiberboard]. 2.7 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS A. Shelving: Made from one of the following materials, 3/4-inch (19-mm) thick. Do not use particleboard or medium-density fiberboard that contains urea formaldehyde. 1. Melamine-faced particleboard with radiused and filled front edge. 2. Particleboard with radiused and filled front edge. 3. Medium-density fiberboard with radiused front edge. 4. Wood boards of same species and grade indicated above for interior lumber trim for transparent finish. B. Shelf Cleats: [3/4-by-3-1/2-inch (19-by-89-mm) boards] [3/4-by-5-1/2-inch (19-by-140-mm) boards with hole and notch to receive clothes rods], of same species and grade indicated above for interior lumber trim for opaque finish. C. Shelf Brackets: Prime-painted formed steel with provision to support clothes rod where rod is indicated. 2.8 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, [Exterior, AC] [Exterior, C-C Plugged] (Exposure 1, C-D Plugged], [fire-retardant treated,] in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than [1/2-inch (13-mm)][3/4-inch (19-mm)] nominal thickness. 2.9 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners[with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M][of Type 304 stainless steel]. YUM—E3.1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06105-7 July,2008 1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; [Premium or 2 Common (Sterling)] [Standard or No. 3 Common] grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Mixed southern pine, No. [1] [2]grade; SPIB. 3. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), [Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common] [Construction or No. 2 Common]grade; NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, [Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common] [Construction or No. 2 Common] grade; NeLMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. E. For concealed boards, provide lumber with [15] [19] percent maximum moisture content and [any of]the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. [2][3]grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), [Construction or 2 Common] [Standard or 3 Common] grade; NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, [Construction or 2 Common] [Standard or 3 Common]grade; NeLMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods, No. [2] [3] Common grade; NELMA. 5. Northern species, No. [2] [3] Common grade; NLGA. 6. Western woods, [Construction or No. 2 Common] [Standard or No. 3 Common] grade; WCLIB or WWPA. F. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. G. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. H. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.6 INTERIOR WOOD TRIM A. General: Provide kiln-dried finished (surfaced) material[without finger-jointing, unless otherwise indicated]. B. Softwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Provide[one of] the following species and grade: 1. Grade[C Select][D Select][Finish] [Premium]eastern white pine; NeLMA or NLGA. 2. Grade[C Select (Choice)] [D Select (Quality)] [1 Common (Colonial)] [2 Common (Sterling)] Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; NLGA or WWPA. 3. Grade[Superior or C & Btr] [Prime or D] Finish Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir-south; NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. [Clear Heart] [Grade A][Grade B]western red cedar; NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. C. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Clear[red oak] [white maple], [selected for compatible grain and color]. D. Hardwood Lumber for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Grade A Finish [red alder] [aspen, basswood, cottonwood, magnolia, soft maple, or sycamore] [aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, red alder, soft maple, sycamore, tupelo,or yellow poplar]; NHLA. YUM—E3.1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY . Site Number 305-634 06105-6 July,2008 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir;WCLIB,or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir(south); NeLMA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Northern species; NLGA. 7. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. 8. Western woods;WCLIB or WWPA. D. Other Framing: [No. 2] [Construction or No. 2] [Construction, Stud, or No. 3] grade and [any of]the following species: 1. Hem-fir(north); NLGA. 2. Southern pine; SPIB. 3. Douglas fir-larch;WCLIB or WWPA. 4. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 5. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 6. Douglas fir-south;WWPA. 7. Hem-fir;WCLIB or WWPA. 8. Douglas fir-larch(north); NLGA. 9. Spruce-pine-fir(south); NeLMA,WCLIB,or WWPA. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. 7. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide [Construction or No. 2] [Standard, Stud, or No. 3] grade lumber with [15][19]percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For items of dimension lumber size, provide [Construction or No. 2] [Standard, Stud, or No. 3] grade lumber with [15] [19] percent maximum moisture content and[any of] the following species: 1. Hem-fir(north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir;WCLIB, or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir(south); NeLMA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods;WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. D. For exposed boards, provide lumber with [15] [19] percent maximum moisture content and[any of]the following species and grades: YUM-E3.1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06105-5 July,2008 A"�ra 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,flashing, vapor barriers,and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, [furring,] [stripping,] and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm)above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where indicated. 4. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated. items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Framing for raised platforms. 2. Concealed blocking. 3. Roof construction. 4. Plywood backing panels. 5. <Insert category of rough carpentry items required to be treated.> 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: [15 percent] [19 percent] [15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness]. B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: [Construction or No.2] [Construction, Stud, or No.3] [Standard, Stud, or No. 3]grade of any species. C. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: [Construction or No. 2] [Construction, Stud, or No. 3] [Standard, Stud, or No. 3]grade and[any of]the following species: 1. Hem-fir(north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. YUM—E3.1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY ,�w► , Site Number 305-634 06105-4 July,2008 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated,they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber,S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2[, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron(SBX)]. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction[ and containing no arsenic or chromium]. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat[all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.] [items indicated on Drawings, and the following:] YUM—E3.1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06105-3 July,2008 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature(HT)type include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. ub 1. Products, t4! retl1t.E9C"f farad � i';.. ti #,, oon,t'olrtt,a 2 Proyd sf /u [ate fp wilt E44 for ca ©s +d � that prcxf�i,,ct�� s na ur '� 3 J tss *f reds p 999 toy aceig VV q1,1111,000, t iflcat[a . Y. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD- 01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship": 1. Dimension lumber framing. 2. Miscellaneous lumber. 3. Interior wood trim. 4. Shelving and clothes rods. 5. Plywood 6. Particleboard YUM—E3.1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 14 Site Number 305-634 06105-2 July,2008 SECTION 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 4. Wood furring and grounds. 5. Wood sleepers. 6. Interior wood trim. 7. Wood shelving and clothes rods. 8. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood framing. 2. Division 6 Section"Sheathing." 3. Division 6 Section"Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses." 4. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal(114 mm actual)in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. YUM—E3.1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06105-1 July,2008 END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 ROUGH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06100-3 July,2008 2. Exposures: Provide exposure ratings as indicated. 3. Thickness: As detailed or noted, or otherwise as required to maintain span capability. 4. Uses, Grades, Ratings a. As indicated in drawings. 2.2 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths,evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde. B. Parallel-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths,evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde. C. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored accordin to ASTM D 5055 1. ;,,, .I�tHQY�t '�",t�w. factc�� •,.,, D. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood (- joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists. 1. Material: [All-veneer product][glued-laminated wood][or][product made from any combination solid lumber,wood strands,and veneers].[ Provide rim boards made without urea formaldehyde.] 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners 1. Provide fasteners in sizes,spacings, and locations to suit applications. Hot dip galvanize unless noted otherwise. 2.4 WOOD TREATMENTS-SHOP PREPARED A. Preservative Treated Wood 1. Preservative treat all wood in contact w/grade steel or concrete. 2. Use waterborne salt preservatives as follows: a. AWPB LP-2 above ground. b. AWPB LP 22 ground contact. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. 1. VOC Content: 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines,with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. Scribe and cope as required. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Framing members: 1/4 inch maximum from true position. B. Surface flatness of floors/roofs: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum. YUM—E3.1 ROUGH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06100-2 July,2008 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grading: Lumber Grading Rules and Wood Species in accordance with Voluntary Product Standards. Grading rules of following associations apply to materials furnished. 1. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 2. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau(WCLIB). 3 Western Wood Products Association(WWPA) 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store products above ground,on platforms or skids,and covered with waterproof coverings. Provide for adequate air circulation. B. Do not store seasoned materials in damp or wet locations. C. Support products in such a way as to prevent warping and distortion. 1.3 SUBMITTALS � .._.. C�` ad.�: . s g prne+t':sf� et1 t� u a r 4pa P ,,...,�5entlgrt; T i s✓ 11�t' h Ct Y +��0 Ahit j�tYCIWC \\,"t t C G 's S#i � 11T�'ile ih fr �ludavd�nc tha l ed` t n cat custad ki ,..., � 1�te �dtd04#�tem�in# PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD MATERIALS A. General: Where stress rating values are given in lieu of grades, select any quality which will meet structural requirements. B. Lumber 1. Grading Rules: PS 20. 2. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum moisture content after treatment for fire retardant and preservative treated woods. 3. Surfacing: Surface four sides(S4S), unless noted otherwise. 4. Uses, Grades,and Stress Ratings a. Non-structural Framing (2 to 4 inch thick,2 to 4 inch wide): 1) Plates, Blocking, Bracing, Nailers: Utility grade. b. Structural Framing: Refer to structural drawings and structural calculations. C. Plywood 1. Grading Rules: PS 1, using group 1 to 4 species as required for rating. YUM—E3.1 ROUGH CARPENTRY Site Number 305-634 06100-1 July,2008 5. Safety Handrails: Extend rails 42 inches above top rung and anchor to structure, if adjacent structure does not extend above top rung,gooseneck extended rails back to structure. 2.10 BICYCLE RACKS A. Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe,fully welded together,to lengths indicated. B. Fabricate with NPS 3 top rails and end posts, NPS 1-1/2 bottom rails and intermediate posts not more than 72 inches o.c.,and NPS 3/4 vertical separators at approximately 8 inches o.c. C. Make top rails 36 inches above pavement/floor and bottom rails 4 inches above pavement/floor. D. Fabricate end posts[and intermediate posts]with 114-inch-thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill end post baseplates at all 4 corners[and intermediate-post baseplates at 2 opposite sides)for 1/2-inch anchor bolts. E. Galvanize bicycle racks after fabrication. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted,free from distortion or defects.Adequately reinforce and anchor work in place. Form exterior joints to exclude water. B. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1, D1.2 or D1.3 depending on substrate involved. C. After installation,touch-up field welds, scratched or damaged surfaces with primer. D. Install stock manufactured items in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Provide and install items listed in Schedule and shown on Drawings with anchorage and attachments necessary for installation. B. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled. C. Items of Work Custom Fabricated 1. Bumper bollards and guard rails;schedule 40 steel: Galvanized finish. 2. Lintels, ledges,shelf angles,channels and plates not attached to structural framing, for support of metal decking and masonry: Prime paint finish. 3. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Channels,wide flange shapes, angles,plates,tubing, connections,and bolts where shown and detailed on Drawings. Hot dip galvanize where exposed to weather or touching exterior masonry after fabrication. 4. Bicycle Rack(s) END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 METAL FABRICATIONS Site Number 305-634 05500-3 July,2008 2.4 ZINC-RICH PRIMER A. Inorganic,zinc-rich,capable of providing sound foundation for field applied top coats despite prolonged exposure,cathodic protection and corrosion resistance. 1. Pigment Content: Minimum 80 percent zinc in dry film by weight. 2. Compatible with finish paint system specified in Section 09910. B. Acceptable Products: 1. Valspar MZ-7(13-F-12) by Ameron, Baltimore,MD. 2. Tnemec N90-392 Tneme-Zinc,Tnemec Co., Kansas City,MO. 2.5 GALVANIZING A. Provide hot-dip galvanized coating in accordance with: 1. ASTM A 153-Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A 123-Rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates,bars and strips 1/8 inch thick and heavier. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: 1. Standard: MIL-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Valspar M-Z-2(13-F-2),Valspar, Baltimore, MD. b. Tnemec 90-93,Tnemec Co., Kansas,MO. 2.6 FINISH A. Clean surfaces of rust,scale, grease,and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint interior steel items scheduled with two coats of primer. D. Galvanize exterior steel items and those touching exterior masonry walls to minimum 2.0 ounces per square foot zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 386. Finish coating surface to be smooth,without irregularities,drip marks,or other roughness, ready for priming with minimal preparation required. 2.7 STEEL LINTELS A. Provide at wall opening and recesses. B. Weld multiple loose lintels to form a single unit. C. Provide a minimum of 8 inches of bearing at ends unless noted otherwise. D. Finish: Prime painted. 2.8 PIPE BOLLARDS A. Type: Standard steel pipe. B. Fill with standard weight concrete;set in concrete foundations. Ensure concrete at top of pipe is rounded and smooth. C. Finish: Galvanized. 2.9 VERTICAL LADDERS A. Type: Vertical steel ladders consisting of following components: 1. Side Rails:3/8 inch by 2-1/2 inches flat steel bars with eased edges spaced as detailed on Drawings or not less than 18 inches between. 2. Rungs: 1 inch minimum solid round steel bars spaced 12 inches maximum on center, punched through stringers and plug welded. 3. Provide non-slip surface on top of each rung,either by coating rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using type of manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grout. 4. Angle Supports: Support ladders by steel angles bolted to walls and floors to provide minimum of 7 inches from face of wall to centerline of rungs. Locate at 5 feet on center and within 16 inches of top and bottom. YUM-E3.1 METAL FABRICATIONS '"o^ Site Number 305-634 05500-2 July,2008 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate and verify required access door sizes and locations with applicable trades. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36; ASM A992 for wide flanges. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Grade B,Schedule 40. D. Bolts, Nuts,and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1;type required for materials being welded. F. Ferrous Metals: 1. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections,for delivery to site. D. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts;unobtrusively located; consistent with design of structure,except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Make exposed joints butt tight,flush, and hairline. G. Supply components required for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication,except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.3 UNIVERSAL PRIMER A. Manufacturer's standard, lead free primer,capable of providing sound foundation for field applied top coats despite prolonged exposure. B. Standard: FS TT-P-645. C. Maximum Allowable Dry Time:4 hours to touch; 24 hours to re-coat. D. Compatible with finish paint system specified in 09900 or 09965,as scheduled or noted. E. Acceptable Products(subject to compatibility with finish coating): 1. Tnemec, Chem Prime 371 Tnemec, Kansas City, MO. 2. Valspar 13-Y-5,Valspar, Baltimore, MD. 3. Carboline Multi-Bond 150, by Carboline Company, St. Louis,MO. YUM—E3.1 METAL FABRICATIONS Site Number 305-634 05500-1 July,2008 3.2 ERECTION OF STUDDING A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to layout. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks. C. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud wall openings, door and window jambs. D. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted. E. Allow for deflection,directly below horizontal building framing for non-load bearing framing. F. Attach cross studs/furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls and for attachment of mechanical and electrical items within walls. G. Touch-up field welds and damaged prefinished surfaces with primer. 3.3 ERECTION OF JOISTS/PURLINS A. Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. C. Set joists parallel and level,with lateral bracing and bridging. D. Locate joist end bearing directly over load bearing studs or provide load distributing member to top of stud track. E. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points. F. Touch-up field welds and damaged prefinished surfaces with primer. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING Site Number 305-634 05400-2 July,2008 SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Load bearing formed steel stud framing. B. Formed steel joist, purlin,slotted channel framing and bridging. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds,type and location of fasteners,and accessories or items required of related work. B. Indicate stud,floor joist,ceiling joist, roof joist, roof rafter,and roof truss layout. C. Product Data: Describe materials and finish, product criteria,and limitations. x m9. rvdu g. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING MATERIALS A. As specified on Drawings. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring,Bridging, Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel,thickness determined for conditions encountered;same finish as framing members. B. Screws: ASTM A90,hot dip galvanized,self-drilling, self-tapping. C. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated or Drilled expansion bolts. D. Welding: In accordance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3. E. Primer: Touch-up for galvanized surfaces. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of sizes and profiles required;with framing members fitted, reinforced and braced. B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. 2.4 FINISHES A. Studs and Accessories: Galvanize to G90 coating class. B. Joists, Purlins and Accessories: Galvanize to G90 coating class. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. YUM—E3.1 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING Site Number 305-634 05400-1 July,2008 H. Install wet concrete stops at deck edge upturned to top surface of slab. I. Install sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings between deck and walls, columns,and openings. J. Install single row of foam flute closures above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes. K. Position roof sump pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Attach at each deck flute. L. Place cant strips in position and attach. M. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position,coat welds,weld blooms, burned areas,and damaged surface coating,with touch-up prime paint. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 STEEL DECKING Site Number 305-634 05310-2 July,2008 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel deck and accessories;framing for openings up to and including 18 inches; bearing plates and angles. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate decking plan,support locations, projections,openings and reinforcement, pertinent details,and accessories. B. Product Data: Deck profile characteristics and dimensions,structural properties, and finishes. 6 Ammorp""R"W"rt having recycled content. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL DECK A. Deck Type: 1. Type B wide rib deck of carbon steel of specified gage. B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446,Grade B Structural Quality;with G30 galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A525. C. Bearing Plates,Angles:ASTM A36 steel. D. Welding Materials:AWS D1.1. E. Touch-Up Primer:Zinc chromate type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Erect metal decking in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Bear decking on support surfaces with minimum bearing as specified on Drawings. Align and level. C. Fasten ribbed deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports with fusion welds through weld washers at 12 inches oc maximum,parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute. D. Weld in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Weld male/female side laps at 18 inches oc maximum. F. Reinforce steel deck openings from 6 to 18 inches in size with 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angles. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute. G. Install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates,of same thickness as decking,where deck changes direction. Fusion weld. YUM—E3.1 STEEL DECKING Site Number 305-634 05310-1 July,2008 ,We,,, E. Frame floor/roof openings greater than 18 inches with supplementary framing. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions,and surfaces not shop primed except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection of members,connections,and torquing. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 STEEL JOISTS Site Number 305-634 05210-2 July,2008 lam"° SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Open web steel joists with bridging,attached seats and anchors. B. Section 03001-Concrete: Placement of anchors for casting into concrete. C. Section 04300-Unit Masonry System: Placement of anchors for embedding into masonry. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration,sizes, spacing,locations of joists,joist leg extensions, brid in connections,attachments,and cambers. NO n r ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SJI. B. Utilize Load Tables,and Weight Tables,including headers and other supplementary framing. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Open Web Joists Members: SJI Type K Open Web, Longspan LH,or Deep Longspan DLH and Joist Girders. B. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307,galvanized to ASTM A153. C. Primer: SSPC 15,Type 1, red oxide. D. Supplementary Framing: ASTM A36. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1;type required for materials being welded. F. Steel: Comply with SJI's"Specifications"for web and steel-angle chord members. 1. Recycled Content: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Provide bottom and top chord extensions as indicated. B. Drill holes in chords necessary for attachment of wood nailers. Weld threaded lugs to chords for attachment of wood nailers. 2.3 FINISH A. Shop prime joists. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed,field welded,or in contact with concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.2 ERECTION A. Erect and bear joists on supports. B. Allow for erection loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain framing in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing. C. After joist alignment,field weld joist seat to bearing surfaces. D. Position and field weld joist chord extensions and wall attachments as detailed. #00* YUM—E3.1 STEEL JOISTS Site Number 305-634 05210-1 July,2008 5. Steel Pipe: [25]<Insert number>percent. 6. <Insert Category Name>: <Insert number>percent. All Other Steel Materials: [25]<Insert number>percent. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. 2.3 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 2. B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete,or high strength bolted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.2 ERECTION A. Allow for erection loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain framing in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing. B. Field weld components indicated on Drawings and shop drawings. C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer. D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. E. Grout under base plates in accordance with Section 04100. Aq%, 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection of members,connections,and torquing. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL Site Number 305-634 05120-2- July,2008 .Alts SECTION 05120 STRUCTURALSTEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members,base plates,plates,and grouting under base plates. B. Section 03001-Concrete: Placement of anchors for casting into concrete. C. Section 04300-Unit Masonry System: Placement of anchors for embedding into masonry. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, openings, connections,cambers, loads,and welded connections. E 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Members:ASTM A36. B. Structural Tubing:ASTM A501. C. Pipe:ASTM A53,Grade B. D. Bolts, Nuts,and Washers:ASTM A325, galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized members. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1;type required for materials being welded. G. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15,Type 1, red oxide. I. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. J. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. W-Shapes: [60]<Insert number>percent. 2. Channels,Angles[, M][, S]-Shapes: [60]<Insert number>percent. 3. Plate and Bar: [25]<Insert number>percent. 4. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: [25]<Insert number>percent. YUM—E3.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL Site Number 305-634 05120-1 - July,2008 PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. B. Wet clay masonry units prior to laying if required to reduce excessive absorption of mortar moisture by the unit. Do not wet concrete masonry units. 3.2 COURSING A. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated. B. Maintain masonry joints to uniform width of 3/8 inches. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal, of uniform thickness,tightly tucked. C. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course one block unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form concave mortar joints on exposed work and flush joints on work to receive subsequent wall coating. D. Lay clay brick and concrete brick in running bond. Form concave mortar joints. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch maximum. B. Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more. C. Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch maximum. D. Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. E. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 3.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Attach wall ties to wall studs for veneer construction at maximum 24 inches on center vertically and 24 inches on center horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches on center each way around perimeter of openings,within 12 inches of openings. Place at 8 inches on center at parapets. 3.5 WEEPS AND VENTS A. Install weep holes in veneer at 32 inches on center horizontally for clay masonry.. 3.6 CAVITY WALL A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep holes. 3.7 CONTROUEXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide expansion joints where shown on the Drawings or as required/recommended by referenced standards. 3.8 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes,conduit, sleeves,and grounds. Cooperate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape,and location. 3.9 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and smears. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Leave surfaces thoroughly clean and free of all mortar and other soiling. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION A YUM—E3.1 BRICK MASONRY Site Number 305-634 04820-2 July,2008 SECTION 04820 BRICK MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints as shown on the Drawings or if not shown, install at frequency and in accordance with details as recommended by the N.C.M.A.or B.I.A. Confirm locations and frequency with Owner's Representative before beginning work. 1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. In hot weather,above 99 degrees F with less than 50 percent relative humidity, protect masonry construction from direct exposure to sun and wind. B. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC-Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 BRICK MANUFACTURERS A. As indicated on drawings. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: 1. Type: Standard truss design,fabricated from ASTM A 82 cold-drawn steel wire. 2. Side Rods:Two or more continuous 9 gage deformed side rods butt welded in same plane to continuous diagonal 9 gage plain cross rod at 16 inches on centers maximum. 3. Size: Standard length 10 to 20 feet;side rods spaced approximately 2 inches less than width of partition or wall in which placed. 4. Finish: Exterior walls;ASTM A 153, Class B-2,minimum 1.5 ounce per square foot zinc coating)hot-dip galvanized. 5. Provide prefabricated tee and corner units. 6. Acceptable product: Dur-O-WaI Truss by Dur-O-Wall. B. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel,ASTM A 615,Grade 60,unless noted otherwise on structural drawings. C. Veneer Wall Ties:7/8 inch wide by 7inches long minimum(masonry ledge depth plus 4 inches),corrugated sheet steel,20 gage,galvanized finish. 1. Acceptable Product: Model No. D/A CWT by Dur-O-Wall D. Expansion Joint Fillers: 1. Type: Closed cell neoprene complying with ASTM D 1056, Class RE41. 2. Compatible with sealant. 3. Self adhering on one side;50 percent minimum compressibility. 4. Size: Thickness to suit joint size;depth to allow sealant application. 5. Locations: Vertical expansion joints,horizontal joints at head of masonry terminating below shelf angles, beams,or slabs;other locations as detailed. 6. Acceptable Products: D/A 2010 and 2015 by Dur-O-WaI. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Sealant: Refer to Section 07920. B. Weep Holes: Open head joints. YUM—E3.1 BRICK MASONRY Site Number 305-634 04820-1 July,2008 D. At bearing points,fill masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from opening. E. Grout hollow metal frames with joint around frame uniform at 1/4 inch width. 3.9 WEEPS AND VENTS A. Install weep holes in veneer at 24 inches on center horizontally for clay masonry and 32 inches on center for 16 inch long concrete masonry,above through-wall flashing,above shelf angles,and at bottom of walls. B. After placement of flashing,fill cavity to a depth of six inches with pea gravel. 3.10 CAVITY WALL A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep holes. Install mortar net to keep weeps clean. 3.11 CONTROUEXPANSION JOINTS A. Size control joints in accordance with Section 07920 for sealant performance, but in no case larger than adjacent mortar joints in exposed face brick. B. Provide expansion joints where shown on the Drawings or as required/recommended by referenced standards. 3.12 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes,conduit,sleeves,and grounds. Cooperate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape,and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. C. Sleeve all pipe penetrating masonry walls. 3.13 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and smears. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Leave surfaces thoroughly clean and free of all mortar and other soiling. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION awk YUM—E3.1 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Site Number 305-634 04810-4 July,2008 C. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made,remove mortar and replace. D. Remove excess mortar on surface and in cavities. E. Perform job site saw cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edges. Take care to prevent breaking masonry unit corners or edges. F. Cut mortar joints of block units flush where resilient base is scheduled, cavity insulation vapor barrier adhesive is applied or bitumen dampproofing is applied. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Alignment of Columns: Maximum 1/4 inch from true line. B. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch maximum. C. Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more. D. Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative 1/2 inch in two stories or more. E. Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch maximum. F. Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center typically and 8 inches at intersection of walls. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend 16 inches minimum each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. E. Place reinforcing bars supported and secured against displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of true dimension. F. Verify that anchorages embedded in concrete and attached to structural steel members are "" properly placed. G. Attach wall ties to wall studs for veneer construction at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 16 inches on center horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches on center each way around perimeter of openings,within 12 inches of openings. Place at 8 inches on center at parapets. H. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 8 inches on center. 3.6 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Extend flashings through exterior face of veneer,turn up minimum 8 inches and seal onto face of sheathing over stud framed back-up. B. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight per manufacturer's recommendation. C. Use flashing manufacturer's recommended adhesive and termination sealant. D. Create end dams at ends of window heads, at edges of curtain walls, and other vertical elements to channel water to nearest weep hole away from window mullions and other items which might allow water to travel vertically. 3.7 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels as scheduled or shown. B. Install precast concrete lintels as scheduled. C. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled or shown. Construct lintels using grout filled solid bottom"U"shaped block and reinforcing. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. Place reinforcing near bottom of beam. 3.8 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Reinforce bond beams and pilasters as indicated on the Drawings. B. Lap splices minimum 36 bar diameters. C. Place and consolidate grout fill without disturbing reinforcing. YUM—E3.1 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Site Number 305-634 04810-3 July,2008 2.5 MANUFACTURERS-REINFORCEMENT,ANCHORAGES,AND ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following: 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.Arlington Heights, IL. 2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL. 3. Hohmann& Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY. B. Substitutions:Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Section 04055. 2.7 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Rubberized Asphalt: 40 mil thick, laminated composition of rubberized asphalt and cross laminated polyethylene. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing by W.R.Grace Construction Products Division. b. 400 Through Wall Flashing by Polyguard. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Preformed rubber material. Width slightly less than wall thickness to allow for sealant material. B. Joint Sealant: Refer to Section 07920. C. Weep Holes: Open head joints. D. Cleaner: Verify with masonry manufacturer that cleaner specified is acceptable. 1. Acceptable Products subject to manufacturer's approval: a. "Deox"Chemical Cleaner by National Chemsearch Corp. b. "Sure Klean"by Process Solvent Co., Inc. E. Cavity Drainage Material: 1 inch thick,free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands and shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Mortar Net; Mortar Net USA, Ltd. b. Mortar Stop; Polytite Manufacturing Corp. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Establish lines, levels,and coursing. Protect from disturbance. B. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. C. Wet clay masonry units prior to laying if required to reduce excessive absorption of mortar moisture by the unit. Do not wet concrete masonry units. 3.2 COURSING A. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated. B. Maintain masonry joints to uniform width of 3/8 inches. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal, of uniform thickness,tightly tucked. C. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course one block unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form concave mortar joints on exposed work and flush joints on work to receive subsequent wall coating. D. Lay clay brick and concrete brick in running bond. Form concave mortar joints. 3.3 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Buttering corners of joints and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. B. Fully bond intersections, and external and internal corners. YUM—E3.1 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Site Number 305-634 04810-2 July,2008 r� SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330. B. Submit 4 samples of decorative face brick units to illustrate color texture and extremes of color range. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints as shown on the Drawings or if not shown, install at frequency and in accordance with details as recommended by the N.C.M.A.or B.I.A. Confirm locations and frequency with Owner's Representative before beginning work. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. In hot weather,above 99 degrees F with less than 50 percent relative humidity, protect masonry construction from direct exposure to sun and wind. B. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC-Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. Trinity Industries. 2. Featherlite. 3. TXI. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Units: ASTM C 90,Grade N,Type I; light weight. B. Solid Units: ASTM C 145,Grade N,Type I; light weight. C. Concrete Brick: ASTM C 55,Grade N,Type I;normal weight. D. Sizes: Modular sized to widths as indicated on Drawings by 8 inch high by 16 inch long; provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams,45 degree corners,lintels. 2.3 BRICK MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following: 1. Acme Brick. 2. U.S. Brick. 3. Elgin-Butler. 4. Boral Henderson Clay Products. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.4 BRICK UNITS A. Face Brick: ASTM C 216,Type FBS, Grade SW;sized as indicated on Drawings. 1. Acceptable Product: Refer to finish legend on Drawings. B. Special Shapes: Of same brick type as above,shaped to profile indicated including solids, 45 degree corners,45 degree soldiers;surface texture on face and ends. YUM—E3.1 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Site Number 305-634 04810-1 July,2008 H. Expansion Joints: Provide where indicated on Drawings or as recommended by system manufacturer. I. Built-in Work:As work progresses, build in door and window frames, nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items specified in various sections. 1. Build in items plumb and level. 2. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar. 3. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes,conduit, sleeves,and grounds. Cooperate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape,and location. 1. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.4 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Cleaning: Comply with Section 01740. 1. Remove excess mortar and smears using brush or steel wool. 2. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. 3. Clean soiled surfaces with non-acidic solution,acceptable to the stone manufacturer,which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. 4. Leave surfaces thoroughly clean and free of mortar and other soiling. 5. Use nonmetallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 SIMULATED STONE VENEER Site Number 305-634 04730-5 July,2008 I. Apply sheets horizontally, starting at the base of the wall, and lapping each successive upper sheet over the previous lower sheet. 2. Lap horizontal and vertical joints 6 inches. 3. Cut and seal joints, penetrations, openings, and projections with manufacturer's recommended tape. 4. Install with corrosion-resistant staples. B. Lathing:Apply metal lath taut,with long dimension perpendicular to supports. 1. Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. 2. Lap sides of lath minimum 1-1/2 inches. 3. Attach metal lath to framing using nails or screws of type,size,and spacing as recommended by system manufacturer. 4. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh,except where the metal lath returns 3 inches from comer to form the angle reinforcement;fasten at perimeter edges only. 5. Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials. Secure rigidly in place. C. Plaster Substrate: 1. Apply 3/8 inch base coat and a 3/8 scratch coat of mortar to lath according to ASTM specifications for Portland Cement Plastering. w D. Simulated Stone Veneer: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Idaho Drystack: Stone should not be installed in a vertical position.Consists of 2inch,3inch and 4inch stones and should be installed in an ashlar pattern. (Do Not lay all 2inch,3inch or 4inch stones in one row) Blend the stone on the wall from several different boxes to ensure proper color and size variation. See brochure photos for recommended installation pattern. 2. Fully grout in each stone. Grout joints should be no greater than 3/8"with deep raked exposed joints. 3. Place units with uniform mortar joints Deep Raked in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Install outside corner return units with short and long lengths alternated. 5. Install accessory pieces(quoins,caps,sills, moldings)as work progresses, using same techniques as units in field of wall. E. Plan work to minimize jobsite cutting. Perform necessary cutting with proper tools to provide uniform edges;take care to prevent breaking unit corners or edges. F. Remove excess mortar;do not allow mortar to dry on face of units. 1. Point and tool joints before mortar has set. 2. Clean and finish joints in accordance with architect's and manufacturer's instructions. G. Control Joints:Size in accordance with Section 07920 for sealant performance, but in no case larger than adjacent mortar joints in exposed stone units. YUM—E3.1 SIMULATED STONE VENEER Site Number 305-634 04730-4 July,2008 B. Masonry sand,complying with ASTM C 144, natural or manufactured. C. Pigments: Meeting ASTM C 979, mineral oxide type. 1. Mortar Color: Natural as manufactured by Coronado Stone Products D. Water: Potable. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Setting Accessories: 1. Moisture Barrier: a. ASTM D 226, No. 15 non-perforated asphalt saturated organic felt. 2. Metal Lath:ASTM C 847; 18 gage,galvanized,flat diamond mesh,self furring, stamped sheet; 2.5. a. Attachment: Galvanized nails,screws and other metal supports,of type and size to suit applications;to rigidly secure materials in place. 3. Joint Sealant: Refer to Section 07920. 4. Fasteners: Coated 1-1/2 inch nails,staples,or screws of type and for spacing as recommended by simulated stone manufacturer. 5. Cleaner: Nonacid cleaner as recommended by simulated stone manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Examination: Examine conditions and proceed with work in accordance with Section 01400. 1. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 2. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located. 3. Verify that built- in items are in proper location and ready for roughing into masonry work. 4. Verify correct product prior to installation. 5. Consult Owner and manufacturer if deficiencies exist. Correct deficiencies in accordance with stone manufacturer's recommendations. B. Protect surrounding area from possible damage during installation work. C. Initiating installation constitutes Installer's acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Moisture Barrier: YUM—E3.1 SIMULATED STONE VENEER Site Number 305-634 04730-3 July,2008 _40"k, 2. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC (International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council)- Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store, handle, and protect materials in accordance with Section 01600. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Provide 50-year warranty against manufacturing defects in manufactured stone products. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Coronado Stone Products. B. Stone Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product: 1. Coronado Product: Idaho Drystack as manufactured by Coronado Stone Products a. Stone Color:Carmel Mountain as manufactured by Coronado Stone Products 2.2 STONE MATERIALS A. Simulated Stone: 1. Pre-cast simulated stone,composed of following materials: a. Portland Cement:ASTM C 150,Type 1,2,or 3 depending upon color to be produced. b. Course Aggregates:ASTM C 330, lightweight type,color as necessary to obtain final approved color of stone. C. Sand:ASTM C 144,special color if required to match approved sample. d. Iron oxide colors. e. Water: Clean and free from deleterious substances. B. Stone Accessories 1. Provide the following accessory and accent stones: 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Mix mortar in accordance with[ASTM C 270,Type S][or][Coronado Stone Products, Inc. mortar preparation instructions.] YUM—E3.1 SIMULATED STONE VENEER Site Number 305-634 04730-2 July,2008 SECTION 04730 SIMULATED STONE VENEER PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents:General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 General Requirements, and Drawings are applicable to this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Simulated stone veneers for[interior][exterior]applications. 2. Reinforcement,anchorages, mortar,and accessories. C. Contact: Coronado Stone Products Inc. 11191 Calabash Avenue Fontana,California 92337 909.357.8295 voice hftp:/www.coronado.com 1.2 FIELD SAMPLES A. Sample Installation:Construct stone wall at job site 3 feet x 4 feet in size, including mortar,special shapes, bonding,joint work, reinforcement, moisture barrier,grouting,corbelling, mortar color, expansion,control joints,and accessories. 1. Obtain Architect's approval before beginning work. Protect and retain sample as a basis on which the quality of the work will be judged. Do not remove until Substantial Completion. 2. Accepted Field Sample: May not remain as part of completed Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Minimum 5 years experience in similar types of work of similar scope and be able to furnish list of previous jobs and references if requested by Architect. B. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints as indicated on Drawings or,if not indicated, install at frequency and in accordance with details and as recommended by manufacturer. Confirm locations and frequency with Architect before beginning work. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Minimum air temperature of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to,during, and for 48 hours after completion of work;and YUM—E3.1 SIMULATED STONE VENEER Site Number 305-634 04730-1 July,2008 2.6 MANUFACTURERS-REINFORCEMENT,ANCHORAGES,AND ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following: 1. Dur-O-WaI, Inc.Arlington Heights, IL. 2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL. 3. Hohmann&Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY. B. Substitutions:Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 2.7 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: 1. Type: Standard truss design,fabricated from ASTM A 82 cold-drawn steel wire. 2. Side Rods:Two or more continuous 9 gage deformed side rods butt welded in same plane to continuous diagonal 9 gage plain cross rod at 16 inches on centers maximum. 3. Size: Standard length 10 to 20 feet;side rods spaced approximately 2 inches less than width of partition or wall in which placed. 4. Finish: Exterior walls;ASTM A 153, Class B-2, minimum 1.5 ounce per square foot zinc coating) hot-dip galvanized. 5. Provide prefabricated tee and corner units. 6. Acceptable product: Dur-O-WaI Truss by Dur-O-Wall. B. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel,ASTM A 615,Grade 60, unless noted otherwise on structural drawings. C. Veneer Wall Ties: 7/8 inch wide by 7inches long minimum(masonry ledge depth plus 4 inches), corrugated sheet steel,20 gage,galvanized finish. 1. Acceptable Product: Model No. D/A CWT by Dur-O-Wall D. Expansion Joint Fillers: 1. Type: Closed cell neoprene complying with ASTM D 1056,Class RE41. A 2. Compatible with sealant. 3. Self adhering on one side;50 percent minimum compressibility. 4. Size: Thickness to suit joint size;depth to allow sealant application. 5. Locations: Vertical expansion joints, horizontal joints at head of masonry terminating below shelf angles,beams,or slabs;other locations as detailed. 6. Acceptable Products: D/A 2010 and 2015 by Dur-O-WaI. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of the specific masonry Sections. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. D. Remove grout spaces of excess mortar. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 MASONRY MATERIALS Site Number 305-634 04055-2 July,2008 SECTION 04055 MASONRY MATERIALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Maintain packaged materials clean,dry,and protected against dampness,freezing,and foreign matter. 1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC-Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I,gray color. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144,standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207,Type S. D. Quicklime: ASTM C 5,non-hydraulic type. ,,, E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 33, pea gravel uniformly sorted from 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch. F. Water: Clean and potable. 2.2 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Non-load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C 270,Type N using the Property Method to achieve 750 psi strength. B. Mortar for Reinforced Masonry: ASTM C 270,Type S using the Property Method to achieve 1900 psi strength. 2.3 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C 270 and C 780. B. Provide uniformity of mix. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. D. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within 2 hours of mixing. E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F,or 2-1/2 hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F. 2.4 GROUT MIXES A. Bond Beams: 2500 psi strength at 28 days;9-1/2 inches slump; premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94. 2.5 GROUT MIXING A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94. B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. YUM—E3.1 MASONRY MATERIALS Site Number 305-634 04055-1 July,2008 E. Apply hardener/sealer in accordance with manufacturers instructions on scheduled floor surfaces. 3.3 TOLERANCES. A. Maintain surface flatness to ACI 302 of Ff30 and levelness of FI25 for floors to receive carpet, resilient surfaces,thin set tile,and surfaces to be left exposed; maintain flatness to Ff15 and levelness to FI13 for recessed sub-slabs. Test flatness and levelness in accordance with ASTM E 1155. B. In areas of floor drains, maintain floor level at walls and slope surface uniformly to drains at 1/8 to 1/4 inch per foot. 3.4 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot,dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing.Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound,or by moisture-retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by the following Method 1: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Use continuous water-fog spray. 2. Provide moisture-cover curing by the following Method 2: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs,walks,and curbs as follows: a. Apply specified curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete,within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. b. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete. C. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ACI 301. d. Do not apply curing compound on surfaces to receive applied coatings and finishes. Use other methods specified herein. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING AND CURING Site Number 305-634 03355-2 July,2008 SECTION 03355 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING AND CURING PART 1GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ACI 301. 1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperature during curing period above 70 degrees F for 3 days or above 50 degrees F for 5 days. B. Protect from rain or running water. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. Sonneborn Building Products 2. L&M Construction Chemicals 3. Secure, Inc. 4. Dayton Superior 5. Burke !o' B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sodium Silicate Compounds: Zero-VOC water-based sodium silicate compound in solution. Clear. Non-membrane forming.Compounds in suspension not permitted. 1. Compatible with subsequent coatings and toppings without stripping. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Sinak S-102, Sinak Corp.,San Diego,CA b. L&M Cure, L&M Construction Chemicals,Omaha, NE. C. Eucosil, Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland,OH. d. Ashford Formula, Crecrete Distribution Inc. a. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify floor surfaces are acceptable for application of this work. B. Ensure floor surfaces are depressed to accommodate finish materials. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of surfaces. 3.2 FLOOR FINISHING A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. B. Uniformly spread,screed,and float concrete. Do not use grate tampers or mesh rollers. Do not spread concrete by vibration. C. Manually float surfaces which will receive ceramic tile with full bed setting system. D. Steel trowel surfaces to receive carpeting, resilient flooring,seamless flooring,thin set ceramic tile,and surfaces to be left exposed. YUM—E3.1 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING AND CURING Site Number 305-634 03355-1 July,2008 surface after placing and finishing.Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of formed concrete by moist curing,or by moisture-retaining cover curing, as herein specified. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces,including underside of beams, supported slabs,and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed,continue curing by moisture cover curing method. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs and other flat surfaces, in accordance with Section 03355. 3.5 PATCHING CONCRETE SURFACES A. It is the intent of these Specifications to provide for grade beams of such quality as to require a minimum of pointing. B. Exercise care in forming, mixing and placing of concrete to ensure reasonably uniform dense surfaces,free from blemishes,voids,or honeycombs. C. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar and bonding agent mixture immediately after removal of forms,when acceptable to Owner's Representative. 1. Cut out honeycomb,rock pockets,voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts,down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water,and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding compound has dried. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450. B. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. "'" C. Cast-in-Place Concrete 1. Test Cylinders: Make at least one test of each day's pouring or each 50 cubic yards, whichever comes first,on each different portion or section of the work.Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31, and test in accordance with ASTM C 39. Test cylinders shall be made and tested by the laboratory in accordance with ASTM C 172. Footings,walls,and floor systems constitute different sections. Each test shall consist of 5 specimens,2 of which shall be broken at 7 days,2 at 28 days and one held in reserve. Determine temperature and air content for each set of test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 231. 2. Field Quality Control a. Determine slump for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, in accordance with ASTM C 143. b. Monitor addition of water to concrete and length of time concrete is allowed to remain in truck. C. Certify delivery tickets indicating class of concrete,amount of water added during initial batching,and time initial batching occurred. d. Monitor work being performed in accordance with ACI recommendations as a standard of quality. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying,excessively hot or cold temperatures, rain or running water and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 3.8 SCHEDULE OF MIXES A. Refer to Drawings. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Site Number 305-634 03300-4 July,2008 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify anchors,seats, plates,reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, held securely,and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. B. Correct unsatisfactory work prior to placing concrete. C. Remove rubbish from formwork immediately prior to placing concrete. D. Remove ice and excess water from excavations and formwork. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs-on-fill and over sand leveling bed,if present. Lap joints minimum 12 inches and seal with special tape of same permeance as vapor barrier. Do not disturb or damage vapor barrier while placing concrete. Repair damaged vapor barrier. 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE A. Notify testing laboratory a minimum of 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete operations. B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and as specified below. 1. Unless protection is provided,do not place concrete in rain,sleet,or snow. 2. Regulate rate of placement so concrete remains plastic and flows into position. 3. Deposit concrete continuously until panel or section is completed. Place as near as possible to its final location;do not rehandle. 4. Consolidation a. Comply with requirements of ACI 309. b. Use mechanical vibrating equipment for consolidation. C. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete in forms. d. Thoroughly consolidate concrete and work around reinforcement,embedded items and into corners of forms. Thoroughly consolidate layers of concrete with previous layers. 5. Cold Weather Placement: Do not place concrete when temperature is below 40 degrees F unless cold weather concrete procedures are followed as specified in ACI 306. Calcium chloride shall not be used. 6. Hot Weather Placement: Exercise special care to prevent high temperature in fresh concrete during hot weather in accordance with ACI 305. Use water reducing set-retarding admixtures in such quantities as especially recommended by manufacturer to assure that concrete remains workable and lift lines will not be visible. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts,embedded parts,and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings,maintain concrete cover around reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318. E. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. F. Place floor slabs on fill in pattern indicated on Drawings. G. Separate exterior slabs on fill from vertical surfaces with joint filler. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/4 inch of finished slab surface. H. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Owner's Representative upon discovery. I. Maintain record of concrete placement. Record date,location,quantity, air temperature and test samples taken. 3.4 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed formed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete YUM—E3.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Site Number 305-634 03300-3 July,2008 "*AN b. Master Builders. C. Sika. B. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494. Depending upon weather conditions at time of placing, cement-dispersing agent may be supplemented by a set-retarding or set-accelerating agent to improve control of setting and, in the case of hot weather,to minimize surface checking. Introduce admixtures in quantities and according to methods recommended by manufacturers of materials approved for use. Introduce admixtures only after receiving written approval from testing laboratory and Structural Engineer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Barrier: 1. Type: 15 mil film meeting requirements of ASTM E 1745, Class A and B. 2. Water Vapor Transmittance: Maximum 0.006 grams per square foot per hour. 3. Tensile Strength: Minimum 54.2 pounds at 1139 percent strain/MD per ASTM D 638. 4. Tear Resistance: 7.40 pounds per foot MD per ASTM D 1004. 5. Acceptable Products: a. Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries, Ilc, San Juan Capistrano,CA. b. Comparable products by Reef Industries, Raven Industries,and WR Meadows. 6. Accessories: Rubber based pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene tape. a. Acceptable Product: Stego Wrap Red Polyethylene Tape. 2.4 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94,Alternative No.2,or ACI 304. B. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94. C. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1. Mix not less than one minute after materials are in mixer. D. Do not transport or use concrete after the following time has expired from time of initial AOW* mixing: 1. 90 minutes when ambient temperatures are below 80 degrees F. 2. 75 minutes when ambient temperatures are between 80 and 90 degrees F. 3. 60 minutes when ambient temperatures are over 90 degrees F.Verify supplier of transit-mixed concrete has a plant of sufficient capacity,and adequate transportation facilities to assure continuous delivery at required rate. Frequency of deliveries to project site shall be such as to provide for continuous concrete placement throughout any one pour. E. Use of calcium chloride is strictly prohibited. F. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data or both accordin to ACI 301 m diet r� " , ' N rtt ed 8 6i 2.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than than 25 percent. YUM—E3.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Site Number 305-634 03300-2 July,2008 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301,304,305,306,309,and 318. B. Obtain materials from same source throughout the Work. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building code. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Notify responsible trades of schedules of concrete pours so as to allow adequate time for installation of their work. B. Obtain anchor bolts and other miscellaneous steel items to be cast into concrete from material supplier. C. Coordinate size and location of mechanical equipment concrete pads with applicable trades. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Mix and deliver concrete to project ready-mixed in accordance with ASTM C 94. B. Schedule delivery so that continuity of any pour will not be interrupted for over 15 minutes. C. Place concrete on site within 90 minutes after proportioning materials at batch plant. 1.5 SUBMITTALS d PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Normal-Type II;air entrained where exposed to the freeze-thaw c cle;�gra�r color. aSS� B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33 clean, hard,durable,natural sand free from silt,loam or clay. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, hard,durable, uncoated,crushed limestone or other approved aggregate. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.2 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C 260 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following: a. W.R. Grace. ew YUM—E3.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Site Number 305-634 03300-1 July,2008 ,1%K 3.2 PLACING A. Place reinforcement in accordance with CRSI"Placing Reinforcing Bars"and ACI 318,with provisions of ACI 318 governing. B. Move bars as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. C. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter or enough to exceed tolerances,submit resulting arrangement of bars to Owner's Representative for review. D. Place,support,and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from alignment or measurement. Place in accordance with approved shop drawings and CRSI recommendations. Do not heat,cut or bend bars without Owner's Representative's approval. E. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier required by Section 03300. F. Refer to Section 03300 for minimum coverage of concrete unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. G. Place reinforcement,at time of concrete placing,free of mud, oil,or other materials that adversely affect or reduce bond. H. Reinforcement with Rust, Mill Scale, or Both:Considered satisfactory, provided minimum dimensions, including height of deformation,and weight of hand-wire-brushed test specimen are not less than ASTM A 615 requirements. I. Support reinforcement and fasten together to prevent displacement by construction loads of placing concrete. Use No. 16 gage black annealed wire at joints and crosses to accurately position reinforcing in place. J. Over formwork, use metal or plastic bar chairs and spacers to support reinforcement. K. Where concrete surface will be exposed to weather in finished structure, use non-corrosive or corrosion protected accessories within 1/2 inch of concrete surface. L. Bars having splices not shown on shop drawings will be subject to rejection. M. Do not bend reinforcement after being embedded in hardened concrete. N. Do not allow bars to be in contact with dissimilar materials. END OF SECTION AM% YUM—E3.1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Site Number 305-634 03200-2 July,2008 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Documents 63 and 65. B. Conform to ACI 301 and 318. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615,grade billet-steel deformed bars,uncoated,60 KSI yield grade;ASTM A 706,grade 40 weldable for bars welded to steel members. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ANSI/ASTM A 185 plain type;in flat sheets; uncoated finish. C. Contractors Option: Glass fiber reinforcement,ASTM C 948 collated,fibrillated, polypropylene fibers. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Forta CR by Forta Corporation. b. Fibermesh by Fibermesh, Inc 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in accordance with ACI SP-66,providing concrete cover specified in Section 03300. B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings at points of minimum stress. Indicate location of splices on shop drawings. C. Weld reinforcing bars in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4. D. Provide sufficient lap of splicing of reinforcement,where required,to permit transfer of stress in accordance with requirements of this specification.Splice wall vertical reinforcement at location of horizontal construction joints. E. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings to be more,lap reinforcement 36 bar diameters (class"A"lap)at splices or have dowels of same bar section and spacing as the bars to be spliced. Lap bars at least 36 diameters(class"A"lap)at corners and at abrupt changes in direction of walls. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before placing concrete,clean reinforcement of foreign particles or coatings. YUM—E3.1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Site Number 305-634 03200-1 July,2008 3.4 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS,AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for work embedded in or passing through concrete. B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and setting openings,slots,recesses,chases, sleeves,bolts, anchors, and other inserts. D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Install construction joint device in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. 3.5 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. B. Camber slabs and beams as indicated in Drawings and in accordance with ACI 301. 3.6 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms, shoring and bracing until concrete has sufficient strength to support its own weight, and construction and design loads which may be imposed upon it. B. Do not damage concrete surfaces during form removal. C. Do not place wood forms which cannot be retrieved after concrete placement. Use steel forms. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 CONCRETE FORMWORK Site Number 305-634 03100-2 July,2008 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design,engineer,and construct formwork,shoring,and bracing to meet design and code requirements,so that resultant concrete conforms to required shapes, lines,and dimensions. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and 347. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Plywood: Solid one side grade;sound, undamaged sheets with clean,true edges. B. Lumber: No.2 or better grade;with grade stamp clearly visible. 2.2 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Snap-off metal of adjustable length;cone type; 1 inch break back dimension; free of defects that will leave holes no larger than 1-1/4 inches diameter in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete,absorb moisture or affect bond of subsequent surface finish,or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete; C. Fillets for Chamfered Corners and other justifications: Wood strips,sizes and configurations as detailed. D. Formed Construction Joints: Galvanized steel,tongue and groove type,knock-out holes spaced at 6 inches on center,with anchors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH FORMS A. Earth forms not permitted,except for footings where soil is conducive and approval is received from authorities having jurisdiction and structural engineer. 3.2 ERECTION A. Minimize form joints. Symmetrically align joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of mortar. B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit stripping, so that concrete is not damaged during its removal. C. Arrange forms to allow stripping without removal of principal shores,where required to remain in place. D. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Strengthen formwork liable to be overstressed by construction loads. E. Provide chamfer strips on external corners of beams,and columns where they will be exposed to view after completion of construction. F. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier placed by Section 03300. G. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances in accordance with ACI 301. H. Construct form full depth of concrete to be placed. 3.3 APPLICATION OF FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel,anchoring devices, and embedded items. tow YUM—E3.1 CONCRETE FORMWORK Site Number 305-634 03100-1 July,2008 4. Butt joints tightly, but do not overlap edges. 5. On second strip stagger end joints. 6. Use a sharp knife to cut sod to fit curves, edges, sprinkler heads. 7. Lay smooth. Align with adjoining grass areas. Place top elevation of sod 1/2 inch below adjoining edging, paving, and curbs. 8. On slopes 6 inches per foot and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod. 9. Prior to placing sod on slopes exceeding 8 inches per foot(or where indicated) -place wire mesh over topsoil. Securely anchor in place with wood pegs sunk firmly into ground. D. Watering: Do not lay whole lawn before watering. When a conveniently large area has been sodded,water lightly to prevent drying. Continue to lay sod and water until installation is complete. E. Rolling Sod: After laying sod, roll lightly to eliminate irregularities and to form good contact between sod and soil. Avoid a very heavy roller or excessive initial watering which may cause roller marks. F. Replacement: Replace any areas of grass not showing sufficient growth at the end of 3 weeks per original method of application at no additional cost to Owner. G. Watering: Continue irrigation regularly to keep soil evenly moist until active growth resumes. 3.9 CLEAN UP A. During work, keep premises neat and orderly including organization of storage areas. Remove trash, including debris resulting from removing weeds or rocks from planting areas, preparing beds, or planting plants,from site daily as work progresses. Keep walkway and driveway areas clean by sweeping or hosing. lditk END OF SECTION A YUM-E3.1 LANDSCAPING Site Number 305-634 02905-6 July,2008 3.4 SPACING AND PLANTING SHRUBS AND GROUND COVERS A. Place plants in position on bed areas or in individual pits before cans or burlap have been removed. B. Remove top 1/3 burlap from balled and burlapped plants. Plant where located and approved, setting plants with root flares at or slightly above finish grade, and compact soil carefully around each plant ball. C. Water each plant thoroughly with hoses to eliminate air pockets. Carefully prune plants to remove dead or broken branches and hand-rake bed areas to smooth, even surfaces. D. Owner's Representative reserves the right to interchange or shift locations of plants prior to planting. 3.5 STAKING A. Refer to Drawing details for placement of stakes. B. No staking required for trees smaller than 1 '/2 in.caliber. C. Use 3 or more wires, attached to tree by loops of wire covered by 3/4 inch rubber hose, and secured around the lowest crotch.Anchor wire to"T"posts, driven into the ground to a depth of 20 inches. D. Inspect hose and wire attachments regularly to evidence of girdling or other damage, and adjusted before such damage occurs. E. Warning Flags: Flag guy wires or cable with plastic surveyor's ribbon to warn pedestrians- do not place guy wires and cable across paths or sidewalks F. At direction of Owner's Representative, leave some trees unstaked for reasons of sheltered location or large relative size of root ball. G. At the direction of Owner's Representative, stake certain large shrubs for reasons of exposure to prevailing winds or small size of root ball in relation to top growth. 3.6 MULCHING A. After work of planting has been completed and approved by Owner's Representative, mulch soil in and around tree pit and bed areas with 4 inch thickness of mulch, lightly cultivated into area. Do not disturb watering saucer,and do not cover root flare. Delay this operation until just prior to final inspection. B. Mulching Material: Mulching material shall be prevalent in location, and free of germination- inhibiting ingredients. Combustible,wood based mulches shall not be used directly adjacent to the building. If the mulch is required adjacent to the building, mulching materials shall consist of pea gravel or crushed stone for a distance of 18"from the face of the building. Gravel shall be separated from organic mulches with a metal or commercial grade nylon spike edging. No black or white pumice rock will be permitted 3.7 FINE GRADING A. Loosen lawn areas and fine rake to break up lumps and produce a smooth,even grade free from unsightly variations, ridges or depressions. B. Remove and legally dispose off site stones 1/2 inch or larger, sticks, root or other debris that is exposed during this operation. C. Fine Grading: Subject to approval by Owner's Representative. D. Ensure positive drainage away from building at planting areas adjacent to the building. 3.8 SOD PLANTING A. Grading and Rolling: Carefully smooth surfaces to be sodded. Roll area to expose soil depressions or surface irregularities. B. Fertilizing: Spread turf fertilizer onto soil evenly at rate of 10 pounds per 1,000 square feet of lawn area. Rake in lightly. Be sure soil is level and smooth before laying sod. Avoid laying sod on dry soil. Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours prior to laying sod. C. Laying Sod: 1. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod. 2. Lay sod within 24 hours after harvesting. 3. Lay first strip of sod slabs along a straight line, using a string in irregular areas. YUM-E3.1 LANDSCAPING Site Number 305-634 02905-5 July,2008 I. Weed Barrier: spun-bond or woven, polypropylene, needle-punched fabric. 10-year warranty preferred. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine subgrade, verify elevations noted on the Drawings, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed, and notify Owner's Representative of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Contractor and Owner's Representative. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing site. C. Verify location of underground irrigation lines and other utilities. 3.2 SOIL PREPARATION A. Trees: 1. General: Refer to the Drawings for tree locations. 2. Backfill Soil: Unless noted on drawings, backfill tree planting pits with native topsoil. a. Topsoil: Free from rocks, construction debris and other foreign materials. Do not use soil amendments. B. Shrubs and Ground Covers: 1. General: Refer to the Drawings for shrub area locations. a. Shrub areas with ground cover: Rough grade in bed areas will be left 4 inches low prior to work of this Section. b. Shrub areas without ground cover: The rough grade will be left 3 inches low prior to work of this Section. 2. Soil Mix: General Planting a. 1 part bedding mix b. 1 part native soil C. Add 4 pounds fertilizer per 100 square feet of bed area and cultivate 6 inches deep. 3. Shrub Beds without Ground Cover: Pocket planted with soil mix described above. Fertilize as above. 4. Specimen or Individual Shrubs: Plant in pits twice the diameter and no deeper than the root ball, and backfill with soil mix described above. 5. Refer to the Drawings for other soil preparation details, notes, and requirements. 3.3 TREE PLANTING A. Location: Refer to Drawings for location of trees. Stake and label position of trees before pits are dug. Receive approval from Owner's Representative before proceeding. B. General 1. Excavate pit: During pit excavation, if pit walls are glazed, roughen sides to allow for good root bond with backfill. 2. Center trees with root flare at or above finish grade and with trunk plumb: once tree is positioned, remove any wire/rope at tree trunk base(critical). 3. Remove top 1/3 of ball burlap immediately prior to backfilling pit, 2 hour maximum, and gently roughen exposed soil around ball, being careful not to damage feeder roots. C. Size of Tree Pits: Plant tree balls in pits slightly larger than tree root ball unless otherwise dictated by the landscape architect/landscape designer and no deeper than height of ball. In some locations coniferous tress may need to be planted higher than level ground (verify with landscape architect/landscape designer). Rest root ball on undisturbed soil. During backfilling do not allow air pockets. D. Maintain trees in vertical position while backfilling. AOW%, YUM-E3.1 LANDSCAPING Site Number 305-634 02905-4 July,2008 4. Normal,well-developed branches and vigorous,fibrous root systems,conforming to specifications of the last edition of ANSI Z60.1,Standards for Nursery Stock published by the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. (A.A.N.). 5. Healthy, vigorous and free from defects, decay„ girdling roots, sun-scald injuries, abrasions of the bark, plant diseases, and insect pests,their eggs and larvae. 6. Hardy grown under soil type conditions similar to those in the locality of the project. I. Upon becoming aware of any condition that will adversely affect the long-term survival of any plant, notify the Owner's Representative before installation of the plant(s). 2.2 SOIL PREPARATION MATERIALS A. Bedding Soil 1. Acceptable Manufacturer for location B. Commercial Fertilizer(if used): Uniform in composition, dry and free-flowing. Deliver fertilizer to site in original unopened containers, each bearing manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis. 1. Fertilizer per the landscape architect/landscape designer's recommendation-do not over-stimulate plantings with nitrogen. C. Coarse grade Sphagnum Moss, no Peat Moss permitted. D. Bark Mulch: if wood mulch used (see note 3.6-13 below), it must be sterilized and contain no harmful active residues: pesticides, disease organisms and foreign chemicals. Screen to particle size of 1 inch or smaller. Shredded mulch preferred. E. Refer to Drawings for specific soil preparation materials which may be proprietary in nature. If such materials are indicated, provide only these proprietary materials unless specific approval of substitutions has been granted in accordance with Section 01600. 2.3 TOPSOIL A. Fertile, agricultural soil typical for locality-Refer to Section 02300 for specific information. 2.4 TREE STAKING AND GUYING MATERIALS A. Hose: New 3/4 inch rubber hose. B. Hardware 1. Wire: #10 gage, galvanized. C. Stakes: Steel"T"posts, minimum 5 feet in height. D. Warning Flags: Plastic surveyor's ribbon, international orange, 1 inch wide and 24 inches long,minimum E. Tree Wrap: Heavy crepe paper, impregnated with insect repellent chemicals. F. Install staking and guying as indicated on the Drawings. G. Turnbuckles: Cadmium plated steel with 3 inch minimum lengthwise adjustment. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Steel Edging: 4 inches deep, 1/8 inch thick, painted dark green with rust-resistant paint and stake loops welded or formed onto backside. B. Spikes: Similar material as steel edging, 18 inches long. C. Erosion Fabric: Jute matting,4 inch open weave. D. Root Wrapping Materials: Quality burlap. E. Tree Wound Dressing: Black asphaltic based antiseptic paint. F. Herbicides—Acceptable Products: 1. Pre-Emergent per landscape architect/landscape designer: local or regional use. 2. Post-Emergent per landscape architect/landscape designer: local or regional use. G. Tree, Shrub,and Plant Bed Mulch: Shredded decomposed pine bark, having a pH between 6.0 and 7.0, sterilized, and containing no harmful active residues,that is, pesticides, disease organisms and foreign chemicals, uniform in size with a medium particle size of 1-1/2 inch, free of sticks, stones, leaves and other debris. H. Turf Mulches: Hydroseed base, no dry hay or straw permitted. YUM-E3.1 LANDSCAPING Site Number 305-634 02905-3 July,2008 6. Trimming and pruning: including the removal of clippings and dead or broken branches and treatment of pruned areas and other wounds. 7. Provide disease control if needed. 8. Maintain wrapping,guys,turnbuckles, and stakes.Adjust turnbuckles to keep guy wires tight. Repair or replace accessories when required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANTS A. General: 1. Well-formed No. 1 grade or better nursery stock, in accordance with ANSI Z-60 and as noted hereafter, subject to Owner's Representative's approval. 2. Listed Plant Heights: From top of root ball to nominal top of plant. 3. Provide only healthy,vigorous stock, grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement. B. Shrub Size:As shown on scheduled. Trees and shrubs of larger size may be used if acceptable to Owner's Representative, in which case, increase size of roots or balls proportionately. Larger-than-specified plant materials shall not exceed original budget intent. C. Tree Size: Unless otherwise stated, caliper size will refer to trunk diameter as determined in accordance with ANSI Z-60.1. D. Ornamental and Shade Trees: 1. Healthy, vigorous, full-branched,well-shaped,with trunk diameter and height requirements as specified. 2. Balls: Firm, neat, slightly tapered and well burlapped. Trees with loose or broken balls at time of planting will be rejected. 3. Trees will be individually approved by the Owner's Representative. 4. Ball Diameter: Minimum 10 inches for each 1 inch caliper measured 6 to12 inches above root ball. 5. Containers: Heavy gage plastic, metal and wooden boxes only. 6. Provide trees with full rounded crowns, meeting height and spread standards after pruning. No flat sided trees or trees with open areas on any side will be acceptable, consistently superior in form and branching,and typical of the growth habit of their species unless otherwise specified. E. Multi-trunk Trees: Measure multi-trunk tree caliper as follows. Add the caliper of the largest trunk to one-half the caliper of the remaining trunks. 1. Example:An 8 inch caliper, multi-trunk could be 3 trunks of 5 inch/4 inch/2 inch or 5 inch/3 inch/3 inch). F. Shrubs, Groundcovers, Perennials and (Annuals with Owner's approval only): Nursery grown, healthy, vigorous,and of normal habit of growth for the species. G. Turf Grass Sod: 1. Green, actively growing,with strong fibrous root system, free of weeds, stones, and foreign grasses of type indicated in Plant Schedule or on Drawings. Sod which is dormant, heat or drought stressed will not be accepted. 2. Cut sod with a minimum of 3/4 inch of soil covering the roots. 3. Deliver to the site in no larger than 24 inch wide rolls or pallets. 4. Do not stack more than 24 hours between time of cutting and time of delivery. H. Plants: 1. Conform to sizes and quality notes in plant list and as indicated, with the exception of that larger plants than those specified may be used if approved by the Owner's Representative. Use of larger plants shall not increase the contract price. 2. Specified sizes are after pruning. 3. Measure plants with their branches in normal position. YUM-E3.1 LANDSCAPING Site Number 305-634 02905-2 July,2008 SECTION 02905 LANDSCAPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control: Furnish certificates of inspection of landscape materials,to accompany shipments, as required by governmental authorities. Comply with applicable Federal,state,county and local regulations governing landscape materials. 1.2 JOB CONDITIONS A. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available,working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required. B. Cooperate with other contractors and trades working in and adjacent to the landscape work areas. Examine drawings which show the development of the entire site and become familiar with the scope of other work required. C. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Owner's Representative before planting. D. Scheduling: Plant or install materials only during normal planting seasons for each type of landscape work required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance until occupancy by the Owner. E. Site Utilities 1. Determine locations of underground utilities, especially site lighting, and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Do not permit heavy equipment such OOW as trucks to damage utilities. Hand excavate,as required to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 2. Coordinate work with the irrigation,electrical,and other trades to prevent damage to underground piping or conduit and similar obstruction work located in landscape areas. F. Protections: Do not move any equipment over existing or newly placed concrete without approval of Owner's Representative. Provide necessary protections such as board-roading as required. G. Provide water, hoses, other watering equipment and labor necessary for the work. H. Do not install plant materials when ground is frozen. 1.3 MAINTENANCE A. Until final acceptance or in accordance with the Warranty Program (refer to contract), maintain plantings and trees by watering,cultivating,weeding, controlling pests and diseases, cleaning and replacing as necessary to keep landscape in a vigorous, healthy condition. Rake bed areas as required. B. In general, provide maintenance as follows: 1. Watering: As necessary to promote growth. Water will be available on site. Provide necessary hoses and other watering equipment required to complete work. 2. Watering Trees: Keep tree balls moistened to depth of tree ball. 3. Weeding: Remove weeds and foreign grass over plant areas at least once every 2 weeks. Herbicides may be used only when approved by Owner's Representative. 4. Mowing and Edging: Mow and edge newly planted turf when growth reaches minimum required height for specified turf type. Maintain at this height. 5. Apply pesticides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage from use of pesticides. YUM-E3.1 LANDSCAPING Site Number 305-634 02905-1 July,2008 SECTION 02848 PARKING BUMPERS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Job Conditions 1. Verify that concrete paving and pavement marking is completed and ready for installation of wheel stops. 2. Coordinate installation of concrete wheel stops with pavement marking layout. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE PARKING BUMPERS A. Qualities: Precast concrete parking bumpers reinforced, and having 2 pre-drilled pin holes and having 2 cast-in anchor pins. 1. Concrete: Normal weight concrete, minimum 4000 psi 28-day compressive strength. 2. Reinforcing: 2 continuous No. 3 deformed reinforcement bars. 3. Size: 8-1/2 inch wide by 6 inch high by 72 inch length. 4. Anchor Pins: 5/8 inch deformed bar, 2 for each wheel stop, extending a minimum of 3 inches below bottom of wheel stop. B. Standards 1. Concrete: ASTM C 94. 2. Reinforcing: ASTM A 615, Grade 40. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify layout of parking bumper locations with pavement marking layout. B. Thoroughly clean surfaces to receive parking bumper free of dirt,sand, oil,grease or other foreign matter. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install a precast parking bumper in each parking space indicated on drawings. B. Install with anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Leave parking bumper securely anchored and in proper alignment. END OF SECTION A01k' YUM—E3.1 PARKING BUMPERS Site Number 305-634 02848-1 July,2008 SECTION 02823 WOOD FENCES AND GATES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the installation of the fence with other trades to avoid cutting and patching. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Posts: ASTM A 120; Schedule 40 steel pipe, standard weight, one piece without joints; galvanized finish. B. Wood Rails and Pickets: Western Red Cedar, No. 1 clear grade,rough sawn surface. C. No treated yellow pine allowed. 2.2 CONCRETE MIX A. Concrete: ASTM C 94; normal Portland Cement; 2500 psi at 28 days; 3 inch slump; 3/4 inch maximum sized aggregate. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. As indicated on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set terminal,gate and line posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above finish grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff. B. Attach rails to posts with pre-manufactured, radiused, steel devices. Use minimum 2 lag bolts per device. C. Attach pickets to each rail with 2 galvanized nails. If power actuated nailers are used, adjust to make sure fasteners are not driven past face of picket. D. Gate Latching Devises. 1. Crane bolt 1-inch diameter. 2. 3-inch deep lead cylinder receiver pipe. END OF SECTION 0"* YUM—E3.1 WOOD FENCES AND GATES Site Number 305-634 02823-1 July,2008 3.5 TESTING A. Prior to backfilling, test mains for a period of 4 hours. If leaks or pressure drops occur, correct defect and repeat test. 3.6 FINAL ADJUSTMENT A. After installation is complete, make final adjustment of sprinkler system preparatory to Owner's Representative's final inspection. B. Completely flush system to remove debris from lines by removing nozzles from heads on ends of lines and operating system. C. Adjust sprinklers for proper operation and proper alignment for direction of throw. NOTE: Under no circumstances shall the direction of throw come into contact with any portion of the building and/or exterior cooler/freezer box. D. Adjust each section of spray heads for operating pressure and balance to other sections by use of flow adjustment on top of each valve. E. Adjust nozzling for proper coverage. Prevailing wind conditions or slopes may indicate that arc of angle or trajectory of spray should be other than as shown on Drawings. Change nozzles to provide correct coverage. 3.7 CLEANUP A. Keep premises clean and neat. B. Replace and/or repair plant material, structures, and installations by others, damaged by work of this section. 3.8 SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system including adjusting of sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance material as basis for demonstration. END OF SECTION OOW YUM—E3.1 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 02810-5 July,2008 3. Threaded PVC Connections: Where required, use threaded PVC adapters into which pipe may be welded. D. Copper Pipe and Fittings Assembly: 1. Clean pipe and fittings thoroughly and buff connections with sand paper to remove residue from pipe. 2. Flux pipe and fitting and solder connection using 50-50 soft solid core solder. E. Electrical Valves: 1. Provide valves in accordance with materials list and size according to Drawings. 2. Provide valves in a level position in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. 3. Provide plastic or concrete valve box as noted on the Drawings, centered over valve, flush with finish grade. Provide valve box extensions as required. F. Sprinklers: 1. General: Provide in accordance with materials list,with nozzling in accordance with Drawings. Revise nozzle degree and trajectory if wind conditions affect coverage. Set pop-up heads flush with finish grade. 2. Shrub Heads: Provide spray heads on copper pipe risers of high pop sprinklers attached to lateral piping with flexible, Schedule 80 PVC nipples, sufficiently high to water over shrubs and plants when they have reached their ultimate growth, or as otherwise directed by Owner's Representative. Firmly tamp soil around copper riser. " G. Wiring: 1. Provide wire from automatic sprinkler controls to valves. No conduit required for U.L. wire, except under pavement, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 2. Make wire connections with waterproof connectors according to manufacturer's recommendations, and only in approved value boxes. 3. Provide wire from controller to each electric valve. Provide a common neutral wire from controller to valves served by a particular controller. 4. Install control wiring. Provide 10 inch expansion coil at each valve to which controls are connected, and at 100 foot intervals. Bury wire beside pipe. Mark valves with neoprene valve markers containing locking device. Set valve markers in 160 psi PVC pipe risers extending from top of valve to finish grade. H. Automatic Sprinkler Controllers: 1. Provide and install per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Locate as shown on Drawings with approval of Owner's Representative. 3. Complete controller connection to power supply in PVC conduit in accordance with local electrical codes with watertight fittings. 4. Provide lightning protection (ground rod and wire)to nearest available ground location. look YUM—E3.1 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 02810-4 July,2008 C. Make trenches wide enough to allow 6 inches between parallel lines. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Perform work only in the presence of a licensed irrigation contractor. 2. Do not install system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions,grade differences or discrepancies in equipment usage, area dimensions,or static water pressure exist that might not have been considered in the engineering. Bring obstructions or differences to the attention of the Owner's Representative. In the event this notifications is not performed, assume full responsibility for any revision necessary. 3. Staking: Prior to installation, place a stake where each sprinkler is to be located. Receive approval of Owner's Representative before proceeding. 4. Piping Layout: Piping layout is diagrammatic. Route piping around trees and shrubs in such a manner to avoid damage to plantings. Do not dig within balls of newly planted trees and shrubs. Hand excavate whenever possible to avoid cutting of roots greater than 1 inch diameter, during construction. 5. Install pipe,valves, controls, and outlets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 6. Install all necessary pumps and connections to Waterhog storage system. B. Pipe Installations: 1. Sprinkler Mains: Install in minimum 4 inch wide trenches with a minimum 18 inches cover. 2. Lateral Piping: Install in minimum 4 inch wide trenches deep enough to allow for installation of sprinkler heads and valves, but in no case with less than 12 inches cover. 3. Provide firm, uniform bearing in trenches for entire length of each pipe to prevent uneven settlement.Wedging or blocking of pipe is not permitted. Remove foreign matter and dirt from inside of pipes before welding, and keep inside of piping clear during and after layout of pipes. 4. Provide for thermal movement. 5. Backfill: Hand-tamp and water-jet to prevent settling. Hand rake trenches and adjoining areas to leave grade in a good or better condition than before installation. Backfill trench and compact as specified in Section 02300. Protect piping from displacement. C. PVC Pipe and Fittings Assembly: 1. Solvent: Use solvent and procedures recommended by manufacturer to make solvent-welded joints. Thoroughly clean pipe and fittings of dirt,dust and moisture before applying solvent. 2. PVC to Metal Connections: Work metal connections first. Use a non-hardening pipe dope on threaded PVC to metal joints. Use only light wrench pressure. a. Acceptable Product: Permatex No. 2. YUM—E3.1 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 02810-3 July,2008 2.2 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS ITEM MANUFAC. MODEL NO. 4" Pop-up Spray Head Rainbird 1804 12" Pop-up Spray Head Rainbird 1812 Rotor Head Hunter PGP Hunter ICC Controller Controllers Electric Valves Rainbird EFA-CP Gate Valves NIBCO Quick Coupler Valve& Key Buckner 14 and 14C Swivel Hose E11 Buckner 22 2"Quick Coupler Valve FEBCO 805 10"Round Valve Box Amtec 181104 Rain Sensor Mini-Click 24-A Freeze Sensor Irritrol FC-1 40%' urge Protection Kit Irritrol SPD-587 PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify location of existing utilities and that they are ready for use. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Piping layout indicated is diagrammatic only. Layout and stake locations of system components. Route piping to avoid plants and structures. Verify full and complete coverage. B. Protect landscaping and other features remaining as final work. C. Coordinate work which is embedded in concrete or masonry and routed under paved areas according to underground irrigation sleeves. D. Provide timely delivery and installation at job site. 3.3 TRENCHING A. Keep trenches free of debris, material, or obstructions that may damage pipe. B. Leave trench bottoms smooth so pipe will lay flat. YUM—E3.1 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 02810-2 July,2008 SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate to ensure that irrigation sleeving and electrical power source is in place. 1.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide instructions for operation and maintenance of system and controls, seasonal activation and shutdown,and manufacturer's parts catalog. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for piping and component requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS-GENERAL A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe(PVC): PVC pipe manufactured in accordance with standards noted herein. 1. Marking and Identification: Continuously and permanently marked with the following information: a. Class 200 SDR 21 number. b. ASTM D 2241 standard number. C. NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) seal. 2. PVC Pipe Fitting: ASTM D 2464 and D 2466, of the same materials as PVC pipe specified and compatible with PVC pipe provided. B. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564 for PVC pipe and fittings. C. Copper Tubing: Seamless,type'M' hard drawn,ASTM B 88. D. Copper Piping: Hard, straight lengths of domestic manufacture only,ASTM B 88,Type'L'. No copper tube of foreign extrusion,or so-called irrigation tubing(thin wall)allowed. E. Copper Pipe Fittings: Cast brass or wrought copper,sweat-solder type. F. Wire: 14 gage, single copper strand minimum. Type OF with 1/64 inches insulation. Underwriters Laboratory(UL)approved for direct underground burial when used in a National Electric Code Class II Circuit(30 volts AC or less). G. Flexible PVC Risers(Nipples): Virgin PVC material, complying with ASTM D 2287,tested at 200 psi static pressure for 2 hours and having a quick burst rating of 400 psi minimum. 1. Acceptable Product: Excaliber type. H. Swing Joints: O-ring seal type 1. Acceptable Product: Lasco. YUM-E3.1 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 02810-1 July,2008 SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Job Conditions: Do not apply marking paint when weather is foggy or rainy, or ambient or pavement temperatures are below 40 degrees F., nor when such conditions are anticipated during 8 hours after application. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Traffic Marking Paint: 1. Type: Solvent borne alkyd resin; durable and weather-resistant; high solids;fast drying;VOC compliant; meeting requirements of Federal Paint Specifications TT-P- 11 5F and TT-P-85E. 2. Application Thickness per Coat: 15 mils wet(7 mils dry). 3. Application Rate per Coat: 300 to 320 linear feet of 4 inches wide line per gallon. 4. Colors: a. White: Parking stall stripping, directional emblems, restricted parking zone striping,disabled accessibility paths. b. Blue with White Copy: Disabled parking emblems. C. Red with White Copy: Fire lanes. 5. Acceptable Products: a. S275 Traffic Paint Alkyd 4900 Series by ICI Dulux. 2.2 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. Pressurized, self-contained paint machine capable of applying a straight line from 2 to 6 inch wide,with consistent coverage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Locate markings as indicated on Drawings. Provide qualified technician to supervise equipment and application of markings. Lay out markings using guide lines,templates and forms. B. Thoroughly clean pavement surfaces free of dirt, sand, gravel, oil and other foreign materials. C. Allow paving to cure before painting as required by manufacturer of traffic paint. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply 2 coats to paving where indicated or required by code. C. Restrict traffic on pavement until stripping if fully cured. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Site Number 305-634 02765-1 July,2008 B. Immediately after placement, protect concrete under provisions of Section 01500 from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. C. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Finishes: 1. Vehicular Paving: Heavy broom. 2. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, radiused and trowel joint edges. 3. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom. 4. Inclined Pedestrian Ramps: Broom perpendicular to slope. 5. Curb Ramps for the Disabled: a. Stamped during final finishing to create raised truncated domes with a diameter of nominal 0.9 inches, a height of nominal 0.2 inches and a center-to-center spacing of nominal 2.35 inches,with a visual contrast to adjoining surfaces. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing performed under provisions of Section 01450. B. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity,air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.9 SCHEDULES(unless noted otherwise recommended by soils investigation report or if otherwise indicated on civil drawings, provide the following minimum strengths and thicknesses) A. Concrete Sidewalks: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete compression strength,4 inches thick, 3 inch minimum and 5 inch maximum slump. B. Parking Area Pavement and Curbs: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete compressive strength, 5 inches thick, 3 inch minimum and 5 inch maximum slump. C. Fire Lane and Frequent Truck Traffic Pavement and Curbs: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete compressive strength,6 inches thick, 3 inch minimum and 5 inch maximum slump. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Site Number 305-634 02752-4 July,2008 Ate' F. Support reinforcing on bar chairs. Securely saddle tie at intersections. Rigidly secure in place to minimize displacement during concrete pour. 3.5 JOINTS A. Intentional stoppage of concrete placing allowed only at planned location of either an expansion joint or contraction joint. B. When stoppage occurs at an expansion joint, install joint assembly with a bulkhead of sufficient section drilled to accommodate required dowels. Provide expansion joints at maximum 40'-0"on center each way in parking lots,40'-0"on center for curbs and maximum 20'-0"on center each way at pedestrian paving. C. When stoppage occurs at a contraction joint, install sheet metal joint assembly of sufficient section to prevent deflection,shaped to concrete section. Drill bulkhead to permit continuation of longitudinal reinforcing steel through construction joint. D. Stoppage at Unintentional Location 1. Immediately upon unintended stoppage of concrete placing, place available concrete to a line and install bulkhead perpendicular to surface of pavement and at required elevation. Place and finish concrete to this bulkhead. Remove and dispose of concrete remaining on subgrade ahead of bulkhead. 2. When placing of concrete is resumed before concrete has set to extent that concrete will stand on removal of bulkhead, rod new concrete with the first;otherwise, carefully preserve joint face. 3. Provide a joint seal space at edges created by a construction joint of this type, as detailed on Drawings. E. Provide sawed contraction joints in vehicular paving and curbs spaced as detailed on Drawings, but in no case greater than 20 foot on center spacing. 1. Saw joints after completion of finishing operations as soon as concrete has hardened to extent necessary to prevent revealing of joint or damage to adjacent concrete surfaces. 2. Saw joints same day that concrete is placed except that sawing of joints in concrete placed late in day may be delayed until morning of following day. 3. In any event, saw joints within 18 hours after placing concrete. 4. Use a power-driven concrete saw made especially for sawing concrete and maintain in good operating condition. 5. Saw Blades: Make a clean, smooth cut, producing a groove 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch wide and a depth equal to 1/4 of slab thickness, minimum 1 inch depth. 6. Align joints in vehicular paving with joints in adjacent pedestrian paving. 7. Cut joints through curbs at right angles to back of curb. F. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. Recess top of filler 1 inch for backing rod and sealant placement. Install sealant over backing rod in accordance with Section 07920 and manufacturer's recommendations. G. Provide 3/4 inch deep scored joints in sidewalks and plazas at intervals as indicated, but in no case spaced greater than width of walk. 3.6 PLACING CONCRETE A. Hot Weather Placement: ACI 305. B. Cold Weather Placement: ACI 306. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. 3.7 FINISHING AND CURING A. After consolidating and screeding,float concrete to gradients indicated. Use a straight edge to level and test surface in longitudinal direction to required grade. Finish edges to provide a smooth dense surface with 1/8 inch radius. YUM-E3.1 REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Site Number 305-634 02752-3 July,2008 B. Backer Rod: As specified in Section 07920. C. Sealants:Two or three part polyurethane sealants,of grade as required to suit application, meeting ASTM C 920, in manufacturer's custom colors, and as follows: [Refer to Section 07920 for traffic-bearing urethane sealant,Type U-TB. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. W. R. Grace&Co. 2. Euclid Chemical Company. 3. Sika Corporation. 4. Master Builders, Inc. B. Air Entrainment: ASTM C 260. C. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A-cement dispersing and water reducing. Use Type D-water reducing and retarding, or Type E-water reducing and accelerating as determined by climatic conditions and as approved by testing laboratory. 2.7 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94,Alternate 2. B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by testing laboratory. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. C. Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by testing laboratory. D. Add air entraining agent to concrete mix for concrete work exposed to exterior, in amounts of 4 to 7 percent of total concrete volume or as otherwise recommended by testing laboratory. E. Maintain water-cement ratio to produce a minimum of 3 to maximum of 5 inch slump. F. Use of calcium chloride and fly ash are strictly prohibited. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify compacted subgrade or stabilized soil is ready to support paving and imposed loads, free of frost, smooth and properly compacted. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct, and proper drainage has been provided so that water does not stand in the area to receive paving. 3.2 FORMING A. Construct and remove forms in accordance with ACI 347. B. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension,and profile. Adequately brace to withstand loads applied during concrete placement. C. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. D. Place joint fillers vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. 3.3 INSERTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Make provisions for installation of inserts, accessories, anchors, and sleeves. 3.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Accurately place reinforcement in middle of slabs-on-grade. B. Interrupt every other bar of reinforcement at control and expansion joints. C. Place reinforcement to achieve slab and curb alignment as detailed. D. Steel: Free of rust, mill scale, dirt and oil. E. Provide doweled joints at interruptions of concrete with one end of dowel set in capped sleeve to allow longitudinal movement. Provide support at both ends of dowels. YUM-E3.1 REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Site Number 305-634 02752-2 July,2008 + SECTION 02752 REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Obtain materials from same source throughout. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for paving work on public property. 1.3 TESTS A. Testing and analysis performed under provisions of Section 01450. B. Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in accordance with ACI 301. C. Four concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 or less cubic yards of each class of concrete placed each day. D. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place pavement when base surface or ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F,or if base surface is wet or frozen. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150,Air Entraining-Type IA, Portland Cement,gray color. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.2 FORM MATERIALS A. Conform to ACI 301. If using metal, use material free of deformities. If using wood, use construction grade lumber,sound and free of warp, minimum 2 inch nominal thickness, except where short radii of curves require thinner forms. B. Contraction Joint Devices: Galvanized sheet metal, keyed profile,with knock-outs for reinforcing and dowel steel. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615; 60 ksi yield grade;deformed billet steel bars, uncoated finish. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type,ANSI/ASTM A 185; in flat sheets; uncoated finish. C. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, minimum 16 gage size. D. Dowels: ASTM A 615;40 ksi yield grade, plain steel,uncoated finish. E. Miscellaneous Reinforcing Accessories: Spacers, chairs,ties, and other devices necessary for properly placing, spacing,supporting,and fastening reinforcement in place. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Form Release Agent: Non-staining, paraffin-based oil. 2.5 JOINT FILLERS A. Wood: Construction grade, preservative treated yellow pine, sound and free of checks, splits or other defects,3/4 inch thick. YUM—E3.1 REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Site Number 305-634 02752- 1 July,2008 3.8 SITE SPECIFIC IDENTIFICATION A. Remove and store bumper blocks and other lot accessories during operations, reinstall after work is completed, and replace any and all broken bumper blocks. B. Remove all waste materials from the site and dispose of according to local ordinances. C. Complete all work in compliance with ADA requirements. D. Notify Owner and Store Manager when store traffic can return to lot. E. Supply Owner with Notarized Certificate of Compliance and total(tons, cu.yds., number) used for all products supplied to the project for each pay item. F. Supply Owner with yield calculations for all products used on the project. (Example: placement of 1,300 sq. yds. of Hot Mix Asphalt,1-3/4" compacted thickness will require 128 tons when the unit weight= 150 pcf.) References: Asphalt Institute, Lexington, KY National Asphalt Pavement Association, Lantham, MD END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 HOT MIX ASHALT PAVEMENT ' Site Number 305-634 02743-10 July,2008 Method C. Additional testing shall be performed on any given day once 400 tons of asphalt is placed. H. Any average in-place density measure for surface course mixtures that is less than required for the day will result in a reduction in HMA pay equal to the following chart. After reaching the 30% reduction mark the pavement shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor or left in place with no compensation due the Contractor. Base and leveling installation of asphalt shall meet local DOT specifications for in-place density measures. Surface course longitudinal joints shall be measured 6"from the joint, centered upon core or density gauge, and shall meet the mat density requirements minus 2.0%at a minimum. Base and leveling course longitudinal joint density measures shall achieve between 95% - 102%of maximum achievable individually,with an average of 98%on any given day. In-Place Density Pay Schedule, Surface Course Mat Density Pay Factors, % (percent) In-Place Density, % Maximum Theoretical Specific Gravity, Gmm 100 >92.0% 100—0.5 for each 0.1% below 92.0% 91.0%to 92.0% 95— 1.0 for each 0.1% below 91.0% 90.0%to 91.0% 85— 1.5 for each 0.1% below 90.0% 89.0%to 90.0% I. Process Control testing shall be in accordance with state standards for frequency and methods where the work being performed is done with a minimum of testing meeting the above QC requirements. J. Protect the HMA until such time that traffic can be placed upon the properly compacted asphalt and show no signs of deformation. K. If excessive segregation is occurring during placement operations,the Contractor will investigate the cause(s)and make appropriate changes to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.7 WORKTIMELINES A. HMA Full-depth pavements: After placing base asphalt and immediately prior to placing the surface asphalt inspect the entire pavement for low spots,damaged areas, segregated materials, and testing measures taken. Remove and replace any and all deficient sections to meet these specification requirements prior to continuing with work. These efforts shall not delay the overall progress of construction nor delay the opening of the facility. B. Overlays(a/k/a Resurfacing): The pavement repairs, overlay, and striping shall be accomplished in such a manner as not to unduly limit parking or access to the site by customers or employees. 1. There shall never be less than 50% of the usable parking spaces available unless work is performed during off hours or when completion of work is possible prior to hours of operation. 2. Every attempt should be made to complete the surface course placement process in one continuous placement with no cold joints. 3. The timing and process should be discussed with the Owner before proceeding with the work. YUM—E3.1 HOT MIX ASHALT PAVEMENT Site Number 305-634 02743-9 July,2008 acceptable and shall require replacement at the Contractor's expense. Flood the lot as directed by the Owner to determine positive drainage acceptability. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Hot Mix Asphalt(HMA) shall be manufactured from a state approved/ certified HMA manufacturing facility. Work consists of one or more courses of HMA constructed on a prepared foundation. The asphalt concrete consists of a mixture of uniformly graded aggregate and specified type and grade of asphalt binder. The manufacturing facility shall be capable of producing HMA in accordance with the following requirements and all applicable local agency specifications on an ongoing and consistent basis. B. Ensuring uniform material is produced and selecting the vendor for these asphalt projects will require timely submittal of documents and qualifications to the satisfaction of the Owner. Contractor/material supplier shall demonstrate the existence of the following documents: 1. Approved vendor certificate for the state where work is being done. 2. Quality Control manual for material production over-site and testing measures being performed both at the asphalt plant as well as on the job site. 3. List/Organizational Chart showing personnel responsible for use of equipment and actions of the crew on the grade while paving and compacting asphalt. C. Calibrated equipment and qualified personnel must be accessible at all times during the construction of this HMA. The Contractor shall provide the necessary equipment, materials, and labor to complete the job acceptable to the Owner. Variations in the size and amount of equipment will depend on the size of the area being paved. D. It is imperative that all documents list a 'Person-in-Charge'who is responsible for the over-site of the previously listed activities. This individual will be the point of contact for the Owner and they shall work with the Owner to ensure timely project completion and specification compliance. This individual shall be knowledgeable in all aspects of asphalt design, production, and installation and shall be an employee of the company holding the contract with the Owner, even if the HMA is being produced and supplied by a separate vendor. E. Daily maximum theoretical specific gravity values must be made available to the Contractors density technician for verifying in-place density within four hours of start of production. F. Asphalt content, gradation, and bulk specific gravity(Gmb)testing shall be done a minimum of once every 400 tons of HMA supplied or every third day for low tonnages that when added together successively do not equal 400 tons. G. Acceptable average measures are made by use of a correlated nuclear density gauge, Pavement Quality Indicator or PaveTracker(non-nuclear)or by cutting (4)cores per lift, per day and testing per AASHTO T-166, YUM—E3.1 HOT MIX ASHALT PAVEMENT Site Number 305-634 02743-8 July,2008 texture not showing tearing, shoving, or gouging. Auger extensions are required if segregation occurs while pavers are extended beyond the basic screed width. Paving Equipment shall be LeeBoy or Pro Paver type or the equivalent. Hand work shall be minimized to ensure the best possible finished surface. H. Place Hot Mix Asphalt at a minimum temperature of 250 degrees F. I. Rolling shall start as soon as the HMA can be compacted without displacement. Rolling shall continue until the HMA is thoroughly compacted and all roller marks have disappeared. Compact the HMA to a minimum in-place density of 92.0%of the Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity, Gmm• J. Rollers shall conform to the manufacturer's specifications for all ballasting. At least one vibratory roller shall be required for each project. Rollers shall be of good condition and capable of compacting the HMA to the minimum in-place density required by this specification. K. For asphalt repairs work at an existing site,Work in such a manner as to not unduly limit parking or access to the site by customers or employees. Maintain access to at least 50% of usable parking spaces during paving. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Minimize construction, longitudinal and transverse joints left open for an extended period of time. B. Construct parking swale longitudinal joint by paving in a hot fashion with a temperature of not less than 180°F to ensure maximum performance. C. Compact all joints to provide for a neat, uniform and tightly bonded joint that will meet both surface tolerances and density requirements. D. Cut true construction or transverse joints if the material has cooled to less than 180°F prior to the placement of the next pass to ensure the best performing joint possible. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Smoothness shall meet the requirements of no greater than 1/4"in 10 ft.for base and leveling courses and 3/16" in 10 ft.for surface course. B. Thickness of the overall mat shall be within 1/4"of the specified compacted plan thickness at all locations. The average thickness shall meet the plan thickness shown. The yield for the day and for the entire site shall meet calculated theoretical based on 92% of Gmm supplied from the Contractors mix design and daily test values. This item shall be calculated by the Contractor and supplied to YUM as final parking lot documentation prior to final payment. C. Deficient areas shall be defined, removed and replaced, or adjusted to the Design Thickness, by methods approved by the Owner's Representative. D. Completed HMA placement must be laid in order to allow positive drainage away from buildings and towards drainage outlets. Any ponding of water is not look YUM—E3.1 HOT MIX ASHALT PAVEMENT Site Number 305-634 02743-7 July,2008 Blotter sand may be used if the prime is applied at too heavy of an application rate to dry up the excess prime coat material. G. Tack/Prime Coat Distributor Truck must have an insulated tank, heating system and a distributor capable of maintaining a uniform application of emulsified asphalt under pressure throughout the area to be paved. This requires a pump in good working order, full circulating spray bars, and free flowing nozzles. Small, isolated areas may be tacked with a wand. H. Install tack/prime coat during appropriate weather conditions and protect the tack/prime coat from traffic so as not to wear and track. Allow each installation of the tack/prime coat to'break', i.e.turn from brown to black prior to installation of the HMA. 3.3 PLACING ASPHALT PAVING A. Placement shall not occur when weather is inclement. Adhere to local requirements for temperature constraints however in no case shall the base asphalt be placed when the temperature is below 400 and the surface asphalt when the temperature is below 45°. Additionally, the forecast shall be for rising temperatures for both efforts. B. Detail and submit to the Owner a paving plan on the site plan sheet prior to placement of asphalt. C. Apply tack coat at the diluted rate of 0.05 gal/sy over newly constructed asphalt leveling or base mixes, 0.10 gal/sy over existing asphalt pavements and 0.15 gal/sy over milled surfaces. The higher rate shall be used on dry and brittle surfaces. All vertical edges abutting proposed asphalt surfaces shall receive a tack coat. Excessive asphalt applications, drooling, or pooling shall be swept with a broom to ensure proper bonding of the HMA. Immediately install the HMA after the asphalt emulsion has'broken'. D. Trucks shall have smooth,clean and tight metal beds that do not have mixture sticking to the truck bed and from which the entire quantity of HMA can be discharged smoothly into the spreading equipment. Trucks shall have a tarp and insulation as needed to protect the asphalt mixture from wind, rain and cold temperatures. Trucks for hauling asphalt mixture shall be in good, safe working condition. E. Surface course longitudinal joints shall run with the traffic pattern. Therefore, pulling across the driving lanes shall not be allowed unless express permission is given by the Owner. F. The entire parking lot surface course shall be paved on the same day. The timing and process should be discussed with and approved by the Owner before proceeding with the work. G. Paving Equipment must be capable of placing, spreading and finishing courses of HMA to the specified thicknesses. HMA shall be free of marks, segregation and be placed to the required uniform elevation with a smooth YUM—E3.1 HOT MIX ASHALT PAVEMENT '` Site Number 305-634 02743-6 July,2008 O E. Mix Design Method Requirements Table: Measures Su er ave Marshall Hveem Stability, lbs. n/a 1,200 min. 30 min. Flow, 0.01 in. n/a 8 to 16 n/a Swell, in. n/a n/a 0.030 max. Air Voids @ optimum AC 3.5% 3.5% 3.5% VMA base mix 13.0 min. 13.0 min. 13.0 min. VMA surface mix 14.5 min. 14.5 min. 14.5 min. VFA 70 to 80 70 to 80 70 to 80 Dust to total AC (design) 0.6 to 1.0 0.6 to 1.0 0.6 to 1.0 Dust to total AC (production) 0.8 to 1.2 0.8 to 1.2 0.8 to 1.2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify compacted sub-grade or granular base is dry and ready to support paving equipment and imposed loads. Proof roll to check for unstable areas and remove and replace loose material. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Repair pavement failures and perform crack repair according to their respective specification requirements prior to installation of any HMA surface course. B. Cold-milling and/or grinding may be necessary to ensure that the asphalt edges at concrete abutments such as approaches, sidewalks, curbing, and drainage basins have smooth transitions. C. After site review, detail whether wedge milling is necessary to assure positive drainage and transition. Install leveling course, if required, on the project per the site details and quantities shown on the plan sheets. D. Existing surfaces to receive HMA must be clean prior to the installation of any portion of the work. Clean the surface on which the asphalt concrete is to be placed, and keep it free of accumulations of materials that would, in the judgment of the Owner, contaminate the mixture, prevent bonding, or interfere with spreading operations. Methods used may include but not be limited to the use of a sweeper that can wet and vacuum the area free of dirt and debris,clay, and dust,or any other foreign material. E. Any oil or grease spots shall be scraped and treated to prevent bleeding through the tack coat. Bad oil spills may require removal with a wire brush or other suitable tool. Maintain clean pavements prior to applying emulsified tack coat. When approved sub-grade or pavement courses previously constructed under the Contract become loosened, rutted, or otherwise defective,the Contractor must correct the deficiency according to the contract item or items involved before the spreading of a subsequent pavement course. F. If shown on the plans, apply prime coat at the diluted rate of 0.30 gal/sy over newly placed aggregate base course prior to the installation of the base asphalt. YUM—E3.1 HOT MIX ASHALT PAVEMENT Site Number 305-634 02743-5 July,2008 L. Mix Designs shall include a breakdown factor, increase to minus#200, introduced during the design stage to mimic production values. M. VMA is based on the aggregate bulk(dry)specific gravity, Gsb, as determined by AASHTO T-84&T-85. N. RAP may be used up to 20% in the HMA Binder and Surface Courses without approval by the engineer; mixes greater than 20% require engineer's approval. Use a softer grade of PG Binder per local requirements when using RAP. 2.2 HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) A. All HMA mix designs shall be performed in accordance with the Asphalt Institute MS-2 and SP-2, current edition. The HMA mix designs developed shall meet the requirements of one of the following for compactive effort: 1. Marshall, 50-Blow, 2. Superpave, 50-Gyration, or 3. Hveem, Low Volume Mix. 4. Alternate design with the Engineers approval prior to time of bidding. B. HMA Mix Designs shall be performed by qualified personnel with proven past experience and successes in the mix design and quality control of asphalt production. Resumes of the signing'individual-in-charge' may be required by the Owner and shall be supplied if requested. The design shall meet the following requirements and be less than 24-months old. However, the mix design method used shall be the Contractors option, as stated previously, based on various methods which currently exist around the nation. A completed design shall require submittal of documentation as detailed, requested by the Owner in order for the producer to demonstrate knowledge of design and production criterion. C. Bidding documents shall include the Contractors proposed Asphalt Mixture Design sheets. Ref. Mix Design Submittal Checklist sheet at the end of this document. Designs will be for HMA to be placed for each of the uses anticipated on each project; patching, base, leveling, and/or surface course. Different asphalt suppliers shall require different design submittals. D. All submitted HMA mix designs shall contain at a minimum the following information: 1. All Aggregate Gradations 2. Plot(0.45 power graph)of Final Aggregate Blend 3. Bulk Specific Gravity of All Aggregates and Final Blend (Gsb) including Work sheets for natural as well as reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP). 4. Optimum%Asphalt Binder(Pb) 5. Mix Air Voids at Optimum(Va) 6. Bulk Specific Gravity of Mix at Optimum (Gmb) 7. Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity at Optimum (Gmm) 8. Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA) and Voids Filled with Asphalt (VFA) 9. Dust to total AC Ratio 10. All Design Data and associated Design Curves YUM—E3.1 HOT MIX ASHALT PAVEMENT Site Number 305-634 02743-4 July,2008 1.6 DEFINITIONS A. Surface Course-The surface/wearing course shall be installed uniformly, to all finished lines and grades, smooth, durable, skid-resistant, impervious thus protecting lower layers, and stable. Workmanship of the finished surface course shall be of the highest industry standards possible prior to acceptance by the Owner. The surface course shall be built with a maximum aggregate particle size of between 1/2°and%". Surface course shall be a nominal 1-'/z"compacted thickness with no thickness less than 2- times the maximum aggregate particle size(MAS). B. Leveling Course-The course and location of the parking area that requires placement of a variable thickness of HMA to`true up'the lot prior to placement of the surface course. This course has an'MAS' no greater than that of the surface course. C. Base Course-The lower courses of the pavement structure below the surface and leveling course with an `MAS'of between%"and 1". D. Tacking/Priming-The process of applying one coat of emulsified asphalt to all horizontal and vertical surfaces of either an existing pavement for an overlay or between lifts while building an improved or new structure (tacking), or upon the aggregate base(priming). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Tack Coat and Prime Coat: AASHTO M140 or M208 (Reference the Asphalt Institute MS-19 for Handling, Storage and Application criteria). 1. Prime Coat: Prime Coat materials of MS-2, CMS-2, or HFMS-2s. 2. Tack Coat: SS-1, SS-1 h, CSS-1 or CSS-1 h diluted with an equal amount of water, or agency acceptable product. D. Performance Graded binder shall meet typical agency specification for low to medium volume roadways. E. Aggregates, mineral filler, and asphalt binder shall meet or exceed the requirements of local specifications for asphalt pavements placed under this contract for qualities and types. F. The coarse aggregate shall be sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag as allowed by the local state agency. Coarse Aggregate fraction shall have a minimum of 75% crushed faces. G. The fine aggregate shall be well graded, moderately sharp to sharp sands that will prevent tender mixes and scuffing from occurring. Fine Aggregate Angularity (AASHTO T-304, Method A), shall be—40%. H. Base mixes shall have a minimum of 45% passing the#4 sieve. I. Surface and leveling mixes shall have a minimum of 45% passing the#8 sieve. YUM-E3.1 HOT MIX ASHALT PAVEMENT Site Number 305-634 02743-3 July,2008 Mix Design Submittal Checklist Project: Date: Supplier: Mix Design: Surface / Leveling / Base Included Missing NIA Required Information Contractor to select mix design method: (design shall be less than 24 months oki 50 Blow Marshall 50-Gyration Superpave Hveem, Low Volume Other,Engineers Approval R 'd Before Bidding Proper Authorizating Signature for Mix Design All Aggregate T pes, Gradations&%Crush FAA>=40% Plot(0.45 Power Graph)of Final Aggregate Blend Bulk Specific Gravity of AD Aggregates and Final Blend(Gsb),Include All Worksheets Optimum Binder Content(Pb) Mix Voids at Optimum(Va) VMA at Optimum Bulk Specific Gravity of Mix at Optimum(Gmb) Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity at Optimum(Gmm) Dust to Total AC Ratio All Design Data and Associated Design Curves Recent Quality Control Production Charts „AMIN Other Information per Specifications YUM—E3.1 HOT MIX ASHALT PAVEMENT AWN, Site Number 305-634 02743-2 July,2008 SECTION 02743 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable provisions for design, materials,fabrication, and installation (construction) of component parts in addition to requirements shown or specified herein. B. Install pavement thicknesses, quantities, and'locations of heavy duty and light duty asphalt pavements as recommended by the soils investigation report and as shown on the plan sheets. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to all local standards and applicable codes and requirements for paving work on public and private property during the execution of this work. B. Manufacture Hot Mix Asphalt(HMA) shall be manufactured from a state approved/certified HMA manufacturing facility. 1.3 TESTS REQUIRED of GENERAL CONTRACTOR A. Test materials during production to validate and/or control the mix supplied and w„ shall be included in the bid cost for providing these HMA items. B. Submit Recent Quality Control testing of the mixture proposed to be used on the project to the Owner prior to acceptance of the proposed mix design. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Place HMA in acceptable weather conditions; avoid inclement weather. B. Adhere to local requirements for temperature constraints however in no case shall the base asphalt be placed when the temperature is below 400 and the surface asphalt when the temperature is below 45°. Additionally,the forecast shall be for rising temperatures for both efforts. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Approved vendor certificate for the state where work is being done. B. Provide Quality Control manual for material production over-site and testing measures being performed both at the asphalt plant as well as on the job site. C. List/Organizational Chart showing personnel responsible for use of equipment and actions of the crew on the grade while paving and compacting asphalt. YUM—E3.1 HOT MIX ASHALT PAVEMENT Site Number 305-634 02743-1 July,2008 B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. 3.2 BEDDING A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 02300 for work of this section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. B. Place bedding material at trench bottom, in accordance with section 02300. C. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density. 3.3 INSTALLATION-PIPE A. Install pipe,fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's instructions. Seal joints watertight. B. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings;with maximum variation from true slope of 118 inch in 10 feet. C. Install aggregate at sides and over top of pipe. Provide top cover to minimum compacted thickness of 6 inches D. Connect to municipal storm sewer system. E. Install trace wire continuous over top of non-metallic pipes. buried 6 inches below finish grade, above pipe line. 3.4 INSTALLATION -CATCH BASINS AND CLEANOUTS A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad,with provision for storm sewer pipe end sections. C. Level top surface of base pad to receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive storm sewer pipe sections. D. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. E. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing performed under provisions of Section 01450. B. Request inspection prior to installation of pipe, and prior to and immediately after placing aggregate cover over pipe. C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D 1557 or ANSI/ASTM D 698. D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 02630-2 July,2008 SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01780. B. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs,connections, cleanouts, and invert elevations. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this section. 1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements and elevations are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS (utilize types of pipe as allowed by local code and as indicated on Drawings) A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ANSI/ASTM C76, Class I with Wall Type A; mesh reinforcement; bell and spigot end joints. B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joint Device: ANSI/ASTM C443, rubber compression gasket joint. C. Plastic Pipe: ANSI/ASTM D 2729, polyvinyl chloride(PVC) material; bell and spigot solvent sealed joint end. #PIN" 2.2 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type,expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal. B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design,in required tee, bends, elbows,cleanouts, reducers,traps and other configurations required. C. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering,imprinted with "Storm Sewer Service"in large letters. 2.3 CATCH BASINS A. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, hinged lid. B. Shaft Construction and Concentric Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast concrete pipe sections, lipped male/female dry joints. C. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03300. D. Conform to standard details of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanout Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, hinged lid. B. Shaft Construction and Concentric Eccentric Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast concrete pipe sections, lipped male/female dry joints. C. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03300. D. Conform to standard details of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with course aggregate. YUM—E3.1 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM Site Number 305-634 02630-1 July,2008 3.3 BEDDING A. Excavate pipe trench. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. B. Place bedding material at trench bottom. C. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density. 3.4 INSTALLATION-PIPE A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's instructions. Seal joints watertight. B. Begin installation at downstream discharge connection point and make connection where indicated on Drawings. C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings;with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. D. Install bedding at sides and over top of pipe to minimum compacted thickness of 12 inches E. Connect to municipal sewer system. F. Install trace wire continuous over top of non-metallic pipes buried 6 inches below finish grade, above pipe line. 3.5 INSTALLATION -CLEANOUTS A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad,with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end sections. C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450. B. Request inspection prior to placing bedding. C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 SANITARY SEWERAGE Site Number 305-634 02530-2 July,2008 SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01780. B. Record location of pipe runs,connections, catch basins, cleanouts,and invert elevations. C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS(utilize types of pipe as allowed by local code and as indicated on Drawings) A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ANSI/ASTM A 74, Service type, bell and spigot end. B. Cast Iron Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C 564, rubber gasket joint devices. C. Plastic Pipe: ANSI/ASTM D 2751, SDR 35(SDR 36 if buried more than 10 feet below grade),Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene(ABS)material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. w, 2.2 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type,expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal. B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends,elbows,cleanouts, reducers,traps and other configurations required. C. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Sewer Service"in large letters. 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, hinged lid. B. Shaft Construction and Concentric Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast concrete pipe sections, lipped male/female dry joints, cast steel ladder rungs into shaft sections at 12 inches; nominal shaft diameter of 36 inches. C. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03300, leveled top surface to receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive sanitary sewer pipe sections. D. Conform to standard details of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that trench cut and excavation base is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on [layout]drawings. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with course aggregate. B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. t0l"'" YUM—E3.1 SANITARY SEWERAGE Site Number 305-634 02530-1 July,2008 SECTION 02511 DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AWWA C651. B. Water Treatment Firm: Company specializing in disinfecting potable water systems specified in this Section with minimum 3 years experience. C. Testing Firm: Company specializing in examining potable water systems,certified by the State in which the project is located. D. Submit bacteriologist's signature and authority associated with testing. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code or regulation for performing the work of this Section. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of water system. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS A. Chemicals: AWWA B300, Hypochlorite,or AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping system has been cleaned, inspected, and pressure tested. B. Perform scheduling and disinfecting activity with start-up,testing,adjusting and balancing, demonstration procedures, including coordination with related systems. 3.2 EXECUTION A. Provide and attach required equipment to perform the work of this Section. B. Introduce treatment into piping system. C. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. D. Flush, circulate,and clean until required cleanliness is achieved;use municipal domestic water. Monitor system for 2 days and if water tests do not meet standards, repeat disinfection process. E. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection. F. Pressure test system. Repair leaks and re-test. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test samples in accordance with AWWA C651. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION Site Number 305-634 02511 - 1 July,2008 A0%, 2.7 FIRE HYDRANT A. Hydrant: Type as required by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends and remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 BEDDING A. Excavate pipe trench and hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. B. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer. C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with fill,tamped in place and compacted. D. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density. 3.3 INSTALLATION-PIPE A. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping in accordance with code requirements. B. Install ductile iron piping and fittings to ANSI/AWWA C600. C. Route pipe in straight line. D. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. E. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under Section 02511. F. Slope water pipe and position drain at low points. G. Form and place concrete for thrust blocks at each elbow or change of direction of pipe main. 3.4 INSTALLATION-VALVES AND HYDRANTS A. Set valves on solid bearing. B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade. C. Set hydrants plumb and locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to roadway. D. Set hydrants to grade,with nozzles at least 20 inches above ground. 3.5 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Flush and disinfect system in accordance with Section 02511. 3.6 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide water service to utility company requirements with reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 WATER DISTRIBUTION Site Number 305-634 02510-2 July,2008 look SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01780. B. Accurately record actual locations of piping mains,valves, connections, and invert elevations. C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with utility company requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE(utilize types of pipe as allowed by local code and as indicated on Drawings) A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C150 1. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: ANSI/AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods. 3. Jackets: ANSI/AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88,Type L, annealed: 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.18, cast copper,or ANSUASME 816.22,wrought copper. 2. Joints: Compression connection or ANSI/AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. C. PVC Pipe: AWWA C900 Class 150(DR-18)except that lines serving fire sprinker systems must be AWWA C900 class 200(DR14): 1. Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron. 2. Joints: ASTM D 3139 compression gasket ring. 3. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with"Water Service"in large letters. 2.2 GATE VALVES-Up to 3 Inches: A. Brass or Bronze body, non-rising stem, inside screw,single wedge or disc, compression ends,with control rod,extension box and valve key. 2.3 GATE VALVES-3 Inches and Over A. ANSI/AWWA C500, Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut,single wedge, flanged ends, control rod, extension box and valve key. B. ANSI/AWWA C509, Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut,single wedge, resilient seat,flanged ends,control rod,extension box and valve key. 2.4 BALL VALVES-Up to 2 Inches A. Brass body,teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals, Tee stem pre-drilled for control rod,AWWA compression inlet end, compression outlet,with control rod, extension box and valve key. 2.5 SWING CHECK VALVES-From 2 inches to 24 inches A. ANSI/AWWA C508, iron body, bronze trim,45 degree swing disc,renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. 2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES-From 2 inches to 24 inches A. ANSI/AWWA C504, iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat,water or lug ends, infinite position lever handle. ", YUM—E3.1 WATER DISTRIBUTION Site Number 305-634 02510-1 July,2008 concrete, reinforcement in compliance with Contract Documents and any and all observed irregularities,deficiencies or deviations from Contract Documents. 3.4 INSPECTION A. Schedule footing excavation such that the concrete can be placed immediately after inspection. 3.5 PLACING OF CONCRETE: A. Place concrete so as to prevent segregation. Do not allow concrete to free fall over 6-0"; provide tremie, chutes or other means of conveyance when drop exceeds this amount. B. Place concrete as soon as practical after the excavation has been completed. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 SPREAD AND CONTINUOUS FOOTINGS Site Number 305-634 02485-2 July,2008 SECTION 02485 SPREAD AND CONTINUOUS FOOTINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation Tolerances: 1. Maximum lateral variation off of centerlines:2 inches. 2. Plan Dimensions: Plus 3 inches, minus 1/2 inch. 3. Thickness: Not smaller than scheduled sizes. 4. Top of Footing Elevation: Plus 0 inches, minus 3 inches. 1.2 SCHEDULING/SEQUENCING A. Coordinate Work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. B. Schedule footing excavations such that reinforcing and concrete can be placed immediately after excavations are completed and inspected. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Formwork: Refer to Section 03100. B. Reinforcement: Refer to Section 03200. C. Concrete: Refer to Section 03300. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Spread and continuous footings: Extend to and penetrate bearing materials shown on Drawings. B. Exposed subgrade soils: Examined in the field by a geotechnical engineer of the testing laboratory to verify the strength and bearing capacity. C. Excavations and footings: 1. Size and shape as shown on the Drawings. 2. Bottom of each excavation: Level, undisturbed,free of water,caving material or any other foreign substance. 3.2 FABRICATION AND PLACING OF REINFORCING A. Steel reinforcing mats: Fabricated in rigid fashion to permit expeditious placement into excavation with minimum time delay. B. Accurately place reinforcement in excavations, maintaining specified coverage. Secure to prevent displacement during concreting. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Laboratory services: In accordance with Section 01450. B. Inspect each concrete wall and column footing excavation to determine that proper bearing stratum is obtained and utilized for bearing and that excavations are properly clean and dry before placing concrete. C. Furnish complete footing log showing location, elevation of top of bearing stratum,footing size and depth, condition of material, excavation properly clean and dry before placing OW YUM—E3.1 SPREAD AND CONTINUOUS FOOTINGS Site Number 305-634 02485-1 July,2008 SECTION 02362 TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for application licensing and authority to use toxicant chemicals. 1.2 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year warranty for material and installation under provisions of Section 01780. B. Warranty: Cover against invasion or propagation of subterranean termites, damage to building or building contents caused by termites,and repairs to building or building contents so caused. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Toxicant Chemical: Water based emulsion, uniform composition,synthetic dye to permit visual identification of treated soil,of the following chemical element and concentrations 1. Chloropyrifos: Dursban TC as manufactured by Dow Chemical, 1%solution. 2. Permathrin: "Dragnet"by FMC or Torpedo"by ICI Americas, 0.5 percent in water emulsion. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MIX DILUTION A. Dilute toxicant chemical as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION/PREPARATION A. Verify the soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, ready to receive treatment. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply toxicant no more than 12 hours prior to installation of vapor barrier under slab-on-grade or finish grading outside foundation walls. B. Apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Apply extra treatment to structure penetrations, pipe,ducts,expansion joints and other soil penetrations. D. Apply as a coarse spray to ensure uniform distribution. E. Coordinate soil treatment at foundation perimeter with finish grading and landscaping work to avoid disturbance of treated soil. Retreat disturbed treated soil. F. Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating,filling and grading operations are completed,except as otherwise required in construction operations. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. G. Post signs in the areas of application,warning workers that soil poisoning has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 TERMITE CONTROL Site Number 305-634 02362-1 July,2008 SECTION 02340 SUBGRADE STABILIZATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Lime stabilization of subgrade beneath site paving. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sub-grade preparation with earthwork trades. 1.3 INSPECTION,TESTING AND CONTROL A. Inspection, testing and control: Conducted by an independent testing laboratory as specified in Section 01450. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lime Slurry Injection Material Under Building Slabs-on-Grade 1. Lime: Hydrated lime or lime slurry conforming to requirements of local paving authority. 2. Fluid to consist of clean fresh water and surfactant. 3. Provide a nonionic surfactant(wetting agent) according to manufacturer's recommendations, but in no case shall proportions be less than one gallon (undiluted) per 3,500 gallons of water. B. Lime Stabilization for Paving Subgrade 1. Hydrated Lime: Type A(dry): Per. TxDOT Item 264-2 or approved equal. 2. Dry Waste Lime: Equivalent amount to obtain, by laboratory tests, plasticity index equal to that specified and obtained for use of hydrated lime,Type A, lime stabilized subgrade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ensure that surfaces have been brought to approximate rough grades plus or minus 0.10 feet. Loosen and pulverize soil to a depth of 6 inches below bottom of designated paving or slab areas, including a distance of one foot outside perimeter of paving. 3.2 STABILIZATION OF PAVING SUBGRADE A. Lime Stabilization 1. Prepare rough grade,treat top 6 inches of subgrade by mixing with hydrated lime equal to 6 percent lime or as otherwise required to achieve a soils Plasticity Index of not greater than 12. 2. Construction methods and equipment shall comply to TxDOT Item 260 for Type A treatment. 3. Extend lime stabilization 18 inches beyond exposed pavement edges to reduce shrinkage effects during extended dry periods. 4. Compact subgrade a minimum 95 percent of ASTM D 698 at or within 2 percent of optimum moisture content or as otherwise recommended in soils investigation report. END OF SECTION ow YUM—E3.1 SUBGRADE STABILIZATION Site Number 305-634 02340-1 July,2008 D. Finish Surfaces: No greater than 0.10 feet above or below established grade elevation. E. Provide uniform roundings at top and bottom of slopes and other breaks in grade. Correct irregularities and areas where water will stand. F. Uniformly distribute topsoil to required grades;feather back to where grades remain unchanged. G. Finish lawn and unpaved areas to 1 inch below top of walk and curbs. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with requirements of Section 01450. B. Testing Laboratory Services: 1. Owner will engage soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during soil stabilization,fill and backfill operations. 2. Submit soil materials proposed for fill and backfill to laboratory for testing. a. Laboratory will determine suitability of materials to be used. b. Laboratory will submit test results and recommendations. 3. Advise testing laboratory 48 hours minimum in advance of operations. 4. Tests will be executed immediately prior to covering of such compacted areas. 5. When tests indicate compaction does not meet requirements, remove fill and backfill completely,dry out or moisten as necessary and recompact. a. Retest recompacted areas. b. Repeat until test indicate compliance with specified requirements. C. Provide reworking and retesting at no additional cost to Owner. C. Testing laboratory will inspect soil stabilization operations. Notify laboratory when operations are to begin. D. Testing laboratory will perform one field density test of each lift per 5000 square feet of compacted fill materials for building slab and paved areas. E. For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed,testing laboratory will conduct at least OW one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata,when acceptable to Owner's Representative. F. Laboratory will perform one series of tests on area being evaluated in accordance with ASTM D 2922 and D 3017, or ASTM D 1556 and D 1557. G. If during progress of Work tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner. H. Ensure compacted fills are tested before proceeding with placement of surface materials. 3.14 ADJUSTING A. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded,and rutted areas to specified tolerances. B. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re-shape,and compact to required density prior to further construction. C. Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period,remove surface(pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work,and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 EARTHWORK Site Number 305-634 02300-5 July,2008 Am D. Site backfill systematically, as early as possible,to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous,wet or spongy subgrade surfaces. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. F. Make gradual changes in grade. Blend slopes into level areas. 3.8 FILLS WITHIN STRUCTURE A. Select Fill Beneath Slabs on Grade: 1. Scarify exposed sub-grade to a depth of 6 inches and re-compact to a density and moisture content as recommended in soils investigation report. 2. Place Select Fill in loose lifts of 8 inches and compact each lift to a density and moisture content as recommended in soils investigation report. 3. Place Select Fill to a minimum depth as indicated in soils investigation report. 4. Prevent excessive loss of moisture during construction. 3.9 FILLS OUTSIDE STRUCTURE A. Roughen and loosen filled areas before placing of fill materials. B. Spread suitable fill materials in uniform layers over area not to exceed 8 inches thick compaction. C. Wet and work materials as required for proper compaction and thoroughly mix. D. Compaction: By tamping rollers or by utilizing excavation equipment to spread and compact fill to a uniform density equal to natural density of material before excavating. E. Areas adjacent to building, or where compacting equipment cannot work: Compact with hand tampers. F. Compact filled areas to 90 percent Standard Proctor and to lines and grades shown,with allowances for a final layer of topsoil in lawn and planter areas. G. Base Material Beneath Paving: Fill beneath paving with material, placed at density and moisture content as recommended in soils investigation report. -0 3.10 BACKFILL OUTSIDE STRUCTURE A. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow, ice and water and that ground surfaces are not in frozen condition. B. Do not backfill over existing subgrade surfaces which are porous,wet or spongy. C. Backfill areas to grades,contours, levels and elevations indicated. D. Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction. E. After permanent construction is in place, forms and trash removed, sub-soil drainage and water-proofing complete and inspections complete, backfill with approved materials and compact to approximate density of natural ground. F. Place backfill in layers not exceeding 8 inches loose depth, and hand or machine tamp to compaction required. G. Water may be added to backfill material as an aid to compaction; however,do not allow material to become wet to form a mud or paste. 3.11 REMOVAL OF CONTAMINATED SOIL A. Prior to Finish Grading: Remove soil contaminated with lime from lawn and plant bed areas. Replace with clean, approved topsoil. 3.12 FINISH GRADING A. After completion of rough grading and site cleared of construction debris,cover areas disturbed by construction or graded to provide new finish grades with a layer of topsoil not less than 6 inches thick. B. Provide final grades as shown or as directed by Owner's Representative, slope away from building,and provide drainage for area. C. Degree of Finish: That ordinarily obtainable with blade grader or scraper operations. YUM-E3.1 EARTHWORK Site Number 305-634 02300-4 July,2008 5. Backfill and compact other unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification,unless otherwise directed by Owner's Representative. C. Additional Excavation: 1. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify soils testing laboratory for examination of conditions. 2. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, excavate deeper and replace excavated material as directed by soils testing laboratory. 3. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of Contract conditions relative to changes in Work. D. Dewatering: 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. 2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. 3. If presence of subsurface water is encountered during excavation, provide interior drainage. 4. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. 5. Provide and maintain pumps,well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 6. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or run-off areas. 7. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. AOW 3.5 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION A. Locate and mark existing underground utilities and services before beginning structural excavation. B. Provide excavation for structures and footings, as required for construction, bracing and removal of forms,applying waterproofing, and to permit inspection. C. Machine slope banks to angle of repose or less until shored. Do not allow excavation to interfere with normal 45 degree angle bearing splay of any foundation. D. Ensure bottom of excavation is reasonably level. E. Maintain excavations in as near their natural moisture conditions as possible. F. Fill over-excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces in accordance with Owner's Representative's direction. G. Do not allow construction equipment to create"pumping"of soils. H. Remove boulders or cobbles. 3.6 EXCAVATION BENEATH FLOOR SLABS ON GRADE A. If required by soils investigation report, excavate and remove existing soil to a depths below bottom of slab as recommended in report. 3.7 FILLS AND BACKFILLS-GENERAL A. Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice or water, and ground surfaces are not frozen. B. Proofroll exposed subgrade in building and paving areas with heavily loaded dump truck or similar acceptable construction equipment,to detect unsuitable soil conditions. Commence proofrolling operations after a suitable period of dry weather to avoid degrading acceptable subgrade surfaces. Make 4 passes over each section with proofrolling equipment,with the last 2 passes perpendicular to the first 2 passes. C. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not readily capable of in-situ compaction. Backfill and compact to density equal to requirements for subsequent backfill material. how YUM—E3.1 EARTHWORK Site Number 305-634 02300-3 July,2008 B. Fill Beneath Structures: Select sandy clay, inert and non-expansive, having a plasticity index and a liquid limit as indicated in soils investigation report to replace unstable material below structure and to raise sub-grade level to elevations required. 1. Base Material in Parking/Drive Areas: As recommended in soils investigation report. C. Top Soil: 1. Clean natural topsoil free of vegetation, debris and other deleterious matter, and approved by Owner's Representative. 2. Upper 6 inches of topsoil stripped may be used, if suitable, otherwise use imported natural,fertile,friable soil possessing characteristics representative of productive growing soils in the area. D. Granular Leveling Course Under Slabs,Walks, and Decks on Grade: Pit run cushion sand, free of organic matter, clays or other binder materials. Submit samples for approval. E. Impervious Clay Soil: Clayey material having a plasticity index in excess of 30. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Establish extent of excavation by area and elevation; designate and identify datum elevation. B. Set required lines and levels. C. Maintain bench marks, monuments and other reference points. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utilities: 1. Before starting excavation, establish location and extent of underground utilities occurring in work area. 2. Notify utility companies to remove and relocate lines which are in way of excavation. 3. Maintain, reroute or extend as required, existing utility lines to remain which pass through work area. *"* 4. Protect utility services uncovered by excavation. 5. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed condition,discontinue affected work and notify Owner's Representative. 3.3 ROUGH GRADING A. Excavation and rough grade to lines and grades shown. B. Overcut planting and lawn areas to allow a layer of topsoil not less than 6 inches thick. C. Maintain excavations to drain and be free of excess water. Ponding of water on site will not be permitted. D. Remove objectionable and excess materials from site when excavated. 3.4 EXCAVATION-GENERAL A. Excavation Classification: 1. Unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered. B. Unauthorized Excavation: 1. Consists of material removal beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Owner's Representative. 2. Correct unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Owner's Representative, at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Under footings,foundation bases, or retaining walls,fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom without altering required top elevation. 4. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position,when acceptable to Owner's Representative. YUM—E3.1 EARTHWORK Site Number 305-634 02300-2 July,2008 SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 BASIS FOR BIDS A. Base bids on excavating and filling with materials encountered at site except where special fill or backfill materials are specified herein or indicated on Drawings. No allowance or extra payments will be made by reason of variation in types of soil encountered or variations in their moisture contents. Furnish additional fill material required and included as a part of the work. Include removal of excess or objectionable materials as a part of the work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shoring,sheeting, bracing and retention plans, details and other provisions necessary in order to safely excavate trenches for this project shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer registered in the jurisdiction where project is located and employed by Contractor. B. Contractor is solely responsible for retention plans,details,accessories and execution. C. Regulatory Requirements: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. D. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will engage soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. Refer to Section 01450. 1.3 PROTECTION A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, rock out-croppings and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. B. Protect benchmarks, existing structures,fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from equipment and vehicular traffic. C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. D. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling,underpinning, or other methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation. Monitor shoring system and surrounding ground surface during construction to detect movement. If movement becomes significant,take contingency steps to brace excavation and adjacent utility lines. E. Notify Owner's Representative of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work. F. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water run-off into excavation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STOCKPILING A. Material cut or excavated from building areas which is suitable for backfilling may be stored on site to be distributed later. B. Fill material required to be hauled in may be stockpiled at site until used, provided it is properly handled to prevent contamination with undesirable materials. C. Stockpile topsoil separate from excavated sub-soil. 2.2 SURPLUS MATERIALS A. Remove excavated materials not to be used in fills and backfills on this project from site immediately. B. Remove materials containing rubbish, debris,fracture limestone,or rocks. 2.3 SOIL MATERIALS A. General Fill and Backfill: Suitable existing excavated on-site soil free from vegetation, debris, and other deleterious matter, unless otherwise noted. YUM—E3.1 EARTHWORK Site Number 305-634 02300- 1 July,2008 3.6 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped,or re-graded. B. Stockpile in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Protect from erosion. Remove from site excess topsoil not being reused. 3.7 REMOVAL A. Remove debris from site. Leave site in clean condition ready for earthwork. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 SITE CLEARING Site Number 305-634 02230-2 July,2008 SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING PART 1GENERAL 1.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building code for disposal of debris. B. Conform with applicable portions of O.S.H.A. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Herbicide: Round-up by Monsanto. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION &SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to a sediment and erosion control plan,specific to the site,that complies with EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction,whichever is more stringent. B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Verify that existing plant life and features designated to remain are tagged or identified. B. Locate and identify utilities intended to remain. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect plant growth and features remaining as final landscaping. Flag as required to properly identify items to remain. B. Protect bench marks and existing work from damage or displacement. C. Protect remaining utilities from damage. 3.4 CLEARING A. Dilute and apply herbicide in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work. C. Remove trees and shrubs within marked areas. Grub out stumps, roots, and surface rock. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. D. Clear undergrowth and deadwood,without disturbing subsoil. E. Burning debris on site is not permitted. F. Remove debris,rock,and extracted plant life from site. 3.5 CUTTING CURBS AND GUTTERS A. Make new openings in curbs and gutters neat,as close as possible to profiles indicated and only to extent necessary for new work. B. At concrete, paving,and other materials where edges of cuts remain exposed in the completed work,make cuts using power-sawing equipment. Do not overcut at corners of cut openings. YUM—E3.1 SITE CLEARING Site Number 305-634 02230-1 July,2008 SECTION 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When specified in individual Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to demonstrate operation of equipment and systems, instruct Owner's personnel,and provide written report that demonstrations and instructions have been completed. B. Owner will provide list of personnel to receive instructions, and will coordinate their attendance at agreed-upon times. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit preliminary schedule for Owner's approval, listing times and dates for demonstration of each item of equipment and each system,2 weeks prior to proposed dates. B. Submit reports within one week after completion of demonstrations,that demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed. Give time and date of each demonstration, with a list of persons present. PART 2PRODUCTS—not used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify equipment has been inspected and put into operation in accordance with Section 01750;testing,adjusting, and balancing has been performed in accordance with Division 15 and 16, and equipment and systems are fully operational. B. Have copies of completed operation and maintenance manuals at hand for use in demonstrations and instructions. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Owner's personnel 2 weeks prior to date of final inspection. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within 6 months. B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Demonstrate start-up,operation, control, adjustment,trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times,at designated location. D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions. END OF SECTION old^ YUM-E3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Site Number 305-634 01820-1 July,2008 K. Contractor shall submit Pre-Functional test and inspection reports for each item of equipment or system which verifies and documents tests and inspections performed. When manufacturer's service representative has been involved, report shall include verification by that representative that the equipment or system is ready for operation. 1.07 PROCEDURES FOR FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. In conjunction with the Functional Test procedures and requirements, the Contractor shall provide labor, equipment, and services to place systems and equipment into service. B. The Owner's Agent will furnish operating personnel to observe Contractor's work during the Commissioning process. Contractor shall provide a minimum of eight (8) working days notice. Contractor shall provide other workers required to make adjustments and correct deficiencies during equipment commissioning and initial operation. It is anticipated that commissioning will be in progress continuously over extended periods of time. Workers required of Contractor shall be on site as required by the Owner's Agent. C. Contractor shall furnish and apply oils, greases, refrigerants, fuels and other lubricants and materials required to place equipment in condition ready for operation. Contractor shall provide temporary gauging devices required during checkout and operation of equipment and systems. Contractor shall remedy any deficiencies and provide all labor, material, etc. to complete the Commissioning process in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved construction schedule. D. After systems have been commissioned to satisfaction of the Owner's Agent, Architect/Engineer, Contractor, and equipment manufacturers, the systems will be considered commissioned and ready for operation. •O Exhibit 1 Equipment/Systems to be commissioned Rainwater harvesting system Hot water systems Photovoltaic system Air handling units Packaged air conditioning, or Heat pump units Variable frequency drives, ducts, dampers filters Split system heat pumps Refrigeration units (evaporators and condensers) Heat recovery systems (refrigerant, exhaust air) Domestic water system Building automation systems Lighting controls Testing and Balancing of all air moving systems END OF SECTION COMMISSIONING 01810-4 Melink LEED Commissioning 01810 General Commissioning Requirements_MELINK.doc B. In accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall render all services and do all work required to install each item of equipment, including auxiliaries, and wiring and in operating condition to the satisfaction of the Owner's Agent. Individual systems and items of equipment shall be completed in a sequence that will permit systematic checkout and trial operation of each such component before it is incorporated in the initial operation. Contractor shall provide supervision and other workers required to make adjustments and correct deficiencies during initial equipment checking. C. Certain calibration and test procedures may involve personnel or work being furnished by other contractors. Contractor shall arrange working crews and schedule so that calibration will be performed in one operation. D. Work shall be performed as necessary to meet the Contract Document requirements and the approved construction schedule. E. Personnel performing adjustments and tests shall be qualified and experienced. Adjustments and tests shall be performed as many times as is necessary to assure proper operation of equipment and systems and quality of materials and workmanship. F. If tests reveal unsatisfactory materials or workmanship, such materials or installation shall be repaired or replaced by Contractor to satisfaction of the Owner's Agent and shall meet all Contract Document requirements. G. Equipment and instrumentation furnished by Contractor (including gauges, switches, thermometers, and other devices which are part of major equipment assemblies furnished by Contractor) shall be assembled, tested, adjusted and calibrated as required for correct and reliable operation. H. Contractor shall confirm the inspection and test procedures, identified in the Prefunctional Checklists, for systems in which the equipment is installed and submit to the Owner's Agent for approval. Inspection and test procedures information shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Identification of material or article to be inspected or tested. 2. List of test equipment. 3. Detailed sequential instructions and test objective. 4. Measurement characteristics and required measuring equipment. 5. Acceptance and rejection criteria. 6. Allowable adjustment, repair or rework. 7. Requirements for data recording and reporting. I. Pre-Functional tests and inspections shall be performed for all equipment, materials, and systems installed by Contractor, as specified herein and in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. J. Pre-Functional tests shall be tests and checks required by these Specifications to verify correct assembly and installation of equipment and systems. COMMISSIONING 01810-3 Melink LEED Commissioning 01810 General Commissioning Requirements_MELINK.doc B. The commissioning process does not relieve the Contractor's reponsibility to provide fully AA*,, finished and fully functioning systems. C. The commissioning process shall meet the requirements of LEED-NC Version 2.2 Prerequisite EA 1, Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems. The commissioning shall also meet the requirements as specified in the technical sections of this specification. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Cooperate with the Owner's Agent in the scheduling of activities to be included in the commissioning plan. 2. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action. 3. Cooperate with the Owner's Agent for resolution of issues recorded in the Commissioning Issues Log. 4. Attend commissioning team meetings as requested by the Owner's Agent. 5. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule. 6. Review and use the Pre-Functional Checklists as specified in the technical specifications. In consideration to any approved "Substitution Requests" in accordance with 00700 General Conditions and Section 01330 Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall be responsible for revising and completing the Pre-Functional Checklists and submit to the Owner's Agent for approval during the"Request for Substitution" process. 7. Complete the Pre-Functional Checklists as Work is completed and provide to the Owner's Agent. 8. Review and use the commissioning process and comply with the Pre-Functional Tests and Functional Test procedures and requirements as specified in the technical specifications. In consideration to any approved "Substitution Requests" in accordance with 00700 General Conditions and Section 01330 Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall be responsible for revising and completing the Functional Performance Test procedures and requirements and submit to the Owner's Agent for approval during the "Request for Substitution" process. 9. Complete the commissioning process and Functional Performance Test procedures and requirements. 1.06 PROCEDURES FOR PRE-FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. In conjunction with the Pre-Functional Checklists, adjustments and tests shall be made by Contractor as specified herein and as required by governing codes, regulations, manufacturer's recommendations and good construction requirements. Contractor shall adjust, calibrate, and test equipment and devices installed under these Specifications. Except as otherwise specified, Contractor shall furnish labor, materials, tools, and instruments required to perform the work. COMMISSIONING _Aw► 01810-2 Melink LEED Commissioning 01810 General Commissioning Requirements_MELINK.doc ems"' SECTION 01810 COMMISSIONING YUM E3 Project Northampton Massachusetts PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for Pre-Functional Testing. B. Procedures for Functional Testing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330: Submittal Procedures. B. Document 00700: General Conditions of the Contract for Construction C. Document 00800: Supplementary Conditions D. Section 01750: Starting and Adjusting E. Division 15 F. Division 16 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. B. CxA: Commissioning Authority. 1.04 SUMMARY A. Commissioning is a comprehensive and systematic process to verify that the building systems perform as designed to meet the Owner's requirements. Commissioning during the construction and warranty phases is intended to achieve the following specific objectives: 1. Verify and document that equipment is installed and started per manufacturer's recommendations and the technical specifications requirements. 2. Verify and document that equipment and systems receive complete operational checkout by installing Contractors. 3. Verify and document equipment and system performance. COMMISSIONING 01810-1 Melink LEED Commissioning 01810 General Commissioning Requirements_MELINK.doc J. Motors: Verify that motor amperage agrees with nameplate value. Inspect for conditions which produce excessive current flow and which exist due to equipment malfunction. Take corrective action. 3.3 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractor personnel. B. Place equipment in operation in proper sequence. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 STARTING AND ADJUSTING Site Number 305-634 01750-2 July,2008 SECTION 01750 STARTING AND ADJUSTING PARTIGENERAL 1.1 QUALITY CONTROL A. When specified in individual Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to: 1. Inspect,check, and approve equipment installation prior to start-up. 2. Supervise placing equipment in operation. 3. Provide a written report that equipment has been properly installed and lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting lines or anchor bolts, and has been satisfactorily operated under full load conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit preliminary schedule listing times and dates for start-up of each item of equipment in sequence 2 weeks prior to proposed dates. B. Submit manufacturer's representative reports within one week after start-up, listing satisfactory startup dates. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Building enclosure is complete and weathertight. B. Excess packing and shipping bolts are removed. C. Interdependent systems have been checked and are operational. PART2PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that Project conditions comply with requirements. B. Verify that status of Work meets requirements for starting of equipment and systems. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate sequence for start-up of various items of equipment, including Owner-provided equipment. B. Have Contract Documents, shop drawings, product data, and operation and maintenance data at hand during entire start-up process. C. Verify that each piece of equipment has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify control systems are fully operational in automatic mode. E. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specific electrical characteristics agree with those specified by electrical equipment manufacturer. F. Verify wiring to motors and controls required by mechanical work for operational smoke and fire protection demonstrations is complete. G. Verify wiring and support systems for equipment installed under separate contracts is complete and checked. H. Bearings: Inspect for cleanliness;clean and remove foreign matter. Verify alignment;take corrective measures. I. Drives: Inspect for tension on belt drives, adjustment of variable pitch sheaves and drives, alignment, proper equipment speed,and cleanliness. Take corrective action. YUM—E3.1 STARTING AND ADJUSTING Site Number 305-634 01750-1 July,2008 9. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on Project site. Do not dispose of volatile wastes or hazardous materials such as mineral spirits,oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways. 10. Maintain cleaning until Final Completion. D. Final Cleaning: In addition to cleaning during construction, prior to Substantial Completion provide the following: 1. Remove temporary protection and labels not required to remain. 2. Clean finishes free of dust, stains, films and other foreign substances. 3. Clean transparent and glossy materials to a polished condition; remove foreign substances. Polish reflective surfaces to a clear shine. 4. Clean, damp mop,wax, and polish resilient and hard-surface floor as specified. 5. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication. 6. Clean plumbing fixtures, and food service equipment, to a sanitary condition. 7. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters when units have been operated during construction; in addition, clean ducts, blowers, and coils when units have been operated without filters during construction. 8. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 9. Remove waste, debris, and surplus materials from site. Clean grounds; remove stains, spills, and foreign substances from paved areas and sweep clean. Rake clean other exterior surfaces. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 CLEANING Site Number 305-634 01740-2 July,2008 SECTION 01740 CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off-site. B. Keep site and construction areas clean on a weekly basis. C. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. 1.2 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute cleaning prior to inspection for Substantial Completion of the Work. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or property,and which will not damage surfaces. B. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material being cleaned. ate'` PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING A. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning specified in other sections, clean interior and exterior exposed-to-view surfaces. B. Remove waste,foreign matter, and debris from roofs,gutters, area ways, and drainage systems. C. Cleaning during Construction: 1. Execute periodic cleaning to keep building, site,and adjacent properties free of accumulations of waste materials,debris, rubbish, and wind blown debris resulting from construction operations. 2. Prior to Substantial Completion remove construction tools,scaffolding,equipment, machinery, and surplus materials. 3. Broom clean and vacuum interior areas prior to start of surface finishing,and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. 4. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on or adhere to wet or newly-coated surfaces. 5. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing space. 6. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. Prevent accumulation of waste which creates hazardous conditions. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. 7. Collect and remove waste materials, debris,and rubbish from site weekly until execution of final cleaning and dispose off site in lawful manner. 8. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws. YUM—E3.1 CLEANING Site Number 305-634 01740-1 July,2008 2.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section"Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: On-site burning of any demolished materials is prohibited. 2.7 CATEGORIES OF MATERIALS TO BE SALVAGED, RECYCLED OR DEMOLISHED NOTE: ANY OBSERVED OMISSIONS, DISCREPANCIES, CONFLICTS OR EXCEPTIONS BETWEEN THE ABOVE STATEMENTS AND THE FOLLOWING ARE TO BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF YUM! BRANDS FOR CORRECTION OR REVISION PRIOR TO SUBMISSION OF YOUR PROPOSAL A. Existing items to be Removed and Salvaged/Recycled: 1. Rooftop-mounted HVAC equipment and exhaust fans 2. HVAC ductwork, exhaust hoods, and diffusers 3. Rooftop-mounted refrigeration equipment 4. Glazing systems and frames 5. Door systems and frames 6. Water heater 7. Copper water and vent piping 8. Water closets, urinals, service sink and lavatories 9. Electrical wiring, conduits and rough-in boxes 10. Fluorescent and incandescent lighting fixtures 11. Exit signage and emergency light fixtures 12. Fire alarm components (manual pull stations, audible/visual alarms, etc.) 13. Stainless steel panels 14. Structural steel (joists, columns, lintels, etc.) 15. Asphalt and concrete site paving, sidewalks, light pole bases, etc. 16. Site lighting fixtures and poles 17. Building masonry(concrete block and brick) 18. Building concrete slab. B. Existing Items to Demolished and disposed of: 1. Roofing material unsuitable for recycling 2. Wood products unsuitable for recycling 3. Miscellaneous fabric and carpet unsuitable for recycling. C. See drawings for items to be reused. May include: 1. Building Masonry(Brick). END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 BUILDING DECONSTRUCTION Site Number 305-634 01736-5 July,2008 AM E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or videotapes. F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from deconstruction activities. 2.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems. 2.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct deconstruction operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to workers and damage to salvageable materials. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of workers around deconstruction area. 2. Provide weather protection for all salvage materials(and items to remain) before, during and after deconstruction. 2.4 DECONSTRUCTION A. General: Deconstruct and remove existing construction in accordance with the materials identified for removal in the deconstruction plan. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with deconstruction systematically, from higher to lower level. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces of items indicated to be salvaged. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations. 6. Remove structural framing members in such a way as to maintain their highest value. 7. Locate deconstruction equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Salvaged Items: 1. Sort and organize salvaged materials as they are removed from the structure. 2. Pack, crate or band materials to keep them contained and organized. 3. Store items in a secure and weather protected area until removed from the site. 4. (If required)Transport items to storage area off-site. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during deconstruction activities.When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during deconstruction and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after deconstruction operations are complete. YUM—E3.1 BUILDING DECONSTRUCTION Site Number 305-634 01736-4 July,2008 Work described with documented experience in similar types of deconstruction work. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Comply with noise and dust regulations of LEED for New Construction Version 2.2 "Sustainable Site Prerequisite 1", and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Pre-Deconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to deconstruction including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of building to be deconstructed. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize deconstruction schedule and verify availability of materials, personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by deconstruction operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 6. Review method for removing materials from the site. 7. Review staging area for materials on the site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Hazardous Materials: It is anticipated that all existing hazardous materials will be removed from the site prior to commencement of the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. '! B. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during deconstruction operations. Special consideration is to be taken to avoid damage to existing storm line located approximately fifteen (15)feet below existing grade. 1.7 DECONSTRUCTION PLAN A. Material Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of materials to be salvaged, recycled, and disposed of. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout. B. Procedure: Describe deconstruction methodology, sequencing, and materials handling and removal procedures. Include the anticipated final destination of each material. PART 2-EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of deconstruction required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. D. Engage a licensed structural engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during deconstruction operations. YUM—E3.1 BUILDING DECONSTRUCTION Site Number 305-634 01736-3 July,2008 B. Contractor's proposal to reflect lump sum cost of deconstruction and demolition process to Owner. Contractor to deduct total anticipated value of salvaged and recycled materials that Contractor will realize from deconstruction process. Contractor to provide subtotals for each category of item listed in Section 2.7, and clearly identify these amounts on proposal. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Company experienced and specializing in performing the Work of this Section with documented experience in similar types of deconstruction work. Project Experience: Describe prior work performed during the last five (5)years that is similar to the work being proposed under this invitation to bid. Provide a list of most recent projects of similar nature and briefly discuss, based on these examples, your ability to successfully commission this project. At a minimum, provide a brief description of each project, current client references (including names and phone numbers), the dates services were performed, specific services you provided, size and type of the project, and project costs at completion. List all clients served in the last 24 months, including name, address, phone number, e-mail, and type of work performed. Personnel Experience/Qualifications. Submit names and relevant experience of the personnel, including subcontractors who will perform the work being proposed under this invitation to bid. Organization, Management and Administration. Describe how the work will be organized, managed, and administered so as to meet specified requirements. Provide a listing of potential organizations and entities where reused, recycled and deposal materials may be sent. Indicate if disposition of each material category will reflect a financial cost or gain to the contractor. Demonstrate the ability to accomplish the required tasks for work being proposed under this invitation to bid within the specified times. B. Schedule of Deconstruction Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of deconstruction and removal work,with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Method of proposed dust-and noise-control within building and on site. 5. Means of protection for items to be salvaged and/or reused. C. Disposition of items Identified for Salvage/Recycling/Disposal: Contractor to provide names of companies, organizations and locations of where materials removed from Project are to be brought. Contractor to identify intended purpose (e.g. refurbish and reuse, recycle into new product, dispose, etc.)of all materials. D. Inventory: After deconstruction is complete, submit a list of items that have been salvaged, recycled and disposed of and documentation (receipts/scale tickets/waybills) indicating all quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout. D. Deconstruction Photographic Documentation: Document general condition of materials to be salvaged prior to removal. E. Submit deconstruction plan prior to start of work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Deconstruction Firm Qualifications: Company experienced and specializing in performing the YUM—E3.1 BUILDING DECONSTRUCTION Alftk Site Number 305-634 01736-2 July,2008 SECTION 01736 BUILDING DECONSTRUCTION THIS SECTION OF THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS, 01736 BUILDING DECONSTRUCTION, HAS BEEN ISSUED AND BID AND THE WORK WILL BE COMPLETE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. THIS SECTION IS INCLUDED FOR INFORMATION ONLY. PART 1 GENERAL 1.0 PROJECT OVERVIEW Yum! Brands, Inc. ("Owner") seeks the services of a contractor ("contractor") for the deconstruction of an existing one-story, masonry / steel building of approximately 3,000 square feet, located on an asphalt and concrete paved lot of approximately one acre in Northampton, MA. Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design (LEEDO) Gold Certification is the goal for this project. The contractor will be fully responsible for adherence to all procedures, activities and documentation related to obtaining, at a minimum, Material & Resources Credit 2.1, Divert 50% from Disposal and obtaining, if possible, Material & Resources Credit 2.2, Divert 75% from Disposal. 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Activities include: 1. Deconstruction and removal of entire building for salvage, recycling and disposal. 2. Deconstruction and removal of man-made site elements for salvage, recycling and disposal. 3. At completion of Deconstruction, rough grade entire site to fill and eliminate all voids, holes,trenches and depressions, and to match elevations at adjacent property lines B. Related Sections: 1. General Specifications Division 01 Section"Construction Waste Management and Disposal'for disposal of demolished materials. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Full Deconstruction: Removal by disassembly of a building in the reverse order in which it was constructed. B. Selective Deconstruction: Disassembly and removal of selected portions of building or structure. C. Salvage: Removal of disassembled building materials for the purpose of reuse or recycling. D. Demolish: Remove and legally dispose of off-site all materials not salvaged or reused.. 1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP/PROPOSED COST A. Unless otherwise indicated, all salvaged materials, recyclable materials and deconstruction & demolition waste becomes property of the Contractor,who is solely responsible for the disposition of all items. t4 YUM—E3.1 BUILDING DECONSTRUCTION Site Number 305-634 01736-1 July,2008 D. Remove and replace defective or non-forming work. E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. G. Uncover work to allow for Owner's Representative's observation of covered work which has been covered up prior to required observation by Owner's Representative. 3.5 PERFORMANCE A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. 1. Use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering or chopping. 2. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required,with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 3. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 4. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 5. Cut through concrete and masonry using cutting machine, such as Carborundum saw or diamond-core drill. B. Execute in manner which does not void required or existing warranties. C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. F. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection;for an assembly, refinish entire unit. G. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods in accordance with applicable Sections of Division 2 which will prevent settlement or damage to Project. H. Execute fitting and adjustment to produce finished installation complying with specified products,functions,tolerances, and finishes. I. Install products and materials to complete Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. J. Do not cut and patch structural elements in manner that would result in reduction of load carrying capacity or of load deflection ratio. K. Do not cut and patch operational elements or safety related components in manner that would result in reduction of their capacity to perform in manner intended, including energy performance,that would result in increased maintenance, decreased operational life, or decreased safety. L. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. M. Except where indicated otherwise, restore exposed finishes of patched areas to match existing and where necessary extend finish restoration into retained adjoining surfaces in manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. Thoroughly clean surfaces prior to application of paint and other finishes. N. Where patching occurs in previously painted surface, provide appropriate prime coat followed by first finish coat of paint. Provide final finish coat over entire area containing patch;for continuous surface extend to nearest vertical break or intersection,for an assembly refinish entire unit. Except where indicated otherwise,finish in sheen and color to match existing. 3.6 CLEANING A. Restore damaged surfaces to its original condition. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING Site Number 305-634 01731 -2 July,2008 OOW SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART1GENERAL 1.1 PAYMENT FOR COSTS A. Costs resulting from ill-timed or defective work, or work not conforming to Contract Documents, including costs for additional services of Owner's Representative,or other consultants shall be borne by the party responsible for ill-timed, rejected or non-conforming Work. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Products: Those required for original installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Execute cutting,fitting,and patching including excavation and fill,to complete Work,and to: 1. Fit the several parts together,to integrate with other work. 2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. 4. Remove samples of installed work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work; maintain excavations free of water. C. Provide materials and control operations to prevent spread of dust in surrounding area. Provide drop cloths or other suitable barriers. D. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. E. Avoid cutting in service pipes, ducts, or conduit until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting,fitting, and patching(including excavation and fill)to complete work. B. Fit products together,to integrate with other work. C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. look YUM—E3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING Site Number 305-634 01731 - 1 July,2008 SECTION 01725 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY CONTROL A. Land Surveyor: Registered in the State in which Project is located,and acceptable to Owner's Representative. 1.2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. B. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles,and elevations of construction. PART2PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. Promptly notify Owner's Representative of any discrepancies discovered. 3.2 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. B. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. Make no changes without prior written notice to Owner's Representative. D. Promptly report to Owner's Representative the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. 3.3 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. Establish a minimum of 2 permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations,with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements, including pavements; stakes for grading,fill and topsoil placement; and utility locations, slopes,and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations,and ground floor elevations. C. Prior to commencement of Work,verify and establish floor elevations of existing facilities to assure that new Work will meet existing elevations in smooth and level alignment, except where specifically detailed or indicated otherwise. D. Periodically verify layouts by same means. E. Prepare certified survey showing dimensions, locations,angles, and elevations of construction and sitework on completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring surveying. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 FIELD ENGINEERING Site Number 305-634 01725-1 July,2008 OW I/we have investigated the proposed substitution. I/we: believe that it is equal or superior in all respects including function, appearance and quality to specified product,except as stated above; - does not negatively impact the intent to LEED certify this project; will provide same warranty and servicing requirements as specified for specified product; - have included complete cost data and implications of the substitution; will pay for changes to the building design and special inspection costs caused by the use of this product; will coordinate the incorporation of the proposed substitution in the work; waive future claims for added cost to Contract caused by the substitution. Contractor(Bidder): Date: By: Answer all questions and complete all blanks-use"NA"if not applicable. Unresponsive or incomplete request will be rejected. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S REVIEW AND ACTION Resubmit substitution request Provide more information in the following areas: Sign Contractor's(Bidder's) Statement of Conformance Substitution is accepted. Substitution is accepted,with the following comments: Substitution rejected. Substitution Request received too late. Date: Owner's Representative oopk YUM—E3.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Site Number305-634 01600-7 July,2008 A0k Warranty Provided: Yes No Years By Whom: 4. PREVIOUS INSTALLATIONS: Identification of similar projects on which proposed substitution was used: Project: Architect: Address: Owner: Date Installed: 5. REASON FOR NOT GIVING PRIORITY TO SPECIFIED ITEMS: 6. EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION: Does the proposed substitution affect other work or LEED Certification Criteria(adverse or otherwise): No Yes (if yes, explain) Substitution Changes Contract Time: No Yes Add/Deduct Days Substitution requires dimensional revisions or redesign of the work: No Yes (if yes, attach explanation data) Saving of credit to Owner: $ Extra Cost to Owner: $ 7. CONTRACTOR'S (BIDDER'S) STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: YUM—E3.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Site Number305-634 01600-6 July,2008 e SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM DATE: Owner's Representative's Project No: Project: To: From: Contractor(Bidder) hereby request acceptance of the following product or system as substitution in accordance with provisions of Section 01600 of the Specifications: 1. SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM: Substitution request for: Specification Section No : Article: 2. SUPPORTING DATA: Product data adequate for evaluation of the request for proposed substitution is attached (description of product, reference standard, performance and test data, specifications, drawings, photographs). Sample is attached. Sample will be sent if requested. 3. QUALITY COMPARISON SPECIFIED PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION Name, Brand: Catalog No.: Manufacturer: Vendor: Significant Variations: (Add Additional Sheets If Necessary) Maintenance Service Available: Yes No Spare Parts Source: """' YUM-E3.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Site Number305-634 01600-5 July,2008 AW%N 2. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at site; limitations on storage space; availability of personnel and handling equipment,and Owner's use of premises. 3. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 4. Deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing. 5. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify equipment and contents to permit easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly. C. Receiving and Handling: 1. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, including those provided by Owner, by methods to prevent soiling and damage. 2. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces. 3. Handle product by methods to avoid bending or overstressing. Lift large and heavy components only at designated lift points. 4. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure: a. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittal. b. Quantities are correct. C. Accessories and installation hardware are correct. d. Containers and packages are intact and labels legible. e. Products are protected and undamaged. 3.3 STORAGE A. General: 1. Store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,with seals and labels intact. Protect until installed. 2. Arrange storage in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection. 3. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. B. Enclosed Storage: 1. Store products, subject to damage by the elements, in substantial weathertight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges stated in manufacturer's instructions. 3. Provide humidity control and ventilation for sensitive products as required by manufacturer's instructions. 4. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items. C. Exterior Storage: 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids,to support fabricated products above ground; slope to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling and staining. 2. For products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, cover with impervious sheet material. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. 3. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid surfaces such as pavement,or on rigid sheet materials,to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. END OF SECTION Attachment: Substitution Request Form YUM—E3.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Site Number305-634 01600-4 July,2008 2. Semi-Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. a. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning"substitutions"to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 3. Non-Proprietary Specifications: When the Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work,but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only,the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning"substitutions"to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly,listing exact characteristics required,with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. 5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 6. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards,codes or regulations specified. 7. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample,the Owner's Representative's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements,comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning"substitutions"for selection of a matching product in another product category, or for noncompliance with specified requirements. 8. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase"...as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns,textures..."or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Owner's Representative will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION A. Require supplier to package products in boxes or crates for protection during shipment, handling,and storage. Protect sensitive products against exposure to elements and moisture. B. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion, and other damage. 3.2 DELIVERY, RECEIVING,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, receive, and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft B. Delivery: 1. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction progress schedules. Allow time for inspection prior to installation. OOW YUM—E3.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Site Number305-634 01600-3 July,2008 2. Identify product by Specifications section and Article numbers. Provide manufacturer's name and address,trade name of product, and model or catalog number. List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate. 3. Attach product data as specified in Section 01330. 4. List similar projects using product, dates of installation, and names of Owner's Representative and Owner. 5. Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing variations, and reference to Specifications section and Article numbers. 6. Give quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and the specified product. 7. Give cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product, and amount of net change to Contract Sum. 8. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials. 9. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other work or products. C. Contractor Representation: 1. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product or that the cost reduction offered, if any, is ample justification for accepting the offered substitution. 2. Provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product. 3. Coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. 4. Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes related costs under this Contract. 5. Waives claims for additional costs related to substitution which may later become apparent. D. Submittal Procedures: 1. Submit 3 copies of request for substitution. 2. Owner's Representative will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. 3. During the bidding period, Owner's Representative will record acceptable substitutions in Addenda. 4. After award of Contract, Owner's Representative will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution, generally within 14 days. 5. For accepted products, submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Section 01330. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with all accessories,trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. YUM—E3.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Site Number305-634 01600-2 July,2008 SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART1GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind,from a single source. 1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot produce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Owner's Representative for a determination of the most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes relating to visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources whose products possess these qualities,to the fullest extent possible. B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the Project,the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected,even if previously selected products were also options. C. Matching of Colors: 1. When a product is listed in the specifications with an accompanying color, pattern, texture,or sheen, provide only that product,or one that is identical in color, pattern, texture, and sheen to the product specified, regardless if the color, pattern,texture,or sheen of the alternate manufacturer's product is a standard or option. 2. On finished materials and products,verify that colors, patterns,textures, and sheens are identical for the entire project and that there are no visual differences between batches, packages, bundles, or shipments, due to differing production runs. Owner's Representative reserves the right to reject products and materials installed,which have, in the sole opinion of the Owner's Representative,a significant enough difference in color, pattern, texture, or sheen,from other products on the project, so as to be visually distracting. 1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Limitations: 1. During Bidding period, Instructions to Bidders govern times for submitting requests for substitutions under requirements specified in this Section. 2. Requests for substitutions of products will be considered only within 30 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. Subsequent requests will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor. 3. Substitutions will not be considered: a. When indicated on shop drawings or product data submittal without separate formal request. b. When requested directly by subcontractor or supplier. C. When acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. 4. Do not order or install proposed substitute products without written acceptance. 5. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When substitution is not accepted, provide specified product. 6. Owner's Representative will determine acceptability of substitutions. B. Requests for Substitutions: 1. Submit separate request for each substitution. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract Documents. Utilize substitution request form attached. YUM—E3.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Site Number305-634 01600-1 July,2008 SECTION 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION PART 1GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign: Construct and install to withstand 60 mph wind velocity. B. Graphics Painter: Professional sign painter, minimum 2 years experience. C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading,and chipping for duration of construction. D. Permit: Obtain and pay for permit that may be required to display sign on Project site. Coordinate requirements with local jurisdiction. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGN MATERIALS A. Support Structure and Framing: Mount 4 by 4 inch posts, set 3 feet into ground,with 4 feet clearance from ground to bottom of sign. Brace each post back to ground with 2 by 4 inch brace and brace both sides of"W to each other. B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 23/32 inch thick, sized to minimize joints. C. Nails, Bolts, and Fasteners: Types and sizes as required, galvanized or corrosion resistant. D. Primers and Paints: Exterior type, colors as selected by Owner's Representative, 2 coats consisting of an appropriate primer followed by one coat of paint for support structure, framing and sign surfaces. E. Graphics: 1. Design, sizes,colors,and styles of lettering as selected by Owner's Representative. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Sign: One painted surface. B. Sign Size:4 x 8 feet. 1. Refer to Drawings for further information. C. Required Information: 1. Title of Project and Name of Owner. 2. Names and titles of Owner's Representative and Contractor, painted in black letters on white background. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification sign within 10 days after commencement of construction. B. Install assembly plumb and level, rigidly braced,framed, and anchored to resist wind load. C. Maintain signs; repair deterioration and damage. D. Remove signs,framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore area. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION Site Number 305-634 01580-1 July,2008 IWON 1. During the course of construction all temporary swales constructed for this contract shall be maintained so as to allow proper drainage from the construction area. Before Contractor leaves the site at the end of construction, all temporary swales to remain shall be placed in good working condition. 2. Contractor shall work with other contractors at the site in maintaining existing swales and ditches. 3. Where necessary for access to the work areas, adequately sized culverts shall be installed and maintained to provide the access without disturbing the site drainage. 4. Care shall be taken not to rut and damage sodded swales. Damaged swales shall be repaired immediately. 5. Keep sodded swales mowed. 3.4 DRAINAGE DITCHES A. Drainage ditches shall be hydromulched immediately upon final grading. B. Erosion of the banks of the drainage ditches shall be repaired immediately and re-stabilized. C. Sediment barriers shall be placed at intervals along the ditch as shown on the plans and as necessary to help trap sediment on the site. Sediment and other debris trapped by the barriers shall be removed on a daily basis as needed. D. Ditch side slopes shall not be steeper than 3 feet horizontal to 1 foot vertical. E. Maintenance of the ditches during construction shall include but not be limited to mowing, re- grading, sediment removal, re-hydromulching, bank repair and debris removal. F. Sediment removed from the ditches may be respread on the site as directed by the Owner. 3.5 FILL AND CUT SLOPES A. Fill slopes in all cases shall be no steeper than 3:1 unless specifically stated on the plans or approved by the Owner's soils engineer. B. When cut slopes exceed 2:1 for depths over 3 feet, proper bracing and shoring per OSHA requirements shall be used and maintained. C. For permanent slopes, cut or fill, between 2:1 and 10:1,erosion protection shall be provided with hydromulching, sodding, seeding, or other method as approved. 3.6 SEDIMENTATION BASINS A. Description 1. Sedimentation ponds shall be provided where designated on the plans. 2. All drainage from cleared areas shall be routed through the sedimentation basin. 3. Contractor will be responsible for the operation and maintenance of the pond during construction. B. Maintenance 1. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the pond and the outfall and sediment retarding structure in good working condition throughout the time the pond is to be in operation. 2. When sediment and debris fill the pond to over 1/3 its designed capacity,the pond shall be cleaned out. 3.7 EROSION CONTROL BARRIERS A. Erosion control barriers shall be provided at intervals along swales and ditches as shown on the drawings and as necessary to meet the requirements of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. B. The barriers shall be silt fence or hay bales placed as shown on the drawings and details. C. Barriers shall be maintained in good working condition and replaced when damaged. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Site Number 305-634 01570-2 July,2008 SECTION 01570 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTICE OF INTENT A. Contractor and Owner shall jointly submit an EPA Notice of Intent(NOI) prior to construction. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Grass: Materials for seeding and sodding shall conform to Section 02905. B. Fertilizer: Use commercial grade fertilizers to insure germination and growth. Analysis by weight shall be 16-4-8 or 15-5-10 for Nitrogen, Phosphoric Acid and Potash. C. Silt Fence: Lundin"Silt Buster", Mirafi"Envirofence"or approved equal. D. Straw Bales: Standard rectangular hay bales bound by baling wire E. Sediment Traps: Standard manufacture designed to fit the intended inlet. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Contractor shall keep disturbed areas to a minimum required to adequately perform the work. At all times the Contractor shall maintain the site in such a manner that minimizes erosion of the site. The execution of work under this section shall be in conformance with the NPDES rulings and the site Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. 3.2 SEEDING A. Disturbed portions of the site and stockpile areas shall be seeded within 14 days if the phasing of the construction operations are anticipated to leave those portions of the areas unworked for 21 days or more. B. Seeding operations shall be performed in accordance to the state's Standard Specifications, using the materials specified and the season in which the seeding operations are to occur. C. Seeded areas shall be maintained until the project is accepted by the Owner. Maintenance shall include but not be limited to watering,fertilizing, reseeding, mowing and erosion repair as may be required. Grass shall be cut when the average height of the grass reaches 6 inches. Clippings may be mulched back into the seeded areas. 3.3 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT SWALES A. Description 1. Temporary and permanent drainage swales shall be provided as required to carry drainage away from the work area to an approved outfall point. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, swales shall be earthen W"shaped channels graded to a sufficient depth and slope to carry the anticipated runoff, but at least 2 feet deep with a slope of 0.1 percent. 3. Swales not designated to remain in place at the completion of the contract shall be cleaned of any muck,debris and other unsuitable material and filled with approved fill before final grading operations begin. 4. Swales shall have erosion control barriers as required. 5. All permanent swales shall be sodded to a minimum width of 10 feet on either side of the centerline of the swale. B. Maintenance YUM—E3.1 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Site Number 305-634 01570-1 July,2008 1. Moisture-damaged g gypsum board with evidence of significant mold growth shall be disposed of in accordance with New York City's "Guidelines on Assessment and Remediation of Fungi in Indoor Environments": http://www.nyc.gov/html/doh/html/epi/moldrptl.shtmi 2. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. a. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Exterior Plants"for use of clean ground gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment. E. Miscellaneous:Anything called out to be ground and used on site should utilize an on-site grinder. 1. Grinder should be able to accommodate a variety of materials including masonry, asphalt shingles,wood, and drywall. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise re- used, remove waste materials from Project Site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of to accumulate on site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Do not burn or bury waste materials on or off site.Appropriate on-site topical application of ground gypsum or wood, or use of site paving as granulated fill is considered reuse, not waste. END OF SECTION 01524 YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A*k Site Number 305-634 01524-10 July,2008 recycling. Separate wood material treated with heavy metal preservatives for re- use or landfill disposal. E. Metals: Separate metals by type. 1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size,type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts,washers, and other rough hardware. F. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts for recycling into asphalt paving or by other recycling entities. G. Gypsum Board: Stack large, clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry loca- tion for recycling off-site. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. 1. Moisture-damaged gypsum board with evidence of significant mold growth shall be disposed of in accordance with New York City's "Guidelines on Assessment and Remediation of Fungi in Indoor Environments": http://www.nyc.gov/html/doh/html/epi/moldrptl.shtml H. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large, clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. 1. Separate suspension system, trim, and other metals from panels and the and sort with other metals. I. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris,trash, adhesive, and tack strips. 1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by a carpet recycler or manufacturer-related carpet reclamation agency. J. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather. K. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. L. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size. M. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. N. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear,transformers, me- ters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. O. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size. 3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets:As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project Site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on-site. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section"Exterior Plants"for use of chipped organic waste as organic mulch. C. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into material appropriate for mulch or erosion control. 2. Lumber Treated with Heavy-Metal Preservatives: Do not grind, chip, or incinerate; must be reused or landfilled. D. Gypsum Board: Stack large, clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry loca- tion for recycling and/or reuse on-site or off-site. YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT Site Number 305-634 01524-9 July,2008 miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated. B. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors. 3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only; available recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the fol- lowing: 1. List to be developed by Contractor. C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates,tax credits, and other incen- tives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials,trash, and de- bris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project Site to the maximum extent practical. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project Site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. _4 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. 3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling fa- cility or recycle on-site into new paving. B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 4-inch (100-mm) size. 2. Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase. C. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) size. a. Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for use as general fill or subbase. b. Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Exterior Plants"for use as mineral mulch. 2. Clean and stack undamaged,whole masonry units on wood pallets. D. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, and panel products for reuse and/or YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT Site Number 305-634 01524-8 July,2008 1.8 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT RESOURCES A. General information contacts regarding construction and demolition waste: 1. EPA Construction and demolition (C&D) debris website: http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/non-hw/debris-new/bytype.htm 2. Directory of Wood-Framed Building Deconstruction and Reused Building Materials Companies: http://www.fpl.fs.fed.us/documnts/fplgtr/fpl_gtrl50.pdf 3. Additional resources to be developed by Contractor with assistance from Owner and Architect, as requested. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect and Owner. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage,transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with Division 1 Section"Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation,termination, and removal requirements. B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste manage- ment work plan. Coordinator shall be present at the Project Site full-time for dura- tion of Project. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste manage- ment procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project Site. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,walks,walkways, and other ad- jacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project Site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated,and sold. 2. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat, and clean, and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. 3. Comply with Division 1 Section"Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. E. Hazardous Wastes: Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, and disposed of according to local regulations and should not be included in Construction Waste Management Plan's calculations of waste. 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and %' YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT Site Number 305-634 01524-7 July,2008 D. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site- clearing, and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quanti- ties and assumptions for estimates. E. Landfill Options: Indicate the name of the landfill(s) and/or transfer station(s) and/or incinerator(s)where trash will be disposed of,the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all Project waste in the landfill(s). F. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be sal- vaged, reused, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work. 2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Describe method that will be used for separating recyclable waste, including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project Site where materials separation will be located. G. Materials: The following list of required materials, at a minimum, must be included for salvaging/recycling: 1. Cardboard 2. Clean dimensional wood 3. Beverage and food containers 4. Paper 5. Concrete 6. Concrete Masonry Units(CMUs 7. Asphalt: Include the approximate weight of the asphalt paving to be crushed and utilized as granulated fill from the existing paving as a component of waste material diverted from the landfill. 8. Ferrous and non-ferrous metals (banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other trim, steel, iron, galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze) 9. Stretch and shrink wrap 10. Gypsum wallboard 11. Paint containers and other clean, empty plastic containers H. Meetings: Provide a description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste management. I. Materials Handling Procedures: Provide a description of the means by which any waste materials identified will be protected from contamination, and a description of the means to be employed in recycling the above materials consistent with re- quirements for acceptance by designated facilities. J. Transportation: Provide a description of the means of transportation of the recy- clable materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to des- ignated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site)and destination of materials. YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT Site Number 305-634 01524-6 July,2008 H. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of re- cyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. In- clude manifests,weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. I. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills (or transfer stations)and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests,weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. J. LEED Submittal: LEED letter template for Credit MR 2.1, signed by Contractor, tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is di- verted, and statement that requirements for the credit have been met. K. Qualification Data: For Waste Management Coordinator and refrigerant recovery technician. L. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician re- sponsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all applicable local ordinances and regula- tions. B. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: LEED Accredited Professional by U.S. Green Building Council. Waste management coordinator may also serve as LEED coordinator. C. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certi- fication program. D. Waste Management Meetings: Conduct an initial conference at Project Site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordi- nation."Contractor shall include discussions on construction waste management requirements in the preconstruction meeting. Contractor shall include discussions on construction waste management requirements in the regular job meetings con- ducted during the course of the Project; at these meetings, review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to,the follow- ing: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of the Waste Management Coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop and implement a CWMP consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Include separate sections in plan for demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or vol- ume, but use the same units of measure throughout the CWMP. B. Draft Construction Waste Management Plan:Within 30 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, or prior to any waste removal,whichever occurs sooner,the Contrac- tor shall submit to the Owner and Architect a Draft Waste Management Plan. C. Final Construction Waste Management Plan: Once the Owner has determined which of the recycling options addressed in the draft Waste Management Plan are acceptable, the Contractor shall submit,within 10 calendar days, a Final Waste Management Plan. YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT Site Number 305-634 01524-5 July,2008 a" D. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Pay- ment, submit four copies of report. Include separate reports for demolition and construction waste. Include the following information: 1. Material category 2. Generation point of waste 3. Total quantity of waste in tons 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled)as a percentage of total waste 8. Include up-to-date records of donations, sales, recycling and landfill/incinerator manifests,weight tickets, hauling receipts, and invoices. E. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit four copies of calculated end-of-project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work. Complete a table similar to the example below. Recycled/Salvaged/Diverted Materials Hauler or Location Quantity of Material (tons) Total Construction Waste Diverted Oak, Landfilled Materials Total Construction Waste Landfilled Total Construction Waste Total Construction Waste Diverted +Total Construction Waste Landfilled Percentage of Construction Waste (Total Construction Waste Diverted from Landfill Diverted/Total Construction Waste *100 F. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste do- nated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax- exempt. G. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax-exempt. YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AOWk Site Number 305-634 01524-4 July,2008 hh. Electrical conduit ii. Copper wiring jj. Lighting fixtures kk. Lamps II. Ballasts mm. Electrical devices nn. Switchgear and panelboards oo. Transformers 2. Construction Waste: a. Masonry and CMU b. All untreated wood, including lumber and finish materials C. Wood sheet materials d. Wood trim e. Metals f. Roofing g. Insulation h. Carpet and pad i. Gypsum board j. Unused (leftover) paint k. Piping I. Electrical conduit M. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper 2) Cardboard 3) Boxes 4) Plastic sheet and film 5) Polystyrene packaging 6) Wood crates 7) Plastic pails n. Beverage and packaged food containers 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Construction Waste Management Plan (CWMP): It is the intent of this specification to maximize the diversion of demolition and construction waste from landfill dis- posal.Accordingly, not more than 10 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed and prior to the generation of any waste, prepare and submit a draft Construction Waste Management Plan in accordance with Section 01524 including, but not lim- ited to,the following: 1. Procedures for Recycling/Reuse Program to divert a minimum of 75% (by weight) of construction and demolition waste from landfill disposal, including waste resulting from demolition of any existing building and site paving scheduled for demolition; any site paving is required to be ground on site and reused as granulated fill on site. 2. Approval of the Contractor's CWMP shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for adequate and continuing control of pollutants and other environmental protection measures. B. Submit a 3-ring binder with calculations on end-of-project recycling rates, salvage rates, and landfill rates itemized by waste material, demonstrating that a minimum of 75%of construction wastes were recycled or salvaged and diverted from land- fill. Include documentation of recovery rate(if commingled),waste hauling certifi- cates or receipts, and a brief narrative explaining how and to where each waste type has been diverted. C. Construction Waste Management Plan: Submit four copies of plan within 15 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT Site Number 305-634 01524-3 July,2008 K. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste L. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure M. Trash:Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or sal- vaged N. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use.Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The Owner has established that this Project shall generate the least amount of waste possible and that processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors shall be employed. B. Of the waste that is generated, as many of the waste materials as economically feasible shall be reused, salvaged, or recycled.Waste disposal in landfills or in- cinerators shall be minimized, thereby reducing disposal costs. C. Develop a construction waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75% (by weight)of construction and demolition waste. D. Salvage/Recycle Requirements: Salvage and recycle as much non-hazardous demolition and construction waste as possible, including the following materials: 1. Demolition Waste: a. Asphaltic concrete paving b. Concrete C. Concrete reinforcing steel d. Brick e. Concrete masonry units f. Wood studs g. Wood joists h. Plywood and oriented strand board i. Wood paneling j. Wood trim k. Structural and miscellaneous steel I. Rough hardware M. Roofing n. Insulation o. Doors and frames P. Door hardware q. Windows r. Glazing S. Metal studs t. Gypsum board U. Acoustical tile and panels V. Carpet W. Carpet pad X. Demountable partitions Y. Equipment Z. Cabinets aa. Plumbing fixtures bb. Piping cc. Supports and hangers dd. Valves ee. Sprinklers ff. Mechanical equipment gg. Refrigerants YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT ' Site Number 305-634 01524-2 July,2008 SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the follow- ing: 1. Salvaging non-hazardous demolition and construction waste 2. Recycling non-hazardous demolition and construction waste 3. Disposing of non-hazardous demolition and construction waste B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 01 12 00"Summary of Multiple Contracts"for coordination of responsibilities for waste management 2. Division 1 Section"Sustainable Design Requirements" 3. Division 1 Section"Temporary Facilities and Controls"for environmental-protection measures during construction 4. Sections within 02 41 00"Demolition"for disposition of waste resulting from demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. 5. Division 2 Section"Site Clearing"for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above-and below-grade improvements. 6. Division 4 Section"Unit Masonry Assemblies"for disposal requirements for masonry waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, paint, or the like B. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. C. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demoli- tion or selective demolition operations D. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction E. Diversion: Avoidance of demolition and construction waste sent to landfill or incin- eration. Diversion does not include using materials for landfill, alternate daily cover on landfills, or materials used as fuel in waste-to-energy processes F. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignita- bility, corrosiveness, toxicity or reactivity G. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse H. Recycling: The process of sorting,cleansing, treating, and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Re- cycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. I. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent reuse or sale in another facility J. Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorpora- tion into the Work YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT Site Number 305-634 01524-1 July,2008 o 1. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAG system for temporary use during construction,provide filter with MERV of 8 at each,return air grille in system and remove at end of construction. PART 3 PRODUCTS 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference With performance of the Work. :Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section"Summary." SEE SECTION 02230 FOR TEMPORARY EROSION&SEDIMENTATION CONTROL. END OF SECTION O` YUM—E3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Site Number 305-634 01500-3 July,2008 1.8 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Observe and enforce throughout the work all requirements of City, State and Insurance authorities to minimize fire hazards. B. Remove combustible refuse from within each building daily. C. Provide fire extinguishers as required by the local fire department and city ordinances. 1.9 BARRIERS A. Provide as required to prevent public entry to construction areas. B. Provide 6 foot high commercial grade chain link fence around construction site;equip with vehicular and pedestrian on outside gates with locks. C. Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to remain. Protect against vehicular traffic, stored materials, dumping, chemically injurious materials, and puddling or continuous running water. Protect from staining on trunk and branches. Do not disturb existing soil at base or within drip line in any manner. 1.10 ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather-tight closures of openings in exterior surfaces to provide acceptable working conditions and protection for materials,to allow for temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area to minimize damage. B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. Protect finished floors and stairs from traffic, movement of heavy objects, and storage. C. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces, on lawn and landscaped '090* areas. 1.12 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide and operate pumping equipment. Protect site from ponding or running water. 1.13 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Office: 1. Weather-tight,with lighting, electrical outlets,telephone, heating, and air conditioning equipment. 2. Equip with minimum of one layout table, one desk,file cabinet, plan rack and 2 chairs. B. Storage Sheds for Tools, Materials, and Equipment: 1. Weather-tight,with heat and ventilation for Products requiring controlled conditions, with adequate space for organized storage and access, and lighting for inspection of stored materials. 1.14 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES,AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction prior to Substantial Completion inspection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,self-contained,liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. YUM—E3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Site Number 305-634 01500-2 July,2008 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for power service required from Utility source. B. Provide temporary electric feeder from electrical service at location as directed. C. Provide power outlets for construction operations,with branch wiring and distribution boxes located at each floor. Provide flexible power cords as required. D. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. E. Provide adequate distribution equipment,wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. F. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools. G. Provide 20 ampere,single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq.ft. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails and lamps as required. D. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. E. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. F. Provide a minimum of 80 f.c.of lighting on surfaces to receive finished materials. 1.3 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes,verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.4 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials,to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust,fumes,vapors,or gases. 1.5 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide telephone service to field office. B. Provide a minimum of 2 lines, one for voice, and one for fax/data. Cellular phone of superintendent may be substituted for one of the land lines. 1.6 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide service required for construction operations. Extend branch piping with outlets located so that water is available by use of hoses. 1.7 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. olowk YUM—E3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Site Number 305-634 01500-1 July,2008 G. Pay for subsequent re-testing of products or systems found to be defective or otherwise not in accordance with specification requirements. Remove rejected products and replace with products of specified quality. H. Furnish copies of product tests or mill test reports as specified or required. I. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at Project site or at source of product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. J. Notify Owner's Representative, Owner, and laboratory 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. K. When inspections or tests can not be performed after proper notification and at no fault of laboratory, reimbursement costs for laboratory expenses incurred will be charged to Contractor by deducting charges from Contract Sum. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01330. B. Laboratory Reports: 1. Submit test reports within 2 weeks of test date. 2. After each inspection and test, promptly submit copies of written reports as follows: a. Owner: One copy. b. Owner's Representative: 3 copies. C. Code Officials: One copy. d. Contractor: 3 copies. 3. When requested by Owner's Representative, provide interpretation of test results and suggested remedies. 1.11 FAILURES AND RETESTING ,4*k A. When initial inspections and tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents, subsequent testing will be performed by same Testing Agency and will be done at Contractor's expense and deducted from Contract Sum. B. Removal and replacement of Work necessitated by such non-compliance of Contract Documents shall be at Contractor's expense. PART 2PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 QUALITY CONTROL Awk Site Number 305-634 01450-4 July,2008 1. Owner will employ services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing. 2. Employment of testing laboratory in no way relieves obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor will pay testing required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Where the Owner has engaged a testing agency or other entity for testing and inspection of a part of the Work,and the Contractor is also required to engage an entity for the same or related element,the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the Owner, unless otherwise agreed in writing with the Owner. C. Laboratory: 1. Cooperate with Owner's Representative, Owner, and Contractor. 2. Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM E 329 and ANSI/ASTM D 3740. 3. Maintain a full-time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 4. Authorized to operate in State where the project is located. 5. Calibrate testing equipment once each year with devices of an accuracy traceable to either NBS Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 6. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 7. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Contractor and Owner's Representative in performance of services. 8. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 9. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 10. Promptly notify Owner's Representative, Owner, and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 11. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Owner's Representative. 12. Attend Preconstruction Conference. D. Laboratory Reports: 1. After each inspection and test, promptly submit 2 copies of laboratory report to Owner's Representative and one to the applicable consultant and one to Contractor. 2. Include: Date issued,project title and number, name of inspector, date and time of sampling or inspection, identification of product and Specifications section, location in the Project,type of inspection or test, date of test, results of tests, and conformance with Contract Documents. 3. When requested by Owner's Representative, provide interpretation of test results. E. Limits on Testing Laboratory Authority: 1. May not release, revoke, relax, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. May not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. May not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Has no authority to stop Work. 1.9 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing,together with proposed mix designs. B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to Work and to manufacturer's facilities. C. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to work to be tested,to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested,to facilitate tests and inspections, and for storage and curing of test samples. D. Notify laboratory of material sources and furnish necessary quantities of representative samples of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested. E. Notify Owner's Representative and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. F. Advise laboratory in a timely fashion to complete required inspection and testing prior to subsequent work being performed. YUM—E3.1 QUALITY CONTROL Site Number 305-634 01450-3 July,2008 ANNk 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supervise performance of Work in such manner and by such means to ensure that Work, whether completed or in progress,will not be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during construction period. B. Ensure that persons performing Work are qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Monitor quality control over products,suppliers, manufacturers, services, site conditions, and workmanship to ensure Work complies with Contract Documents. D. Comply with specified reference standards as minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. 1.5 EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS A. Examine substrates and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not commence work over unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to proper and timely execution of Work. B. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and cost of any corrective measures are responsibility of Contractor. 1.6 MOCKUPS A. General: 1. Use materials, fabrication and installation methods identical with those indicated for Work. Simulate actual construction conditions as accurately as possible. 2. Provide mock-ups required by individual Specification sections. 3. Approval: a. Obtain Owner's Representative's written approval for each mock-up. b. Do not start production of materials for final Project site erection until Project Manager's approval of mock-ups has been obtained. C. Approved mock-ups will serve as standard of quality and workmanship of Work; maintain mock-ups until completion of relevant Work. 4. Upon completion of relevant Work or when directed by Project Manager,demolish and remove mock-ups. 1.7 FIELD SAMPLES A. General: 1. Provide field samples at site required by individual Specification sections. 2. Erect at location acceptable to Owner's Representative; perform Work in accordance with applicable Specification sections. 3. Construct complete, including Work of related trades required in finished Work. 4. Make adjustments necessary to obtain approval from Owner's Representative. Do not proceed with further work until sample installation has been approved by Owner's Representative. 5. Approved samples will serve as standard of quality and workmanship of Work; maintain samples until completion of relevant Work. 6. Upon completion of Work or when directed by Owner's Representative, demolish field samples and remove from site, unless accepted by Owner's Representative as part of completed Work. 1.8 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. General: 1. Where terms"Laboratory", "Inspector", "Inspection Laboratory","Laboratory"or "Testing Laboratory"are used,they mean and refer to officially designated and accredited testing laboratory. 2. Provide testing laboratory with one set of Contract Documents and relevant approved submittals. B. Selection and Payment: YUM—E3.1 QUALITY CONTROL Site Number 305-634 01450-2 July,2008 SECTION 01450 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Maintain quality control over supervision,subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services,workmanship, and site conditions,to produce Work in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Field Samples: Partial installation of selected materials installed at Project site for Owner's Representative's review and approval of visual features and workmanship. B. Mock-ups: Full size assemblies that incorporate several materials or elements of construction erected for Owner's and Owner's Representative's review and approval of visual features and workmanship. Mock-ups represent quality of materials and workmanship required for Work. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Workmanship: 1. Comply with industry standards of the region except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. 2. Provide suitably qualified personnel to produce Work of specified quality. 3. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,vibration, and racking. 4. Provide finishes to match approved samples. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Require compliance with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. Do not omit preparatory steps or installation procedures unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 2. Maintain one complete set of instructions at Project Site during installation and until completion. 3. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner's Representative/Engineer before proceeding. C. Manufacturer's Certificates: 1. When required in individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's certificate, in duplicate,certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements, executed by responsible officer. D. Manufacturer's Field Services and Reports: 1. Submit reports in accordance in accordance with Section 01330. 2. Submit qualifications of field observer 30 days in advance of required observations; observer is subject to approval of Owner's Representative. 3. When specified in individual Specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces,quality of workmanship,and conditions of installation as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. 4. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Submit reports within 7 days of observation. Distribute copies to Owner's Representative, Owner, Project site file,subcontractor, and other entities requiring information. 6. Provide one additional copy of reports for record documents file; refer to Section 01780. YUM—E3.1 QUALITY CONTROL Site Number 305-634 01450-1 July,2008 Aw%e C. Finish: The manner or method of completion. The final appearance of a surface, including texture, smoothness, sheen, and color,after finishing operations have been performed. Finishing operations include preparation of substrate and application, curing, and protection of specified finish materials. D. Furnish: Means to supply, purchase, procure and deliver complete with related accessories, ready for assembly,application, installation, and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. E. Indicated: Refers to graphic representations, notes,or schedules on Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in Specifications, and similar requirements in Contract Documents. Terms such as"shown,""noted,""scheduled,"and"specified"are used to help reader locate the reference. Location is not limited. F. Install: Means to construct, assemble, erect, mount, anchor, place, connect, apply and similar operations, complete with related accessories, as applicable in each instance, connected, operable, and ready for service or intended use. G. Installer: Entity(person or firm) engaged to perform a particular unit of Work at Project site, including installation,erection, application, repair, patching, and similar required operations. Such entities must be experienced in operations they are engaged to perform. H. Or: Used to introduce any of the possibilities in a series. Items in the series are not required to be taken jointly. It does not mean that individual items in the series are optional requirements. I. Product: Includes natural and manufactured materials,components, machinery, fixtures, equipment, devices,furnishings, systems, and their associated accessories to be incorporated into the Work. J. Provide: Means to furnish and install, complete and ready for operations and use for purpose intended. K. Regulations: Includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction,as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within construction industry that control performance of the Work. L. Similar: Interpreted in its general sense and not as meaning identical. Elements defined as "similar"shall be coordinated in relationship to their location and connection with other parts of the Work. M. True To Line, Plumb, Level,and Flat: Install Work within following tolerances,except where indicated otherwise: 1. True to line: Allowed deviation from straight line within plus or minus 1/16 inch in 1 foot; plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet;plus or minus 1/4 inch in 20 feet; and plus or minus 3/8 inch in lengths over 20 feet. 2. Level: Allowed deviation from horizontal plane within plus or minus 1/16 inch in one foot; plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet; plus or minus 1/4 inch in 20 feet; and plus or minus 1/2 inch in lengths over 20 feet. 3. Plumb: Allowed deviation from vertical plane within plus or minus 1/16 inch in one foot; plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet; plus or minus 1/4 inch in 20 feet;and plus or minus 1/2 inch in lengths over 20 feet. 4. Flat: Allowed deviation from flat plane in any planar direction within plus or minusl/16 inch in 1 foot; plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet; plus or minus 1/4 inch in 20 feet; and plus or minus 3/8 inch in lengths over 20 feet. 5. Tolerances are not accumulative. PART 2PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 REFERENCES Site Number 305-634 01420-2 July,2008 SECTION 01420 REFERENCES PART 1GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with association,trade,federal,commercial, standards generating organization (such as ANSI and ASTM), and other similar standards referenced within Specification sections, except where more explicit or stringent requirements are indicated or required by Specification or applicable codes. B. Reference standards include their associated amendments and supplements. C. Except where a specific date is indicated,date of standard is latest edition in effect at date of Contract Documents, or date of standard required by code. D. Reference standards have same force and effect as if bound into or copied directly into Contract Documents; standards are made a part of Contract Documents by reference. E. Contractual relationship of parties to the Contract shall not be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference standards. F. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner's Representative before proceeding. 1.2 EXPLANATION OF PROJECT MANUAL CONTENT A. Specifying Methods: Techniques or methods of specifying varies throughout text and may include"prescriptive,""generic-descriptive,""compliance with standards,""performance," "proprietary,"or a combination of these. B. Language: 1. Imperative mood of sentence structure is generally used which places verb as first word in sentence. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by Contractor. 2. In certain circumstances,the language of specifications and other contract documents are of abbreviated type. It implies words and meanings that will be appropriately interpreted. Words such as"the,""shall,""shall be,""Contractor shall,""a,""all,""an," "any,"and other similar words are eliminated. 3. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicates. 4. The words"shall be"are implied wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. C. Minimum Quality and Quantity: In every instance,quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended to be minimum for Work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, actual Work may either comply exactly with that minimum within specified tolerances, or may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted, or as appropriate for context of requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner's Representative for decision before proceeding. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Custom Color: Refers to color selection by Owner's Representative that is not limited to a manufacturer's standard color or a manufacturer's color that is designated by the manufacturer as"custom", "premium"or any other designation. Custom color means any color selected by Owner's Representative. B. Directed, Requested: Terms such as"directed,""requested,""authorized,""selected," "approved,""required,""accepted,"and"permitted"mean"directed by Architect,""requested by Architect,"and similar phrases. However, no such implied meaning shall be interpreted to extend Owner's Representative's responsibility into area of construction supervision. AOW YUM—E3.1 REFERENCES Site Number 305-634 01420-1 July,2008 3.3 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT A. Credit EQ 3.1: Comply with SMACNA's"SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction." 1. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during construction period as specified in Division 1 Section"Temporary Facilities and Controls," install filter media having a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return-air inlet for the air-handling system used during construction. 2. Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy. B. Credit EQ 3.2: 1. After construction ends, prior to occupancy and with all interior finishes installed, perform a building flush-out by supplying a total volume of 14000 cu. ft. of outdoor air per sq.ft. of floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60 deg F and a relative humidity no higher than 60 percent. 2. If occupancy is desired prior to flush-out completion,the space may be occupied following delivery of a minimum of 3500 cu. ft.of outdoor air per sq.ft. of floor area to the space. Once a space is occupied, it shall be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cfm per sq.ft. of outside air or the design minimum outside air rate determined in EQ Prerequisite 1,which- ever is greater. During each day of the flush-out period, ventilation shall begin a minimum of three hours prior to occupancy and continue during occupancy. These conditions shall be maintained until a total of 14000 cu. ft./sq.ft. of outside air has been delivered to the space. END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 REFERENCES Site Number 305-634 01352-7 July,2008 3. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 5. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 6. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 7. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 9. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 10. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. C. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichloro benzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. I. Dimethyl phthalate. M. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. P. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. S. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. U. Methylene chloride. V. Naphthalene. W. Toluene (methylbenzene). X. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. Y. Vinyl chloride. C. Credit EQ 4.4: Do not use composite wood or agrifiber products or adhesives that contain urea-formaldehyde resin. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION A. Credit EA 5: Implement measurement and verification plan consistent with Option D: Cali- brated Simulation, Savings Estimation Method 2 in the EVO's"International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol(IPMVP)Volume III: Concepts and Options for De- termining Energy Savings in New Construction," B. If not already in place, install metering equipment to measure energy usage. Monitor, re- cord, and trend log measurements. C. Evaluate energy performance and efficiency by comparing actual to predicted performance. D. Measurement and verification period shall cover at least one year of postconstruction occu- pancy. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Credit MR 2.1: Comply with Division 1 Section"Construction Waste Management." YUM-E3.1 REFERENCES Site Number 305-634 01352-6 July,2008 1. Categories below are taken from LEED rating systems and the standards referenced by them; if clarification is required, see those documents or the reference guides. 2. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 3. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L. 4. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L. 5. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. 6. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 7. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L. 8. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L. 9. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L. 10. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. 11. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 12. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. 13. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. 14. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 15. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 16. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. 17. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L. 18. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L. 19. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 20. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive(contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine cov- ered board, metal, unsupported vinyl,Teflon, ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene, rub- ber or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250 g/L. 21. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L. 22. First five subparagraphs below apply to LEED-NC and LEED-CS. 23. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L. 24. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L. 25. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 26. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 27. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L. 28. First five subparagraphs below apply to LEED-CI. 29. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 350 g/L. 30. ABS Welding Compounds: 400 g/L. 31. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 32. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 33. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L. 34. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L. 35. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight. 36. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight. 37. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive(All Types): 70 percent by weight. 38. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. 39. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 40. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 41. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 42. Other Sealants: 420 g/L. 43. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 44. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 45. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. 46. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L. B. Credit EQ 4.2: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D: 1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints,Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 150 g/L. YUM-E3.1 REFERENCES Site Number 305-634 01352-5 July,2008 PART21PRODUCTS 2.1 SALVAGED AND REFURBISHED MATERIALS A. Credit MR 3.1: Provide salvaged or refurbished materials for a minimum of 5 percent of building materials (by cost). The following materials may be salvaged or refurbished materi- als: 1. <Insert list of materials>. 2.2 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS A. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 20 percent of cost of materials used for Project. 1. Cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of post-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item. 2. Cost of pre-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of pre-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item. 3. Furniture may be used toward LEED-NC Credit MR 3.1 through 7 if it is included consis- tently in calculations for all of them. 4. Do not include furniture, plumbing, mechanical and electrical components, and specialty items such as elevators and equipment in the calculation. 2.3 REGIONAL MATERIALS A. Credit MR 5.1: Provide a minimum of 10 percent of building materials (by cost)that are re- gional materials. 2.4 CERTIFIED WOOD A. Credit MR 7: Provide a minimum of 50 percent(by cost) of wood-based materials that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." 1. Wood-based materials include, but are not limited to,the following materials when made from wood, engineered wood products, or wood-based panel products: a. Rough carpentry. b. Miscellaneous carpentry. C. Heavy timber construction. d. Wood decking. e. Metal-plate-connected wood trusses. f. Structural glued-laminated timber. g. Finish carpentry. h. Architectural woodwork. i. Wood paneling. j. Wood veneer wall covering. k. Wood flooring. 1. Wood lockers. M. Wood cabinets. n. For LEED-NC,furniture may be included, providing it is included consistently in Credits MR 3 through MR 7. o. Furniture. 2.5 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS A. Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhe- sives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated ac- cording to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D: YUM—E3.1 REFERENCES a Site Number 305-634 01352-4 July,2008 3. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Recycled content. 4. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Regional materials. 5. Credit MR 7: Certified wood products. G. LEED Documentation Submittals: 1. Credit EA 5: Product data and wiring diagrams for sensors and data collection system used to provide continuous metering of building energy-consumption performance over a period of time of not less than one year of postconstruction occupancy. 2. Credit MR 2.1: Comply with Division 1 Section"Construction Waste Management." 3. Credit MR 3.1: Receipts for salvaged and refurbished materials used for Project, indicating sources and costs for salvaged and refurbished materials. 4. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Product data and certification letter indicating percent- ages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled con- tent. 5. Credit MR 5.1: Product data for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest,or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional. 6. Credit MR 7: Product data and chain-of-custody certificates for products containing certified wood. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product. 7. Credit EQ 3.1: a. Construction indoor-air-quality management plan. b. Product data for temporary filtration media. C. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy. d. Construction Documentation: Six photographs at three different times during the construction period, along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach employed, documenting implementation of the indoor-air-quality management measures, such as protection of ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive materials. 8. Credit EQ 3.2: a. Signed statement describing the building air flush-out procedures including the dates when flush-out was begun and completed and statement that filtration media was replaced after flush-out. b. Product data for filtration media used during flush-out and during occupancy. C. Report from testing and inspecting agency indicating results of indoor-air- quality testing and documentation showing compliance with indoor-air-quality testing procedures and requirements. 9. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calcu- lated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 10. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing sys- tem indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 11. Credit EQ 4.4: Product data for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues indicating that they do not contain urea-formaldehyde resin. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. LEED Coordinator: Engage an experienced LEED-Accredited Professional to coordinate LEED requirements. LEED coordinator may also serve as waste management coordinator. YUM—E3.1 REFERENCES Site Number 305-634 01352-3 July,2008 1. "Post-consumer"material is defined as waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. 2. "Pre-consumer"material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind, or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal requirements in this article assume that product data and cost information will be submitted to Architect who will then either fill out the LEED online forms or forward the sub- mittals to Owner to fill out the forms. Submittals include documentation needed to verify compliance with LEED requirements so that Architect or Owner can be assured when filling out the online forms that requirements have been met. Although USGBC's"LEED-NC: Ref- erence Guide"does not specifically identify who can certify compliance, submittals could be deleted if requirements in this Section are revised to require Contractor to fill out the online forms and to notify Architect or Owner as they are completed. B. General: Submit additional LEED submittals required by other Specification Sections. C. LEED submittals are in addition to other submittals. If submitted item is identical to that submitted to comply with other requirements, submit duplicate copies as a separate submit- tal to verify compliance with indicated LEED requirements. D. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for materials used for Project. Costs exclude labor, overhead, and profit. Include breakout of costs for the follow- ing categories of items: 1. Furniture. 2. Plumbing. 3. Mechanical. 4. Electrical. AWN 5. Specialty items such as elevators and equipment. 6. Wood-based construction materials. E. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed indicating how the following requirements will be met: 1. Credit MR 2.1: Waste management plan complying with Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." 2. Credit MR 3.1: List of proposed salvaged and refurbished materials. Identify each material that will be salvaged or refurbished, including its source, cost, and replacement cost if the item was to be purchased new. 3. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indi- cate cost, post-consumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content. 4. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: List of proposed regional materials. Identify each re- gional material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight that is considered re- gional. 5. Credit MR 7: List of proposed certified wood products. Indicate each product containing certified wood, including its source and cost of certified wood products. 6. Credit EQ 3.1: Construction indoor-air-quality management plan. F. LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans for the fol- lowing: 1. Credit MR 2.1: Waste reduction progress reports complying with Division 1 Section "Con- struction Waste Management." 2. Credit MR 3.1: Salvaged and refurbished materials. YUM—E3.1 REFERENCES A Site Number 305-634 01352-2 July,2008 SECTION 01352 LEED REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain USGBC LEED prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED Gold certification based on LEED-NC, Version 2.2. 1. Other LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain LEED certification depend on mate- rial selections and may not be specifically identified as LEED requirements. Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits may be used as one cri- terion to evaluate substitution requests and comparable product requests. 2. Additional LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain the indicated LEED certification depend on Architect's design and other aspects of Project that are not part of the Work of the Contract. 3. If retaining subparagraph below, attach a copy of the LEED checklist to the end of this Sec- tion as information for Contractor. 4. A copy of the LEED Project checklist is attached at the end of this Section for information only. B. Related Sections: 1. Divisions 1 through 16 Sections for LEED requirements specific to the work of each of these Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to LEED. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-FSC-accredited certification body. B. LEED: Leadership in Energy& Environmental Design. C. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested within a 10-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made from bam- boo, cotton,flax,jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vegetable oils, or wool. D. Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered,as well as manufactured,within 500 miles(800 km) of Project site. If only a fraction of a product or ma- terial is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally,then only that percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value. E. Note that LEED use the term"pre-consumer" rather than"post-industrial." Also note that when manufacturers and trade associations use the term"post-industrial" it often includes spills, scraps, and damaged and surplus materials that are fed back into the same manufac- turing process and that these materials are not considered recycled content by the LEED rat- ing systems. F. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be determined by weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to determine the recycled content value. YUM—E3.1 REFERENCES Site Number 305-634 01352-1 July,2008 SUBMITTAL REGISTER Project: Project Number: Owner: Contractor: PRECONSTRUCTION POST CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION Prod Shop Samp Calc Dgn Test Cert Qualf Mfg Conf Mfg Rec O M/M wrty SECTION Data DWg Data Rpt Inst Fld Doc anl Rt YUM—E3.1 SUBMITTAL LOG Site Number 305-634 01330.2- 1 July,2008 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS: A. LEED Submittals;comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section"LEED Requirements." 1. Number of Copies:Submit 3 copies of LEED submittals,unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION YUM-E3.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Site Number 305-634 01330-4 July,2008 7. Manufacturer's Certificates: 8. Manufacturer's Field Reports: 1.7 CONTRACTOR REVIEW A. Review submittal prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements,field construction criteria, quantities and details, manufacturer's catalog numbers,and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Coordinate submittal with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. C. Sign or initial in a rubber-stamped review block format, each sheet of shop drawings and product data, and each sample label to certify compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Notify Owner's Representative in writing at time of submittal of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. D. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittal until return of submittal with Owner's Representative acceptance. E. Responsibility for errors and omissions in submittal is not relieved by Owner's Representative's review of submittal. F. Responsibility for deviations in submittal from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Owner's Representative's review of submittal, unless Owner's Representative gives specific written acceptance of deviations. Owner's Representative will review submittal for general conformance to design intent only. 1.8 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AND ENGINEER REVIEW A. Owner's Representative will review construction progress schedules,and submittal schedules. Owner's Representative will review product lists, shop drawings, product data, and samples and return within 15 working days of receipt. B. Informational submittals and other similar data are for Owner's Representative's information and do not require Owner's Representative's responsive action. C. Owner's Representative's review of submittals is for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Owner's Representative's review is not conducted for purpose of determining accuracy and completeness of items such as dimensions and quantities,which remain responsibility of Contractor. D. Owner's Representative's review and approval of submittals does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for deviations from Contract Document requirements, unless Owner's Representative is informed in writing of deviations and approval is received in writing from Owner's Representative for such deviation. E. Owner's Representative's review and acceptance of submittals does not indicate acceptance of changes in Contract time or cost. F. Submittals stamped"No Exception Taken": No corrections or resubmittal required; fabrication may proceed. G. Submittals stamped"Make Corrections Noted": Comply with noted corrections and modifications; and resubmit. Fabrication may proceed. If for any reason noted corrections and modifications can not be fully complied with, resubmit for review requesting clarification; do not proceed with fabrication. H. Submittals stamped"Rejected"or"Revised/Resubmit": Revise and resubmit for review; do not proceed with fabrication. Clearly indicate revisions, including corrections,to previous submittal. Disapproved submittals will not be considered valid cause for construction delay. I. Submittal approval does not authorize changes to Contract requirements unless accompanied by a Change Order, Owner's Representative's Supplemental Instruction,or Construction Change Directive. J. Owner's Representative will transmit 1 copy of Approved or Approved as Noted submittals to Owner. YUM—E3.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Site Number 305-634 01330-3 July,2008 E. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or critical features of Work or products. F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. G. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. H. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 1.3 CALCULATIONS A. When specified in individual Sections, submit calculations. B. Submit engineering calculations for component sizes, deflections, and connections. C. Submit calculations bearing seal and signature of registered professional engineer responsible for design. D. Where existing conditions deviate from Contract Documents or shop drawings, submit calculations for existing condition, including calculations for anticipated corrective action required, and changes to loads transferred to"base building"structure. 1.4 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit only pages which are pertinent. 1. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, models, options,and other data referenced to Specification Section and Article number. 2. Show reference standards, performance characteristics, and capacities;wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts;finishes; dimensions;and required clearances. 3. Modify manufacturer's standard data, schematic drawings, and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. Delete information not applicable. B. After review, distribute copies of reviewed product data to concerned parties. Instruct parties AMON to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 1.5 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product,with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers'standard colors,textures, and patterns for Owner's Representative selection. C. Where custom colors are specified, submit samples illustrating colors,textures, patterns, and finishes for Owner's Representative's review. Owner's Representative will advise colors required or furnish samples for color matching. D. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of products, including parts and attachments. E. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site,for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Informational submittals upon which Owner's Representative is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in Contract Documents. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems, or equipment is required by Contract Documents, Owner's Representative shall be entitled to rely upon accuracy and completeness of such certifications. B. Types of Informational Submittals: 1. Design data: Submit with shop drawings. 2. Test reports: Submit within 2 weeks of testing. 3. Certifications 4. Engineering Certifications: 5. Qualification Data 6. Manufacturer's Instructions: YUM—E3.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Site Number 305-634 01330-2 July,2008 SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit number of copies of product data and manufacturer's instructions Contractor requires, plus 2 copies which will be retained by Owner's Representative and 1 copy for the Owner. B. Submit under Owner's Representative accepted form transmittal letter. Identify Project by title and number. Identify Work and product by Specification section and Article number. C. Provide complete submittals for each specified product, system or equipment. Partial or incomplete submittals will be returned,without review, for re-submission. D. Schedule submittals to expedite Project and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of Owner or of separate contractors. No extension of contract time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals in sufficient advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Deliver submittals to Owner's Representative's office. Submittals accepted only from Contractor. F. Apply Contractor's stamp, sign or initial and date certifying that review,verification of products,field dimensions,adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. G. Submittals will be returned without processing if they have not been reviewed and stamped by Contractor for coordination of work and conformance with the Drawings and Specifications prior to submission to Owner's Representative, if they are not initialed or signed by authorized person, if they are not dated, or if it becomes evident that they have not been properly reviewed. Delays resulting therefrom are not responsibility of Owner's Representative. H. Clearly identify on submittals, or in writing at time of submission, deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents. I. Do not perform Work on any element requiring submittal and review of shop drawings, product data, samples, or other similar submittals until respective submittal has been approved by Owner's Representative. J. Maintain in field office a copy of submittal schedule and log of submittals indicating current status of each item. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items. 1. Finishes which involve Owner's Representative selection of colors,textures, or patterns. 2. Associated items which require correlation for efficient function or for installation. B. Present in a clear and thorough manner original drawings which illustrate the portion of the work showing fabrication, layout, setting, or erection details, prepared by a qualified detailer. Title each drawing with Project and Contract name and number; identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail,schedule,or room number of Contract Documents. C. Check and coordinate shop drawings of any section or trade with requirements of other sections or trades and as necessary for proper coordination and complete installation of Work. D. Show layout, details, materials, dimensions,thicknesses, methods of assembly, attachments, relation to adjoining Work,wiring diagrams, rough-in requirements, and other pertinent data and information. Submit detail drawings of special accessory components not included in manufacturer's product data. YUM—E3.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Site Number 305-634 01330-1 July,2008 PART 2PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION -Not Used END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Site Number 305--634 01320-2 July,2008 SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1GENERAL 1.1 PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Format: 1. Submit a computer generated horizontal bar chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first workday of each week. B. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of Work. C. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions. D. Sheet Size: Minimum 11 by 17 inches. E. Content: 1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity,with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. 2. Identify each item by major Specification section number. 3. Indicate the early and late start. Early and late finish,float dates and duration. 4. Show delivery dates for Owner furnished products and products specified under Allowances, if applicable. F. Revisions to Schedules: 1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. 2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. G. Distribution: 1. Distribute copies of Schedules reviewed by Owner's Representative to job site file, subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned entities. 2. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in Schedules. 1.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Provide digital photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work. B. Take photographs on cutoff date for each Application for Payment,and delivery electronically to Owner's Representative and Owner via email. C. Take a minimum of 20 photographs at maximum 2 week intervals throughout the progress of the work, D. Identify each photo electronically by listing name of project, phase,orientation of view, and date and time of view. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Progress Schedule: 1. Submit initial Schedules within 15 days from Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within 15 days. 2. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment. B. Construction Photographs: 1. Deliver prints with application for payment with transmittal letter specified under Section 01330. C. LEER Submittals: 1. Per the direction of the rating system used submitted to the USGBC. 2. All consultants and contractor may be responsible for submittals. YUM—E3.1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Site Number 305--634 01320-1 July,2008 Yum! Brands, Inc. Notification to Proceed with Construction Date: GC: Address: RE: (Site Number) (Entity Number) Dear Enclosed is a fully executed Construction Contract with respect to the above Project. The purpose of this letter is to provide you ("Contractor")with an authorization to proceed with construction of the Project immediately. It is imperative, however, that you provide this office on behalf of Owner/Developer(as defined and identified in the enclosed Construction Contract)with the following documents before construction begins. 1. Performance and Labor/Material Payment/Bonds unless waived by Owner/Developer. 2. Certificates of Insurance evidencing the following insurance coverage: a. Commercial General Liability Insurance with limits not less than $3,000,000 Combined Single Limit, identifying Owner/Developer as an additional insured. b. Workers'Compensation Insurance in accordance with applicable state requirements,with a waiver of subrogation in favor of Owner/Developer. C. Employers' Liability Insurance in an amount not less than$1,000,000,with a waiver of subrogation in favor of Owner/Developer. d. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance, including owned, non-owned and hired coverage in an amount not less than$1,000,000 Combined Single Limit, identifying Owner/Developer as an additional insured. e. Such other insurance required by law, ordinance, rule or regulation, identifying Owner/Developer as an additional insured, if applicable. Construction should not commence, and in no event will any Application for Payment against the Project be accepted by Owner/Developer, until the above items have been provided to this office. YUM! Brands, Inc. ASSET DEMO DATE: (N/A if not applicable) GROUND BREAK DATE: SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE: Thank you for your prompt attention to these matters. Very truly yours, Project Coordinator cc: Construction Manager YUM—E3.1 Construction—Notice to Proceed Site Number 305-634 01310.2-1 July,2008 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION Contractor: Project: Question to: From: Contractor Date: Other Signed: RFI Number: RE: Specification Section Reference Paragraph Number Drawing References Details Response: Answer as Above From:Owner To: Contractor Date Transmitted: Date Received: Other Signed: Copies: Owner YUM—E3.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Site Number 305-634 01310-3 July,2008 diagrammatic. Variations in alignment, elevation, and details required to avoid interferences and satisfy architectural and structural limitations are not necessarily shown. E. Prior to installation of material and equipment, review and coordinate Work with Architectural and Structural Drawings to establish exact space conditions. Where available space is inadequate or where reasonable modifications are not possible, request information from Owner's Representative before proceeding. F. Coordinate installation to prevent conflicts and cooperate in making,without extra charge, reasonable modifications in layout as needed. G. Provide clear access to control points,valves, strainers,control devices, and specialty items of every nature related to such systems and equipment to obtain maximum head room. Provide adequate clearances as necessary for operation and maintenance. 1.6 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion of portions of Work designated for Owner partial occupancy. B. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by various sections for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents,to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. C. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in Section 01780. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Owner's Representative will schedule conference within 15 days after notice of award. B. Attendance: Architect, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and representatives of major subcontractors, and others as appropriate. 1. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. LEED requirements b. New specification items—change in products finishes , C. Lead time or specific sustainable materials 1.8 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer bi-weekly construction progress meetings,throughout progress of Work. 1. Prepare agenda and distribute notice of each meeting to participants. 2. Make physical arrangements. 3. Preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies after meeting to participants,and to entities affected by decisions at meetings. 4. Distribute one copy of minutes to Owner's Representative. 5. Maintain in field office one copy of agenda and minutes for each conference and meeting. B. Location of Meetings: Contractor's field office. C. Attendance: Contractor,job superintendent, subcontractors,and suppliers as appropriate to agenda; Owner's Representative, and professional consultants as appropriate. 1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. Schedule pre-installation conferences required in individual Specification sections. Convene at Project site prior to commencing Work of the section. B. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures,and coordination with related work. PART 2PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION AWk Site Number 305-634 01310-2 July,2008 SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART1GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals,and work of the various sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements,with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later. 1.2 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Carefully study and compare Contract Documents before proceeding with fabrication and installation of Work. Promptly advise Owner's Representative of any error, inconsistency, omission, or apparent discrepancy discovered. B. Allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Owner's Representative,establish procedures for handling queries and clarifications. Use standard"Request for Interpretation", form as approved by Owner's Representative for requesting information. C. In addition to meetings specified herein, hold coordination meetings and conferences with personnel and subcontractors to ensure coordination of Work. D. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various Specification sections to avoid conflicts and ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. E. Coordinate Work of various Specification sections having interdependent responsibilities for installation,connection, and operation. F. Verify that characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities and services. G. Except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts,conduit and wiring in construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. H. Make provision to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 1.3 MEETINGS A. In addition to progress meetings, hold coordination meetings and pre-installation conferences with personnel and subcontractors to assure coordination of Work. 1.4 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section 01330. B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to,and placing in service,such equipment. C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space,of operating elements, and effect on work of other sections. 1.5 COORDINATION OF SPACE A. Coordinate use of Project space and sequence of installation of mechanical,and electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable,with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,for maintenance,and for repairs. B. In finished areas except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts,and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. C. In finished areas except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes,ducts, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. D. Layout of plumbing,fire protection, mechanical, and electrical systems,equipment,fixtures, piping, ductwork, conduit, specialty items, and accessories indicated on Drawings is YUM—E3.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Site Number 305-634 01310- 1 July,2008 areas with permeable surfaces(such as pervious paving areas, stormwater detention facilities, and playing fields)that require additional staging areas in order to limit compaction in the constructed area. 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet(8 m)of entrances, operable windows,or outdoor air intakes PART 2PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION -Not Used END OF SECTION YUM—E3.1 SUMMARY Site Number 305-634 01100-2 July,2008 i SECTION 01100 SUMMARY PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Contract comprises general construction of a new 1 story multi-branded restaurant for the Owner, YUM! Brands, Irvine, CA, or for applicable franchisee if so designated. 1.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Owner's Representative:Throughout the specifications,the term"Owner's Representative" has been used instead of the term"Architect." In some cases the Owner's employee will provide services and responsibilities normally provided by the Architect.The Owner will clarify whether the Architect is acting as the Owner's Representative,or if the Owner's employee is acting as the Owner's Representative for the project. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES A. Except as specifically noted, provide and pay for: 1. Labor, materials and equipment. 2. Tools, construction equipment and machinery. 3. Water, heat, and utilities required for construction. 4. Other facilities and services necessary of proper execution and completion of work. B. Secure and pay for,as necessary for proper execution and completion of Work, and as applicable at time of receipt of bids: 1. Government Fees including inspection fees. ew 2. Licenses. C. Give required notices. D. Comply with codes,ordinances, rules,regulations,orders and other legal requirements of public authorities which bear on performance of Work. E. Promptly submit written notice to Owner's Representative of observed variance of Contract Documents from legal requirements.Assume responsibility for Work known to be contrary to such requirements,without notice. 1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Limit use of premises for Work,for storage, and for access,to allow for: 1. Work by other contractors. B. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner. C. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract. D. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed when required for operations under this Contract. 1.5 NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENTS A. Note that Owner has entered into national account agreement with the certain vendors. Refer to Scope of Work Drawings. B. Purchase of equipment from these venders is to be made by the respective sub-contractor, with confirmation of the purchase given to the Owner. C. Contractor remains responsible for delivery, storage, rough-in requirements,and installation of purchased equipment. 1.6 USE OF PREMISES A. Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation,to 40 feet(12.2 m) beyond building perimeter; 10 feet(3 m)beyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utilities less than 12 inches(300 mm) in diameter; 15 feet(4.5 m) beyond primary roadway curbs and main utility branch trenches; and 25 feet(7.6 m) beyond constructed YUM—E3.1 SUMMARY Site Number 305-634 01100-1 July,2008 DOCUMENT 00500 AGREEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established within General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 General Requirements,and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Document. 1.2 FORM OF AGREEMENT A. The Owner's customized Construction Contract-Rev 8-Bonus,last updated on 11/15/02 Between Owner and Contractor will apply to the Work of this project. END OF DOCUMENT YUM-E3.1 AGREEMENT Site Number 305-634 00500-1 July,2008 DOCUMENT 00320 GEOTECHNICAL DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Related Documents: Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.2 INVESTIGATION A. An investigation of subsurface soil conditions at the building site was authorized by Owner, and these investigations were made by the soils engineer identified in the Drawings. 1.3 REPORT A. A copy of the the full report is available to all bidders from the office of the Owner's representative. B. Report and log of borings are available for Contractor's information but is not a warranty of subsurface conditions, nor is it a part of the Contract Documents. 1.4 RESPONSIBILITY A. Bidders are expected to examine the site and subsurface investigation reports and then decide for themselves the character of the materials to be encountered. B. The Owner's Representative and Owner assume no responsibility for variations of subsoil quality or conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF DOCUMENT YUM—E3.1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA Site Number 305-634 00320-1 July,2008 Scope of Work Owner's Scope of Work l General Comments: G.C.is responsible for coordination of General Comments installation of entire music system including coordination with local Muzak installer. CM to verify Owner's responsibility for ordering music system from local Muzak contact;Muzak shall be notified at ground break to coordinate installatior date. 16820-3_Music System.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 16820-3 MUSIC SYSTEM National Supplier Muzak Contact: Dana Carlyle Phone:(803)396-3023(direct) Phone: (800)331-3340 x3023(toll-free) Fax:(803)396-3074 Email: Dana—Carlyle@muzak.com Manufacturer's Model # N/A A&E Item Number F131 Who orders item from Owner Supplier? Who Coordinates Manufacturer Shipping? Shipping Method Direct If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Installed By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: J-Boxes,conduit, phone and electrical wiring.. of Work Install: J-Boxes,conduit,phone and electrical wiring per plans. Note: Because the DBS dish is sled mounted,the GC scope includes only the installation of the walkway pads below the sled; in accordance with the roof manufacturer's recommendations. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Sled mounted DBS antenna,satellite receiver,digital amp,speakers with grilles, speaker wire,coaxial, hardware per national contract.Speakers to be black in open ceiling areas, white in dropped ceilings. Install: Complete installation of entire music system.Pre-wire prior to ceiling installation. Provide testing and calibration of entire system to national decibel standards for office volume control. Wire system per national contract wiring diagram.Music to be set to 50s/60s music or custom programming per national contract. Sleds to be placed on roof walkway pads(by roofing contractor). Ballast to be secured to sled w/steel cables. Route signal cable through nearest pipe hood(as indicated in the plans). No penetrations through roof membrane or curbs allowed. 16820-3_Music System.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work 16720 TELEPHONE COMMUNICATIONS National Supplier Company Stores YUM!Telecom Franchise Stores. By owner through local phone service provider Contact: Patricia Montgomery—Phone:(800)325-4066 ext:23 Fax:(972)338-8672 Email:pA riciamon ctomry oizzahut.com Manufacturer's Model# N/A A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from Owner Supplier? Who Coordinates Manufacturer Shipping? Shipping Method Direct If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, w which number? Received By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Installed By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Warranty Material I Install Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Provide all J-Boxes,conduits,,pull strings and outlets. of Work Permanent power to be in place before installation can begin. Contact YUM!Telecom when permanent power is active. Install: Install all J-Boxes,conduits,pull strings and outlets ready for supplier, and confirm that permanent power is active prior to installation. Set backboard for D-Mark panel.Install conduit and pull strings as required(interior and exterior) Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Supplier to provide all wiring and equipment Install: Supplier to install all wiring and telephone equipment Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments: YUM!Telecom provides installation and General`Comments phone equipment for company stores.YUM!Telecom places order when they receive the stores ground break notice. Franchises to order phone lines at their discretion 16720—Telephone Communications.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 16520 LIGHT FIXTURES - SITE National Supplier Accusery Contact: Buddy Bockweg Phone (877)707-7378 Fax (502)'961-0357 Manufacturer's Model # Varies A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Conductors,conduit,foundations and other items as of Work required for the complete installation of fighting fixtures. Install: Interior and exterior light fixtures,lamps,anchor bolts,and brackets. Provide excavations and concrete foundations at locations noted on photometric drawings,assemble and install fixtures per plans. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Exterior light fixtures, lamps,anchor bolts,and brackets. Photometric drawings and anchor bolt templates. Install : N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments 16520—Light Fixtures-Site.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 16500 LIGHT FIXTURES National Supplier Accusery Contact: Buddy Bockweg Phone:(877)707-7378 Fax:(502)961-0357 Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor row Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Conductors,conduit, boxes and other items as of Work required for the complete installation of lighting fixtures. Install: All owner provided fixtures and lamps. G.C.is responsible for a complete installation. Supplier`s Scope of Work Material: Interior and exterior light fixtures,lamps,lighting tracks, adapters. Contactors as detailed for interior lighting control. Install:,.N/A Owner's Scope of Work I General Comments 16500—Light Fixtures-Interior& Building.doc Page 1 of Scope of Work 16300-1 SWITCHGEAR - OWNER SUPPLIED National Supplier Accusery Contact: Buddy Bockweg Phone:(877)707-7378 Fax (502)961-0357 Manufacturer's Model# Square-D A&E Item Number varies Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Breakers and outlet devices required by local of Work jurisdiction if different than specified. Conductors,conduit, lugs,3- phase motor starters. Disconnects for roof top mounted equipment are supplied by others. Supply C.T. Cabinet if not provided by utility company. Install: Install service entrance,main switch panel,branch panels with circuit breakers,conductors from transformer,conductors form MSB to panels, panel rough-ins,and panels.-Install all circuit wiring to branch panels and equipment per drawings. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Service entrance,MSB, branch panels with circuit breakers as shown on plans. Interior lighting contactors as shown on sheet E6.0 Install : N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ 4-week lead-time General Comments 1-year parts warranty 16300-1_Switchgear-Company.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 15700-1 HVAC (RTU/CURBS) National Supplier Trans Contact: : Marty Cusick or Chad Sanders Phone,:(866)YI,M-VAC or(866).986-482,2 Fax:(502)499-7870 Cellular:(502)558=4879 Email:rrt gusickotrane.com Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from General Contractor Supplier? Who Coordinates General Contractor Shipping? Shipping Method Direct If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor tow Warranty Material/Install General Contractor/General Contractor Paid for By General Contractor General Contractor Scope Material: Purchase RTUs(with factory installed un-powered of Work convenience outlets and HACR circuit breaker),knock-down curbs,and thermostats from Trans using national account pricing. Provide ductwork,smoke detectors,conduit to rooftop units and any other materials required for a complete HVAC system. Install: All HVAC equipment.G.G.to coordinate owner's T&B (Test&Balance)consultant, including scheduling T&B prior to turnover using YUM!Scope of T&B services and YUM!Format. Owner to pay for initial T&B only. Supplier's Scope of Work Material N/A Install : N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments: G.0 to follow Mechanical Engineered General Comments design per the drawings.Provide ductwork and report any discrepancies to Owner ASAP. G.0 to pay for subsequent T&B necessary to verify corrections required by initial T&B Owner's Scope: Provide C.M.with YUM!Scope and Format for Test and Balance(T&B)services.C.M.to inform R.A.P.of reoccurring Issues on T&B reports, R.A.P.to copy plan manager. Owner to pay for initial T&B. 15700-1 HVAC.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work yy � t Z '77 777 x C 4 3 r h k A Amwk 15500-1—Test and Balance.doc—TEST and BALANCE Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 15500-1 HVAC - TEST and BALANCE National Supplier: Melink Corporation, YUMt Brands"Zero Defect"Program Contact: ' MElink Corporation- Rod Richwine Phone:513-965-7319 Fax;513-96 5-7354 i=mail:rrichWne@meillinkcorp.com Who selects Providers? YUM Construction(CM)or Remodel Manager(RCM) Who orders services from Determined by CM or RCM Approved Provider? Approved Options: General Contractor CM/RCM Who Coordinates Determined by CM or RCM Scheduling of Services? Approved Options: General Contractor CM/RCM Paid for By: Determined by CM or RCM s �+, d ✓ a "o-0 SON* 5 � t ,y, 4 d `� �� "' y♦ � y end �5yw� t^4��j4'`myp� a r,�� 4� ij 4 asp x xa T •+t W, zgs ot�W`orikr 5 S'�.k� '! �� � :tilcl p�oJect��i � X�*•�w�.���M�l��.1!"'�Z"� �y � ilu"(1511. YU he■■+��ppul � �y{e�t1y�yyfi���ar prt(��rfys T � 3 wY: T,.al 4 0pY{'�*�" M Rt+r4.tJtr r 5,j►. 5 f � a 4 a � f", ,�� �•#1�t141iIt E�Ilit�����M�.' T�, ��'�� � �� ;�� ,,. �R�x7vw�' � ` % �, `�' ua v d `�, �t fi a � x k k��'?�5,3��tr ants " fi+�? "h�,��✓q� �. 's �""'�� •tz Ste`�3�efi+ ?t'a ro^", z$a,x al,; .a� a a"*n r'� �. �° � `N �. A�s�,€e Y"�a{ �i °Aj�;" � 15500-1—Test and Balance.doc—TEST and BALANCE Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work "* 15480-3 WATER HEATER National Supplier Lee Supply Contact: Jack Peek—Phone: (800)873-1107 Fax: (812)941-0059 Email:jack.oeek0leesuoolv.net Manufacturer's Model# Bradford White EF-100T-199E-3N(A) A&E Item Number B-215 Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor ' Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Electric conduit and conductors,gas line,water lines, of Work PVC intake and exhaust flue. Install:_Complete installation of water heater. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Water heater Install N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comment: General Comments When calling Lee Supply identify that your call is regarding a YUM Brands facility so that your issue can be logged and reported. Bradford White Technical Service: 800-334-3393 Information required: Identify store as YUM and/or store type Serial#of water heater Brief description of issue 15480-3—Water Heater.doc Page 1 of 1 *► Scope of Work 15470-5 WATER FILTER - PEPSI National;Supplier Selecto Scientific Contact: Delrinda Butler or Angela Dawson Phone:,(800)635-4017 Manufacturer's Model# 60-06251C A&E Item Number Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Manufacturer Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor—See Vendor Scope (Drink System-Pepsi) Warranty Material I Install Pepsi/General Contractor Paid for By Pepsi General Contractor Scope Material: Plumbing rough-ins for filter. of Work Install:G.C.to mount water filter on wall and connect to water supply line. Suppiiees Scope of Work Material: Water filter and cartridges. Install: N/A. Owner's Scope of Work/ Owner Scopes C.M.to coordinate work between drink platform General Comments Vendor/Supplier and G.C. General Comment: Distributor;provides purchase orders to manufacturer for applicable Pepsi platform. 15470-5—Water Filter_Pepsi.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work A 15410 HAND SINKS National Supplier Aero Contact: Phone:973-473-5300 Fax: 973-473-3794 Manufacturer's Model# HS-Mod A&E Item Number N-053 Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Consol. Pkg. If shipped in a Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Piping for supply lines. of Work Install::. Complete installation of Owner supplied materials. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Supply hand sink,faucet and foot valve. Install: N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comment: Splash guards to meet code requirements General Comments supplied and installed by G.C.See details. Awk 15410—Hand Sinks.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 13900-1 FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEM National Supplier Ansul Contact: Pete Matulonis Business Development Manager Phone:(360)210-79731, Bill Klingenmaier—Technical Services Manager Phone:(715)735-7411 ext.3439' Manufacturer's Model# N/A A&E Item Number Who orders item from General Contractor Supplier? Who Coordinates General Contractor Shipping? Shipping Method Direct If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor(Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install General Contractor/General Contractor Paid for By General Contractor General Contractor Scope Material: By Local Installer of Work Install: Fire Suppression System must be compatible with specified'hoods. Hoods are pre-piped by manufacturer.Tanks, connections&heads by local installer contracted by G.C.G.C.to provide water to fire suppression system(if Piranha).See plumbing sheets. See General Comments below for design intent. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: N/A Install N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ Design Intent: Upon activation of any hood fire extinguishing General Comments systems the make up air fan shall be de-energized. Hood Exhaust Fans and Roof Top Units shall remain running.Upon activation RTU smoke detector its respective rooftop unit shall be de- energized. See sheet Electrical Drawings for interlock diagram. 13900-1_Fire Suppression System.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 13800-1 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL National Supplier Accusery Contact: Buddy Bockweg Phone : (877)707-7378 Fax (502)961-0357 Manufacturer's Model# N/A A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Items to provide a complete installation. of Work Install: Install control panel enclosure, sensors,controls,and photocell as detailed. Suppllees Scope of Work Material: Lighting control panel,sensors, controls, photocell Install: N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comment: The lighting control panel is provided in the General Comments Accusery lighting package. *'m", 13800-1—Exterior Lighting Control Panel.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work Owner's Scope of Work/ Owner Scope: G.M.to forward Lass Prevention's site specific- General Comments security recommendation(based on CAR index)to Site Specific Consultant and distributor. 13700-1 CCTV.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 13700-1 CCTV (AS REQUIRED BY CAP INDEX) National Supplier Checkpoint Systems,Inc., MARTCO,Inc. Contact: Checkpoint(West of the Mississippi River) Brian Baker—Phone:972-625-3155 Fax:972-625-5701 brig nbakerO-checkot.com Lynn Hegee (for installation),Phone:(800)285-0492 MARTCO(East of the Mississippi River) Adela Kragge Ph: 800-333-7769 Fax 502-635-8027 adelaAmartcoinc.com Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number varies Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By Manufacturer(Local Installer) Installed By Manufacturer(Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material:J-Boxes,conduits and outlets as shown in drawings of Work Install: Set equipment as shown on drawings. Install wall mounted digital recorder cabinet. Coordinate installation of office shelving prior to supplier installation of CCTV. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Cameras,monitors,Image-Vault. Digital recorder cabinet brackets and cable. Install: Cameras and monitors; Mount cameras and monitors, and connect cables(Video/Power)Image-Vault digital system; Set recorder and connect to camera and monitors. Security cabinet for digital system; Pre-wire prior to ceiling installation.Cable; Complete installation of cabling runs, pre-wire to ceiling installation. 13700-1_CCTV.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work 13200 CO2 - BULK National Supplier MVE(bulk tank) NU CO2 (CO2 and service) Contact: MVE(bulk tank) Cathy Bartusek—Phone (952)882-5185 ext.5169 Fax:(800)247-4446 Ext.'5169 NU CO2(CO2 and service) Lynn Heller ext. 3483 or Matt Sebuckat ext.3472 Phone:(800)472-2855 Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number S580 Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By Manufacturer(Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material:N/A of Work Install: Receive tank and schedule installation.Coordinate with drink system installation Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Bulk tank,fill box supply lines Install: Bulk tank,fill box supply tines from fill box to tank,supply lines from tank to syrup rack location. Owner's Scope of Work! General Comment:C.M.coordinates installation of tank,fill box, General Comments lines and connectors. Installation is performed by local NU CO2 rep. Standard process is for the owner to provide the tank. C.M. to contact YUM!Facility Leader to determine if tank will be rented. 13200 CO2-Bulk.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 12540-1 CHAIRS AND STOOLS (FREE-STANDING) National Supplier MTS Seating Contact: Laurie Prater Phone (734),847-3875 ext 222 Manufacturer's Model # Varies A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: N/A " of Work Install:.General Contractor to receive and store freestanding chairs and stools,set in place after final cleanup Suppllees Scope of Work Material: Freestanding chairs and stools Install: N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments n' 12540-1—Chairs & Stool s-Freestanding.doc Page 1 of Scope of Work Owner's Scope of Work) Tetley&the Distributor will receive the ground break notice for all General Comments company&franchisee site specific projects. The distributor will then issue a penny PO to Tetley to initiate the supply&install order process. As noted above DMAs may differ in terms of the type of ICED TEA system they are using so Tetley will take point to confirm the product mix with Ops to insure the proper equipment is ordered and installed on site. Tetley will then contact the"Owner"(Franchisee,CM or Superintendent)and verify if the site is ready to receive the ICED' TEA equipment. If the answer is"no"then Tetley will add the site number to a general list for stores to be retrofitted at a later date. Taco Bell Facilities will retrofit all company stores on the list. Franchisees will be required to add ICE TEA at a later date if your DMA has approved the addition of ICE TEA. Franchisees should contact their RAP or FBM for questions about deadlines for retrofitting their stores. If Tetley confirms the site is ready they will have a BUNN representative perform the Supplier Install Scope of Work. The Distributor will provide the"Owner"with the local Tetley contact information for use in coordinating the work on site. The "Owner"will be responsible for communicating and coordinating the work with the project schedule,to provide adequate lead time to install Tetley equipment. A,store needs to have the ability to plug the Brewer into a non POS outlet that has enough capacity remaining for an additional(single phase) 14.5 amp load. If this is not available a new 20 amp will need to be installed to meet the need previously described. Table/Counter space must be available to place the(12"W x22"D) brewer within 6 ft.of the electrical outlet. There must also be space for a minimum of 2 (12"W x 18"D)Ums. 12440 Iced Tea TB Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 12440 ICED TEA National Supplier Tetley Contact: Irina Eyman(coordinator for new construction) Phone (203)929-9349 Fax: (203)929-9263- e.maii: Irina.Eyman ,TetlevHarrls,com. Manufacturer's Model# Varies, see Sheet A2.0 Equipment Plan for the affected concepts A&E Item Number TB3Q Brewer with TDO-4 Urn = S544, TDO-4 Urn = S546, TCD-1 Concentrate Dispenser(option), TCD-2 Concentrate Dispenser (option) Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Supplier Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By Supplier(local installer) Installed By Supplier/General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Supplier/General Contractor Paid for By Tetley General Contractor Scope Material: All electrical conduits,conductors and connectors of Work shown in drawings. Install:(2)Drink Machine Tables. Install tubing bundle prior to installation of ceiling tile. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: The supplier will provide all equipment approved by the DMA where the project is located. Each DMA will select one of four options: 1). Standard=Either sweetened or unsweetened brewed iced tea. 2). Sweetened and Unsweetened brewed iced tea. 3). Extract iced tea. 4).No iced tea. Install: Complete installation of ICED TEA equipment. Add a"T" connection from the drink machine bundled tubing filtered water line and connect branched filtered water line to the brewer. Perform all tests and start-up procedures. 12440_Iced Tea—TB Page 1 of 2 , * Scope of Work Supplier's Scope of Work Material: All Fruitista related equipment,including the FBD machine and"Buck&Boost"transformer. Note: The transformer is only needed if the electrical service is not24Qvolts. Most are 120 volts Install: ICEE will provide the complete installation and start-up including the branch-off of Co2&filtered water litres from bundled water tubing and final start-up. The Fruitista machine-shall not be installed until after the Pepsi soft drink machine is installed. Owner's Scope of Work,i Owner Scope: Owner Rep shall verify if'a Fruitista machine has General Comments already been installed before issuing the ground break notice on their"Scrape"or"Relocated"project. if the answer is yes then the Owner Rep shall contact FBD and cancel the shipment of new, Fruitista equipment. The Owner Rep shall also contact the ICEE representative and make arrangements to transfer the current Fruitista equipment to the new store. Applies to all Single Brand Taco Bells and Taco Bell Multibrands; Taco Bell Express Concepts are"OPTINAt_". 12430 Fruitista Machine—TB Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 12430 FRUITISTA MACHINE National Supplier Equipment Delivery, Equipment Install&`Setup Taco Bell Engineering Contact: Equipment Delivery FBD Dan Barden Phone: (210)637-2810 email: dbarden@fbdfrozen.com Equipment Install&Setup ICEE Doug Larson Company&Franchisees Phone: (623)434-3351 ext: 16 email: DlarsenAicee_com'' Taco Bell Engineering Bill Williamson-Director Engineering Company&Franchisees Phone: (949)'863-4830 email: bill.williamson0yum.com Manufacturer's Model# Varies, see Sheet A2.0 Equipment Plan for the affected concepts A&E Item Number Varies, see Sheet A2.0 Equipment Plan for the affected concepts Who orders item from Equipment: Distributor Supplier? Installation &Setup: General Contractor(notify vendor 2 weeks from desired install date) Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: All building infrastructure noted on plans including of Work electrical conduit,wires and outlets. Install: None 12430_Fruitista Machine—TB Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work curved divider wall and service counter for GC installation. Install:N/A Owner's Scope of Work f D6cor Vendor Notes: The DLcor Vendor shall fully-adhere the General Comments roll Marmoleum on 1/8"Luan plywood panels in their factory,and ship panels,to the site,with the decor package. 12400-1 Decor.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 12400-1 DECOR National Supplier Interior Systems Incorporated Contact: Interior Systems Incorporated Jim Zielinski Phone:414-232-3502 Fax:(414-224-0972 Email:izielinski @isiamerica.com Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material:Chair Rails,Window Sills,Adhesives of Work Install:Chair Rails and Window Sills. Complete installation of owner supplied decor package including seating,tables, modular counter,circular soffit,and dining room wainscot(roll Marmoleum adhered to 1/8"Luan plywood panels)with all associated trim(J- mold/corner trim). Coordinate alignment of ceiling hung items and core drilled fixtures such as tables and pendant lights(where occurs). Drill 2"holes in service counter for P.O.S. Install light fixture and paint circular soffit. Note:Secure trim and fully-adhere the Marmoleum panels (supplied by Decor Vendor)onto the wall(gypsum board and/or CMU)as indicated in the drawings. Refer to Decor Sheets for reference Supplier's Scope of Work Material:Modular front service counter,divider wall,trash and condiment enclosures,table/bases, booths and settees,wainscot (roll Marmoleum adhered to 1/8"Luan plywood panels)with all associated trim(J-mold/corner trim),paint-ready circular soffit with 1/4"pilot holes at light fixture locations, and site-specific core- drill template/seating layout. The Supplier shall prepare the 12400-1_Decor.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments:The supplier provides detailed installation General Comments instructions with the wall murals(where applicable). Failure to follow the instructions for wall preparation, adhesive,or installation methods may result in damage to the murals or an unapproved installation. Contact the supplier if additional copies of instructions are needed. 121 00 Artwork TB KFC.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 12100 ARTWORK National Supplier Creative Palette,The Color Place,Inc.,CIP Retail,Impact Contact: Creative Palette: Guiles Richardson Phone. 800-321-1949 Email: cpaletteg@aol gom The Color Place,Inc.: Debbie Nicholson Phone: (502)423-9230 CIP Retail Impact: Charlene Vu Phone: (800)877-7373 ext. 433 Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material:Any mounting/support hardware or adhesive as of Work recommended by manufacturer's installation instructions. Install: All owner supplied artwork as produced by vendor. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Refer to drawings for number, size and location of Artwork. Contact Artwork Supplier for materials and mounting instructions. Install: N/A 121 00 Artwork_TB_KFC.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work 11435-3 ICE MACHINES - Pepsi National Supplier Manitowoc Ice Inc. Contact: Alicia Dillon Phone:(920)682-0161 Manufacturer's Model# SY-1474C A&E Item Number S-513 Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Manufacturer Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor or Local Installer Installed By Manufacturer(Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install Manufacturer/Manufacturer Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Condenser platform,conduit,conductors of Work Install:.G.C.to arrange,coordinate and schedule installation of Ice Machines after the Pepsi drink system is installed.Ice Machines are shipped to local Installer by Distributor. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Ice machine condensers,cubers and refrigerant lines. Install: Complete installation of system,start up and test. Owner's Scope of Work I General Comment: Distributor provides purchase orders to General Comments manufacturer for applicable Pepsi platform. 11435-3 Ice Machines.doc page 1 of 1 Scope of Work Owner's Scope of Work/ Owner Scope: C.M.to coordinate work between drink platform General Comments Vendor/Supplier and G.C. General Comment: Distributor provides purchase orders to manufacturer for applicable Pepsi platform. ` 11430-2—Drink Dispenser& Line Sets - Pepsi_TB.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 11430-2 DRINK SYSTEM - PEPSI National Supplier Pepsi Contact: Christine Trevino' Taco Belk Coordinator Phone:(949)863-4532 Fax:(949)862-1083 Email:Chnstine.trevinofpepsi.com Manufacturer's Model# Cornelius ED 250 (8 Valves) Servend ED 300 BCZ(12 Valves) A&E Item Number S-532, S533 Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Manufacturer Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By Manufacturer(Local Installer) Installed By Pepsi Warranty Material/Install Pepsi/Pepsi Paid for By Pepsi General Contractor Scope Material: Condenser curbs,conduit,and conductors as described of Work in drawings Install:(2) Drink Machine Tables. Install tubing bundle prior to installation of ceiling tile. Pipe hoods at remote condensers. Cover any exposed lines with stainless steel shroud and/or pvc chase as shown in drawings Supplier's Scope of Work Material: (2)Drink machines,syrup rack,carbonators,bundled tubing,ice machine adapter plates, drain/condensate lines. Install: Complete installation of drink machines, syrup rack, carbonators. Bundled Tubing:Connect water lines in tubing bundle to filter,syrup rack,and drink/ice equipment;install back-flow device thru drink units. Connect CO2 line in tubing bundle to carbonators and drive thru drink machine ice delivery system. Install ice machine adapter plates. Complete installation of drain/condensate lines as indicated on drawings. Note: Pepsi to provide all other equipment and installation necessary for a complete installation. Start up,test and calibration of drink system. 11430-2—Drink Dispenser& Line Sets - Pepsi_TB.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work 11425—Exhaust Hoods.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 11425 HOODS National Supplier Stratovent Contact: Stratovent Jeff Johnson Phone:840-474-0037 Cell:251490-6114 Fax:919-573-4251 Email:leff.iohnsonftstratovent.com Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number Varies Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Exhaust Duct,Duct Fireproofing as required by code, of Work " relays for hood fan interlock circuit. Provide all other materials for complete installation. Install: Install hood,duct,duct fireproofing,and all other materials for complete installation. Stainless steel wall panels to be installed without exposed fasteners. Supply, assemble and install exhaust fan interlock per 21E6.0 Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Hood pre-piped for fire suppression,exhaust fans with insulated steel curbs,louvered steel extensions and hinged base. 6"air gap for Type I hoods. Stainless steel panels per plans.- 1" standoffs for stainless panels at Type l hoods. Standoffs not required if wall construction is"non-combustible"(CMU). Install: N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comment: G.C.responsible for all inspections. General Comments 11425 Exhaust Hoods.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work AM, Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments: Hold-up buttons inside coolers and freezer General Comments by security supplier.No Clear-Vu curtains in chicken cooler.If the exterior of the'walk-in.cooler is to be painted,preparation shall consist of power washing to remove dirt and grease. A , 11405-5—Walk-In Cooler-Freezer.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 11405-5 WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER National Supplier I.C.S. Contact: Gary Tintrow Phone:(800)835-0001 ext: 122 Fax:(316)733-2434 e.mail:garv.tintrgW@icsco.com Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number Varies Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By Manufacturer Installed By Manufacturer/General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner(G.C. is responsible for weather tight installation at building shell) Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Provide concrete footings/slab,counter flashing at walk- of Work in roof,condensate drains as shown on plans,power and conduit from building to walk-in condensers.Accessibility to slab to be provided. Install:All flashing kits including base trim,roof flashing,corner trim,interior cove base trim and door trim. Finish installation of interior angle flashing to slab. Final connection to power and condensate drains. Install Clear-Vu curtains.Install hurricane tie- downs if required. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Walk-in Cooler/Freezer complete package. Install:Walk-in Cooler/Freezer. Off-load and set in place if walk-in slab is accessible.Seal to slab.Install interior floorless wall angles.' If walk-in slab is not accessible, unit will be off-loaded at nearest accessible location. Refrigeration Install:Walk-in condensing units are shipped loose with walk-in for field installation. ICS will be responsible for condensing unit placement, piping,control wiring and start-up. Note:Field install to take place after platform is installed over walk- in. OPW 11405-5—Walk-in Cooler-Freezer.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work 11405-3 SHELVING/ WORKSTATIONS National Supplier I.S.S. Contact: Colleen Keenan—Phone:(770)784-5783 Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number Varies Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Consol. Pkg. If shipped in a 1 Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: N/A of Work Install: Assemble shelving and workstations per supplier's instructions and install per plans Supplier's Scope of Work Material: All components for shelving and workstation assemblies bundled together in clearly marked packaging.,` Clear assembly instructions including isometric drawing of final assembly. Install: N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments 11405-3—Kitchen Shelving & Workstations.d oc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 11400-4 MAPS LINE National Supplier Duke Contact: Norm Rader— Phone:(502)299-5543 Fax:(502)412-2641 Email:nraderer@earthlink.net Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number Varies Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor 400* Installed By General Contractor/Manufacturer (Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: All electrical conduits,conductors and connectors of Work necessary to the point of connection;all plumbing necessary to the point of connection. Provide duct to exhaust hood. Install: Off load and install MAPS line as shown in plans and as described in the Duke MAPS service,installation and operations manual.Connect(2)125 Amp electrical'service to MAPS line service panel.:Connect water supply lines to cheese melters. Mounting of POS bump bars and monitor brackets. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Ship complete package including service, installation and operations manual Install POS installer will mount and connect POS bump bars and monitors.MAPS line vendor to perform start-up. Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comment: G.C.sends the vendor a signed site prep General Comments form stating that the site is ready for start-up.(1-2 week lead-time required) 11400-4—MAPS Production Line_KT.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 11400-1 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT National Supplier Varies Contact: Varies Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number Varies Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Consol. Pkg. If shipped in a 1 Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor (See General Comments) Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material:- All materials required to provide rough-ins as shown on of Work plans and in manufacturer's instructions. Install: All receiving,inventory,offloading,installation,rough-in connections, and final utility connections/inspections. G.C.to coordinate calibration and testing of kitchen equipment with local vendors as applicable. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Equipment and accessories as scheduled. Installation and startup instructions. Install N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comment: See"Exhaust Hoods"and"Walk-in Cooler" General Comments for additional kitchen equipment information 11400-1—Kitchen Equipment.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 11300-2 DRIVE-THRU SPEAKER AND MICROPHONE National Supplier HME Contact: > HME(Speaker and microphone) Technical Services Dept. Phone,(800)843-4468 (Opt-3) Manufacturer's Model# ABBE Item Number Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By Manufacturer(Local Installer) Installed By Manufacturer(Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Conduit from Pick-up window to OCB. of Work Install: N/A Supplier's Scope of Work Material Speaker and Microphone Install: Speaker and Microphone.Pull communication wires to OCB Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comment: The OCB is similar to the previous speaker General Comments posts.The speaker and microphone will be installed after permanent power has been connected to the OCB.The HME speaker and microphone shall have a separate conduit for audio wires.See plans. 11300-2_Drive-thru Speaker & Microphone.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work Install: Order Confirmation Board. Install data switch in managers office. Pull serial cables with adapters.Start-up and test OGB. Train RGM.Speaker and microphone is installed by'HME. Note: Delphi will provide"Pte_installation Site Preparation Requirements. Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comment: The OCB is,.similar to the previous speaker General Comments posts.The speaieer and microphone will be installed and permanent power hes been connected to the OCB.The"ME speaker andtaophone shalt have a"separat conduitfor audio wires.See plans. 11300-1—Order Confirmation Board-OCB_TB.doc Page 2 of 2 OOW Scope of Work 11300-1 OCB National Supplier Delphi Texas Digital-(Franchise Option) Contact: Delphi Technical Service Department-Tom Rock Phone:(800)456-0060 ext:476- Installation Coordination-Marlene Gelb Phone(800)456-0060 ext:452 Texas Digital Technical Service Dept.-Phone (972)693-9378 Manufacturer's Model# Delphi# 15E Texas Digital Accu-view 150 LCD A&E Item Number S240 (Data switch) Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By See General Contractor&supplier Scope of Work Notes Warranty Material/Install Material—Owner Install—General Contractor/3'd Party Paid for By Owner General Contractor See General Contractor&Supplier Scope of Work Notes General Contractor Scope Material: Provide everything the vendor does not provide to of Work complete the OCB installation including but not limited to the footing and anchor bolts,conduits and power conductors. Install: OCB footing per civil engineering details. Place anchor bolts as directed by vendor. Place all power and data conduits, pull power conductors per plans. Install OCB pedestallspeaker post.Make ready for final power connections and pulling data cables. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Order Confirmation board.Provide data switch,serial cable/sand adapter.Speaker and microphone is supplied by HME. 11300-1 Order Confirmation Board-OCB_TB.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work Com Wiring:;;Provide I.G.power,J-Boxes,conduit and wiring as noted on drawings, Scheduling: G.C.to coordinate scheduling so that permanent power is active prior to installation of"Telephone System". Telephone system must be active prior to installation of P.O.S. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Supply and coordinate all system components and materials necessary for a complete Installation except that which is provided or coordinated by G.C. Install: Monitors: Complete installation of all monitors. Video Controllers:Complete installation of videocontrollers. Sump Bars/Pads: Complete installation of bump pad/wiring connection. Computers:Complete installation of computer systems. Receipt Printers:Complete installation of receipt printers Cabling:Pull communications wiring to POS components,final POS equipment connections and software start-up. install data cabinet,office server and components. Satellite Dish:Sleds to be"placed on Y<"to%*asphaltic mat. Ballast to be secured to sled w/steel cables. Route signal cable through nearest pipe hood or vented curb louver. No penetrations through roof membrane or curbs allowed. Owner's Scope of Work/ Design Intent: Owner provides wiring diagram if different from General Comments drawings. See"Telephone Communications"for more information. Critical Flow Chart: Permanent Power Available-> Telephone Lines Active-> Pre-installation Survey-> P.Q.S. Installation. 11 100-2—POS-Point of Sale.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 11100-2 P.O.S. (POINT OF SALE PACKAGE) National Supplier YUMI POS Implementation Contact: Kevin Pfaffinger-Phone:(800),544-5774 ext:6539 F :(502)874-1393.Email:Kevin.Dfaflinaer yum,com Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number U-100 Who orders item from Owner Supplier? Who Coordinates Manufacturer(YUM!) Shipping? Shipping Method Direct If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Installed By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Supply all J-boxes,conduit, pull-strings and electrical of Work outlets. Install: POS/Order entry terminals: Provide holes in counters for order entry terminals; provide J-Box, I.G.power and conduits as noted on drawings. Monitors: Provide J-Box, I.G.power and conduits as noted on drawings. Brackets for Monitors: Complete installation of monitor brackets. Provide blocking/support as required. Computers: Provide J-box, I.G.'outlet,conduit and wiring as noted on drawings. Receipt;Printers: Provide J-Box,I.G.outlet,conduit and wiring as noted on drawings. Data Wiring Cabinet: Provide blocking in the wall J-box,I.G. outlet,phone conduit Managers Office P.C.server(includes computer,printer, keyboard, monitor, UPS,.power cords and tow voltage/corn wiring): Provide I.G.power,J-Boxes,conduit and wiring as noted on drawings. 11100-2 POS-Point of Sale.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work 11030-4 DRIVE THRU LOOP SENSOR National Supplier Panasonic- Contact: Manufacturer's Model# WX8172 A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Conduit and wiring of Work Install: Complete installation of loop sensors and conduit in concrete pads as indicated in civil drawings. Loops must be labeled"Speaker Post Loop"and"Front Window". Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Loop Sensors. Install: N/A Owner's Scope of Work General Comments 11030-4_Drive-thru Sensor Loop.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 11030-2 DRIVE THRU CLEARANCE BAR National Supplier Lincoln Industries(PLC of KY) Contact: Michael Winn—Phone:(502)425-3333 Fax:(502)425-7004 Mwi n n2ftbellso uth.net Manufacturer's Model# LI-2801-YUM 906-Y2 A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: N/A of Work Install Complete installation of footing and owner supplied material Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Clearance bar, bracket, sign,anchor bolt pattern and anchor bolts Install:N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments 11030-2 Drive-thru Clearance Bar.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 11030-1 DRIVE THRU-WINDOW National Supplier Quicksery (MCE Systems Inc.) Contact: Phone:(800)388-8307 Fax:(713)849-5708 Manufacturer's Model# SC-4030BR A&E Item Number B-140 Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor -w#, Warranty Material/Install See General Comments Paid for By See General Comments General Contractor Scope Material: G.C.to supply storefront metal and glazing surrounding of Work DfT window: Install:. G.C.to install owner provided DR windows and G.C. provided storefront metal and glazing Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Drive-thru window. Install: N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comment: Owner provides warranty on DfT window General Comments material, G.C.provides warranty on DfT window Installation See"Air Curtains"for further information. A4W. 11030-1_Drive-thru Window_T_KT.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work Install:Alarm device for rear/kitchen door;complete installation of devices as noted on plan door contactors connect devices to panel(power/communicat on/phone).Motion detectors with' mounting brackets;mount panel as noted'and connect to power/phone. Alarm siren;complete installation;of alarm siren, Strobe;Complete,installation of strobe. Hold Up Buttons;Complete installation of Hold.Up Buttons. Security Panel;Comptete installation of security panel. Security MCeypady Complete installation of security,keypad,. Note:Supplier to'provide for pre-wiring of system prior to ceiling the installation. Owner's Scope of Work-/ General Comments: Owner to provide phone jack. No surface General:Comments mounted conduit and/or wiring will be permitted unless otherwise noted.Coordinate wiring prior to closing in walls. 11020-2_Security System.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 11020-2 SECURITY SYSTEM National Supplier ADT Contact: For pre-construction issues: Ralph Mertz Phone:(614)527-3639 Fax (614)492-2556 Email:rmertz gA&gm For issues during or immediateliafter`new store construction or to schedule an ADT installer: Molly Meyer-Cotner Phone" 877-862-0897 x 2238; Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number Varies Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Installed By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Outlets and J-Boxes.with conduit(power/pull of Work strings/phone)per location and sizes noted on drawings;phone jack RS31X for security system. Install: Outlets and J-Boxes with conduit(power/pull strings/phone)per locations and sizes noted on drawings;phone jack RS31X for security system.Complete installation of outlets and J-Boxes with conduit(power/pull strings/phone)per locations and sizes noted on drawings;phone jack RS31X for security' system.G.C.to provide assistance to supplier in installation of holdup buttons as directed by supplier. Note: J-boxes and conduit are pre-installed in walk-in cooler freezer boxes. Extend,supplied conduit to above ceiling. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Alarm device for rear/kitchen door,door contactors, motion detectors with mounting brackets,alarm siren,strobe,hold up buttons,security panel,and security key pad. AWN 11020-2_Security System.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work 11020-1 SAFE National Supplier NKL(Fire King) Contact: Beth Peters,-,!-Phone: (800)528-9904 ext:3274 Laura Johnson —:Phone, (800)528-9500 'ext:3636 Jessica Amos—Phone:,(800)528-9900 ext:3584 Customer Service—,Phone:(800)528-9900 ext 3028 Fax:(840)2274513 Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number Varies Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Installed By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Outlets,conduit and conductors.5/8"cement board per of Work safe pedestal detail. Install: Outlet,conduit and conductors and safe pedestal per plan detail.G.C.to schedule installation with NKL and YUMI Loss Prevention after permanent power is available. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Anchor bolts,Safe Install: Safe;set safe and secure,finalize electrical connections. Owner's Scope of Work f General Comments: Owner to provide phone jack.No surface General Comments mounted conduit and/or wiring will be permitted unless otherwise noted.Coordinate wiring prior to closing in walls. 11020-1 Safe.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 10810 RESTROOM ACCESSORIES National Supplier Accusery Contact: Buddy;Bockweg and Charlie Jacobs Phone:(877)707-7378 Fax (502)961-4357 Manufacturer's Model# Varies ABBE Item Number F-452 (if indicated in Plan Set), B-241, B-265, B-275, B-290 (where occurs), B-291 (where occurs), B-300, B-305, B-405, B-410 Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor ,,k Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contactor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Blocking as noted in drawings and required of Work Install: All owner provided Restroom Accessories Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Restroom Accessories Install: N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ Notes: Restroom Accessories are part of the consolidated General Comments package from the distributor. ,."m*, 10810_Restroom Accessories.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work Suppiiees Scope of Work Material: Canopies with diagonal supports and wire ways/conduit for light fixtures,Lauver and Light Box Elements(where occurs), Canopy/Louver/Light Box Permits where required. Supplier to provide site specific blocking and electrical rough-in information to GC and owner's representative. Install:Supplier must verify actual field dimensions with Supplier's designated Field Representative or as-built drawings. Complete installation of Canopies,Louvers and fight Box Elements(where occurs). Fasten canopies to header above openings and diagonal supports to GC installed blocking. NOTE: Any connections through EiFS finish insist be bushed and sealed per signage vendor drawings and as shown in architectural drawings to prevent damage to insulation and weather-tight envelope of building. Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments:Supplier arranges delivery of awnings and General Comments exterior image elements to local installer. Local installer,delivers to site and installs. 10536_Canopy-Louver-Light Box-Trellis_KT.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 10536 CANOPY / LOUVER / LIGHT BOX / TRELLIS National Supplier Cummings Signs Everbrite Federal Heath Contact: Cummings Signs— Randy Kerr—Phone:(615)244-5555 Fax:(615)782-6654 Everbrite— Ana Dominguez-Phone: (414)529-7140 Fax:(414)529-7191 Federal Heath— Michelte Busing—Phone: (903)589-2057 Fax: (903)589-2101 Company CMs to utilize the Company Regionalization Strategy. Contact Justin Ashby for more information. Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from C.M./Owner Supplier? Who Coordinates Manufacturer Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By Manufacturer ( Local Installer) Installed By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Blocking as detailed and required for awnings and of Work canopies. Conduit,conductors and j-boxes as directed by drawings and signage supplier. Install: Provide dimension assistance to Supplier's representative if requested by supplier,provide J-Boxes,conduit,wiring,and final electrical connections as noted on drawings. Install owner supplied canopy light fudures to bottom of canopies after canopies are installed. 10536—Canopy-Louver-Light Box-Trellis_KT.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work decorative shroud if applicable.Directional Signage;Complete installation and electrical connections of directional signage and foundation, Site-Adapt Consultant Note: Coordinate standard foundation design with the Sign Scope of Work Vendor and perform any modifications,required by local building cede, i.e.,soil bearing capacity,footing depth,wind load,etc. The standard(or)modified foundation design is to be provided in the site-adapted construction documents. owner's Scope,of Work t General Comment: One(I)directional Sign Is standard. General Comments 10430_Signage-Bldg Signs-Road Signs-Directional Signs_KFC.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 10430 EXTERIOR BUILDING, ROAD & DIRECTIONAL SIGNS National Supplier Sign Resource Contact: Sign Resource- Rod Clouser Phone:323-395-4549 Fax:(866)577-1646 Email:rclouser@signresource.com Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from C.M. Supplier? Who Coordinates Manufacturer Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Aftk Consolidated Package, which number? Received By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Installed By Manufacturer (Local Installer) Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material:J-Boxes,conduit,conductors and miscellaneous listed of Work below. Install: Install J-Boxes,conduit,conductors,and blocking as noted on drawings:G.C.to provide complete installation of decorative base/shroud for any monument signs should they occur (example decorative masonry shroud not connected to sign). Accessible Parking Signs:Install foundation as detailed in drawings. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Exterior buildings signs,foundations/footings, pole/pylon sign,reader board and accessories,monument sign (optional),and directional signage. Install: Exterior Building Signage; Complete installation and electrical connections.Supplier responsible for acquiring signage permits unless otherwise noted.Pole/Pylon sign,reader board and Accessories;;Complete installation of engineered foundations. Paint poles.Monument Sign(where occurs);Complete installation of monument sign and foundation excluding installation of a 10430_Signage-Bldg Signs-Road Signs-Directional Signs_KFC.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work 10400-6 YUM SPEAK National Supplier Miller Zell Contact: Tracy Gibson—Phone:(404)526-1462 Cellular;;(404)568-0232 Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number Varies Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Miscellaneous fasteners or adhesive as required. of Work Install: Complete installation of YUM speak components with the exception of those noted as"installed by store manager". Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Complete YUM speak package and installation guide. Install:. N/A ` Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments 10400-6_YUM Speak Interior Signage.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work '" 10400-3 EXTERIOR MENUBOARD PANELS AND INSERT National Suppliers The Color Place,Inc.(KFC Only) MillerZell Contacts: The Color Place-Debbie Nicholson Phone: (602)423-9234 www.!Lc_menuboaLds.com MillerZell-Ryan Spalding Phone:(404)'691-7400 Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number Varies Who orders item from CM or GC/Franchisee for KFC Strips only Supplier? - Utilize the website(listed in Contacts)to place the order Distributor for all other Menu Board Strip Orders - Utilize MillerZell Who Coordinates Manufacturer Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material N/A of Work Install: Install exterior menu board panels after local signage installer completes exterior menu board housing installation. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Exterior menu board panels and inserts. Install: None. Owner's Scope of Work t Note: General Comments If a new product roll-out is scheduled to occur before the new store opens,an additional order for the"roll-out kif should be placed. Once the roll-out has been incorporated into the standard insert package the toll-out kit is not required. 10400-3—Exterior Menu Board Panels & Inserts_KA_KL_KT.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work AOW #O* 10400-2—Exterior Menu Board &Preview Board Housings_KFC.doc Page 2 of 2 Scope of Work 10400-2 EXTERIOR MENUBOARD AND PREVIEW BOARD HOUSINGS National Supplier Sign Resource Contact: Sign Resource- Rod Clouser Phone:323-395-4549 Fax:(866)577-1646 Email::,rclouser@signresource.com Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number Varies Who orders item from C.M. Supplier? Who Coordinates Manufacturer Shipping? Shipping Method Drop If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, 0014k which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: J-Boxes,conduit,conductors. of Work Install: Footings,conduit,conductors and electrical connections for exterior menu board,preview board and speaker post.Provide power for installation by supplier. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Anchor bolts,exterior menu boards,preview board, menu board extenders,and order confirmation board if applicable.` Provide anchor bolt pattemstlemplate to GC Install:Menu board, Preview Board Site-Adapt Consultant Note: Coordinate standard foundation design with the Sign Scope of Work Vendor and perform any modifications required by local building code;i.e.,soil bearing capacity,footing;depth,wind load,etc. The standard(or)modified foundation design is to be provided in the site-adapted construction documents. ` Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments 10400-2—Exterior Menu Board &Preview Board Housings_KFC.doc Page 1 of 2 Scope of Work 10400-1 INTERIOR MENUBOARDS AND INSERTS National Supplier Posterlold IPI Contact: Teresa Somers-Phone:'(800)651-5000 Manufacturer's Model# Varies A&E Item Number Varies Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Manufacturer Shipping? Shipping Method Consol Pkg. If shipped in a 2 Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/Owner Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: N/A of Work' Install:Interior Menu board Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Interior menu boards and brackets Install:Menu board inserts to be pre-loaded by supplier Owner's Scope of Work f General Comments 10400-1 Interior Menu Boards & Inserts.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work "" 10290-2 AIR CURTAIN (SERVICE DOOR) To be used only if required by local jurisdiction National Supplier Marley Engineered Products 2500 Data Drive Louisville,KY. '40299 Contact: Connie McCreary Phone:(502)4914215 Fax:(502)491-3040 Manufacturer's Model# E4200-1175 A&E Item Number B-150(Service Door) Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Consolidated Package If shipped in a #1 Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material:Electrical:conduits and conductors as detailed or of Work required. Install:Complete installation of air curtain including electrical rough-ins and final connections. Install Owner supplied air curtain micro switch in service doorframe. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Complete package. Install N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments: Install only if required by local codes. See General Comments the"option*section for this concept at plans.yum.com for more information •+w"k, 10290-2 Air Curtain-Service Door.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 10290-1 AIR CURTAIN (DRIVE-THRU WINDOW) To be used only if required by local jurisdiction National Supplier Marley Engineered Products 2500 Data Drive Louisville,KY. 40299 Contact: Connie McCreary Phone:(502Y4914215 Fax:(502)491-3040 Manufacturer's Model# E2400-1115FG A&E Item Number B-151 (Drive Thru Window) Who orders item from Distributor Supplier? Who Coordinates Distributor Shipping? Shipping Method Consolidated Package If shipped in a #1 Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor "* Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install Owner/General Contractor Paid for By Owner General Contractor Scope Material: Electrical conduits and conductors as detailed or of Work required. Install:Complete installation of air curtain including electrical rough-ins and final connections. Install Owner supplied air curtain micro switch in drive thru window. Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Complete package. Install N/A Owner's Scope of Work! General Comments: Install only if required by local codes. General Comment Standard storefront configuration at the drive-thru window must be modified. See the option"section for this concept at plans.yum.com for more information 10290-1 Air Curtain-DT Window.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 08625 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING SYSTEM National Supplier Solatube International Inc, Contact: Michael Sather Phone: (760)597-4425 Fax:(760)597-4488 Manufacturer's Model# SolaMaster Series: Solatuve Model 21-C Penetrating Ceiling, 21 inch. Catalogue num: S21C-DA-FCM-LI-SS A&E Item Number See Plans Who orders item from General Contractor Supplier? Who Coordinates General Contractor Shipping? Shipping Method Direct If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor 'qm" Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install General Contractor/General Contractor Paid for By General Contractor General Contractor Scope Material: Roof dame, reflective tube,diffuser assembly,roof of Work flashing base,dome ring,dome seal,and reflective adjustable tube. Install; Complete installation Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Provide complete system.G.C.to verify. Install:N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments: Owner's rep to be present at field test of 13t General Comments unit installed prior to installation of subsequent units. ANWA 08625—Tubular Daylighting System.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 08341 DOOR - SECURITY National Supplier LockNet Contact: Mike Moynahan Phone:(800)887-4307 ,. Fax,: (859)887-4958 Manufacturer's Model# DU3670L52VED A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from General Contractor Supplier? Who Coordinates General Contractor Shipping? Shipping Method Direct If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install General Contractor/General Contractor Paid for By General Contractor General Contractor Scope Material: Purchase complete security door package including of Work - Vision Panel(without Flap)Continuous hinge,'heavy duty closer, rain drip,door bottorritsweep,weather-strip,kick plate and panic hardware from Locknet'using national account pricing.See Door Schedule,sheet Al.I for additional detail. Install`.Complete installation Supplier's Scope of Work Material:Complete security door package including Vision Panel (without Flap)Continuous hinge, heavy duty closer,rain drip,door bottom/sweep,weather strip,kick plate and panic hardware Install N/A Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments: LockNet security door is required by YUM General Comments Loss Prevention. Extended warranty provided by LockNet 08341_Door-Security.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 07412 METAL WALL PANELS (SolarWall) National Supplier Conserval Systems,Inc. Contact: John Hickey Phone:(716),8354903 Fax;(716)8354904 Manufacturer's Model# SW150 A&E Item Number See Plans Who orders item from General Contractor Supplier? Who Coordinates General Contractor Shipping? Shipping Method Direct If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install General Contractor/General Contractor Paid for By General Contractor General Contractor Scope Material: Ribbed metal panels,framing,fasteners,sealants,and of Work wall construction. Provide trim metal(see drawing 7/A6.6). Install:Complete installation Suppliers Scope of Work Material:Ribbed metal panels,framing, and fasteners. Supplier DOES NOT supply decorative,painted trim metal. Install: N/A Owners Scope of Work/ General Continents: General Contractor shall request shop General Comments drawings from manufacturer prior to installation. 07412—Metal Wall Panels.doc Page 1 of 1 Scope of Work 06100 ROOF ACCESS LADDER (Optional Supplier) National Supplier Awningtec USA,Inc. Contact: Hansen Way Phone:(812)734-0423 Fax:(812)734-0344 Manufacturer's Model# N/A A&E Item Number N/A Who orders item from General Contractor Supplier? Who Coordinates General Contractor Shipping? Shipping Method Direct If shipped in a N/A Consolidated Package, which number? Received By General Contractor Installed By General Contractor Warranty Material/Install General Contractor/General Contractor Paid for By General Contractor General Contractor Scope Material: Purchase complete aluminum roof access ladder of Work assembly and mounting hardware(in lieu of subcontractor fabrication). Install: Complete installation Supplier's Scope of Work Material: Provide aluminum roof access ladder assembly and mounting hardware. Install: NIA Owner's Scope of Work/ General Comments: General Contractor shall coordinate General Comments blocking/mounting locations with Supplier(prior to fabrication).; 061 00 Roof Access Ladder_KFC.doc Page 1 of 1 Table of Contents KT-Y07 (E3.1) Note to Site-Adapt Consultant: The Suppliers indicated above (X) shall receive a complete Electronic set of site-adapt Plans;Adobe.pdf format. Following is a standard distribution list for all additional plan set recipients(via mail): • Director of Construction: ❑ Hard Copy(complete 1/2 size set) • Construction Manager: ❑ Hard Copy(complete 1/2 size set) • Real Estate Manager: ❑ Hard Copy(complete 1/2 size set) • Regional Architectural Partner: ❑ Hard Copy(complete 1/2 size set) • Equipment Distributor: ❑ Hard Copy(complete full size set) • UFPC: ❑ Hard Copy(complete full size set) • Facility Leader: ❑ Hard Copy(complete 1/2 size set) • Head Coach: ❑ Hard Copy(complete 1/2 size set) • Region Coach: ❑ Hard Copy(Site Plan,Equipment Plan, Equipment Schedule,Exterior Elevations; 1/2 size) • Loss Prevention Manager: ❑ Hard Copy(Site Plan,Equipment Plan, Equipment Schedule,Exterior Elevations; 1/2 size) • Restaurant General manager: ❑ Hard Copy(complete 1/2 size set) • Restaurant Operator: ❑ Hard Copy(complete 1/2 size set) • Liquor Licensing Manager(PH Only): ❑ Hard Copy(Site Plan,Equipment Plan, Equipment Schedule,Exterior Elevations; 1/2 size) 001 Table of Contents KT-Y07 (January 2008).doc Page 4 of 4 0 ^ Table of Contents KT-Y07 (E3.1) 13700-1 CCTV Checkpoint, Checkpoint(West of the Mississippi River) ; X MARTCO Brlan`Baker Phone:(972)625-3155 e.mail:br1anbak6tftheckpt.com Lynn Hegee (for installation) Phone:(800)285-0492' e.mail:lynnhegge@checkpt.com MARTCO(East of the Mississippi River) Adela Kragge Phone:(800)333-7769; e.mall i i' .c 13800-1 LightingControlPanel-Exterior " Accusery BuddyBackweg Phone:(877)707-7378 Email:bbockwe accu-se .com 13900-1 Fire Suppression;System Ansul Pete Matulonis—Business Development Phone:(360)210-7973 Bill Klingeranaler—Technical Services Phone:(715)735-7411 ext.3439 15410 Hand Sinks Aero Phone:(973)473-5300 15470-5 Water filter Selecto Deldrida Butler or Angela Dawson Phone::(800)6354017 15480-3 Water Heater Lee Supply Jack Peek Phone:(800);873-1107 15500-1 HVAC—Test&Balance Melink Corp., Rod Richwine X Phone:513-965-7319 e.mail:rrichwine@mellinkcoro.com 15700-1 HVAC Trane Marty Cusick X Phone:(866)YUM-VAC or(866)986-4822 email: mjcusick@trane.com 16300-1 Switchgear-Franchisee Accusery Buddy Bockweg X Phone:(877)707-7378 Email:bbockwes @accu-serv.com 16300-2 Switchgear-Company Gexpro Mike Urkoski ' X (formally:General Phone:(630)718-6529 Electric Supply) e.mail:mike.urkosk1 x ra.com 16500 Light Fixtures-Interior and Building Accusery Buddy Bockweg X Phone:(877)707-7378 Email:bbockwes @accu-serv.com 16520 Light Fixtures-Site Accusery Buddy Bockweg X Phone:(877)707-7378 Email:bbockweg@accu-serv.com 16720 Telephone Communications YUM!Telecom Patricia Montgomery X Phone:(800)'325-4066 ext.23 e.mail:patriciamonteomry gizzahut.com 16820-3 Music System` Muzak Dana Carlyle Phone:(803)396-3023(direct) Phone:(800)'331-3340 x3023 001 Table of Contents KT-Y07 (January 2008).doc Page 3 of 4 Table of Contents KT-Y07 (E3.1) 11300-2 Drive-thru Speaker&Microphone HME TechnicalSecWces;Dept. Phone.:(800)848-4 Q (opt3) 11400-1 Kitchen Equipment Distributor: E.S.G.— Ellen Goulart X E.S.G. phone:(502)x893-4149 e-mail. 11400-2 Grease Management System RTI 11400-4 MAPS Production Line Duke Norm Rader, X Phone.*(502)425-2226 e.rnall: r 11405-3 Kitchen Shelving/Workstations I.S.S. Colleen Keenan phane�(770)7&4-5783 11405-5 Walk-in Cooler/Freezer(One Piece) I.C.S. Gary Tintrow X Phone:(S00)835-0001 ek 122 e.mall: G mt r is am 11425 Exhaust Hoods Stratovent Stratovent'-Jeff Johnson X Phone:(800)474,-M7 e,inail: 'eft'' h t� ent.i; 11430-2 Drink Dispensers/Line Sets Pepsi Chris Dietz;. KFC And Multibrand Coordinator Phone:(502)874-8253 11435-3 Ice Machines Manitowoc Alicia Dillon Phone:(920)682-0161 12100 Artwork Creative Palette, Guiles Richardson The Color Place, Phone: (800)321-1949 CIP Retail Impact The Color Place Debbie Nicholson Phone: (502)423-9230 CIP Retail impact Charlene Vu Phone: (800)877-7373 ext.133 12400-1 Decor Interior Systems,Inc. Jim Zielinski X Phone:414-232-3502 email: iziefinskiffiDlEfamerica.com 12430 Fruitista Machine Equipment Delivery, Equipment Delivery Equipment Install& FBD-Dan Barden Setup, Phone: (210)637-2810 Taco Bell Engineering Equipment Install&Setup ICEE -Doug Larson Company&Franchisees Phone: (623)434-3351 ext.16 Taco Bell Engineering Bill Williamson Company&franchisees Phone: (949)863-4830 12440 iced Tea Tetley Irinafyman (coordinator for new construction) Phone: (203)929-9349 12540-1 Chairs and Stools—Freestanding MTS Laurie Prater Phone:(734)847-3875 ext.222 13200 CO2'-Bulk MVE/NU CO2 Cathy Bartusek Phone:(952)882-5185 ext.5169 001 Table of Contents KT-Y07 (January 2008).doc Page 2 of 4 OWW Table of Contents KT-Y07 (E3.1) Title Description Supplier Contacts Require Plan Set 06100 Roof Access Ladder(OPTIONAL ";��' Awningtec USA,Inc. Mansen Way Phone (812)734-0423 07412 Metal Wall Panels(5olarWail) Conserval Systems,Inc. John Hickey Phone:(716)835-4903 Email:jhickey@soiarwall.com 08341 Door—Security. LockNet MikeMoynahan Phone:,,(800)887-4307 08625 Tubular Dayiighting System Solatube International Michael Sather Inc. Phone:(760)597-4425 Email:msather@solatube.com 10290-1 "'Air Curtain(D/T Window) Marley Connie McCreary Phone (502)491-4215 10290-2 Air Curtain(Service floor) Marley Connie McCreary Phone,:(502)491-4215 10400-1 Interior Menu Boards and Inserts Posterloid/IPI Teresa Somers Phone:(800)651-5000' 10400-2 Exterior Menu Board and Preview Sign Resource Rod Clouser X Board Housings Phone:(323)-395-4549' e.mail:rciouser @sisnresourcecom 10400-3 Exterior Menu Board Panels and MillerZell Ryan Spalding, Inserts Phone:(404) 10400-6 YUM Speak Interior Signage MillerZell Tracy Gibson a Phone:(404)526-1462 30 Signage(Bldg Signs,Road Signs, Sign Resource Rod Clouser X Directional Signs) Phone:(323)-395-4549 email rclouLer@signrelgmLqe.com 10536 Canopies,Louvers,tight Boxes Sign Resource Rod Clouser X Phone:(323)-395-4549 e.mail:rclouser @sienresource.com 10810 Restroom Accessories Accusery Buddy Bockweg Phone:(877)707.7378 e-mail: ac u-s rv.t m 11020-1 Safe NKL Customer Service Phone:(800)528-9900 ext:3028 11020-2 Security System ADT Ralph Mertz X Phone:(614)527-3639 email:rm z ad .com 11030-1 Drive-thru Window Quicksery Phone:(800)388-8307 11030-2 Drive-thru Clearance Bar Lincoln Michael Winn Phone:(502)425-3333 11030-4 Drive-thru Sensor Loop Panasonic 11100-2 P.O.S.(Point of Sale) Yum!POS Kevin Pfaffinger X Implementation Phone:(800)544-5774 e.mail: ko in eafaffinarAyum com 11300-1 Order Confirmation Board(OCB) Delphi Technical Service Department-Tom Rock Phone:(800)456-0060 ext.476 Installation Coordination-Marlene Gelb Phone(800)456-OM ext.452 001 Table of Contents KT-Y07 (January 2008).doc Page 1 of 4 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 16060 Grounding and Bonding................................................ July,2008 16070 Hangers and Supports................................................. July,2008 16075 Electrical Identification ................................................. July,2008 16120 Conductors and Cable ................................................. July,2008 16130 Raceway and Boxes.................................................... July,2008 16140 Wiring Devices........................................................... July,2008 16150 Wiring Connections..................................................... July,2008 16210 Electrical Utility Services............................................... July,2008 16220 Enclosed Motor Controllers........................................... July,2008 16410 Distribution Panelboards............................................... July,2008 16510 Interior Luminares....................................................... July,2008 16520 Exterior Luminares...................................................... July,2008 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTE: ALL ITEMS HIGHLIGHTED CONTAIN INFORMATION SPECIFIC TO THE ADHERENCE OF THE USGBC'S LEED REQUIREMENTS. YUM-Y07 TABLE OF CONTENTS Site Number 305-634 00010-4 July,2008 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames............................................... July,2008 08210 Flush Wood Doors ...................................................... July,2008 08410 Aluminum Framed Storefront July,2008 �! � . ice .It A F 08710 Door Hardware July,2008 W mn DIVISION 9-FINISHES 09220 Fiber Reinforced Portland-Cement Plaster/Stucco over Exterior Masonry ........................................................ July,2008 Manufacturer's Details .. July,2008 In 09300 Tile....... ......... ....... .... ............. .......... ...... .......... July,2008 09515 Suspended Acoustical Panel Ceilings.............................. Jury,2008 09540 Textured Wall Finish System over Interior Masonry............ July,2008 Manufacturer's Details...................................................... ......July,2008 09650 Resilient Flooring........................................................ July,2008 09775 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels.................................. July,2008 09910 Paints....................................................................... July,2008 r� DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES ... ;'K� ,'• 'fit, t E. „- D�� � 10435 Exterior and Traffic Control Signage...... ............. ......... July,2008 10525 Fire Extinguishers....................................................... July,2008 DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT—not used DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS—not used DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION—not used DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS—not used DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL 15060 Hangers and Supports. July,2008 NO NN,WE W. I 15145 Plumbing Piping .............. ..... July 2008 15170 Motors July, 15430 Plumbing S ecialties my J 0 15500 Heating,Ventilation and Air Conditioning ............. July,2008 15810 Ductwork July,2008 ♦ t f rx ",, 15850 Air Outlets and Inlets ................................................... July,2008 YUM-Y07 TABLE OF CONTENTS Site Number 305-634 00010-3 July,2008 DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION(Continued) 02823 Wood Fences and Gates.............................................. July,2008 02848 Parking Bumpers........................................................ July,2008 02905 Landscaping.............................................................. July,2008 DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork July,2008 "3200, ncreterGe�nt 03300 � st 1n tcyonctet� t �U 2008 a .CanOreihng niluri 5.. uly DIVISION 4-MASONRY 04055 Masonry Materials....................................................... July,2008 04730 Simulated Stone Veneer............................................... July,2008 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies ............................................. July,2008 04820 Brick Masonry............................................................ July,2008 DIVISION 5—METALS 05120 Structural Steel........................................................... July,2008 05210 Steel Joists................................................................ July,2008 05310 Steel Decking............................................................. July,2008 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing.......................................... July,2008 05500 Metal Fabrications July,2008 057 r c $ DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS 06200 Finish Carpent .. •� .. _ July,2008 I`M-1 ,1710 06650 Solid Polymer Fabrications.... ..... ......... ..... .... July,2008 DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07195 Air/Moisture Barriers July,2008 t1 4w 07214 Cotton Insulation........................................................ July,2008 07240 Exterior Insulation and Finish System.............................. July,2008 Manufacturer's Details...................................................... ..July,2008 07265 Building Da]mpp�lroofing .. July,2008 ,•, 07523 Single July,2008 Manufacturer's Details...................................................... ..July,2008 07550 Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing.............................. July,2008 Manufacturer's Details....................................... ... Jury,2008 07555 4-Ply Asphalt Membrane Roofing July,2008 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ................. ............. July,2008 ........ 07700 Roof Specialties and Accessories................................... July,2008 YUM-Y07 TABLE OF CONTENTS Site Number 305-634 00010-2 July,2008 TABLE OF CONTENTS YUM-KT-Y07 E3 SPECIFICATIONS dry iht► gri�.�l � e�t YUMI BRANDS LATEST NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00001 Title Page 00010 Table of Contents July,2008 } &AT Jufy BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00320 Geotechnical Data....................................................... July,2008 00500 Agreement ................................................................ July,2008 DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01310 Project Management and Coordination............................ July,2008 01320 Construction Progress Documentation............................. July,2008 01330 Submittal Procedures .. July,2008 01420 References....... .................. ..... ........................ ..... July,2008 01450 Quali Control .. .. .... .... ... Jul Up , \ ., 01580 Project Identification.................................................... July,2008 01600 Materials and Equipment.............................................. July,2008 01725 Field Engineering........................................................ July,2008 01731 Cutting and Patching ................................................... July,2008 01736 Building Deconstruction........................................ July,2008 01740 Cleaning uly,2008 g ................................................................... 01750 Starting and Adjusting.................................................. July,2008 01810 General Commissioning Requirements........................ July,2008 01820 Demonstration and Training .......................................... July,2008 DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION OUXEM 02300 Earthwork ..... .............. .. ....... ....... July,2008 02340 Sub-Grade Stabilization................................................ July,2008 02362 Termite Control........................................................... July,2008 02485 Spread and Continuous Footings..................................... July,2008 02510 Water Distribution ...................................................... July,2008 02511 Disinfection of Water Distribution ................................... July,2008 02530 Sanitary Sewerage...................................................... July,2008 02630 Storm Drainage System ............................................... July,2008 02743 Hot Mix Asphalt Paving ................................................ July,2008 02752 Reinforced Cement Concrete Pavement.......................... July,2008 02765 Pavement Markings..................................................... July,2008 02810 Irrigation System......................................................... July,2008 eW YUM-Y07 TABLE OF CONTENTS Site Number 305-634 00010-1 July,2008 SPECIFICATIONS YUM! Brands, Inc. KFC/TACO BELL KT-Y07 (EV) 203 King St. Northampton, MA SITE - NO. 305634 PROJECT MANUAL July 3, 2008 pn No. 9091 "o PARK RIDGE ., i ILLIND S i `� iJ